LAKE ORION COMMUNITY SCHOOLS STADIUM DRIVE …

SECTION 23 05 00

HVAC SUMMARY OF WORK

PAGE 1 OF 2

LAKE ORION COMMUNITY SCHOOLS STADIUM DRIVE ELEMENTARY PHASE 2 RENOVATIONS A/E PROJECT 5-4749

SECTION 23 05 00 - HVAC SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, permits, inspection fees, utility company charges, supervision and other items indicated in the contract General Conditions necessary to yield completely operable and tested systems as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. The Work includes, but is not limited to, the following:

B. Hydronic hot water heating and chilled water cooling systems.

1. Demolition of existing systems as shown.

2. Modifications to the existing hydronic hot water heating system(s).

3. Modifications to the existing chilled water cooling system(s).

4. Furnishing and installing of glycol mixtures, including glycol feed equipment.

5. Chemical treatment equipment for above systems.

6. Filtration equipment for above systems.

C. HVAC

1. Demolition of existing systems as shown.

2. New air handling systems and equipment.

3. Modifications to the existing air handling systems and equipment.

4. New refrigerant piping systems, including charging of systems.

5. Installation of duct smoke detectors furnished by the Electrical Contractor.

6. Coordination of smoke detector interface with the fire alarm system and with the operation of air handling equipment and devices.

7. Combustion air and venting for fuel-fired appliances/equipment.

D. Furnishing of variable frequency motor drives by the Temperature Controls Contractor, for installation by the Electrical Contractor.

E. Piping, valve, and equipment identification.

F. Mechanical insulation for piping, ductwork, and equipment.

G. New temperature control system.

H. Modifications to the existing temperature control system.

I. All temperature and pressure instrumentation and wells not a part of the Temperature Control System.

J. Prime and paint exterior aboveground piping per specification 09 90 01 Mechanical Electrical Painting

K. Touch-up painting of damaged materials furnished by this contractor and damaged prior to Owner occupancy. All materials shall match original color and finishes. All work shall be done by experienced field tradesmen.

L. Protection of new and existing finishes and surfaces. Protect finished surfaces from damage due to mechanical work, including walls, floors, ceilings and roof.

M. Flushing, cleaning, and pressure testing of installed systems.

N. Cleanup associated with work of respective trades.

O. Testing, adjusting and balancing of new systems and equipment.

P. Testing, adjusting and balancing of existing systems and equipment, where indicated.

Q. Commissioning of new equipment and systems.

SECTION 23 05 00

HVAC SUMMARY OF WORK

PAGE 2 OF 2


R. Commissioning of existing equipment and systems, where indicated.

S. Provide As-Built Drawings at the completion of work.

T. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

U. All new equipment shall comply with the testing agency listing and labeling requirements of the current edition of all applicable state and local codes.

V. Equipment of each category shall be provided by single manufacturer.

W. No asbestos or mercury containing materials, materials capable of discharging lead into potable water or air systems, or materials capable of releasing other hazardous substances to the facility air environment, drainage systems or water systems shall be used.

X. Equipment schedules are provided as a convenience to the Contractor, but do not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish all equipment shown on the drawings and indicated in the specifications.

Y. Coordination with all other trades. The Contractor shall assist in the field layout and coordination of equipment, ductwork, and piping installation and their relation with other trades at no additional cost to the Owner.

Z. Provide minimum two (2) year warranty against defects for materials and installation, unless otherwise indicated.

AA. Cost of state and/or local Mechanical permits, as required.

BB. Job site safety is the responsibility of the contractor. The architect/engineer bears no responsibility for job-site safety.

CC. Owner training in the operation and maintenance of installed equipment and systems. Using the Operating and Maintenance manuals, balancing report data, and contract drawings and specifications, the contractor shall instruct the Owner's representative(s) in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment and systems installed to their mutual satisfaction. This activity shall take place near the point of substantial completion and will be considered a punch list item.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 05 13

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PAGE 1 OF 4


SECTION 23 05 13 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. All electric motors for all HVAC pumps and fans applications.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code (NEC)

B. NEMA MG 1-2009: Motors and Generators

C. NEMA MG 2: Safety Standard for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Use

D. Fed. Spec. CC-M-1807: Motors, Alternating Current, Fractional and Integral Horsepower (500 HP & Smaller)

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate all work with job site superintendent and all applicable trades.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide shop drawings for approval for all motors not an integral part of equipment, including construction details. Outline and mounting dimensions. Provide no load and full load line current including motor efficiency and power factor at rated load with connection diagrams.

1. Provide product data including:

a. Frame and housing materials details.

b. Mounting and outline dimensions.

c. Winding and insulation details.

d. Bearing details.

e. Performance characteristics at 25%, 50%, 75%, & 100% rated load including:

1) Line current.

2) Power factor.

3) Efficiency.

4) Rated temperature rise.

5) Rated full load speed.

6) Code letter in accordance with Table 430.7(b) of N.E.C.

2. Provide test reports for all motors not an integral part of equipment as follows:

a. Standard commercial tests including high potential voltage test.

b. Performance test in accordance with standard (IEEE & ANSI testing procedures including certification of:

1) Line current.

2) Power factor.

3) Efficiency.

c. These test results shall be provided as typical for each type motor.

B. Provide operation and maintenance data for all motors.

SECTION 23 05 13


PAGE 2 OF 4


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MOTORS

A. All motors 1/2 HP and larger shall be three phase, 60 cycles, squirrel cage induction type. Voltage shall be as called for on the Plans. Where motors are specified to be 208 volts, they shall have nameplate marked for use at 208 volts.

B. Motors less than 1/2 HP shall be single phase, 60 cycle, 120 volts, unless larger HP ratings are specifically called for at 120 volts in the equipment specifications. Single phase motors shall be of the split phase or capacitor type depending on the application.

C. For sake of standardization, nominal 1800 RPM, NEMA Design B motors are preferred, but exceptions shall be honored where machine design dictates motors of other speeds or torque design.

D. Voltage variation to plus or minus 10% of nameplate rating. Combined voltage and frequency variation to plus or minus 10% total, as long as the frequency does not exceed plus or minus 5%.

E. Motors shall meet or exceed the locked rotor (starting) and breakdown (maximum) torques specified in NEMA for the NEMA design “B” and rating called for.

F. Locked rotor (starting) currents shall not exceed NEMA and N.E.C. maximum values for the specified NEMA design and rating. In addition, the first cycle locked rotor transient current shall not exceed twelve (12) times the full load current. The intent of this requirement is to eliminate nuisance tripping of circuit breakers with instantaneous trips set in accordance with the National Electric Code.

G. The service factor of drip-proof shall be 1.15. If the equipment manufacturer determines that the load will exceed the nameplate horsepower of the motor, the next standard size motor shall be used unless approval, in writing, is obtained from the Engineer and Owner. For applications where the motor is on a variable frequency drive (VFD), the operating service factor shall be considered 1.0.

H. When motors of sizes other than those shown on the plans are provided, the contractor supplying the equipment shall arrange for the upgrade of motor feeders, starters, and protective equipment to proper sizes as required by the Engineer.

I. For applications where the motor is not used with a variable frequency drive (VFD), the insulation shall be Class B or higher. For applications where the motor is used with a variable frequency drive (VFD), the insulation shall be Class F or higher for voltage spike resistance (typically 1600 volts).

J. For IFV applications used Baldor ISR, Leeson IRIS or equivalent for definite purpose inverter fed motors.

K. Bearings for all medium motors, also for all large motors where available with no extra charge, shall be anti-friction ball type for direct connected motors. Anti-friction roller type bearings shall be used where necessary for indirect connected motors. All anti-friction bearings shall be grease lubricated, with readily accessible grease inlet and outlet plug provided in the housing to allow greasing from the exterior while motor is in service.

L. For applications where the motor is used with a variable frequency drive (VFD) and the motor is 30 HP or greater and less than 100 HP, include a shaft grounding brush or an EST-Aegis ring. For applications where the motor is used with a variable frequency drive (VFD) and the motor is 100 HP or greater, include an Aegis ring and one insulated bearing.

M. The stator frames and end-shields shall be of rigid cast iron construction for size 213 frame and above. Below size 213 frame shall be standard with the motor manufacturer.

N. All horizontal motors which are mounted vertically with its shaft extension down, shall be furnished with drip covers.

SECTION 23 05 13


PAGE 3 OF 4


O. The terminal boxes and fan covers shall be of cast iron. The terminal boxes shall be designed so that the boxes will provide conduit entrance from above, below, or from either side. When the conduit entrance is from below conduit shall clear the motor base without bending.

P. All motors shall comply with the noise level requirements of OSHA based on eight (8) hours of exposure time per day unless otherwise indicated. The test procedure shall be in accordance with I.E.E.E. Publication No. 85. Where motors are purchased as an integral part of the mechanical equipment, OSHA requirements shall apply to the complete operating equipment package. If installed equipment operating sound levels may exceed 85 dB-A, the equipment vendor shall so indicate this possibility in his proposal.

Q. All motors shall be prime painted with corrosion resisting metal primer, and finish painted with the manufacturer’s standard finish for inverter duty motors.

R. In addition to the nameplate required by NEMA Standards, a stamped or raised lettered nameplate of stainless steel shall be permanently attached to each motor giving the item number and service as minimum information.

S. Motors to be equipped with a convenient means to attach a ground wire or a drilled and tapped hole in the motor foot for insertion of a bolt suitable for the attachment of a ground wire.

T. Motors shall be sized such that under normal operating conditions the load requirement will not exceed the rated nameplate motor rating and not require the utilization of any part of the service factor rating.

U. Single phase motors to be of the NEMA design type required and recommended by the equipment manufacturer. Single phase capacitor motors shall have hermetically sealed plug in type of rated capacity and voltage as required by motor. Provide two sets of spare capacitors for each size of motor. Spare capacitors shall be tagged for use and turned over to Owner.

V. Multi-speed motors to utilize winding arrangements which shall allow use of NEMA standard starters.

W. The minimum nominal energy efficiency requirements for all 1HP and greater three-phase induction motors shall be as contained in NEMA Standard MG 1-2009, Table 12-12. Motors 5 HP and less shall be “NEMA High Efficiency”. Motors greater than 5 HP shall be “NEMA Premium Efficiency”.

X. All three-phase motors shall be inverter ready type, rated for use with variable frequency drives. Motors shall adhere to NEMA Standards Publication MG 1, Part 31, Section 4.

Y. Acceptable manufacturers are Baldor Electric Company (division of ABB), U.S. Motors (division of Nidec Motor Corp.), Marathon Electric or Century (division of Regal Beloit Corporation), WEG Electric Corp., General Electric Company, or approved equal.

2.2 ELECTRONICALLY COMMUTATED MOTORS (ECM)

A. Where specified, motor shall be electronically commutated type specifically designed for the fan or pump application. The motor shall be rated for continuous operation.

B. Motor shall be permanently lubricated with heavy-duty ball bearings to match the load and prewired to the specific voltage and phase.

C. Internal motor circuitry shall convert AC power supplied to DC power to operate the motor. Motor shall be speed controllable down to 20% of full speed (80% turndown). Speed shall be controlled by a 0-10 VDC signal, unless indicated otherwise.

D. Motor shall be a minimum of 85% efficient at all speeds.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Motors to be installed in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

B. Ground motor frames to the building ground by a separate grounding conductor.

SECTION 23 05 13


PAGE 4 OF 4


C. Motors shall be mounted where accessible for maintenance and not subject to damage. The motor mounting must be such that all motor hold-down bolts can be easily removed and replaced, and conduit boxes easily reached. Except where bearings are permanently sealed, both bearings on the motor must be arranged for checking lubrication levels or for lubricating. Motors with permanently sealed bearings must be so indicated on a nameplate.

D. All motors shall be permanently connected without the use of convenience outlet. Use flexible metal conduit or liquid-tight flexible nonmetallic conduit for motor connections in accordance with the NEC.

E. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install disconnect switches within ten feet of all motors and all disconnecting means must comply with the National Electrical Code.

3.2 TESTING

A. Motor testing procedures shall be in accordance with the American Standard Test Code for poly-phase induction motors and generators, I.E.E.E.-112. All motors shall be given routine tests to determine that they are free from electrical or mechanical defects. The routine test shall, as a minimum, conform to MG1-12.47.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 05 19

METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

PAGE 1 OF 4


SECTION 23 05 19 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers.

2. Filled-system thermometers.

3. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.

4. Duct-thermometer mounting brackets.

5. Thermowells.

6. Dial-type pressure gages.

7. Gage attachments.

8. Test plugs.

1.3 COORDINATION


1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Ashcroft Inc.

2. Miljoco Corporation.

3. Trerice, H. O. Co.

4. WATTS.

5. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

6. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp.

B. Standard: ASME B40.200.

C. Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type(s); stainless steel with 5-inchnominal diameter.

D. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in deg F.

E. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle, with unified-inch screw threads.

F. Connector Size: 1/2 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

G. Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch in diameter; stainless steel.

H. Window: Plain glass.

I. Ring: Stainless steel.

J. Element: Bimetal coil.

SECTION 23 05 19


PAGE 2 OF 4


K. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1.5 percent of scale range.

2.2 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Compact-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Ashcroft Inc.

b. Miljoco Corporation.

c. Trerice, H. O. Co.

d. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

e. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200.

3. Case: Cast aluminum; 9-inch nominal size.

4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.

5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.

6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in deg F and deg C.

7. Window: Clear Lexan.

8. Stem: Aluminum or brass and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud.

b. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

9. Connector: 3/4 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range.

2.3 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:


2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion in piping tee fitting.

3. Material for Use with Copper and Steel Piping: Brass.

4. Material for Use with Stainless Steel Piping: 316 Stainless Steel.

5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.

6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.

11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.4 DIAL-TYPE PRESSURE GAGES

A. Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:

SECTION 23 05 19


PAGE 3 OF 4



a. Ashcroft Inc.

b. Dwyer Instruments, Inc.

c. Miljoco Corporation.

d. Trerice, H. O. Co.

e. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

f. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp.


3. Case: Sealed type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter.

4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.

5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.

6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.

7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi.

8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

9. Window: Glass or plastic.

10. Ring: Stainless steel.

11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.5 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Siphons: Loop-shaped section of brass pipe with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2pipe threads.

C. Valves: Brass ball, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.6 TEST PLUGS


1. Flow Design, Inc.

2. Miljoco Corporation.

3. Nexus Valve, Inc.

4. Trerice, H. O. Co.

5. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion in piping tee fitting.

C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

D. Thread Size: NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.

F. Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide one pressure gage per pump, installing suction and discharge of pump. Pipe gage with shutoff valve on suction and discharge side of gage using hard pipe or tubing. Rubber hoses are not allowed.

SECTION 23 05 19


PAGE 4 OF 4


B. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with smallest appropriate scale.

C. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.

D. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position in piping tees.

E. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.

F. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

G. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

H. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

I. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

J. Install duct-thermometer mounting brackets in walls of ducts. Attach to duct with screws.

K. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.

L. Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel.

M. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam).

N. Install valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam.

O. Install test plugs in piping tees.

P. Install flow indicators in piping systems in accessible positions for easy viewing.

Q. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.

R. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators.

S. Where thermometers and pressure gages are not indicated on drawings, locate temperature and pressure plugs for thermometers in water inlet to each equipment room and outlet to each coil (except reheat coils), inlet and outlet of hot water exchangers and main circulating piping loops, and domestic hot water heat exchangers.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow space for service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

B. Connect flowmeter-system elements to meters.

C. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.

D. Connect thermal-energy meter transmitters to meters.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 05 29

ROOF-MOUNTED PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

PAGE 1 OF 3

LAKE ORION COMMUNITY SCHOOLS

STADIUM DRIVE ELEMENTARY PHASE 2 RENOVATIONS

A/E PROJECT 5-4749

SECTION 23 05 29 - ROOF-MOUNTED PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment Rails.

2. Roof Curbs.

3. Roof Curb Adapters and Extenders.

4. Pipe Portals.

5. Refer to Specification 23 05 48 Vibration Isolation Roof Curbs.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.

2. Section 23 21 13 – Hydronic Piping, Valves and Accessories.

3. Section 23 23 00 – Refrigerant Piping and Accessories.

4. Section 23 31 00 – HVAC Ducts and Casings.

5. Section 23 34 23 – HVAC Power Ventilators.

6. Section 23 73 13 – Modular Indoor Central Station Air Handling Units

7. Section 23 81 26 – Small Split System Air Conditioners.

1.3 COORDINATION


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 – Submittals and Substitutions, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data for all products in this section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All curbs, rails and supports flashed into roofing shall have a minimum exposed height (above

finished roofing) of the greater of 8 inches and the minimum height required by the roofing

contractor to maintain a full roof warranty. Coordinate requirements with the roofing contractor.

Curb and rail heights shall, at a minimum, be provided at the heights listed below. It is this

Contractor’s responsibility to determine whether the curb and rail heights must increase (above

specified heights) to maintain minimum required clearances above finished roofs.

B. Provide roof protection pads under duct or pipe supports not flashed into the roofing material.

Pads shall be minimum 1/2 inch thickness polycarbonate or rubber and shall have been

manufactured specifically for the purpose of distributing a structural load to protect a roof

surface. Mats shall be a minimum of one inch wider than the duct/pipe supports in all

directions.

2.2 ROOF DUCT SUPPORTS (FLASHED INTO ROOFING)

A. Roof duct supports shall be duct mounting pedestals by Roof Products and Systems or

approved equal. Duct mounting pedestals shall consist of an equipment rail (RPS ER-2A or

equal), a galvanized steel slide channel, continuously threaded galvanized steel rods, and a

galvanized steel duct slide assembly. The equipment rail height shall be 11”, unless roof

SECTION 23 05 29


PAGE 2 OF 3



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

insulation height dictates that a taller curb be used (8” Minimum exposed curb height is required

above roof insulation). Roof insulation thickness shall be determined by the Contractor prior to

ordering roof duct supports.

B. Equipment rails shall be mounted on the roof deck and flashed into the finished roofing.

2.3 EQUIPMENT RAILS

A. Equipment rails shall be by Roof Products & Systems RPS Model ER-2B or equal by the Pate

Company, Thybar or approved equal.

B. Equipment rails shall be 18 gauge (14 gauge) galvanized steel, 16” height unless indicated

otherwise, . Rails shall have continuously-welded corner seams, with a base plate and a wood

nailer. Minimum rail width shall be 5-1/2”, or the width of the equipment or vibration isolator to

be supported, whichever is wider. Rail caps shall equal rail widths plus 2 inches, rail lengths

plus 2 inches, to allow for insulation on four sides of each rail.

C. Minimum rail lengths shall be as required by the supported equipment unless a rail length is

indicated on drawings (required to span new or existing structural members). Equipment rails

shall be mounted directly on the roof deck and flashed into the finished roofing.

2.4 ROOF CURBS

A. Roof curbs shall be Roof Products & Systems Model RC-2A, or equal by The Pate Company or

Thybar.

B. Curb heights shall be 16 inches for power ventilators, and 18 inches for intake and relief hoods,

unless indicated otherwise. Curbs shall have continuously-welded corner seams, with base

plates and wood nailers.

C. Roof curbs shall have 1-1/2 inch thickness, 3 pounds per square foot density internal insulation.

D. Roof curbs shall accommodate sloping roofs, to provide a level surface for supported

equipment. The Contractor shall verify the roof slope.

2.5 ROOF CURB EXTENDERS AND ADAPTERS

A. Manufacturer: Roof Products & Systems, The Pate Company, Thybar Corporation or approved

equal.

B. Roof Curb Adapters: Roof Products and Systems Style CA-1 (for equipment larger than the

existing curb) or CA-2 (for equipment smaller than the existing curb).

C. Roof Curb Extenders: Roof Products and Systems Style CE-1.

2.6 PIPE PORTALS

A. Pipe portals shall be by Roof Products & Systems, The Pate Company, Thybar Corporation or

approved equal.

B. Portal assemblies shall consist of roof curbs, curb covers, caps and stainless steel clamps.

Curb covers shall be ABS plastic. Caps shall be EPDM rubber.

C. Where portals are provided for piping serving powered equipment, provide additional caps for

power wiring and for temperature control wiring. Coordinate with the Electrical and

Temperature Control Contractors

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Where new fans or hoods are to be installed on existing roof curbs, field-verify existing curb

dimensions.

C. Coordinate equipment flashing requirements with the Roofing Contractor.

SECTION 23 05 29


PAGE 3 OF 3



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

D. Provide a roof protection pad under each non-flashed piping and ductwork support. Remove all

rock, aggregate, dirt, and excess dust from an area of the roof slightly larger than the protection

pad. Center the protection pad under the pipe/duct support. Where applicable, restore

aggregate adjacent to the support.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 05 30

AIR DUCT CLEANING

PAGE 1 OF 6


SECTION 23 05 30 - AIR DUCT CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Duct cleaning of air systems.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 23 07 13 – Duct Insulation.

2. Section 23 31 00 – HVAC Ducts and Casings.


A. National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA): “Assessment, Cleaning & Restoration of HVAC Systems (ACR).”

B. National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA): “Introduction to HVAC System Cleaning Services,” 2004.

C. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): Standard 180 – “Standard Practice for Inspection and Maintenance of Commercial Building HVAC systems”.

D. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): "Building Air Quality," December 1991.

E. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): “Mold Remediation in Schools and Commercial Buildings”, September 2008.

F. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA): “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,” 1995.

G. North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA): "Cleaning Fibrous Glass Insulated Air Duct Systems," 1993.

1.4 COORDINATION


1.5 SUBMITTALS


1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall be a member in good standing of the National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA) or shall maintain membership in a nationally recognized non-profit industry organization dedicated to the cleaning of HVAC systems.

B. The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall have a minimum of one (1) Air System Cleaning Specialist (ASCS) certified by NADCA on a full time basis or shall have staff certified by a nationally recognized certification program and organization dedicated to the cleaning of HVAC systems.

C. A person certified as an ASCS by NADCA or maintaining an equivalent certification by a nationally recognized program and organization, shall be responsible for the total work herein specified.

D. The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall submit records of experience in the field of HVAC system cleaning as requested by the owner. Bids shall only be considered from firms which are regularly engaged in HVAC system maintenance with an emphasis on HVAC system cleaning and restoration.

SECTION 23 05 30

AIR DUCT CLEANING

PAGE 2 OF 6


E. The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall provide proof of maintaining the proper license(s), if any, as required to perform work in this state. The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall comply with all federal, state, provincial, local, and/or Authorities Having Jurisdiction rules, regulations, and licensing requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 APPROVED DUCT CLEANING CONTRACTORS:

A. Stanley Steemer

B. Sani-Vac Service Inc.

C. Other vendors may request written approval prior to bids.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Systems to be cleaned:

1. AHU-22.1 that serves the existing cafetorium.

2. AHU-22.2 that serves the existing media center.

3. AHU-22.3 that serves the existing gymnasium.

3.2 WORK PLANS

A. Prior to the commencement of any cleaning work, the HVAC system cleaning contractor shall provide a written work plan including the following information:

1. Summary of Work identifying which HVAC components are to be cleaned, as well as those components not included in the process, along with specific environmental engineering controls required for the workspace, and any unique requirements.

2. Means and methods of cleaning to be used on the project.

3. When applicable, the name of all firms, contractors and representatives involved with the project, along with contact information and the tasks they will be performing.

4. Project schedule outlining dates and times the work will take place and timeframe for completion. The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall be involved in determining the sequence of cleaning within the larger project in order to provide the project schedule.

5. Product submittals listing all general use and/or specific “chemical type” products and coatings specific to the project, along with Safety Data Sheets for all chemical products to be used on the project.

6. Safety plan concerns and defined responsibilities of each organization’s designated representative involved with executing the plan for the duration of the project.

7. Disclaimers clearly identifying items not covered under any warranty or guarantee for the project.

3.3 HVAC SYSTEM ASSESSMENT AND SITE SURVEY

A. Prior to the commencement of any cleaning work, the HVAC system cleaning contractor shall perform an assessment of the HVAC system to determine appropriate engineering controls, safety measures, tools and equipment and cleaning methods required to satisfactorily complete the project.

3.4 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE & USE

A. All HVAC system cleaning contractor equipment shall be maintained in good working order, consistent with applicable jurisdictional requirements.

B. Before any equipment is brought onto the work site it shall be cleaned and inspected to ensure that it will not introduce contaminants into the indoor environment or HVAC system.

C. All equipment shall be serviced as needed to limit possible cross-contamination from poor hygiene, and/ or unsafe operating conditions for service personnel and building occupants.

SECTION 23 05 30

AIR DUCT CLEANING

PAGE 3 OF 6


D. Any activity requiring the opening of contaminated vacuum collection equipment on-site, such as servicing, or filter maintenance shall be performed in an appropriate containment area or outside of the building.

E. All collection devices, vacuums and other tools and devices shall be cleaned or sealed before relocating to different areas of the building and before removing the equipment from building.

F. Fuel-powered equipment shall be positioned in a location to prevent combustion emissions and air exhaust emissions from entering the building envelope. The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall monitor and manage location of equipment to prevent introduction of combustion emissions into the occupied space.

G. When using vacuum collection equipment exhausting within the building envelope, the HVAC system cleaning contractor shall utilize equipment fitted with HEPA filtration and the equipment shall have a collection efficiency of 99.97% at 0.3 micron particle size.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEBRIS & CONTAMINATED MATERIALS

A. All debris removed from the HVAC System shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable federal, state, provincial and local requirements. To prevent cross-contamination, all contaminated materials removed from the HVAC system shall be properly contained prior to removal from the building. Materials deemed to be hazardous by governmental agencies shall be handled in strict accordance with any applicable local, regional or national codes.

3.6 NEGATIVE DUCT PRESSURIZATION

A. Prior to and throughout duration of the cleaning process, the HVAC system and associated air duct shall be kept at an appropriate negative pressure differential relative to the indoor non-work area. This negative pressure differential shall be maintained between the portion of the HVAC duct system being cleaned and surrounding indoor occupant spaces.

1. Under all circumstances, the HVAC system cleaning contractor shall verify pressurization differential during the project.

2. When utilizing vacuum collection equipment exhausting indoors it shall utilize HEPA filtration and the equipment shall have a collection efficiency of 99.97% at 0.3 micron particle size and be capable of retaining dislodged debris.

3. All equipment used to create negative duct pressurization that does not have HEPA filtration shall be exhausted outdoors to a location that would not allow re-entrainment.

3.7 SERVICE OPENINGS

A. The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall utilize service openings, as required for proper cleaning, at various points of the HVAC system for physical and mechanical entry, and inspection.

B. The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall utilize existing service openings installed in the HVAC system where possible.

C. Service openings installed into the system as needed shall not degrade the structural, thermal, or functional integrity of the system and shall comply with applicable UL, SMACNA and NFPA standards, as well as local, regional, and state codes.

D. Service openings shall be created in a manner that allows for proper closure and shall not hinder, restrict, or alter the airflow within the air duct.

E. Service opening construction materials and methods shall be in compliance with industry standards and local codes, using materials acceptable under those standards and codes.

F. The HVAC system cleaning contractor shall use duct access doors and permanent panels fabricated with materials classified for flammability and smoke spread if the material is exposed to the internal airstream.

G. All tapes used in the installation and closure of service openings shall meet the requirements of UL 181A.

SECTION 23 05 30

AIR DUCT CLEANING

PAGE 4 OF 6


H. Service panels used for closing service openings in the HVAC system shall be of an equivalent gauge or heavier so as to not compromise the structural integrity of the duct.

I. Service panels used for closing service openings shall be mechanically fastened (screwed or riveted) at maximum every 4” on center and equally spaced. The panel shall overlap the duct surfaces by a minimum of 1” on all sides.

J. Closures must be properly insulated to prevent heat loss/gain or condensation on surfaces within the system.

K. Any fiberglass insulation removed during the installation of a service opening shall be repaired or replaced with like material of the same thickness so that there are no breaks or openings that would degrade the R value, service rating or vapor/air barrier characteristics.

L. All service openings shall be closed with materials meeting UL 181 for smoke generation and flame spread.

M. All service openings capable of being re-opened for future inspection or remediation shall be clearly marked and have their location reported to the owner in project report documents.

N. Cutting service openings into flexible duct is not permitted. Flexible duct shall be disconnected at the ends as needed for proper cleaning and inspection and shall be properly reconnected.

3.8 CLEANING METHODS

A. All HVAC components included in the scope of work shall be cleaned by using a suitable agitation device to dislodge contaminants from the HVAC component surface and then capturing the contaminants with a vacuum collection device. Acceptable methods will include those which will not potentially damage the integrity of the duct, nor damage porous surface materials such as liners inside the duct or system components.

1. The included HVAC components shall be cleaned using source removal mechanical cleaning methods designed to extract contaminants from within the HVAC system and safely remove contaminants from the facility.

2. It is the HVAC system cleaning contractor’s responsibility to select source removal methods that will render the HVAC system visibly clean and capable of passing cleanliness verification methods as described in NADCA Standard ACR.

3. No cleaning method, or combination of methods, shall be used which could potentially damage components of the HVAC system or negatively alter the integrity of the system.

4. Wet cleaning, power washing, steam cleaning and any other form of wet process cleaning of HVAC system components will not be allowed.

3.9 PARTICULATE COLLECTION

A. All methods used shall incorporate the use of vacuum collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. A vacuum collection device shall be connected to the component being cleaned through a predetermined opening. The vacuum collection device must be of sufficient power to render all areas being cleaned under negative pressure, such that containment of debris and the protection of the indoor environment are assured. When the vacuum collection device is used to convey air with debris, it shall maintain a sufficient velocity and negative pressure differential in the portion of the mechanical system being cleaned.

3.10 CONTAINMENT AND ODORS

A. Debris removed during cleaning shall be collected and precautions must be taken to ensure that debris is not otherwise dispersed outside the HVAC system during the cleaning process.

B. Measures shall be employed to control odors and/or mist vapors during the cleaning process.

3.11 COMPONENT CLEANING

A. Air Duct Systems

1. Clean air ducts to remove all non-adhered substances so that they are capable of passing NADCA cleanliness verification tests.

SECTION 23 05 30

AIR DUCT CLEANING

PAGE 5 OF 6


2. Access air ducts through service openings in the system that are large enough to accommodate mechanical cleaning procedures and allow for cleanliness verification.

3. Use mechanical agitation methods to remove particulate, debris, and surface contamination.

4. Capture dislodged substances with a vacuum collection device.

5. Do not use any cleaning methods that will damage any HVAC components.

6. Mark the position of dampers and any air-directional mechanical devices inside the HVAC system prior to cleaning and, upon completion, restore them to their marked position.

7. Verify cleanliness after cleaning has been performed as described in NADCA Standard ACR.

B. Internally Insulated Duct System Components (e.g. Internal Duct Insulation & Sound Attenuators)

1. Use cleaning methods that will not cause damage to internal insulation or sound attenuating components and will render the system capable of passing cleanliness verification tests.

2. Clean fibrous glass duct liner or duct board present in equipment or air ducts using mechanical agitation methods to remove particulate, debris, and surface contamination.

3. Ensure the mechanical cleaning methods selected for duct liner or fibrous glass duct board shall not create abrasions, breaks, or tears to fibrous glass liner or duct board surfaces.

4. Ensure the HVAC system is under constant negative pressure when cleaning internally insulated thermal or acoustical insulation components.

5. Ensure insulated thermal or acoustical insulation components do not get wet, in accordance with applicable NADCA and NAIMA standards and recommendations.

6. Verify cleanliness after cleaning has been performed as described in NADCA Standard ACR.

7. Identify for replacement fibrous glass materials with evidence of damage, deterioration, delaminating, friable materials, biological growth, or moisture such that they cannot be restored by cleaning or resurfacing.

8. When requested or specified, be capable of remediating exposed damaged insulation in air handlers and/or ducts requiring replacement.

9. Scrape clean the base surface of all metal surfaces of the duct system that have undergone removal of degraded thermal-acoustic material such that they are free of loose, visible debris prior to installation of new insulation.

10. In the event the fibrous glass removal was due to mold contamination, clean the base surface prior to reapplying any fibrous glass insulating products in the event the fibrous glass removal was due to mold contamination.

11. In the event internal insulation materials must be replaced, ensure all materials conform to applicable industry codes and standards, including those of UL, NFPA 90-A, 90-B and SMACNA. All materials used for insulation replacement within the HVAC system shall meet the project specifications for duct liner. Installation of the replacement materials shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions. Installation of thermal-acoustic HVAC insulation common to the air stream shall comply with current SMACNA, NAIMA and other applicable codes and standards.

12. Following completion of the installation of replacement materials, ensure all new fibrous glass surfaces shall be capable of meeting NADCA cleanliness verification requirements.

SECTION 23 05 30

AIR DUCT CLEANING

PAGE 6 OF 6


3.12 CLEANLINESS VERIFICATION

A. All components within the project scope of work shall achieve, at minimum, the level of visibly clean. Verification shall be performed on specified components as described in NADCA Standard ACR.

B. Cleanliness verification will be performed immediately after HVAC system component cleaning and prior to use in operation.

C. Visual inspection of porous and non-porous HVAC system components shall be conducted to assess that the HVAC system is visibly clean as defined in NADCA Standard ACR.

D. If no contaminants are evident through visual inspection, the HVAC system shall be considered clean.

E. If visible contaminants are evident through visual inspection, those portions of the system where contaminants are visible shall be re-cleaned and subjected to re-inspection for cleanliness.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 05 48

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC

PAGE 1 OF 6


SECTION 23 05 48 – VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Elastomeric isolation pads.

2. Elastomeric isolation mounts.

3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.

4. Housed-spring isolators.

5. Housed-restrained-spring isolators.

6. Elastomeric hangers.

7. Spring hangers.

8. Vibration isolation equipment bases.

9. Restrained isolation roof-curb rails.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

2. Section 23 21 16 Hydronic Specialties

1.3 COORDINATION



A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of vibration isolation device type required.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of equipment bases. Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each vibration isolation device.

1. Include design calculations for selecting vibration isolators and for designing vibration isolation bases.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation for HVAC piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and restraints, if any.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Welding certificates.

SECTION 23 05 48


PAGE 2 OF 6



A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Isolation Technology, Inc.

B. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.

C. Mason Industries.

D. Thybar Corporation (Roofcurbs).

E. Substitutions: See Section 01 33 00 – Submittals and Substitutions.

2.2 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS (Type 1)

A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads:

1. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness (minimum 50 durometer) for uniform loading over pad area.

2. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment (minimum 3/4” thick).

3. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties.

4. Surface Pattern: Waffle pattern.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC HANGERS (Type 2)

A. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

2. Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel contact.

2.4 HOUSED-SPRING ISOLATORS (Type 3)

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators in Two-Part Telescoping Housing >.

1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.

5. Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators.

a. Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

b. Top housing with attachment and leveling bolt.

2.5 SPRING HANGERS (Type 3)

A. Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in Compression.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

SECTION 23 05 48


PAGE 3 OF 6






6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.

7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower threaded rod.

8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil.

2.6 HOUSED-RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS (Type 4)

A. Freestanding, Steel, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint in Two-Part Telescoping Housing.

1. Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators. Housings are equipped with adjustable snubbers to limit vertical movement.

a. Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

b. Threaded top housing with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.





2.7 RESTRAINED ISOLATION ROOF-CURB RAILS (Type D)

A. Description: Factory-assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb rail designed to resiliently support equipment (Minimum 18” high).

B. Upper Frame: Upper frame shall provide continuous and captive support for equipment.

C. Lower Support Assembly: The lower support assembly shall be formed sheet metal section containing adjustable and removable steel springs that support upper frame. The lower support assembly shall have a means for attaching to building structure and a wood nailer for attaching roof materials and shall be insulated with a minimum of 2 inches of rigid glass-fiber insulation on inside of assembly. Adjustable, restrained-spring isolators shall be mounted on elastomeric vibration isolation pads and shall have access ports, for level adjustment, with removable waterproof covers at all isolator locations. Isolators shall be located so they are accessible for adjustment at any time during the life of the installation without interfering with the integrity of the roof.

D. Snubber Bushings: All-directional, elastomeric snubber bushings at least 1/4 inch thick.

E. Water Seal: Galvanized sheet metal with EPDM seals at corners, attached to upper support frame, extending down past wood nailer of lower support assembly, and counter flashed over roof materials.

SECTION 23 05 48


PAGE 4 OF 6


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Bases:

1. Set steel bases for one inch clearance between housekeeping pad and base.

2. Set concrete inertia bases for 2 inches clearance between housekeeping pad and base.

3. Adjust equipment level.

C. On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions.

D. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal.

E. Provide pairs of horizontal limit springs on fans with more than 6.0 inches WC static pressure, and on hanger supported, horizontally mounted axial fans.

F. Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using isolators or resilient hangers for scheduled distance.

1. Up to 4 Inches Pipe Size: First three points of support.

2. 5 to 8 Inches Pipe Size: First four points of support.

3. 10 inches Pipe Size and Over: First six points of support.

4. Select three hangers closest to vibration source for minimum 1.0 inch static deflection or static deflection of isolated equipment. Select remaining isolators for minimum 1.0 inch static deflection or 1/2 static deflection of isolated equipment.

PART 4 - SCHEDULES

A. Vibration Isolation Schedule

Equipment Type Horsepower and Other

RPM

Floor Span

Slab on Grade Up to 20 ft 20 to 30 ft 30 to 40 ft

Base/ Type

Min. Defl. (in)

Base/ Type

Min. Defl. (in)

Base/ Type

Min. Defl. (in)

Base/ Type

Min. Defl. (in)

Refrigeration Ma-chines

Water-Cooled Centrif-ugal, Scroll

All All 1 0.25 4 0.75 4 1.50 4 1.50

Water-Cooled Screw All All 1 1.00 4 1.50 4 2.50 4 2.50

Absorption All All 4 0.25 4 0.75 4 1.50 4 1.50

Air-Cooled Scroll All All 1 0.25 4 1.50 4 1.50 4 2.50

Air-Cooled Screw All All 4 1.00 4 1.50 4 2.50 4 2.50

Air Compressors and Vacuum Pumps

Tank Mounted Horiz. <10hp All 3 0.75 3 0.75 3 1.50 3 1.50

>10hp All C / 3 0.75 C / 3 0.75 C / 3 1.50 C / 3 1.50

Tank Mounted Vert. All All C / 3 0.75 C / 3 0.75 C / 3 1.50 C / 3 1.50

Base-Mounted All All C / 3 0.75 C / 3 0.75 C / 3 1.50 C / 3 1.50

SECTION 23 05 48


PAGE 5 OF 6



RPM

Floor Span


Base/ Type

Min. Defl. (in)

Base/ Type

Min. Defl. (in)

Base/ Type

Min. Defl. (in)

Base/ Type

Min. Defl. (in)

Large Reciprocating All All C / 3 0.75 C / 3 0.75 C / 3 1.50 C / 3 1.50

Pumps

Inline

5 to 25hp All Bolt to Pad

- 3 1.50 3 1.50 3 1.50

>25hp All Bolt to Pad

- 3 1.50 3 1.50 3 2.50

End Suction, Double-suction split case

<40hp All Bolt to Pad

- C / 3 0.75 C / 3 1.50 C / 3 1.50

50 to 125hp All Bolt to Pad

- C / 3 0.75 C / 3 1.50 C / 3 2.50

>150hp All Bolt to Pad

- C / 3 1.50 C / 3 2.50 C / 3 3.50

Cooling Towers

All Up to 300

1 0.25 4 3.50 4 3.50 4 3.50

All 301 to 500

1 0.25 4 2.50 4 2.50 4 2.50

All >500 1 0.25 4 0.75 4 0.75 4 0.75

Boilers

Fire-Tube All All 1 0.25 B / 4 0.75 B / 4 1.50 B / 4 2.50

Water-Tube All All 1 0.12 1 0.12 1 0.12 1 0.25

Fans (Axial, Ple-num, Cabinet, Cen-trifugal Inline)

Up to 22in Dia. All All 2 0.25 3 0.75 3 0.75 C / 3 0.75

24” Dia. and up

<2 in SP

Up to 300

B / 3 2.50 C / 3 3.50 C / 3 3.50 C / 3 3.50

301 to 500

B / 3 0.75 B / 3 1.50 C / 3 2.50 C / 3 2.50

>500 B / 3 0.75 B / 3 1.50 B / 3 1.50 B / 3 1.50

>2 in SP

Up to 300

C / 3 2.50 C / 3 3.50 C / 3 3.50 C / 3 3.50

301 to 500

C / 3 1.50 C / 3 1.50 C / 3 2.50 C / 3 2.50

>500 C / 3 0.75 C / 3 1.50 C / 3 1.50 C / 3 2.50

Centrifugal Fans

Up to 22in Dia. All All B / 2 0.25 B / 3 0.75 B / 3 0.75 B / 3 1.5

24” Dia. and up

<40hp

Up to 300

B / 3 2.50 B / 3 3.50 B / 3 3.50 B / 3 3.50

301 to 500

B / 3 1.50 B / 3 1.50 B / 3 2.50 B / 3 2.50

>500 B / 3 0.75 B / 3 0.75 B / 3 0.75 B / 3 1.50

>50hp

Up to 300

C / 3 2.50 C / 3 3.50 C / 3 3.50 C / 3 3.50

301 to 500

C / 3 1.50 C / 3 1.50 C / 3 2.50 C / 3 2.50

>500 C / 3 1.00 C / 3 1.50 C / 3 1.50 C / 3 2.50

Propeller Fans

Wall-Mounted All All 1 0.25 1 0.25 1 0.25 1 0.25

Roof-Mounted All All 1 0.25 1 0.25 D / 4 1.50 D / 4 1.50

Heat Pumps, Fan Coil Units, Com-puter Room Units

All All 3 0.75 3 0.75 3 0.75 3 1.50

SECTION 23 05 48


PAGE 6 OF 6



RPM

Floor Span


Base/ Type

Min. Defl. (in)

Base/ Type

Min. Defl. (in)

Base/ Type

Min. Defl. (in)

Base/ Type

Min. Defl. (in)

Condensing Units All All 1 0.25 4 0.75 4 1.50 4 1.50

Internally Isolated Air Handling Units

All All 1 0.25 1 0.25 1 0.25 1 0.25

Packaged Rooftop Equipment

All All 1 0.25 D / 3 0.75 - - - -

Ducted Rotating Equipment

Small Fans, Fan-Powered Boxes

<600 CFM All 3 0.5 3 0.5 3 0.5 3 0.5

>600 CFM All 3 0.75 3 0.75 3 0.75 3 0.75

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PAGE 1 OF 3


SECTION 23 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Equipment ID Labels

2. Tags.

3. Pipe Markers.

4. Ceiling Labels.


A. ANSI/ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007.

1.4 COORDINATION


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS

A. Air Handling Units: Equipment ID Labels.

B. Air Terminal Units: Tags.

C. Automatic Controls: Tags. Key to control schematic.

D. Control Panels: Equipment ID Labels.

E. Dampers: Ceiling labels, where located above lay-in ceiling. Also, colored ribbons for balancing dampers in concealed ductwork.

F. Heat Transfer Equipment: Equipment ID Labels.

G. Instrumentation: Tags.

H. Major Control Components: Equipment ID Labels.

I. Piping: Pipe markers.

J. Pumps: Equipment ID Labels.

K. Small-sized Equipment: Tags.

L. Tanks: Equipment ID Labels.

M. Valves: Tags.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Brady Corporation.

B. Kolbi Pipemarker Co.

C. Seton Identification Products.

2.3 EQUIPMENT ID LABELS

A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters.

1. Letter Color: White.

2. Letter Height: 1 inch.

3. Background Color: Black.

SECTION 23 05 53


PAGE 2 OF 3


2.4 TAGS

A. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges.

B. Valve numbers shall be prefixed with an “HHW” for heating hot water, “CHW” for chilled water, “W” for water, and in similar manner for other services.

2.5 PIPE MARKERS

A. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1, 2007.

B. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.

C. Include flow arrow markers.

2.6 CEILING LABELS

A. Where equipment items are mounted above ceilings, plastic label stuck on ceiling grid to identify the location of such equipment items with the respective equipment number or identification. Label should be no wider than the ceiling grid with the identification wording running parallel to the grid piece upon which it is attached.

B. Description: Printed adhesive backed label

1. Label and Letter Color: Black letters on white label

2. Height: 3/4 inch or width of the ceiling grid.

C. Above Ceiling Equipment Requiring Identification:

1. HVAC Equipment.

2. Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers.

3. Heating/Cooling Valves.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.

C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic equipment ID labels. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags.

F. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic equipment ID labels.

G. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.

H. Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags.

I. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic.

J. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

SECTION 23 05 53


PAGE 3 OF 3


K. Locate ceiling labels to locate valves or dampers above lay-in panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment.

L. Provide brightly-colored ribbons for identification of manual balancing dampers in concealed ductwork.

3.3 PIPE LABEL SCHEDULE

System Wording Letter Color Background Color

Boiler Feed Water BOILER WATER White Green

Chemical Treatment CHEM TREATMENT Black Orange

Chilled Glycol Supply CHILLED WATER SUPPLY White Green

Chilled Glycol Return CHILLED WATER RETURN White Green

Compressed Air COMPRESSED AIR or PLANT AIR White Blue

Compressed Air - 15 psi LOW PRESSURE AIR White Blue

Compressed Air - 85 psi HIGH PRESSURE AIR White Blue

Condensate CONDENSATE White Green

Condensate - H.P. HIGH PRESSURE CONDENSATE White Green

Condensate - L.P. LOW PRESSURE CONDENSATE White Green

Cooling Tower Supply TOWER SUPPLY White Green

Cooling Tower Return TOWER RETURN White Green

Condenser Water Supply CONDENSER WATER SUPPLY White Green

Condenser Water Return CONDENSER WATER RETURN White Green

Heating Water Supply HEATING SUPPLY White Green

Heating Water Return HEATING RETURN White Green

Heat Pump Supply HEAT PUMP SUPPLY White Green

Heat Pump Return HEAT PUMP RETURN White Green

Hot Glycol Supply HOT GLYCOL SUPPLY White Green

Hot Glycol Return HOT GLYCOL RETURN White Green

Natural Gas NATURAL GAS Black Yellow

Natural Gas <10” W.C. LOW PRESSURE GAS Black Yellow

Natural Gas >5 psig HIGH PRESSURE GAS Black Yellow

Steam STEAM White Green

Steam - High Pressure HIGH PRESSURE STEAM White Green

Steam - Low Pressure LOW PRESSURE STEAM White Green

Vent – DA or Cond Receiver VENT White Green

A. Other piping systems, which may occur and are not listed above, shall be worded and colored as instructed by the Owner's Representative.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 05 93

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PAGE 1 OF 5



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

(FOR REFERENCE ONLY)

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.

2. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic systems.


A. NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental

Systems; National Environmental Balancing Bureau; 2015, Eighth Edition.

B. AABC – National Standards for Total System Balance; Associated Air Balance Council, 2002.

C. SMACNA – HVAC Systems – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing; Sheet Metal and Air

Conditioning Contactors National Association; 2002, Third Edition.

D. ASHRAE Standard 111–1988; Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of

Building Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Where project phasing is required, provide a separate Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Report

at the completion of each project phase. Combine all project phases in the final Testing,

Adjusting and Balancing Report.

B. Coordinate all work with job site superintendent and all applicable trades.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. General Requirements:

1. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of

calibration.

2. Format of Test Reports: Standard test report forms published by NEBB, AABC, SMACNA

and ASHRAE are acceptable.

3. Indicate deficiencies in balanced systems that prevent proper testing, adjusting and

balancing.

4. Clearly highlight deficiencies in measured values, including explanatory information where

beneficial.

C. Preliminary Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Report:

D. Final Report:

1. Submit a draft copy of the final report to the Architect/Engineer for review prior to final

acceptance.

SECTION 23 05 93


PAGE 2 OF 5



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

2. Provide final copies to the Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in Operating and

Maintenance manuals.


A. The firm shall specialize in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this

section.

B. The testing, adjusting and balancing firm shall have a minimum of five years documented

experience.

C. The testing, adjusting and balancing firm shall have at least one employee who has been

certified by one of the following:

1. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

2. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org.

3. TABB/ICB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau / International Certification Board.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES

A. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust air outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of

design.

B. Air Handling Systems: Adjust fans to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

C. Hydronic Equipment: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

D. Hydronic Systems: Adjust pumps to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

3.2 PRORATED UTILITY EXPENSES:

A. The testing, adjusting and balancing firm shall not be responsible in whole or in part for any

prorated expenses for utilities.

3.3 PREPARATION FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING WORK

A. The testing, adjusting and balancing firm shall examine the drawings and become familiar with

system layout and operation, equipment types, equipment locations, and balancing and

metering devices.

B. It will be necessary for the testing, adjusting and balancing firm to perform his services in close

coordination with the Mechanical Contractor, Plumbing Contractor and Temperature Controls

Contractor.

C. Where HVAC systems interface with life safety systems, including smoke control, fire or smoke

detection, alarm and control, coordinate scheduling of testing with the authorities having

jurisdiction.

3.4 EXAMINATION OF INSTALLED SYSTEMS

A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work.

B. Verify that clean air filters are installed.

C. Verify that duct systems are free of debris.

D. Verify that fans are rotating correctly.

E. Verify that fire, smoke and fire/smoke dampers are in place and open.

SECTION 23 05 93


PAGE 3 OF 5



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

F. Verify that air outlets are installed and connected.

G. Verify that duct system leakage is minimized.

H. Verify that hydronic systems are filled and vented.

I. Verify that pumps are rotating correctly.

J. Verify that strainer baskets are clean and in place.

3.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Perform total system balance in accordance with the procedures established by AABC, NEBB

or TABB/ICB.

B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings

to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.

C. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing

doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to required settings.

3.6 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURES

A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required supply, return, exhaust, outside

air and relief air quantities.

B. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. Where measurement at air inlets or outlets is

impractical, measure air flow by Pitot tube traverse of duct.

C. Air distribution systems shall have at least one branch damper completely open.

D. Where possible, use duct-mounted volume dampers to regulate air quantities. Minimize the

adjustment of dampers at air inlets or outlets.

E. Operate fans at the lowest speeds possible to achieve required air flows. Adjust fan speeds by

adjusting VFD’s, adjusting potentiometers, coordinating control signal requirements with the

Temperature Controls Contractor, or adjusting / replacing fan sheaves and belts.

F. Provide system schematic diagrams with the following information:

1. Required and actual air quantities recorded at each air outlet or inlet.

2. Air handling unit pressures and air flows. Indicate supply air flow, return air flow, minimum

outside air flow, static pressure upstream and downstream of air handling unit coils, filters,

fans and other components, static pressure in ductwork at return air inlet to unit, outside air

inlet to unit, and at unit discharge.

3. Inlet and discharge static pressures and flows on in-line fans.

G. On applicable air handling systems, measure outside air, return air, supply air and exhaust relief

air, using Pitot tube traverse of ducts. Measure in ‘minimum outdoor air’ mode, and in ‘100

percent outside air’ mode. Where permanent air flow measurement devices exist, compare

Pitot tube air flow readings to air flow measurement device readings.

H. Coil Temperatures: Take wet-bulb and dry-bulb temperatures on the entering and leaving side

of each cooling coil. Dry-bulb temperatures shall be taken on the entering and leaving side of

each heating coil.

I. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme

conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at

minimum air flow rate, full heating.

3.7 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE

SECTION 23 05 93


PAGE 4 OF 5



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities.

B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to

determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base

flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system.

C. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements

prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in

conjunction with air balancing.

D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements. For 3-

way control valves the rated pressure drop shall first be adjusted with the 3-way valve set so

that all the water flows through the coil. The bypass balancing valve shall then be adjusted on

each coil until equal pressure drop between supply and return connections is obtained, with the

3-way valve set to bypass the coil.

E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and

fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point.

F. Air Vents: Check all air vents at the high points of the water system and determine if they are

installed and operating.

G. Pumps: Adjust pumps to meet design GPM requirements. Check pumps for proper operation,

rotation, total dynamic head and pump shutoff head. Pumps shall be free of vibration and

cavitation. Measure and record operating current and voltage.

H. Central Plant: Adjust water flow through the central plant if applicable.

3.8 OPPOSITE SEASON TEST

A. The balancing agency shall perform an inspection of the HVAC system during the opposite

season from that in which the initial adjustments were made. The balancing agency shall make

any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments to produce optimum system operation.

3.9 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT TO BE TESTED, ADJUSTED AND BALANCED

A. Test, adjust, and balance the following:

1. Fans

2. Air Inlets and Outlets

3.10 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED

A. Electric Motors:

1. Model/Frame

2. HP/BHP

3. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load

4. RPM

5. Starter size, rating, heater elements

6. Sheave Make/Size/Bore

7. VFD frequency or percent output.

B. Exhaust Fans:

1. Location

2. Manufacturer

SECTION 23 05 93


PAGE 5 OF 5



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

3. Model number

4. Air flow, specified and actual

5. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual

6. Sheave Make/Size/Bore

7. Number of Belts/Make/Size

8. Fan RPM

C. Flow Measuring Stations:

1. Location

2. Design Flow rate

3. Actual/final flow rate

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 07 13

DUCT INSULATION

PAGE 1 OF 11


SECTION 23 07 13 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation

2. Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation

3. Mineral Fiber Board Insulation

4. Duct liner

5. Adhesives

6. Tapes

7. Sealants

8. Securements


1. Section 09 90 01 Mechanical Electrical Painting

2. Section 23 07 16 HVAC Equipment Insulation

3. Section 23 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation

4. Section 23 31 00 HVAC Ducts and Casings


A. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2007.

B. ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate Metric; 2007.

C. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2004.

D. ASTM C 553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2008.

E. ASTM C 612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 2009.

F. ASTM C 1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material); 2005.

G. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010.

H. ASTM E2336-16 – Standard Test Methods for Fire Resistant Grease Duct Enclosure Systems.

I. ASTM E 96/E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005.

J. ISO 6944-1 – Fire Containment – Elements of Building Construction – Part 1: Ventilation Ducts.

K. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 23 05 29 "Roof-Mounted Piping, Ductwork and Equipment Supports"

SECTION 23 07 13

DUCT INSULATION

PAGE 2 OF 11


B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

D. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Duct Insulation and Jacketing Schedule for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

2.2 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION:

A. Approved Manufacturer:

1. Armacell

B. Insulation:

1. Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C534, Type II for sheet materials. 'K' value: 0.27 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518.

2. Maximum service temperature: 180 degrees F with self-adhesive.

3. Maximum Water Vapor Permeability: 0.08 perm-in. Maximum Water absorption: 0.2%.

4. Mold growth resistant (UL 181), fungi resistance (ASTM G21/C1338), and bacteria resistance (ASTM G22).

SECTION 23 07 13

DUCT INSULATION

PAGE 3 OF 11


5. Exterior Insulation: The Contractor may submit voluntary alternate pricing for the following in lieu of rigid insulation plus duct jacketing: ASTM C 534; Type II sheet Grade 1 flexible elastomeric sheet insulation with expanded closed-cell structure. Armacell Type ArmaTuff Plus II Laminated sheet and roll insulation.

a. 'K' value: 0.27 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518.

b. Maximum service temperature: 180 degrees F with self-adhesive.

c. Maximum Water Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm-in. Maximum Water absorption: 0.2%.

d. Mold growth resistant (UL 181), fungi resistance (ASTM G21/C1338), and bacteria resistance (ASTM G22).

e. Finish:

1) Factory finish shall be 16 mil laminated covering membrane for UV protection. No painting is required.

a) 10 Year limited warranty against breakdown due to UV radiation.

2) After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

3) No finish

2.3 MINERAL-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION:

A. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Knauf Insulation: Atmosphere Duct Wrap

2. Johns Manville Corporation: Model Microlite XG

3. Owens Corning Corporation: Model SOFTR

4. CertainTeed Corporation: Soft Touch Duct Wrap

B. Insulation:

1. Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C553, Type II and ASTM C1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2. One pound per square foot density.

3. 'K' value (material compressed 25 percent): 0.25 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518.

4. Maximum Service Temperature (with FSK face): 250 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 411.

5. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: Maximum 5.0 percent by weight, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1104.

6. Secure with pressure sensitive tape and staples.

2.4 MINERAL-FIBER BOARD INSULATION:


1. Johns Manville Corporation; Model 814 Spin-Glas.

2. Knauf; Model Earth Wool.

3. Owens Corning Corp.

4. CertainTeed Corporation; Commercial Board.

B. Insulation:

1. Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-

SECTION 23 07 13

DUCT INSULATION

PAGE 4 OF 11


applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2. 'K' value: 0.24 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518.

3. Maximum service temperature: 450 degrees F.

4. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent.

5. Minimum Density: 3 lbs./cu ft.

2.5 DUCT LINER


1. CertainTeed Corporation; ToughGard T Textile Duct Liner.

2. Johns Manville Corporation; Model Linacoustic HP or RC.

3. Knauf Insulation model Sonic XP

4. Owens Corning Corp; Model QuietR AcousticR.

B. Insulation: Incombustible glass fiber complying with ASTM C 1071; flexible blanket; impregnated surface and edges coated with acrylic polymer shown to be fungus and bacteria resistant by testing to ASTM G 21.

1. Apparent Thermal Conductivity: Maximum of 0.25 at 75 degrees F.

2. Service Temperature: Up to 250 degrees F.

3. Minimum Rated Velocity on Coated Air Side for Air Erosion: 5,000 FPM.

4. Minimum Noise Reduction Coefficients:

a. 1 Inch Thickness: 0.45.

b. 2 Inch Thickness: 0.70.

2.6 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS

A. Approved Manufacturers

1. Unifrax FyreWrap Elite 1.5 Duct Insulation

2. Morgan Thermal Ceramics FireMaster FastWrap XL

3. Morgan Advanced Materials Pyroscat Duct Wrap XL

4. 3M Fire Barrier Duct Wrap 615+

B. Fire-Rated Blanket: High-temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is tested and certified to provide a 2-hour fire rating by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. U.L. Certified.

2. Ventilation ducts shall have a fire rating of two hour in a single-layer system, in accordance with the acceptance criteria for ISO 6944-1.

a. Compliant with the International Mechanical Code.

3. Fire rated insulation systems for grease ducts shall meet the acceptance criteria for ASTM E2336-16 and shall be rated for zero clearance to combustibles.

a. Compliant with NFPA 96 and the International Mechanical Code.

C. Where access doors are required, prefabricated fire-rated access doors by Ductmate or approved equal may be used, subject to the approval by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Consult with manufacturer for compatibility of access doors with each product.

2.7 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.

SECTION 23 07 13

DUCT INSULATION

PAGE 5 OF 11


C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

2.8 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.

4. Color: Aluminum.

2.9 TAPES

A. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.

2. Thickness: 6.5 mils.

3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

4. Elongation: 2 percent.

5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

B. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

1. Width: 2 inches.

2. Thickness: 3.7 mils.

3. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.

4. Elongation: 5 percent.

5. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.

2.10 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167 or ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304; 0.015-inch-thick, 3/4-inch-wide with wing seal or closed seal.

2. Aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020-inch-thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

2.11 CORNER ANGLES

A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Note that where internal lining is required on ductwork, the listed duct dimensions indicate the free area within the duct (the actual duct wall size must be increased by the thickness of the duct liner in each dimension).

B. All ductwork installed in Mechanical Rooms, Electrical Rooms and other unfinished spaces without ceilings, and below ceilings in Mechanical Rooms, Electrical Rooms and Storage Rooms shall be considered "exposed", regardless of the level of finish in those spaces.

SECTION 23 07 13

DUCT INSULATION

PAGE 6 OF 11


C. All ductwork installed above ceilings and within shafts and chases shall be considered "concealed".

D. Unless indicated otherwise, no external insulation shall be installed on exposed ductwork in normally occupied finished spaces.

E. For interior applications, unless indicated otherwise, internally lined ductwork and double wall ductwork shall not be externally insulated.

F. For exterior applications, unless indicated otherwise, internally lined ductwork and double wall ductwork shall be externally insulated.

G. Unless indicated otherwise, interior return air ductwork shall not be externally insulated.

H. Mixed air ductwork (outside air and return air combined) shall be treated as outside air ductwork.

I. Relief air ductwork: Unless indicated otherwise, insulate relief air ductwork from the relief air discharge through the low-leakage motorized damper. Where no damper exists, insulate relief ductwork through the return air/ relief air duct split.

J. Exhaust air ductwork: Unless indicated otherwise, insulate exhaust air ductwork from the exhaust air discharge through the low-leakage motorized damper. Where no damper exists, insulate exhaust ductwork for the first ten feet upstream of the exhaust air discharge.

K. Ductwork located in spaces having ‘cloud’ ceilings (ceilings covering only a portion of the space footprint, with a portion of the ceiling intentionally left open) shall be treated as “concealed”, regardless of whether any or all of the ductwork is visible from below.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

3.4 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

SECTION 23 07 13

DUCT INSULATION

PAGE 7 OF 11


2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

3.5 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

SECTION 23 07 13

DUCT INSULATION

PAGE 8 OF 11


4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Firestopping."

E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Firestopping."

3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF DUCT LINER

A. Apply full coverage of adhesives in compliance with ASTM C916 and in accordance to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area on duct and plenum surfaces.

B. Duct liner shall be fastened in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply full coverage of adhesives in compliance with ASTM C916 and in accordance to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area on duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not over compress insulation during installation.

e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.

f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

SECTION 23 07 13

DUCT INSULATION

PAGE 9 OF 11


a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply full coverage of adhesives in compliance with ASTM C916 and in accordance to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area on duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside

SECTION 23 07 13

DUCT INSULATION

PAGE 10 OF 11


radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

3.9 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and supports to maintain a continuous fire rating.

B. Where ducts penetrate roofs having combustible construction, extend insulation to 18 inches above the combustible construction.

C. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.

D. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are specified in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.10 ACOUSTICAL LAGGING

A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.11 FINISHES

A. Exposed insulated ducts above ceiling “clouds” shall be provided with a finish suitable for a final coat of paint.

B. Insulation with Mineral Fiber, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 09 90 01 – Mechanical Electrical Painting.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.

PART 4 - SCHEDULE

4.1 INSULATION AND JACKETING SCHEDULE

A. Interior Concealed

1. Ductwork Type Jacket Type Insulation Type Insulation Thickness

2. Supply Air FSK Mineral Fiber Blanket 1.5”

3. Outside Air FSK Mineral Fiber Blanket 1.5”

4. Exhaust Air FSK Mineral Fiber Blanket 1.5”

5. Combustion Air FSK Mineral Fiber Blanket 1.5”

B. Interior Concealed in Unheated Attics


2. Supply Air FSK Mineral Fiber Blanket 2”

3. Outside Air FSK Mineral Fiber Blanket 2”

4. Return Air FSK Mineral Fiber Blanket 2”

5. Exhaust Air FSK Mineral Fiber Blanket 2”

6. Combustion Air FSK Mineral Fiber Blanket 2”

C. Interior Exposed


2. Supply Air FSK Mineral Fiber Board 1.5”

3. Return Air FSK Mineral Fiber Board 1”

4. Outside Air FSK Mineral Fiber Board 1.5”

SECTION 23 07 13

DUCT INSULATION

PAGE 11 OF 11


5. Exhaust Air FSK Mineral Fiber Board 1”

6. OA, RA, EA Plenums FSK Mineral Fiber Board 2”

D. Exterior


2. Supply Air Aluminum Mineral Fiber Board 2”

3. Outside Air Aluminum Mineral Fiber Board 2”

4. Return Air Aluminum Mineral Fiber Board 2”

5. Exhaust Air Aluminum Mineral Fiber Board 2”

6. Combustion Air Aluminum Mineral Fiber Board 2”

E. Duct Liner Thickness: One inch, unless indicated otherwise.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 07 16

HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PAGE 1 OF 5



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

SECTION 23 07 16 - HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Glass Fiber, Flexible Insulation.

2. Glass Fiber, Semi-Rigid Board Insulation.

3. Glass Fiber, Rigid Board Insulation.

4. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation

5. Polyisocyanurate Cellular Plastic Insulation

6. Jackets

B. Related Sections

1. Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping, Valves and Accessories: Placement of hangers and

hanger inserts.

2. Section 23 21 16 - Hydronic Specialties.


A. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003.

B. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2007.

C. ASTM C 177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal

Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2004.

D. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by

Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2004.

E. ASTM C 534/C 534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular

Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2008.

F. ASTM C 553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and

Industrial Applications; 2008.

G. ASTM C 592 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type

Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type); 2008a.

H. ASTM C 612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation;

2009.

I. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2010.

J. ASTM E 96/E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005.

1.4 COORDINATION


1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on insulation materials, jackets and accessories.

SECTION 23 07 16


PAGE 2 OF 5



A/E PROJECT 5-4749


A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this

section with minimum 3 years of experience.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION

A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum,

when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.

2.2 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE

A. Manufacturers:

1. Knauf Insulation

2. Johns Manville Corporation

3. Owens Corning Corporation

4. CertainTeed Corporation

B. Insulation: ASTM C 553; flexible, noncombustible.

1. Density: 1.0 pounds per cubic foot.

2. 'K' Value: 0.25 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177 or ASTM C

518.

3. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F.

4. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket:

1. Factory applied FSK (Foil Scrim-Kraft) reinforced foil and paper jacket.

2. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.

D. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.

2.3 GLASS FIBER, SEMI-RIGID BOARD

A. Manufacturer:

1. Knauf Insulation


3. Owens Corning Corporation


B. Insulation: ASTM C 612 or ASTM C 592; semi-rigid, noncombustible.

1. Density: 3.0 lb/cu ft.


518.


2.4 GLASS FIBER, RIGID BOARD

A. Manufacturer:

1. Knauf Insulation


3. Owens Corning Corp


B. Insulation: ASTM C 612 or ASTM C 592; rigid, noncombustible.

SECTION 23 07 16


PAGE 3 OF 5



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

1. Density: 3.0 lb/cu ft.


518.


4. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket:

1. Factory applied FSK (Foil Scrim-Kraft) reinforced foil and paper jacket.

2. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.

2.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION

A. Manufacturer: Armacell International; Model AP Armaflex

B. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C

534 Grade 3, in sheet form.

1. Minimum Service Temperature: -297 degrees F.


3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive as recommended by manufacturer.

4. R value: 4.2 per inch.

2.6 POLYISOCYANURATE CELLULAR PLASTIC

A. Manufacturers: ITW Insulation Systems, Model Trymer 1800.

B. Insulation Material: ASTM C 591, rigid molded modified polyisocyanurate cellular plastic.

1. Density: 1.8 pounds per cubic foot.

2. 'K' value: 0.18 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518.



5. Water Absorption: <0.7 percent by volume, maximum, when tested in accordance with

ASTM C272.

6. Moisture Vapor Transmission: 4.0 perm in., ASTM E96

7. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.

2.7 JACKETS

A. PVC Plastic:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Ceelco Ceel-Tite PVC 320 UVR Series

b. or equal by Proto PVC Corp.

2. Jacket: Sheet material, off-white color.

a. Thickness: 30 mil.

b. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.

B. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6 oz/sq yd plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilute fire retardant

lagging adhesive.

C. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) formed aluminum sheet.

1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet.

2. Joining: Z-joint longitudinal seam closure and factory supplied butt straps equal to Manville

"Metal-Lok".

SECTION 23 07 16


PAGE 4 OF 5



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

D. Stainless Steel Jacket: ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel.

1. Thickness: 0.010 inch.

2. Finish: Smooth.

3. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.010 inch thick stainless steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.

C. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten

insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.

D. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On

cold equipment, use vapor barrier cement.

E. Insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system.

F. Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Provide vapor

barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Cover with PVC jacket.

G. Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids above ambient temperature: Provide standard

jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass cloth and

adhesive.

H. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket or finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor

barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal

equipment.

I. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate over.

J. Tanks

1. Wrap the tank with flexible board insulation. Cut, score, or miter insulation to fit contour of

equipment. Overlap the service jacket 3” and staple with outward clinching staples on

maximum 4” centers. Coat the staples with vapor barrier mastic for a vapor seal. Seal the

joints with 3” pressure sensitive tape.

2. Around the tank shell, band the insulation with 3/4” x .020” galvanized steel bands or 16

gauge galvanized wire on 12” centers to hold it secure. On the tank heads attach the

insulation with high temperature adhesive and/or mounting pins & studs on no greater than

16” centers. No welding to vessels is allowed.

3. Cover the insulation with aluminum jacket. Overlap joints a minimum of 3” so as to shed

water. Joints that cannot be sealed in either of these ways shall be covers with butt strips,

minimum of 3” wide. Alternate is to cover with PVC jacket with minimum 3” overlap. Glue

together joints with adhesives. Caulk all joints which cannot be sealed with FDA approved

caulking.

4. Band the jacketing with stainless steel banding. Where banding cannot hold the jacketing,

as on the tank heads, attach the jacket with stainless steel sheet metal screws. Seal the

screw holes with caulking.

3.2 SCHEDULES

A. Heating Systems:

1. Pump Bodies:

a. Glass Fiber, Flexible Insulation: 2 inches thick, with PVC jacket.

b. Alternate: Elastomeric Cellular Insulation, 1 inch thick.

2. Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers:

SECTION 23 07 16


PAGE 5 OF 5



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

a. Glass Fiber, Flexible Insulation: 2 inches thick, with Aluminum jacket.

b. Alternate: Elastomeric Cellular Insulation, 1 inch thick.

3. Air Separators:

a. Separators less than 2’ diameter: Glass Fiber, Flexible Insulation: 2 inches thick, with

PVC jacket.

b. Separators 2’ diameter and larger: Glass Fiber, Semi-Rigid Board Insulation: 2

inches thick, with PVC jacket.

c. Alternate: Elastomeric Cellular Insulation, 1 inch thick.

4. Hot Thermal Storage Tanks: Glass Fiber, semi-rigid insulation, 2 inches thick with

aluminum jacket.

5. Boiler Feed Water Storage Tanks: : Glass Fiber, semi-rigid insulation, 2 inches thick with

aluminum jacket.

6. Condensate Tanks: Glass Fiber, semi-rigid insulation, 2 inches thick with aluminum jacket.

B. Cooling Systems:

1. Pump Bodies:

a. Glass Fiber, Flexible Insulation: 2 inches thick, with PVC jacket.

b. Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: 2 inches thick.

2. Air Separators:

a. Separators less than 2’ diameter: Same material as pipe insulation: 2 inches thick,

with PVC jacket.

b. Separators 2’ diameter and larger: Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: 2 inches thick.

3. Chiller Cold Surfaces (Not Factory Insulated):

a. Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: 1.1/2 inches thick.

4. Cold Thermal Storage Tanks (Not factory insulated):

a. Tanks less than 2’ diameter: Same material as pipe insulation: 2 inches thick, with

PVC jacket.

b. Tanks 2’ diameter and larger: Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: 2 inches thick.

5. Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers: Elastomeric Cellular Insulation, 1 inch thick.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 07 19

HYDRONIC PIPING INSULATION

PAGE 1 OF 5



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

SECTION 23 07 19 - HYDRONIC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Glass Fiber insulation.

2. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation

3. Jackets

B. Related Sections

1. Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping, Valves and Accessories: Placement of hangers and

hanger inserts.


A. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003.

B. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2007.

C. ASTM C 177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal

Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2004.

D. ASTM C 195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement; 2007.

E. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by

Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2004.

F. ASTM C 534/C 534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular

Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2008.

G. ASTM C 547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2007.

H. ASTM C 585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for

Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System); 2009.

I. ASTM C 591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate

Thermal Insulation; 2009.

J. ASTM C 795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic

Stainless Steel; 2008.

K. ASTM D 2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2006.

L. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2010.

M. ASTM E 96/E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005.

N. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

National Fire Protection Association; 2006.

O. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 COORDINATION


1.5 SUBMITTALS

SECTION 23 07 19


PAGE 2 OF 5



A/E PROJECT 5-4749


B. Product Data: Provide data on insulation materials, jackets, and accessories.


A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this

section with minimum three (3) years of experience.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION

A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum,


2.2 GLASS FIBER

A. Manufacturers:

1. Knauf Insulation.

2. Johns Manville Corporation; Model Micro-Lok 850AP or AP-T.

3. Owens Corning Corporation.

4. CertainTeed Corporation.

B. Insulation: ASTM C 547 and ASTM C 795; rigid molded, noncombustible.

1. 'K' value: ASTM C 177, 0.23 at 75 degrees F.

2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F.

3. Maximum moisture absorption: <5% by weight.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film;

moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M of 0.02 perm-

inches.

D. Insulating Cement/Mastic: ASTM C 195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

2.3 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION

A. Manufacturer: Armacell International; Model AP Armaflex.

B. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C

534 Grade 3; use molded tubular material wherever possible.



3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.

4. R value: 4.2 per inch.

C. Insulation Type and Joints:

1. Use AP Armaflex black lapseal with self-sealing longitudinal seams.

2. Use continuous AP Armaflex tubes for underground, in slab, or inside wall applications.

D. Exterior Finish: For exterior applications use ArmaTuff sheet insulation with laminated metal

jacket or apply two (2) coats of WB Armaflex finish.

2.4 JACKETS

A. PVC Plastic.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Johns Manville Corporation, Zeston 2000 Series white PVC.

b. Proto Corporation.

SECTION 23 07 19


PAGE 3 OF 5



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.

a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F.

b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.

c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance

with ASTM E 96/E 96M.

d. Thickness: 20 mil.

e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.

B. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) formed aluminum sheet.

1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet.

2. Finish: Smooth.

3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.

4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.

5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature, including but not necessarily

limited to cold domestic water, condensate, chilled water, and storm water: Insulate entire

system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies,

and expansion joints.

1. For pipes and other specialties, use oversized hangers to allow the insulation to pass

through the hanger without cutting or piercing. Maintain a continuous vapor barrier.

C. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:

1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing

longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material, thickness, and density as

adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

D. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:

1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied.

Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive.

Secure with outward clinch expanding staples.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material, thickness, and density as

adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

E. Do not use loose batt insulation under fitting covers. Use preformed fitting insulation or mitered

insulation of like material, thickness, and density as adjacent pipe.

F. Inserts and Shields:

1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger.

2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.

3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.

4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining

insulation; may be factory fabricated.

5. Insert material for hot services: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density

insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range.

SECTION 23 07 19


PAGE 4 OF 5



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

6. Insert material for cold services: High density polyisocyanurate insulating material or other

heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. Use ITW

Insulation Systems 4000 or equivalent for unconditioned spaces such as mechanical

rooms.

G. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at

supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 07 84 13.

H. When covering is terminated at equipment, specialties, or access doors; or where jackets are

pierced by metal parts such as thermometers or pressure gauges, covering material shall be

neatly tapered and jacket securely sealed to pipe or other metal part.

I. Exterior Applications: If Armaflex insulation for exterior applications, use ArmaTuff with

laminated vinyl jacket or apply Armacell WB finish.

J. If exterior piping is heat traced, install insulation after tracing is installed and tested. Contractor

shall install heat trace warning labels (provided with tracing) on insulation jacket.

3.2 SCHEDULES

A. Insulation Schedule for HVAC piping (Thickness per ASHRAE 90.1-2013, Table 6.8.3-1):

1. Hot water heating (105-140°F)

a. Type: Fiberglass

b. Pipe Size: Thru 1.1/4" – Thickness:1"

c. Pipe Size: 1.1/2" & larger – Thickness: 1.1/2"

2. Hot water heating (141-200°F)

a. Type: Fiberglass

b. Pipe Size: Thru 1.1/4" - Thickness: 1.1/2"

c. Pipe Size: 1.1/2" & larger – Thickness: 2"

3. Chilled water cooling (<50°F) conditioned spaces

a. Type: Fiberglass

b. Pipe Size: Thru 2.1/2"-Thickness: 1.1/2"

c. Pipe Size: 3" - 4" – Thickness: 2"

d. Pipe Size: 5" & larger – Thickness: 3"

4. Chilled water cooling in unconditioned Mechanical Rooms & other spaces

a. Type: Polyisocyanurate or Elas-Cellular

b. Pipe Size: Thru 2.1/2" – Thickness: 1"

c. Pipe Size: 3" & larger – Thickness: 1.1/2"

5. Cooling tower water

a. Type: Fiberglass

b. Pipe Size: Thru 6" – Thickness: 1"


6. Snowmelt

a. Type: Fiberglass

b. Pipe Size: Thru 1.1/2" – Thickness: 1"


7. HVAC Steam 15 psig & under saturated (212-250°F)

a. Type: Fiberglass

SECTION 23 07 19


PAGE 5 OF 5



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

b. Pipe Size: Thru 3" – Thickness: 2.1/2"

c. Pipe Size: 4" & larger – Thickness: 3"

8. HVAC Steam 16-120 psig saturated (251-350°F)

a. Type: Fiberglass

b. Pipe Size: Thru 3/4" – Thickness: 3"

c. Pipe Size: 1" – 1.1/4" – Thickness: 4"

d. Pipe Size: 1.1/2" & larger – Thickness: 4.5"

9. HVAC Steam 121 psig & higher (>350°F)

a. Type: Fiberglass

b. Pipe Size: Thru 3/4" – Thickness: 4.5"


10. Boiler Feed & steam condensate (201-250°F)

a. Type: Fiberglass

b. Pipe Size: Thru 3" – Thickness: 2.1/2"


11. Refrigeration suction lines

a. Type: Elas-Cellular

b. Pipe Size: All – Thickness:1"

B. Exterior refrigerant suction and hot gas piping shall be insulated with flexible elastomeric foam

insulation, manufactured in accordance with ASTM C-534, Type I (tubing), Type II (sheets), and

shall have a flame and smoke rating of 25/50. Thickness shall be one inch unless otherwise

noted. Exposed exterior insulation shall be painted with 2 coats of finish adhesive, WB

Armaflex or Rubatex R-373 adhesive. Approved manufacturers are Armaflex, Aerocel, and

Rubatex. NOTE: Joints in horizontal piping shall be on the bottom of the piping to minimize

leak potential from rain.

C. Piping inside fintube radiation covers shall be insulated with ½” fiberglass pipe insulation.

D. Jackets:

1. All exposed insulated piping passing through finished areas and within 10 feet of floor in

unoccupied spaces (e.g., in mechanical rooms) shall be covered with 0.020” PVC jacket.

Kitchen areas and wash down areas shall be sealed vapor and watertight.

2. All exterior piping and steam piping shall have waterproof 0.016 thick aluminum jacket with

Z-joint longitudinal seam closure and factory supplied butt straps. Use preformed aluminum

fitting covers. Seal vapor and watertight.

3. All exterior piping shall have PVC jacket, sealed vapor and watertight.

E. Jackets:

1. All exposed interior insulated piping, except steam & condensate, shall be covered

with 0.020” thick PVC jacket and preformed fittings and valve covers. Piping jacket shall

be sealed vapor and watertight.

2. All exterior insulated piping, except steam & condensate, shall be covered with 0.020”

thick PVC jacket, UV resistant and preformed fittings and valve covers. Exterior piping

jacket shall be sealed vapor and watertight.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 08 00

COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

PAGE 1 OF 6



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

SECTION 23 08 00 - COMMISSIONING OF HVAC


PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. See Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements for overall objectives; comply

with the requirements of Section 01 91 13.

B. This section covers the Contractor's responsibilities for commissioning; each subcontractor or

installer responsible for the installation of a particular system or equipment item to be

commissioned is responsible for the commissioning activities relating to that system or

equipment item.

C. The Commissioning Authority (CA) directs and coordinates all commissioning activities and

provides Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test Procedures for Contractor's use.

D. The entire HVAC system is to be commissioned, including commissioning activities for the

following specific items:

1. Control system.

2. Major and minor equipment items.

3. Piping systems and equipment.

4. Ductwork and accessories.

5. Terminal units.

6. Other equipment and systems explicitly identified elsewhere in Contract Documents as

requiring commissioning.

E. The Prefunctional Checklist and Functional Test requirements specified in this section are in

addition to, not a substitute for, inspection or testing specified in other sections.

F. Related Sections

1. Section 01 91 13 – General Commissioning Requirements.

2. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.

3. Section 23 09 13 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC.

4. Section 23 09 23 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC.

5. Section 23 09 93 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls.

1.3 COORDINATION


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. HVAC Control System Documentation: Submit detailed sequences of operation, control system

drawings, and points list, as specified in Sections 23 09 93.

SECTION 23 08 00


PAGE 2 OF 6



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

1. Incorporate the sequence of operation information specified in other HVAC specification

sections.

2. Incorporate the shop drawing submittal information specified in the HVAC control system

section.

3. Submittals prepared for other sections may be used in preparation of this documentation.

C. Updated Submittals: Keep the Commissioning Authority informed of all changes to control

system documentation made during programming and setup; revise and resubmit when

substantial changes are made.

D. Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test Procedures for Control System: Detailed written

plan indicating the procedures to be followed to test, checkout and adjust the control system

prior to full system Functional Testing; include at least the following for each type of equipment

controlled:

1. System name.

2. List of devices.

3. Step-by-step procedures for testing each controller after installation, including:

a. Process of verifying proper hardware and wiring installation.

b. Process of downloading programs to local controllers and verifying that they are

addressed correctly.

c. Process of performing operational checks of each controlled component.

d. Plan and process for calibrating valve and damper actuators and all sensors.

e. Description of the expected field adjustments for transmitters, controllers and control

actuators should control responses fall outside of expected values.

4. Copy of proposed log and field checkout sheets to be used to document the process;

include space for initial and final read values during calibration of each point and space to

specifically indicate when a sensor or controller has “passed” and is operating within the

contract parameters.

5. Description of the instrumentation required for testing.

6. Indicate what tests on what systems should be completed prior to TAB using the control

system for TAB work. Coordinate with the Commissioning Authority and TAB contractor

for this determination.

E. Startup Reports, Prefunctional Checklists, and Trend Logs: Submit for approval of

Commissioning Authority.

F. HVAC Control System O&M Manual Requirements. In addition to documentation specified

elsewhere, compile and organize at minimum the following data on the control system:

1. Specific step-by-step instructions on how to perform and apply all functions, features,

modes, etc. mentioned in the controls training sections of this specification and other

features of this system. Provide an index and clear table of contents. Include the detailed

technical manual for programming and customizing control loops and algorithms.

2. Full record set of control drawings.

3. Full record sequence of operations for each piece of equipment.

SECTION 23 08 00


PAGE 3 OF 6



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

4. Full points list; in addition to the information on the original points list submittal, include a

listing of all rooms with the following information for each room:

a. Floor.

b. Room number.

c. Room name.

d. Air handler unit ID.

e. Reference drawing number.

f. Air terminal unit tag ID.

g. Heating and/or cooling valve tag ID.

h. Minimum air flow rate.

i. Maximum air flow rate.

5. Full print out of all schedules and set points after testing and acceptance of the system.

6. Full record print out of software program.

7. Electronic copy on disk of the entire program for this facility.

8. Marking of all system sensors and thermostats on the record floor plan and HVAC

drawings with their control system designations.

9. Maintenance instructions, including sensor calibration requirements and methods by

sensor type, etc.

10. Control equipment component submittals, parts lists, etc.

11. Warranty requirements.

12. Copies of all checkout tests and calibrations performed by the Contractor (not

commissioning tests).

13. Organize and subdivide the manual with permanently labeled tabs for each of the following

data in the given order:

a. Sequences of operation.

b. Control drawings.

c. Points lists.

d. Controller and/or module data.

e. Thermostats and timers.

f. Sensors and DP switches.

g. Valves and valve actuators.

h. Dampers and damper actuators.

i. Program setups (software program printouts).

G. Project Record Documents:

1. Submit updated version of control system documentation, for inclusion with operation and

maintenance data.

2. Show actual locations of all static and differential pressure sensors (air, water and building

pressure) and air-flow stations on project record drawings.

SECTION 23 08 00


PAGE 4 OF 6



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

H. Draft Training Plan:

1. Follow the recommendations of ASHRAE Guideline 1.

2. Control system manufacturer's recommended training.

3. Demonstration and instruction on function and overrides of any local packaged controls not

controlled by the HVAC control system.

I. Training Manuals:

1. Provide three extra copies of the controls training manuals in a separate manual from the

O&M manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Provide all standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and

required functional performance testing; unless otherwise noted such testing equipment will

NOT become the property of Owner.

B. Equipment-Specific Tools: Where special testing equipment, tools and instruments are specific

to a piece of equipment, are only available from the vendor, and are required in order to

accomplish startup or Functional Testing, provide such equipment, tools, and instruments as

part of the work at no extra cost to Owner; such equipment, tools, and instruments are to

become the property of Owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Cooperate with the Commissioning Authority in development of the Prefunctional Checklists and

Functional Test Procedures.

B. Furnish additional information requested by the Commissioning Authority.

C. Prepare a preliminary schedule for HVAC pipe and duct system testing, flushing and cleaning,

equipment start-up and testing, adjusting, and balancing start and completion for use by the

Commissioning Authority; update the schedule as appropriate.

D. Notify the Commissioning Authority when pipe and duct system testing, flushing, cleaning,

startup of each piece of equipment and testing, adjusting, and balancing will occur; when

commissioning activities not yet performed or not yet scheduled will delay construction notify

ahead of time and be proactive in seeing that the Commissioning Authority has the scheduling

information needed to efficiently execute the commissioning process.

E. Put all HVAC equipment and systems into operation and continue operation during each

working day of testing, adjusting, and balancing and commissioning, as required.

F. Provide test holes in ducts and plenums where directed to allow air measurements and air

balancing; close with an approved plug.

G. Provide temperature and pressure taps in accordance with the contract documents.

3.2 INSPECTING AND TESTING - GENERAL

A. Submit startup plans, startup reports, and Prefunctional Checklists for each item of equipment

or other assembly to be commissioned.

B. Perform the Functional Tests directed by the Commissioning Authority for each item of

equipment or other assembly to be commissioned.

SECTION 23 08 00


PAGE 5 OF 6



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

C. Provide two-way radios for use during the testing.

D. Valve/Damper Stroke Setup and Check:

1. For 10 percent of the valve/damper actuator positions checked, verify the actual position

against the control system readout (as noted in the following paragraphs) if any of those

fail, sample another 10 percent; if any of those fail, test all remaining valve/damper

actuators at no extra cost to Owner.

2. Set pump/fan to normal operating mode.

3. Command valve/damper closed; visually verify that valve/damper is closed and adjust

output zero signal as required.

4. Command valve/damper open; verify position is full open and adjust output signal as

required.

5. Command valve/damper to a few intermediate positions.

6. If actual valve/damper position does not reasonably correspond, replace actuator.

E. Deficiencies: Correct deficiencies and re-inspect or re-test, as applicable, at no extra cost to

Owner.

3.3 TAB COORDINATION

A. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing of HVAC.

B. Have all required Prefunctional Checklists, calibrations and startup of the system completed and

approved by the Commissioning Authority prior to starting TAB.

3.4 CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL TESTING

A. Prefunctional Checklists for control system components will require a signed and dated

certification that all system programming is complete as required to accomplish the

requirements of the Contract Documents and the detailed Sequences of Operation

documentation submittal.

B. Do not start Functional Testing until all controlled components have themselves been

successfully Functionally Tested in accordance with the contract documents.

C. Using a skilled technician who is familiar with this building, execute the Functional Testing of the

control system as required by the Commissioning Authority.

D. Functional Testing of the control system constitutes demonstration and trend logging of control

points monitored by the control system.

1. The scope of trend logging is partially specified; trend log up to 50 percent more points

than specified at no extra cost to Owner.

2. Perform all trend logging specified in Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test

procedures.

E. Functionally Test integral or stand-alone controls in conjunction with the Functional Tests of the

equipment they are attached to, including any interlocks with other equipment or systems;

further testing during control system Functional Test is not required unless specifically indicated

below.

F. Demonstrate the following to the Commissioning Authority during testing of controlled

equipment; coordinate with commissioning of equipment.

1. Setpoint changing features and functions.

SECTION 23 08 00


PAGE 6 OF 6



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

2. Sensor calibrations.

G. Demonstrate to the Commissioning Authority:

1. That all specified functions and features are set up, debugged and fully operable.

2. That scheduling features are fully functional and setup, including holidays.

3. That all graphic screens and value readouts are completed.

4. Correct date and time setting in central computer.

5. That field panels read the same time as the central computer; sample 10 percent of field

panels; if any of those fail, sample another 10 percent; if any of those fail, test all remaining

units at no extra cost to Owner.

6. Functionality of field panels using local operator keypads and local ports (plug-ins) using

portable computer/keypad; demonstrate 100 percent of panels and 10 percent of ports; if

any ports fail, sample another 10 percent; if any of those fail, test all remaining units at no

extra cost to Owner.

7. Power failure and battery backup and power-up restart functions.

8. Global commands features.

9. Security and access codes.

10. Occupant over-rides (manual, telephone, key, keypad, etc.).

11. O&M schedules and alarms.

12. Occupancy sensors and controls.

13. All control strategies and sequences not tested during controlled equipment testing.

H. If the control system, integral control components, or related equipment do not respond to

changing conditions and parameters appropriately as expected, as specified and according to

acceptable operating practice, under any of the conditions, sequences, or modes tested, correct

all systems, equipment, components, and software required at no additional cost to Owner.

3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Commissioning Authority will add commissioning records to manuals after submission to

Owner.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of HVAC system to Owner' personnel; if during any

demonstration, the system fails to perform in accordance with the information included in the

O&M manual, stop demonstration, repair or adjust, and repeat demonstration. Demonstrations

may be combined with training sessions if appropriate.

B. These demonstrations are in addition to, and not a substitute for, Prefunctional Checklists and

demonstrations to the Commissioning Authority during Functional Testing.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 09 13

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC

PAGE 1 OF 53


SECTION 23 09 13 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARAY

A. Section Includes

1. Sensors.

2. Control valves.

3. Control dampers.

4. Damper operators.

5. Miscellaneous accessories.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 23 09 23 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC.


3. Section 26 05 83 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cv: Design valve coefficient.

B. DDC: Direct-digital control.

C. NBR: Nitrile butadiene rubber.

D. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene

E. RMS: Root-mean-square value of alternating voltage, which is the square root of the mean value of the square of the voltage values during a complete cycle.

F. Ethernet: Local area network based on IEEE 802.3 standards.

G. HART: Highway addressable remote transducer protocol is the global standard for sending and receiving digital information across analog wires between smart devices and control or monitoring systems through bi-directional communication that provides data access between intelligent field instruments and host systems. A host can be any software application from technician's hand-held device or laptop to a plant's process control, asset management, safety, or other system using any control platform.

H. PEEK: polyetheretherketone.

I. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene.

J. PPS: Polyphenylene sulfide.

K. RS-485: A TIA standard for multipoint communications using two twisted pairs.

L. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.

M. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet protocol incorporated into Microsoft Windows.

1.4 COORDINATION

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 2 OF 53



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product, including the following:

1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

2. Operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories indicating process operating range, accuracy over range, control signal over range, default control signal with loss of power, calibration data specific to each unique application, electrical power requirements, and limitations of ambient operating environment, including temperature and humidity.

3. Product description with complete technical data, performance curves, and product specification sheets.

4. Installation, operation, and maintenance instructions, including factors affecting performance.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For control valves to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. All valves shall be provided and sized by the ATC Contractor and be adequate to meet the needs of the application. Sizing is subject to Engineer's approval. Valves shall be delivered to the HVAC Contractor for installation.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency (e.g. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.), and marked for intended location and application.

C. Determine control valve sizes and flow coefficients by ISA 75.01.01.

D. Control valve characteristics and rangeability shall comply with ISA 75.11.01.

E. Environmental Conditions:

1. Provide electric control actuators, with protective enclosures satisfying the following minimum requirements unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Electric control actuators not available with integral enclosures, complying with requirements indicated, shall be housed in protective secondary enclosures.

a. Hazardous Locations: Explosion-proof rating for condition.

2. Instruments shall operate without performance degradation under the ambient environmental temperature, pressure, humidity, and vibration conditions specified and encountered for installed location.

a. If instrument alone cannot meet requirement, install instrument in a protective enclosure that is isolated and protected from conditions impacting performance. Enclosure shall be internally insulated, electrically heated and cooled, filtered, and ventilated as required by instrument and application.

3. Instruments and accessories shall be protected with enclosures satisfying the following minimum requirements unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Instruments not available with integral enclosures complying with requirements indicated shall be housed in

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 3 OF 53


protective secondary enclosures. Instrument's installed location shall dictate following NEMA 250 enclosure requirements:

a. Outdoors, Protected: Type 12.

b. Outdoors and Washdown Areas, Unprotected: Type 4X.

c. Indoors, Heated and Air Conditioned: Type 1.

d. Mechanical Equipment Rooms:

1) Chiller and Boiler Rooms: Type 4.

2) Air-Moving Equipment Rooms: Type 2.

F. Selection Criteria:

1. Control valve shutoff classifications shall be FCI 70-2, Class IV or better unless otherwise indicated.

2. Valve pattern, three-way or straight through, shall be as indicated on Drawings.

3. Modulating straight-through pattern control valves shall have equal percentage flow-throttling characteristics unless otherwise indicated.

4. Modulating three-way pattern water valves shall have linear flow-throttling characteristics. The total flow through the valve shall remain constant regardless of the valve's position.

5. Modulating butterfly valves shall have linear flow-throttling characteristics.

6. Fail positions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Chilled Water Valve: Closed.

b. Heating Hot Water Valve: Open.

c. Supply Air Damper: Last position.

d. Return Air Damper: Last position.

e. Outdoor Air Damper: Close.

f. Exhaust Air Damper: Close.

7. Globe-type control valves shall pass the design flow required with not more than 95 percent of stem lift unless otherwise indicated.

8. Rotary-type control valves, such as ball and butterfly valves, shall have Cv falling between 65 and 75 degrees of valve full open position and minimum valve Cv between 15 and 25 percent of open position.

9. Control Valve Selection shall consider viscosity, flashing, and cavitation corrections.

10. Valves shall have stable operation throughout full range of operation, from design to minimum Cv.

11. Minimum Cv shall be calculated at 10 percent of design flow, with a coincident pressure differential equal to the system design pump head.

12. In water systems, select modulating control valves at terminal equipment for a design Cv based on a pressure drop of 5 psig at design flow unless otherwise indicated.

13. Two-position control valves shall be line size unless otherwise indicated.

14. In water systems, use ball- or globe-style control valves for two-position control for valves NPS 2 and smaller and butterfly style for valves larger than NPS 2.

15. Dampers shall have stable operation throughout full range of operation, from design to minimum airflow over varying pressures and temperatures encountered.

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 4 OF 53


16. Select modulating dampers for a pressure drop of 2 percent of fan total static pressure unless otherwise indicated.

17. Two-position dampers shall be full size of duct or equipment connection unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 BALL-STYLE CONTROL VALVES

A. Ball Valves with Single Port or Two Ports and Characterized Disk:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.

b. Griswold.

c. Johnson Controls Inc.

2. Pressure Rating for NPS 1 and Smaller: Nominal 600 WOG.

3. Pressure Rating for NPS 1-1/2 through NPS 3: Nominal 400 WOG.

4. Close-off Pressure: 200 psig.

5. Process Temperature Range: Zero to 212 deg F.

6. Body and Tail Piece: Cast bronze ASTM B 61, ASTM B 62, ASTM B 584, or forged brass with nickel plating.

7. End Connections: Threaded (NPT) ends.

8. Ball: 300 series stainless steel.

9. Stem and Stem Extension:

a. Material to match ball.

b. Blowout-proof design.

c. Sleeve or other approved means to allow valve to be opened and closed without damaging the insulation or the vapor barrier seal.

10. Ball Seats: Reinforced PTFE.

11. Stem Seal: Reinforced PTFE packing ring with a threaded packing ring follower to retain the packing ring under design pressure with the linkage removed. Alternative means, such as EPDM O-rings, are acceptable if an equivalent cycle endurance can be demonstrated by testing.

2.3 BUTTERFLY-STYLE CONTROL VALVES

A. Commercial-Grade, Two-Way and Three-Way Butterfly Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Keystone; Tyco Flow Control.

b. Honeywell.

c. Johnson Controls, Inc.

d. Siemens.

2. Performance:

a. Bi-directional bubble tight shutoff at 250 psig.

b. Comply with MSS SP-67 or MSS SP-68.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=9647

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123456944534




SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 5 OF 53


c. Rotation: Zero to 90 degrees.

d. Linear or modified equal percentage flow characteristic.

3. Body: Cast iron ASTM A 126, Class B, ductile iron ASTM A 536 or cast steel ASTM A 216/A 216M WCB fully lugged, suitable for mating to ASME B16.5 flanges.

4. Disc: 316 stainless steel.

5. Shaft: 316 or 17-4 PH stainless steel.

6. Seat: Reinforced EPDM or reinforced PTFE with retaining ring.

7. Shaft Bushings: Reinforced PTFE or stainless steel.

8. Replaceable seat, disc, and shaft bushings.

9. Corrosion-resistant nameplate indicating:

a. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

b. Body size.

c. Body and trim materials.

d. Flow arrow.

2.4 SOLENOID VALVES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. ASCO Valve, Inc.

B. Description:

1. Action: Either normally open or normally closed in the event of electrical power failure as required by the application.

2. Size to close against the system pressure.

3. Manual override capable.

4. Heavy-duty assembly.

5. Body: Brass.

6. Seats and Discs: NBR or PTFE.

7. Solenoid Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4.

2.5 RECTANGULAR CONTROL DAMPERS

A. General Requirements:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, use parallel blade configuration for two-position control, equipment isolation service, and when mixing two airstreams. For other applications, use opposed blade configuration.

2. Factory assemble multiple damper sections to provide a single damper assembly of size required by the application.

B. Rectangular Dampers with Aluminum Airfoil Blades:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Ruskin Company.

2. Performance:





SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 6 OF 53


a. Leakage: AMCA 511, Class 1A. Leakage shall not exceed 3 cfm/sq. ft. against 1-in. wg differential static pressure.

b. Pressure Drop: 0.05-in. wg at 1500 fpm across a 24-by-24-inch damper when tested according to AMCA 500-D, figure 5.3.

c. Velocity: Up to 6000 fpm.

d. Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.

e. Pressure Rating: Damper close-off pressure equal to fan shutoff pressure with a maximum blade deflection of 1/200 of blade length.

f. Damper shall have AMCA seal for both air leakage and air performance.

3. Construction:

a. Frame:

1) Material: ASTM B 211, Alloy 6063 T5 extruded-aluminum profiles, 0.07 inch thick.

2) Hat-shaped channel with integral flange(s). Mating face shall be a minimum of 1 inch.

3) Width not less than 5 inches.

b. Blades:

1) Hollow, airfoil, extruded aluminum.

2) Parallel or opposed blade configuration as required by application.

3) Material: ASTM B 211, Alloy 6063 T5 aluminum, 0.07 inch thick.

4) Width not to exceed 6 inches.

5) Length as required by close-off pressure, not to exceed 48 inches.

c. Seals:

1) Blades: Replaceable, mechanically attached extruded silicone, vinyl, or plastic composite.

2) Jambs: Stainless steel, compression type.

d. Axles: 0.5-inch-diameter stainless steel, mechanically attached to blades.

e. Bearings:

1) Molded synthetic or stainless-steel sleeve mounted in frame.

2) Where blade axles are installed in vertical position, provide thrust bearings.

f. Linkage:

1) Concealed in frame.

2) Constructed of aluminum and stainless steel.

3) Hardware: Stainless steel.

g. Transition:

1) For round and flat oval duct applications, provide damper assembly with integral transitions to mate to adjoining field connection.

2) Factory mount damper in a sleeve with a close transition to mate to field connection.

3) Damper size and sleeve shall be connection size plus 2 inches.

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 7 OF 53


4) Sleeve length shall be not less than 12 inches for dampers without jackshafts and shall be not less than 16 inches for dampers with jackshafts.

5) Sleeve material shall match adjacent duct.

h. Additional Corrosion Protection for Corrosive Environments:

1) Provide anodized finish for aluminum surfaces in contact with airstream. Anodized finish shall be a minimum of 0.0007 inch thick.

2) Axles, damper linkage, and hardware shall be constructed of Type 316L stainless steel.

4. Airflow Control:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1) Ruskin Company.

b. Where indicated, provide damper assembly with integral airflow measurement and control.

c. A factory-furnished and -calibrated controller shall be programmed, in nonvolatile EPROM, with application-specific airflow set point and range.

d. The controller and actuator shall communicate to control the desired airflow.

e. The controller shall receive a zero- to 10-V dc input signal and report a zero- to 20-mA output signal that is proportional to the airflow.

f. Airflow measurement and control range shall be suitable for operation between 150 to 2000 fpm.

g. Ambient Operating Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 140 deg F.

h. Ambient Operating Humidity Range: 5 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.

i. Provide unit with control transformer rated for not less than 85 VA. Provide transformer with primary and secondary protection and primary disconnecting means. Coordinate requirements with field power connection.

j. Provide screw terminals for interface to field wiring.

k. Factory mount electronics within a NEMA 250, Type 1 painted steel enclosure.

2.6 ROUND CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Round Dampers, Sleeve Type:


a. Ruskin Company.

2. Performance:

a. Leakage: Leakage shall not exceed 0.15 cfm/in. of perimeter blade at 4-in. wg differential static pressure.

b. Pressure Drop: 0.02-in. wg at 1500 fpm across a 12-inch damper when tested according to AMCA 500-D, figure 5.3.

c. Velocity: Up to 4000 fpm.





SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 8 OF 53


d. Temperature: Minus 25 to plus 200 deg F.

e. Pressure Rating: 8-in. wg for sizes through 12 inches, 6-in. wg for larger sizes.

3. Construction:

a. Frame:

1) Material: Galvanized steel, 0.04 in thick.

2) Outward rolled stiffener beads positioned approximately 1 inch inboard of each end.

3) Sleeve-type connection for mating to adjacent ductwork.

4) Size Range: 4 to 24 inches.

5) Length not less than 7 inches.

6) Provide 2-inch sheet metal stand-off for mounting actuator.

b. Blade: Double-thickness circular flat blades sandwiched together and constructed of galvanized steel.

c. Blade Seal: Polyethylene foam seal sandwiched between two sides of blades and fully encompassing blade edge.

d. Axle: 0.5-inch-diameter stainless steel, mechanically attached to blade.

e. Bearings: Stainless-steel sleeve pressed into frame.

2.7 GENERAL CONTROL-VALVE ACTUATORS REQUIREMENTS


1. Johnson 4233.

B. Actuators for Hydronic Control Valves: Capable of closing valve against system pump shutoff head.

C. Control Valve Position indicator and graduated scale on each actuator.

2.8 GENERAL CONTROL-DAMPER ACTUATORS REQUIREMENTS


1. Belimo SR24.

B. Actuators shall operate related damper(s) with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action and proper speed of response at velocity and pressure conditions to which the damper is subjected.

C. Actuators shall produce sufficient power and torque to close off against the maximum system pressures encountered. Actuators shall be sized to close off against the fan shutoff pressure as a minimum requirement.

D. The total damper area operated by an actuator shall not exceed 80 percent of manufacturer's maximum area rating.

E. Provide one actuator for each damper assembly where possible. Multiple actuators required to drive a single damper assembly shall operate in unison.

F. Avoid the use of excessively oversized actuators which could overdrive and cause linkage failure when the damper blade has reached either its full open or closed position.

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 9 OF 53


G. Use jackshafts and shaft couplings in lieu of blade-to-blade linkages when driving axially aligned damper sections.

H. Provide mounting hardware and linkages for connecting actuator to damper.

I. Select actuators to fail in desired position in the event of a power failure.

2.9 ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC ACTUATORS

A. Type: Motor operated, with or without gears, electric and electronic.

B. Voltage: Voltage selection delegated to installing professional designing control system.

C. Deliver torque required for continuous uniform movement of controlled device from limit to limit when operated at rated voltage.

D. Function properly within a range of 85 to 120 percent of nameplate voltage.

E. Construction:

1. For Actuators Less Than 100 W: Fiber or reinforced nylon gears with steel shaft, copper alloy or nylon bearings, and pressed steel enclosures.

2. For Actuators from 100 to 400 W: Gears ground steel, oil immersed, shaft hardened steel running in bronze, copper alloy or ball bearings. Operator and gear trains shall be totally enclosed in dustproof cast-iron, cast-steel or cast-aluminum housing.

3. For Actuators Larger Than 400 W: Totally enclosed reversible induction motors with auxiliary hand crank and permanently lubricated bearings.

F. Field Adjustment:

1. Spring Return Actuators: Easily switchable from fail open to fail closed in the field without replacement.

2. Gear Type Actuators: External manual adjustment mechanism to allow manual positioning when the actuator is not powered.

G. Two-Position Actuators: Single direction, spring return or reversing type.

H. Modulating Actuators:

1. Operation: Capable of stopping at all points across full range, and starting in either direction from any point in range.

2. Control Input Signal:

a. Proportional: Actuator drives proportional to input signal and modulates throughout its angle of rotation. Suitable for zero- to 10-V dc and 4- to 20-mA signals.

I. Position Feedback:

1. Where indicated, equip actuators with a position feedback through current or voltage signal for remote monitoring.

2. Provide a position indicator and graduated scale on each actuator indicating open and closed travel limits.

J. Fail-Safe:

1. Where indicated, provide actuator to fail to an end position.

2. Internal spring return mechanism to drive controlled device to an end position (open or close) on loss of power.

3. Batteries, capacitors, and other non-mechanical forms of fail-safe operation are acceptable only where uniquely indicated.

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 10 OF 53


K. Integral Overload Protection:

1. Provide against overload throughout the entire operating range in both directions.

2. Electronic overload, digital rotation sensing circuitry, mechanical end switches, or magnetic clutches are acceptable methods of protection.

L. Valve Attachment:

1. Unless otherwise required for valve interface, provide an actuator designed to be directly coupled to valve shaft without the need for connecting linkages.

2. Attach actuator to valve drive shaft in a way that ensures maximum transfer of power and torque without slippage.

3. Bolt and set screw method of attachment is acceptable only if provided with at least two points of attachment.

M. Temperature and Humidity:

1. Temperature: Suitable for operating temperature range encountered by application with minimum operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 120 deg F.

2. Humidity: Suitable for humidity range encountered by application; minimum operating range shall be from 5 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.

N. Enclosure:

1. Suitable for ambient conditions encountered by application.

2. NEMA 250, Type 2 for indoor and protected applications.

3. NEMA 250, Type 4 or Type 4X for outdoor and unprotected applications.

4. Provide actuator enclosure with heater and control where required by application.

O. Stroke Time:

1. Operate valve from fully closed to fully open within 90 seconds.

2. Operate valve from fully open to fully closed within 60 seconds.

3. Move valve to failed position within 15 seconds.

4. Select operating speed to be compatible with equipment and system operation.

P. Sound:

1. Spring Return: 62 dBA.

2. Non-Spring Return: 45 dBA.

2.10 AIR TEMPERATURE SENSORS

A. Thermal Resistors (Thermistors): Common Requirements:

1. 10,000 ohms at 25 deg C and a temperature coefficient of 23.5 ohms/ohm/deg C.

2. Two-wire, PTFE-insulated, 22-gage stranded copper leads.

3. Performance Characteristics:

a. Range: Minus 50 to 275 deg F.

b. Interchangeable Accuracy: At 77 deg F within 0.5 deg F.

c. Repeatability: Within 0.5 deg F.

d. Drift: Within 0.5 deg F over 10 years.

e. Self-Heating: Negligible.

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 11 OF 53


4. Transmitter optional, contingent on compliance with end-to-end control accuracy.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Automation Components, Inc.

2. Minco.

C. Thermistor Space Air Temperature Sensors:

1. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to 212 deg F

2. Provide a mounting plate that is compatible with the surface shape that it is mounted to and electrical box used.

3. Concealed wiring connection.

4. Sensor assembly shall include a temperature sensing element mounted under a bright white, non-yellowing, plastic cover.

5. For offices and conference rooms only, provide sensor with local control.

a. Local override to turn HVAC on.

b. Local adjustment of temperature set point.

c. Both features shall be capable of manual override through control system operator.

6. Public Spaces (i.e. corridors, toilet rooms, locker rooms, and gymnasium): Sensor assembly shall include a temperature sensing element mounted under a flush, brushed-stainless steel wall plate cover.

D. Thermistor, Single-Point Duct Air Temperature Sensors:


2. Probe: Single-point sensor with a stainless-steel sheath.

3. Length: As required by application to achieve tip at midpoint of air tunnel, up to 18 inches.

4. Enclosure: Junction box with removable cover; NEMA 250, Type 1 for indoor applications and Type 4 for outdoor applications.

5. Gasket for attachment to duct or equipment to seal penetration airtight.

6. Conduit Connection: 1/2- inch trade size.

E. Thermistor Averaging Air Temperature Sensors:


2. Multiple sensors to provide average temperature across entire length of sensor.

3. Rigid probe of aluminum, brass, copper, or stainless-steel sheath.

4. Flexible probe of aluminum, brass, copper, or stainless-steel sheath and formable to a 4-inch radius.

5. Length: As required by application to cover entire cross section of air tunnel.

6. Enclosure: Junction box with removable cover; NEMA 250, Type 1 for indoor applications and Type 4 for outdoor applications.

7. Gasket for attachment to duct or equipment to seal penetration airtight.

8. Conduit Connection: 1/2-inch trade size.

F. Thermistor Outdoor Air Temperature Sensors:




SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 12 OF 53


2. Probe: Single-point sensor with a stainless-steel sheath.

3. Solar Shield: Stainless steel.

4. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4 or 4X junction box or combination conduit and outlet box with removable cover and gasket.

5. Conduit Connection: 1/2-inch trade size.

2.11 AIRFLOW MEASUREMENT STATIONS AND SENSORS

A. Performance Requirements:

1. Adjustable for changes in system operational parameters.

2. Airflow Sensor and Transmitter Range: Extended range of 20 percent above Project design flow and 20 percent below minimum Project flow to signal abnormal flow conditions.

3. Manufacturer shall certify that each flow instrument indicated complies with specified performance requirements and characteristics.

a. Product certificates are required.

B. Thermal Airflow Measurement Stations:

1. Common Performance Requirements:

a. Provide stations that are adjustable for changes in system operational parameters.

b. Manufacturer shall certify that each flow instrument indicated complies with specified performance requirements and characteristics.

c. Thermal airflow stations with one or more sensor nodes mounted in a probe, and a remotely mounted microprocessor-based transmitter at each measurement location.

d. Sensor Nodes: One self-heated and one zero-power bead-in-glass thermistor, using the principle of thermal dispersion.

e. Airflow Rate and Temperature of Each Sensor: Equally weighted and averaged by the transmitter prior to output.

f. Sensor-Node and Probe Assemblies:

1) Sensor-Node Construction: Two bead-in-glass, hermetically sealed thermistors potted in a marine-grade waterproof epoxy with sensor housings constructed of glass-filled polypropylene. Construct with only the thermistor located within the sensing node and all other electronic components outside the airstream. Epoxy- or glass-encapsulated chip thermistors or devices with exposed leads are not allowed. Devices that use epoxy- or glass-encapsulated chip thermistors, or electronics in the airstream, are unacceptable. Devices with exposed leads are unacceptable.

2) Store sensor-node airflow and temperature calibration data in a serial memory chip, in the cable connecting plug. Stored data does not require matching or adjustments to the transmitter in the field.

3) Sensing-Node Temperature Accuracy: Within 0.15 deg F over an operating range of minus 20 to plus 160 deg F and humidity range of 0 to 100 percent RH.

4) Sensor-Probe Mounting Bracket Construction: Type 304 stainless steel.

5) Internal Probe Wiring: Kynar-coated copper between the connecting cable and sensor nodes. PVC-jacketed wiring is unacceptable.

6) Internal Probe Wiring Connections: Solder joints and spot welds, sealed and protected from the elements, so that direct exposure to water will not affect

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 13 OF 53


instrument operation. Connectors within the probe, of any type, are unacceptable. Printed circuit boards within the probe are unacceptable.

7) Sensor-Probe Jacket: Integral, FEP jacket, plenum-rated CMP/CL2P, UL/cUL-listed cable, rated for exposures from minus 67 to plus 392 deg F, and for continuous and direct UV exposure. Plenum-rated PVC jacket cables are unacceptable.

8) Sensor-Probe Cable Connector Plug: Gold-plated pins for connection to the transmitter.

g. Transmitter Features and Functions:

1) High and/or low airflow alarm with user-defined set point and percent of set-point tolerance.

2) Manual or automatic alarm reset, and low-limit cutoff value may be selected to disable the alarm.

3) Alarm delay function, field defined.

4) Sensor-node malfunction via the system status alarm and ignore the sensor node that is in a fault condition.

5) Field configuration, diagnostics, and field output adjustment wizard that allow for a one- or two-point field adjustment to factory calibration for installations that require adjustment.

6) Automatic reset after power disruption, transients, and brown-outs through a watchdog timer circuit.

7) Operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 120 deg F and humidity range of 5 to 95 percent RH.

8) Electrical Power Requirement: 24 V ac (between 22.8 and 26.4 V ac under load) at 20 VA maximum, using a switching power supply that is overcurrent and overvoltage protected.

9) Printed Circuit Board Interconnects: Gold-plated edge fingers, receptacle plug pins, and printed circuit board test points.

10) Printed Circuit Boards: Electroless nickel immersion gold (ENIG) plated.

11) Integrated Circuitry: Temperature-rated, industrial-grade. Commercial-grade integrated circuitry is not acceptable.

12) Integration Buffers: Separate integration buffers for display of airflow output, airflow signal output (analog and network), and individual sensor output (IR-interface).

2. For Air-Ducted/Plenum:

a. Airflow Station Performance:

1) Independent processing of up to 16 separately wired sensor-node assemblies.

2) Accuracy: Within 3 percent of reading for ducted applications, and within 5 percent of reading for non-ducted applications, when installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommended placement guidelines. Include the combined uncertainty of the sensor nodes and transmitter. For devices whose overall accuracy is based on individual accuracy specifications of the sensor probes and transmitter, demonstrate compliance with the accuracy requirement over the entire operating range.

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 14 OF 53


b. Sensor-Node and Probe Assemblies:

1) Performance rated and tested with a 100 percent survival rate in a 30-day saltwater and acid vapor test with written independent laboratory results.

2) Sensor-Node Calibration: Individually calibrated at 16 measurement points to airflow standards directly calibrated at NIST to the NIST Laser Doppler Anemometer (LDA) primary velocity standard.

a) Accuracy: Within 2 percent of reading over the entire calibrated airflow range of 0 to 5000 fpm.

b) Individually calibrate thermistor at a minimum of three temperatures to NIST-traceable temperature standards.

3) Provide the number of independent sensor nodes as follows:

a) For Duct/Plenum Area up to 0.5 sq. ft.: One.

b) For Duct/Plenum Area Greater Than 0.5 through 1.0 sq. ft.: Two.

c) For Duct/Plenum Area Greater Than 2.0 through 4.0 sq. ft.: Six.

d) For Duct/Plenum Area Greater Than 4.0 through 8.0 sq. ft.: Eight.

e) For Duct/Plenum Area Greater Than 8.0 through 12.0 sq. ft.: 12.

f) For Duct/Plenum Area Greater Than 12.0 through 14.0 sq. ft.: 14.

g) For Duct/Plenum Area Greater Than 14.0 sq. ft.: 16.

4) For an aspect ratio of 1.5 or less, and an area of 25 sq. ft. or greater, four probes are required.

5) Sensor-Probe Construction: Gold-anodized, 6063 aluminum alloy tube or Type 316 stainless steel tube, with each sensor probe containing one or more independently wired sensing nodes.

c. Transmitter:

1) Transmitter determines the average airflow rate and temperature of connected sensor nodes in an array for a single location.

2) User Interface: 16-character, alpha-numeric, LCD display, with two field-selectable analog output signals and network output capability. Provide one of the following transmitter configurations:

a) Model GTC116 Transmitter: Two field-selectable 0- to 5-V dc, 0-to 10-V dc, or 4- to 20-mA, scalable, isolated, overcurrent protected analog output signals. The first output (AO1) provides the total airflow rate. The second output (AO2) is field configurable for temperature or low and/or high airflow set-point (user-defined) or system status alarm. The RS-485 (BACnet MS/TP, or Modbus RTU) network connection provides the average airflow rate, temperature, high and/or low airflow set-point alarm, system status alarm, individual sensor-node airflow rates, and individual sensor-node temperatures. The transmitter shall be provided with a Bluetooth low-energy interface card capable of transmitting all transmitter setup parameters, diagnostics, average airflow, and temperature of the device and the airflow and temperature of each sensor node. Software capable of capturing and displaying this transmission will be available via download to Android or iOS phone or tablet. Software shall allow for setup parameters, airflow, temperature, and diagnostic data to be saved on the phone or be emailed.

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 15 OF 53


3. For Supply or Return Fan Array:


1) Independent processing of up to eight separately wired sensor-node assemblies.

2) Accuracy: Within 10 percent of reading under operating conditions, when installed in accordance with manufacturer's sensor density and placement guidelines, with no effect on fan performance. Include the combined uncertainty of the sensor nodes and transmitter. For devices whose overall accuracy is based on individual accuracy specifications of the sensor probes and transmitter, demonstrate compliance with the accuracy requirement over the entire operating range.


1) Performance rated and tested with a 100 percent survival rate in a 30-day saltwater and acid vapor test with written independent laboratory test results.


a) Accuracy: Within 2 percent of reading over the entire calibrated airflow range of 0 to 10,000 fpm.


3) Sensor-Probe Construction: One sensor node mounted on a Type 304 stainless steel block with two adjustable zinc-plated steel rods connected to Type 304 stainless steel pivoting mounting feet.

4) Number of Independent Sensor Nodes, Fan Arrays (One to Eight Fans): One probe with one sensor node per probe in each fan inlet.

c. Transmitter:

1) Transmitter determines the average airflow rate and temperature of each fan. Startup firmware facilitates the setup of multiple fans and fan areas.


a) Model GTC108 Transmitter: Two field-selectable 0- to 10-V dc, or 4- to 20-mA, scalable, isolated, overcurrent protected analog output signals. The first output (AO1) provides the total airflow rate. The second output (AO2) is field configurable for temperature or low and/or high airflow set-point (user-defined) or system status alarm. The RS-485 (BACnet MS/TP, or Modbus RTU) network connection provides the average airflow rate, temperature, high and/or low airflow set-point alarm, system status alarm, individual sensor-node airflow rates, and individual sensor-node temperatures. The transmitter shall be provided with a Bluetooth low-energy interface card capable of transmitting all transmitter setup parameters, diagnostics, average airflow, and temperature of the device and the airflow and temperature of each sensor node. Software capable of capturing and displaying this transmission will be available via download to Android or iOS phone or tablet. Software shall allow for setup parameters, airflow, temperature, and diagnostic data to be saved on the phone or be emailed.

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 16 OF 53


4. For Supply or Return Fan, Single-Width Single-Inlet (SWSI) or Double-Width Double-Inlet (DWDI) Fans - Both Analog and Network Outputs:


1) Independent processing of up to eight separately wired sensor-node assemblies.

2) Accuracy: Within 10 percent of reading under operating conditions, when installed in accordance with manufacturer's sensor density and placement guidelines, with no effect on fan performance. Include the combined uncertainty of the sensor nodes and transmitter. For devices whose overall accuracy is based on individual accuracy specifications of the sensor probes and transmitter, demonstrate compliance with the accuracy requirement over the entire operating range.




a) Accuracy: Within 2 percent of reading over the entire calibrated airflow range of 0 to 10,000 fpm.


3) Sensor-Probe Construction: One sensor node mounted on a Type 304 stainless steel block with two adjustable zinc-plated steel rods connected to Type 304 stainless steel pivoting mounting feet.

4) Number of Independent Sensor Nodes, SWSI Fans, and DWDI Fans: Two probes with one sensor node per probe in each fan inlet.

c. Transmitter:

1) Transmitter determines the average airflow rate and temperature of each fan. Startup firmware facilitates the setup of multiple fans and fan areas.


a) Model GTC108 Transmitter: Two field-selectable 0- to 5-V dc, 0- to 10-V dc, or 4- to 20-mA, scalable, isolated, overcurrent protected analog output signals and network output capability. The first output (AO1) provides the total airflow rate. The second output (AO2) is field configurable for temperature or low and/or high airflow set-point (user-defined) or system status alarm. The RS-485 (BACnet MS/TP, or Modbus RTU) network connection provides the average airflow rate, temperature, high and/or low airflow set-point alarm, system status alarm, individual sensor-node airflow rates, and individual sensor-node temperatures. The transmitter shall be provided with a Bluetooth low-energy interface card capable of transmitting all transmitter setup parameters, diagnostics, average airflow, and temperature of the device and the airflow and temperature of each sensor node. Software capable of capturing and displaying this transmission will be available via download to Android or iOS phone or tablet. Software shall

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 17 OF 53


allow for setup parameters, airflow, temperature, and diagnostic data to be saved on the phone or be emailed.

5. For Air Terminal Units:


1) Independent processing of up to two separately wired sensor-node assemblies.

2) Accuracy: Within 3 percent of reading when installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommended placement guidelines. Include the combined uncertainty of the sensor nodes and transmitter. For devices whose overall accuracy is based on individual accuracy specifications of the sensor probes and transmitter, demonstrate compliance with the accuracy requirement over the entire operating range.


1) Sensor-Node Calibration:

a) Individually calibrated at a minimum of seven calibration points to NIST-traceable volumetric standards from 0 to 3000 fpm(0 to 15.2 m/s).



a) For a Duct Diameter of 4 Inches: One.

b) For Duct Diameters 5 through 16 Inches: Two.

3) Sensor-Probe Construction: Mill-finish, 6063 aluminum alloy tube or Type 316 stainless steel tube, with each sensor probe containing one or more independently wired sensing nodes.

c. Transmitter:

1) Transmitter determines the average airflow rate and temperature of all connected sensor nodes in an array for a single location.

2) User Interface: An alpha-numeric, LCD display, with two field-selectable analog output signals or one isolated RS-485 (BACnet MS/TP or Modbus RTU) field-selectable network connection.

3) Model EF-A Transmitter, Analog Capability: Two field-selectable 0- 5-V dc, 1- to 5-V dc, 0- to 10-V dc, or 2- to 10-V dc, scalable analog output signals. The first output (AO1) provides the total airflow rate. The second output (AO2) is field configurable for temperature or low and/or high airflow set-point (user-defined) or system status alarm.

4) Model EF-N Transmitter, Network Communications: The RS-485 (BACnet MS/TP or Modbus RTU) network connection provides the average airflow rate, temperature, high and/or low airflow set-point alarm, system status alarm, individual sensor-node airflow rates, and individual sensor-node temperatures.

5) Contact Closure Relay: One dry contact relay with onboard jumper to drive a remote LED, rated for no less than 30 V dc or 24 V ac at 3 A maximum. User configurable as normally open or normally closed during set up.

6. For Packaged HVAC Units, 12.5 Tons or Smaller:


SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 18 OF 53


1) Independent processing of up to two separately wired sensor-node assemblies.

2) Accuracy: Within 10 percent of reading when installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommended placement guidelines. Include the combined uncertainty of the sensor nodes and transmitter. For devices whose overall accuracy is based on individual accuracy specifications of the sensor probes and transmitter, demonstrate compliance with the accuracy requirement over the entire operating range.


1) Sensor-Node Internal Wiring Connections: Sealed and protected from the elements and suitable for direct exposure to water. Devices with exposed leads are unacceptable.

2) Sensor-Node Calibration:

a) Individually calibrated at a minimum of seven calibration points to NIST-traceable airflow standards from 0 to 3000fpm.



a) For a Duct Diameter of 4 Inches: One.

b) For Duct Diameters 5 through 16 Inches: Two.

4) Sensor-Probe Construction: Mill-finish, 6063 aluminum alloy tube, with each sensor probe containing one or more independently wired sensing nodes.

c. Transmitter:

1) Transmitter determines the average airflow rate and temperature of all connected sensor nodes in an array for a single location.

2) User Interface: An alpha-numeric, LCD display, with two field-selectable analog output signals or one isolated RS-485 (BACnet MS/TP or Modbus RTU) field-selectable network connection.

3) Model EF-A Transmitter, Analog Capability: Two field-selectable 0- to 10-V dc, or 2- to 10-V dc, scalable analog output signals. The first output (AO1) provides the total airflow rate. The second output (AO2) is field configurable for temperature or low and/or high airflow set-point (user-defined) or system status alarm.

4) Model EF-N Transmitter, Network Communications: RS-485 (BACnet MS/TP or Modbus RTU) network connection to provide average airflow rate, temperature, high and/or low airflow set-point alarm, system status alarm, individual sensor-node airflow rates, and individual sensor-node temperatures.

5) Contact Closure Relay: One dry contact relay with onboard jumper to drive a remote LED, rated for no less than 30 V dc or 24 V ac at 3 A maximum. User configurable as normally open or normally closed during set up.

7. For Combination Control Damper and Airflow Station:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1) Ebtron, Inc.

2) Ruskin.



SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 19 OF 53


b. Thermal airflow station and integral damper with two or more sensor nodes mounted in a probe, and a remotely mounted microprocessor-based transmitter at each measurement location. Sensor-node distribution pattern to be based on equal area method.

c. Airflow Station Performance:

1) Independent processing of up to 16 separately wired sensor-node assemblies.

2) Accuracy: Within 3 percent of reading for ducted applications, and within 5 percent of reading for non-ducted applications, when installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommended placement guidelines. Include the combined uncertainty of the sensor nodes and transmitter. For devices whose overall accuracy is based on individual accuracy specifications of the sensor probes and transmitter, demonstrate compliance with the accuracy requirement over the entire operating range.

d. Sensor-Node and Probe Assemblies:



a) Accuracy: Within 2 percent of reading over the entire calibrated airflow range of 0 to 5000 fpm.



a) For Damper Area up to 1.0 sq. ft.: Two.

b) For Duct/Plenum Area Greater Than 1.0 through 4.0 sq. ft.: Four.

c) For Duct/Plenum Area Greater Than 4.0 through 8.0 sq. ft.: Six.

d) For Duct/Plenum Area Greater Than 8.0 through 12.0 sq. ft.: Eight.

e) For Duct/Plenum Area Greater Than 12.0 through 16.0 sq. ft.: 12.

f) For Duct/Plenum Area Greater Than 16.0 sq. ft.: 16.

4) Sensor Probe Construction: Gold-anodized, 6063 aluminum alloy tube or Type 316 stainless steel tube with each sensor probe containing one or more independently wired sensing nodes.

e. Transmitter:

1) Transmitter determines the average airflow rate and temperature of connected sensor nodes in an array for a single location.


a) Model GTC116 Transmitter: Two field-selectable 0- to 5-V dc, 0- to 10-V dc, or 4- to 20-mA, scalable, isolated, overcurrent protected analog output signals and network output capability. The first output (AO1) provides the total airflow rate. The second output (AO2) is field configurable for temperature or low and/or high airflow set-point (user-defined) or system

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 20 OF 53


status alarm. The RS-485 (BACnet MS/TP, or Modbus RTU) network connection provides the average airflow rate, temperature, high and/or low airflow set-point alarm, system status alarm, individual sensor-node airflow rates, and individual sensor-node temperatures. The transmitter shall be provided with a Bluetooth low-energy interface card capable of transmitting all transmitter setup parameters, diagnostics, average airflow, and temperature of the device and the airflow and temperature of each sensor node. Software capable of capturing and displaying this transmission will be available via download to Android or iOS phone or tablet. Software shall allow for setup parameters, airflow, temperature, and diagnostic data to be saved on the phone or be emailed.

f. Integral Control Damper and Sleeve:

1) Frame and Sleeve: Extruded 6063T5 aluminum with an integral damper frame.

a) Thickness: Not less than 0.080-inch thickness for each damper section.

b) Sleeve Depth: 15 inches for ducted applications and 18 inches for non-ducted applications including damper frame. Non-ducted applications include a 3-inch- radius, aluminum entry flair.

c) Installation: Provide an additional 7 inches or non-ducted, 10 inches for ducted, applications between the downstream edge of an intake louver and the leading edge of the entry flair for outside air intake applications that are close coupled to intake louvers.

d) Leakage: The damper leakage shall not exceed 3 cfm/sq. ft. of face area against 1-inch wg. differential static pressure.

2) Blades: Extruded 6063T5 aluminum airfoil blades not less than 0.060-inch thickness.

a) Blade Seals: Extruded EPDM.

b) Frame Seals: Extruded silicone secured in an integral slot within the aluminum extrusions.

c) Orientation: Parallel or opposed blade configuration as required by application.

3) Bearings: Celcon inner bearing fixed to a 7/16-inch aluminum hexagon blade pin, rotating within a polycarbonate outer bearing inserted in the frame, resulting in no metal-to-metal or metal-to-plastic contact.

4) Linkage: Aluminum- and corrosion-resistant zinc-plated steel, complete with cup-point trunnion screws for a slip-proof grip, installed inside the frame.

5) Control-Damper Actuator: Modulating, electronic, damper actuator of sufficient number and adequate size, factory mounted and tested. Control-damper actuators are specified in Section 23 09 23.12

2.12 AIRFLOW SWITCHES

A. Stainless-Steel Single Vane Switch:


a. Dwyer Instruments, Inc.



SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 21 OF 53


2. Description:

a. Velocities up to 2000 fpm.

b. Suitable for mounting with air direction in horizontal.

3. Performance:

a. Voltage: 125-, 240-, and 480-V ac.

b. Full Load Current: 9.8 A at 125-V ac.

c. Field-Adjustable Velocity Set Point: 400 to 1600 fpm.

d. Maximum Process Temperature: 180 deg F.

e. Maximum Ambient Temperature: 125 deg F.

4. Construction:

a. Stainless-steel vane.

b. Vane actuates a SPDT snap switch.

c. Enclosure Material: Die-cast metal.

d. Enclosure with removable cover.

e. NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.

f. Screw set-point adjustment.

g. Electrical Connections: Screw terminals.

h. Conduit Connections: 1-inch trade size conduit knock outs on top and bottom.

2.13 AIR-PRESSURE SENSORS

A. Duct Insertion Static Pressure Sensor:



2. Insertion length shall be at 8 inches.

3. Sensor with four radial holes of 0.04-inch diameter.

4. Stainless-steel construction.

5. Sensor with threaded end support, sealing washers and nuts.

6. Connection: NPS 1/4 compression fitting.

7. Suitable for flat oval, rectangular, and round duct configurations.

B. Outdoor Static Pressure Sensor:



2. Provides average outdoor pressure signal.

3. Sensor with no moving parts.

4. NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure.

5. Pressure Connection: Brass barbed fitting for NPS 1/4tubing.





SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 22 OF 53


6. Conduit fitting around pressure fitting for sensor support and protection to pressure connection.

C. Space Static Pressure Sensor:


a. Air Monitor Corporation.

2. Performance: Within 1 percent of actual room static pressure in vicinity of sensor while being subjected to an air velocity of 1000 fpm from a 360-degree radial source.

3. Stainless-steel wall plate with perforated center arranged to sense space static pressure. Exposed surfaces are provided with brush finish.

4. Wall plate provided with screws and sized to fit standard single-gang electrical box.

5. Wall Mounting: Sensor intended for flush mount on face of ceiling with pressure chamber recessed in ceiling plenum.

6. Recessed Ceiling Mounting: Back of sensor plate fitted with multiple sensing ports, pressure impulse suppression chamber, airflow shielding, and 0.125-inch fitting for tubing connection.

7. Exposed Surface Mounting:

a. Sensor fitted with multiple sensing ports, pressure impulse suppression chamber, and airflow shielding.

b. Surface-mounted sensor provided with solid mounting plate intended for mount to ceiling with pressure chamber exposed to view.

c. Surface-mounted sensor with 0.125-inch fitting for exposed tubing connection.

2.14 AIR-PRESSURE SWITCHES

A. Air-Pressure Differential Switch:



2. Diaphragm operated to actuate an SPDT snap switch.

a. Fan safety shutdown applications: Switch with manual reset.

3. Electrical Connections: Three-screw configuration, including one screw for common operation and two screws for field-selectable normally open or closed operation.

4. Enclosure Conduit Connection: Knock out or threaded connection.

5. User Interface: Screw-type set-point adjustment located inside removable enclosure cover.

6. High and Low Process Connections: Threaded, NPS 1/8.

7. Enclosure:

a. Dry Indoor Installations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

b. Outdoor and Wet Indoor Installations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

c. Hazardous Environments: Explosion proof.

8. Operating Data:





SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 23 OF 53


a. Electrical Rating: 15 A at 120- to 480-V ac.

b. Pressure Limits:

1) Continuous: 45 inches wg.

2) Surge: 10 psig.

c. Temperature Limits: Minus 30 to 180 deg F.

d. Operating Range: Approximately 2 times set point.

e. Repeatability: Within 3 percent.

f. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.15 AIRFLOW TRANSMITTERS

A. Airflow Transmitters with 0.25 Percent Accuracy and Auto-Zero Feature:


a. Air Monitor Corporation.

2. Transmitter shall receive total- and static-pressure signals from a flow element, amplify signals, extract the square foot, and scale the signals to produce 4- to 20-mA dc output signals linear to airflow.

3. NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.

4. Construct assembly so shock, vibration, and pressures surges of up to 1 psig will neither harm transmitter, nor affect its accuracy.

5. Transmitter with automatic zeroing circuit capable of automatically readjusting transmitter zero at predetermined time intervals. The automatic zeroing circuit shall re-zero the transmitter to within 0.1 percent of true zero.

6. Performance:

a. Range: As required by application and at least 10 percent below minimum airflow and 10 percent greater than design airflow.

b. Calibrated Span: Field adjustable, minus 40 percent of the range.

c. Accuracy: Within 0.25 percent of natural span.

d. Repeatability: Within 0.15 percent of calibrated span.

e. Linearity: Within 0.2 percent of calibrated span.

f. Hysteresis and Deadband (Combined): Less than 0.2 percent of calibrated span.

7. Integral digital display for continuous indication of airflow.

B. Pressure Differential Transmitters for Airflow Measurement:


a. Setra System.

2. Performance:

a. Range: As required by application and at least 10 percent below minimum airflow and 10 percent greater than design airflow.





SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 24 OF 53


b. Accuracy: Within 0.25 percent of the full-scale range.

c. Hysteresis: Within 0.10 percent of full scale.

d. Repeatability: Within 0.05 percent of full scale.

e. Stability: Within one percent of span per year.

f. Overpressure: 10 psig.

g. Temperature Limits: Zero to 150 deg F.

h. Compensate Temperature Limits: 40 to 150 deg F.

i. Thermal Effects: 0.033 percent of full scale per degree F.

j. Shock and vibration shall not harm the transmitter.

3. Output Signals:

4. Operator Interface:

a. Zero and span adjustments located behind cover.

5. Construction:

a. Plastic casing with removable plastic cover.

b. Fittings: Swivel fittings for connection to copper tubing or barbed fittings for connection to polyethylene tubing. Fittings on bottom of instrument case.

c. Screw terminal block for wire connections.

d. Vertical plane mounting.

e. NEMA 250, Type 4.

f. Mounting Bracket: Appropriate for installation.

2.16 LIQUID FLOW METERS

A. General Requirements for Liquid Flow Meters:

1. Adjustable for changes in system operational parameters.

2. Liquid and Steam Sensors, Meters, and Transmitters: Extended range of 10 percent above Project design flow and 10 percent below Project minimum flow to signal abnormal flow conditions.

3. Manufacturer shall certify that each flow instrument indicated complies with specified performance requirements and characteristics.

4. Product certificates are required.

B. Insertion Electromagnetic Flow Meter:


a. ONICON Incorporated.

2. Description:

a. No moving parts.

b. Suitable for flow measurement of fluids with electrical conductivity between 20 to 60000 micro-Seimens per centimeter.

c. Suitable for pipe sizes NPS 3 through NPS 72.



SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 25 OF 53


d. Wet calibrate and tag meters to standards traceable to NIST, and provide each meter with a certificate of calibration.

e. Continuous auto-zero function.

f. Transmitter integral to meter.

3. Performance:

a. Flow Range: 0.25 to 20 fps.

b. Accuracy for Velocities between 2 and 20 fps: Within 1 percent of reading.

c. Accuracy for Velocities Less than 2 fps: Within 0.02 fps.

d. Ambient Temperature: Minus 5 to 150 deg F

e. Process Temperature: 15 to 250 deg F.

f. Pressure: 400 psig.

4. Output Signals:

a. Field-selectable analog signals.

1) Current Signal (Isolated): 4 to 20 mA.

2) Voltage Signal (Isolated): Zero- to 10-V dc.

b. Digital Signal: Dry-contact closure signaling fault condition.

c. Frequency Signal: Zero- to 15-V peak pulse, zero to 500 Hz.

d. Scalable Pulse Output:

1) Isolated solid-state dry contact.

2) Contact Rating: 100 mA at 50-V dc.

3) Pulse Duration: 0.5, 1, 2, or 6 seconds.

5. Construction:

a. Wetted Metal Parts: Type 316 stainless steel.

b. Sensor Head: Polysulfone.

c. Process Connection: 1-inch.

d. Instrument Isolation Valve: Full port Type 316 stainless steel ball valve for system isolation.

e. Electrodes: Type 316 stainless steel.

f. Electronics Enclosure:

1) Painted aluminum.

2) Removable cover.

3) NEMA 250, Type 4.

4) Electrical Connection: PVC-jacketed cable, 10 feet long.

5) Conduit Connection:1/2-inch trade size.

6. Display Module:

a. Remote from meter.

b. House in a NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure.

c. Label terminal strip for all wiring connections.

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 26 OF 53


d. 120-V ac power supply with 24-V dc output to power the flow sensor.

e. Input Signal from Meter: Zero- to 15-V pulse output.

f. Output Signals: Additional output signals furnished with flow meter connected to display module terminal strip.

g. Auxiliary Output Signals: Analog voltage output (isolated) shall be zero to 10 V.

h. Digital Display:

1) Flow rate.

2) Totalized flow.

3) At least six display digits for flow rate and eight display digits for totalization.

4) Bi-directional units with separate digital display for flow and totalization in each direction.

i. Local reset of flow totalization.

j. Program and data shall be stored in nonvolatile memory in the event of power loss.

k. For bi-directional units, provide LED display of flow direction (contacts open or closed).

2.17 LIQUID FLOW SWITCHES

A. Liquid Flow Switch:


a. W. E. Anderson; Dwyer Instruments, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Field-adjustable four-vane combinations.

b. Field-adjustable set-point adjustment screw.

c. Suitable for pipe sizes NPS 1 through NPS 8.

d. Switch mounted vertically in horizontal pipe.

3. Performance:

a. Flow Rate Actuation and De-actuation: Varies with vane combination and set-point adjustment.

b. Pressure Limit: 145 psig.

c. Temperature Limit: 230 deg F.

d. Electrical Rating: 10 A resistive, 3 A conductive at 250-V ac.

e. Switch Type: SPDT snap switch.

4. Wetted Parts Construction:

a. Bellows: Tin-bronze.

b. Vanes: Stainless steel.

c. Body: Forged brass.

d. Process Connection: NPS 1.

5. Enclosure:



SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 27 OF 53


a. Die-cast aluminum alloy.

b. NEMA 250, Type 4.

c. Electrical Connection: Cable gland with attached wire leads.

2.18 LIQUID-PRESSURE SWITCHES

A. Liquid Gage Pressure Switch-Bourdon Tube Operated:



2. Description:

a. Bourdon tube operated to actuate a SPDT snap switch.

b. Provide switches used in safety limiting applications with auto reset.

c. Wetted Materials: Type 316 stainless steel.

d. Electrical Connections: Screw terminal.

e. Enclosure Conduit Connection: Knock out or threaded connection.

f. User Interface: Thumbscrew set-point adjustment with enclosed set-point indicator and scale.

g. Process Connection: Threaded, NPS 1/4.

h. Enclosure:

1) Dry Indoor Installations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2) Outdoor and Wet Indoor Installations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

3) Hazardous Environments: Explosion proof.

i. Operating Data:

1) Electrical Rating: 5 or 10 A at 120-V ac.

2) Pressure Limits: Equal to maximum pressure in full-scale range, but not less than system design pressure rating.

3) Temperature Limits: 180 deg F.

4) Operating Range: Approximately 2 times set point, but not less than system design pressure rating.

5) Deadband: Adjustable or fixed as required by application.

j. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Liquid-Pressure Differential Switch with Set-Point Indicator:



2. Description:

a. Type 316 stainless-steel double opposing bellows operate to actuate a SPDT snap switch.





SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 28 OF 53


b. Electrical Connections: Screw terminal.

c. Enclosure Conduit Connection: Knock out or threaded connection.

d. User Interface: Thumbscrew set-point adjustment with enclosed set-point indicator and scale.

e. High and Low Process Connections: Threaded, NPS 1/8.

f. Enclosure:

1) Dry Indoor Installations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2) Outdoor and Wet Indoor Installations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

3) Hazardous Environments: Explosion proof.

g. Operating Data:

1) Electrical Rating: 15 A at 120- to 240-V ac.

2) Pressure Limits: At least 5 times full-scale range, but not less than system design pressure rating.

3) Temperature Limits: Minus 10 to 180 deg F.

4) Operating Range: Approximately 2 times set point.

5) Deadband: Adjustable or fixed as required by application.

2.19 LIQUID FLOW TRANSMITTERS

A. Liquid Pressure Differential Transmitter:



2. Performance:

a. Range: Approximately 2 times the set point.

b. Span: Adjustable plus or minus 1 mA, non-interactive.

c. Accuracy: Within 0.25 percent of full scale.

d. Maximum Operating Pressure: 2.5 times range.

e. Temperature Limits: Zero to 175 deg F.

f. Compensate Temperature Limits: 30 to 150 deg F.

g. Thermal Effects: 0.02 percent of full scale per degree F.

h. Response Time: 30 to 50 ms.

i. Shock and vibration shall not harm the transmitter.

3. Analog Output Current Signal:

a. Two wire, 4- to 20-mA dc current source.

b. Signal capable of operating into 1000-ohm load.

4. Operator Interface:

a. Zero and span adjustments located behind cover.

b. Bleed screws on side of body, two screws on low-pressure side and one screw on high-pressure side, for air in line and pressure cavity.



SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 29 OF 53


5. Construction:

a. Aluminum and stainless-steel enclosure with removable cover.

b. Wetted parts of transmitter constructed of 17-4 PH or 300 series stainless steel.

c. NPS 1/4 process connections on side of instrument enclosure.

d. Knock out for 1/2-inch trade size conduit connection on side of instrument enclosure.

e. Screw terminal block for wire connections.

f. NEMA 250, Type 4X.

g. Mounting bracket shall be suitable for installation.

6. Transmitter shall have three-valve manifold. Construct manifold of brass, bronze, or stainless steel. Manifold shall have NPS 1/4 process connections.

2.20 CARBON-DIOXIDE SENSORS AND TRANSMITTERS


1. Building Automation Products Inc.; BAPI.

2. Telaire; a brand of Amphenol Thermometrics Inc.

3. Vaisala.

4. Veris Industries.

B. Description:

1. NDIR technology or equivalent technology providing long-term stability and reliability.

2. Two-wire, 4-20 mA output signal, linearized to carbon-dioxide concentration in ppm.

C. Construction:

1. House electronics in an ABS plastic enclosure. Provide equivalent of NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure for wall-mounted space applications and NEMA 250, Type 4 for duct-mounted applications.

2. Equip with digital display for continuous indication of carbon-dioxide concentration.

D. Performance:

1. Measurement Range: Zero to 2000 ppm.

2. Accuracy: Within 2 percent of reading, plus or minus 30 ppm.

3. Repeatability: Within 1 percent of full scale.

4. Temperature Dependence: Within 0.05 percent of full scale over an operating range of 25 to 110 deg F.

5. Long-Term Stability: Within 5 percent of full scale after more than five years.

6. Response Time: Within 60 seconds.

7. Warm-up Time: Within five minutes.

E. Provide calibration kit. Turn over to Owner at start of warranty period.

2.21 COMBINATION CARBON-DIOXIDE AND VOC SENSORS AND TRANSMITTERS


1. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.








SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 30 OF 53


B. Description:

1. NDIR technology or equivalent technology that provides long-term stability and reliability.

2. Senses and responds to combined concentration of more than 30 contaminates commonly found in indoor environments.

C. Output Signal: Zero to 10-V dc.

D. Performance:

1. Carbon-Dioxide Range: Zero to 2000 ppm.

2. Carbon-Dioxide Accuracy: Within 50 ppm, plus 2 percent measured value.

3. VOC Range: Zero to 2000 ppm.

4. VOC Sensitivity Ranges: Field selectable, low, normal, high.

5. Ambient Temperature: 32 to 122 degrees F.

6. Ambient Relative Humidity: 5 to 95 percent non-condensing.

E. Enclosure: White plastic.

F. Electrical Connections: Screw terminals.

G. Display: Digital, LCD.

2.22 SINGLE-POINT OXYGEN MONITORING SYSTEM


1. MSA Instrument Division.

B. Description:

1. System shall measure and display a single gas concentration (CO/NO2), provide local audio and visual alarms when preset limits are exceeded, and send output signals of gas concentration and detected alarms.

2. System shall require no periodic maintenance other than periodic checking of sensor response to a known concentration of gas.

3. System shall be designed to provide for installation, setup, and start-up from outside of unit enclosure without need to open the enclosure door.

4. System shall be factory calibrated and ready for operation after installation.

5. Monitor shall be internally wired to accommodate a single-point field power connection.

C. Performance:

1. Range: Full scale, zero to 25 percent oxygen.

2. Zero Drift: Within 1 percent per year.

3. Span Drift: Within 10 percent per year.

4. Repeatability: Within 1 percent of full scale.

5. Linearity: Within 2 percent of full scale.

6. Step Change Response Time: Within 12 seconds.

D. Enclosure:

1. NEMA 250, Type 4X.



SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 31 OF 53


2. Access to the inside of enclosure, as well as to controller, display, and wiring connections, shall be through full-length door on front of enclosure.

3. Door with shatterproof window sized to provide viewing of visual display and indicator lights.

4. Equip enclosure with mounting brackets for the purpose of attaching the unit to a flat surface.

5. Provide door with key lock access to inside enclosure.

E. Controller:

1. Password-protected access through full-function keypad.

2. Set:

a. Real-time clock.

b. Alarm levels.

c. Change span-gas values.

d. Display date of last calibration.

e. Display minimum, maximum, and average gas values.

f. Change address, future calibration time, and date.

3. Automatic return-to-normal-operation feature after calibration.

4. Date stamps last successful calibration.

5. Time and date stamps events.

6. Selectable lockout of output signals during calibration.

7. Logs minimum, maximum, and average gas concentrations over selected time intervals.

F. Visual Display:

1. Four-digit LED or backlight LCD display visible from front face of enclosure.

2. Value displayed shall be a direct reading of gas concentration.

3. Displays system status indicators.

4. Visual Alarm Indication:

a. Three separate alarm levels: Caution, Warning, and Alarm.

b. Separate strobes for Warning and Alarm conditions. Externally mount the two strobes on top of enclosure.

5. Indication of sensor nearing end of its useful life based on the sensor output, not on the time the sensor was in service.

6. Displays average, minimum, and maximum gas concentrations of the sensor over selected time.

7. Malfunction Indication Alarm: Displays a separate unique character when an over range or under range condition exists, a sensor signal sensor is lost, or a set-point error or memory failure occurs.

G. Audible Alarm:

1. Provides an audible horn when an alarm condition occurs.

2. Horn shall be rated for 95 dB with selectable output tones.

3. Mount horn inside or on exterior of enclosure.

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 32 OF 53


4. Activate horn through a horn relay. Horn relay shall be form "A" contacts and set as normally open and common.

H. Operator Interface:

1. Door Audible Alarm Acknowledge Switch:

a. Push-button switch located on front door shall silence audible alarm.

b. Switch shall reset latched alarms if normal gas conditions exist. Visual alarms shall remain on as long as alarms are exceeded.

2. Operating Modes and Parameters Selection: Selections listed shall be accomplished by the use of switches, jumpers, or remote control not involving the use of tools.

a. Display range value.

b. Latching or nonlatching mode for the alarm set points.

c. Upscale or downscale acting alarms.

I. Output Signal:

1. Relays:

a. Provide one relay for each set-point level for each of the three alarm levels.

b. Provide one relay for fault conditions.

c. Alarm and fault relays shall be form "C," SPDT. Contacts shall be rated for 5 A resistive at 250-V ac or 30-V dc.

d. Contacts shall be capable of being selected normally open or normally closed.

e. Alarm relays shall be normally de-energized. The fault relay shall be normally energized.

2. Digital Communication:

a. Bidirectional sending and receiving of digital signals.

b. Digital signals shall comply with FTT-10-based communication.

c. Protocol shall be LonTalk supported by Lon Works.

d. Signal speed shall be no greater than 78.1 kBs per second.

J. Sensor:

1. Electrochemical fuel-cell type does not require periodic addition of reagents.

2. Sensor shall be replaceable without the need for tools.

3. Sensors shall have a minimum useful life of one year. Replace failed sensors at no charge within first year.

4. Mount sensor externally on the side or bottom of enclosure. Where indicated on Drawings, mount sensor remote from enclosure.

5. Remote Mounting:

a. Provide sensor in a separate enclosure. Enclosure shall be NEMA 250, Type 4X, except when sensor is installed in a hazardous location, then enclosure shall be an explosion-proof type suitable for the application.

b. Provide sensor with cable for connecting to monitor.

c. Provide sensor with mounting hardware suitable for application.

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 33 OF 53


d. For duct-mounted applications, the sensor installation shall provide kit for calibration of the sensor without removing sensor from duct.

K. Gas Sampling Pump:

1. Where required by application, provide a pump mounted inside the enclosure to provide a motive force to induce flow of gas sample across the sensor.

2. Signal to the sensor from the pump shall be in digital communication format to eliminate radio-frequency interference (RFI) and electromagnetic interference (EMI).

3. A flow sensor shall activate a relay when the gas sample falls below the acceptable flow rate to the sensor and shall indicate a loss of gas flow on the display.

4. Introduction of a calibration gas to the gas sensor shall be through an integral push-button valve. This push-button valve shall return to monitoring the sampled area when released.

L. Automatic Calibration System:

1. Provide automatic calibration of all oxygen monitors installed. Number of automatic calibration systems shall be determined by supplier based on location and quantity of oxygen monitors.

2. Automatic calibration system shall, without manual intervention, periodically perform a complete calibration of the sensor.

3. System shall exchange digital signals with sensor.

4. Automatic calibration shall be adjustable from as many as three times per day to only once every 30 days.

5. Sensor alarms shall be suppressed or disabled until the automatic calibration cycle is completed.

6. Manual calibration of the sensor shall be initiated at any time with a hand-held infrared remote control without the need to disable or turn off the automatic calibration system.

7. House the system in a separate NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure from the oxygen monitoring system. Enclosure shall have provisions for wall mounting.

8. Digital displays shall indicate zero and when span gas is being applied to the sensor, the status, and any fault condition.

9. Provide with a separate valve condulet to monitor the condition of the calibration cylinders attached to the calibration system. Insufficient gas pressure to calibrate the sensor shall light the fault indicator.

2.23 MULTIPOINT GAS MONITORING SYSTEM



2. MSA Instrument Division.

B. Description:

1. Each sampling point shall monitor any variation in the CO and NO2 concentration level.

2. Each sampling point shall be individually piped to the monitoring system.

3. Provide sampling point with a 0.3-micron filter.

4. Each sampling point shall be an alarm point.




SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 34 OF 53


5. A dual-head diaphragm pump shall draw an air sample through piping system and through a microprocessor-controlled sequencer feeding an analyzer with a new sample every 15 seconds.

6. Sample time shall be adjustable in 1 second increments from zero to 60 minutes.

7. Span and zero calibration gas shall be automatically initiated by the microprocessor. System shall also provide manual initiation of span and zero calibration gas.

8. Analyzer output shall be corrected by the microprocessor.

9. Monitoring system shall have 16 sample points.

10. System shall operate on 120-V ac, single-phase, 60-Hz power.

11. Final adjustment; calibration, testing, and startup of the system shall be performed by a trained representative of manufacturer.

C. Analyzer:

1. Analyzer shall operate using principle of nondispersive infrared absorption.

2. Sampling response time shall be within 10 seconds.

3. Zero drift and span drift shall be less than 1 percent of full scale within a 24-hour period.

4. Repeatability shall be within 1 percent of full scale.

5. Accuracy shall be within 1 percent of full scale.

6. Calibration range shall be zero to 500 ppm.

7. Digital display on analyzer face with scale shall be in ppm.

8. Temperature shall be compensated from 30 to 120 deg F ambient temperature.

D. Control and Display:

1. Each sample shall send a 4-20 mA output signal proportional to the highest concentration.

2. Alphanumeric visual display of current analyzer concentration reading shall be in ppm or another industry-accepted measurement.

3. Visual indication for sample analyzing, sample high-concentration alarm, analyzer malfunction, and calibration.

4. Any number and configuration of sample points shall be capable of being bypassed.

5. Each sample point shall be capable of being manually sampled through an override feature.

6. System parameters shall be stored in nonvolatile memory.

7. Provide at least an eight-hour battery backup of current alarm status. Battery shall be rechargeable.

E. Enclosure:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 12.

2. Hinged and locking door, full size of face.

3. House all system components. Multiple adjoining enclosures are acceptable if joined to a common support structure.

F. Calibration Equipment:

1. Provide equipment necessary to automatically and manually calibrate the system, including, but not be limited to, the following:

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 35 OF 53


a. Regular assembly.

b. Zero cap.

c. Calibration cap.

d. Two cylinders filled with calibration gas.

e. Instruction book.

f. Carrying case.

2.24 VOC SENSORS AND TRANSMITTERS



B. Description:

1. VOC sensor shall use an oxidizing element that varies resistance with contaminant gases.

2. Senses and responds to combined concentration of more than 30 contaminates commonly found in indoor environments.

C. Output Signal: Zero to 5 or 10-V dc with minimum load resistance of 4000 ohms.

D. Performance:

1. Measurement Range: Zero to 100 percent.

2. Ambient Temperature: 32 to 140 deg F.

3. Ambient Relative Humidity: 5 to 95 percent non-condensing.

E. Enclosure: Lexan.

2.25 LEVEL SWITCHES

A. Liquid-Level Switch (Magnetic Type with Float):


a. W. E. Anderson; Dwyer Instruments, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Mounting Suitable for Application: Horizontal or vertical switch mounting.

b. Float arm with hinge design limits vertical movement to prevent sticking.

c. Replaceable float with threaded connection.

d. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for hazardous environments (Class I, Groups C and D; Class II, Groups E, F, and G).

3. Performance:

a. Level Actuation and De-Actuation: 0.75-inch deadband.

b. Body Pressure Limit: 1000 psig for brass body; 2000 psig for Type 316 stainless-steel body.

c. Float Pressure Limit: 150 psig.

d. Temperature Range: Minus 4 to 275 deg F.

e. Electrical Rating: 10 A at 125/250-V ac.





SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 36 OF 53


f. Switch Type: SPDT snap switch.

4. Wetted Parts Construction:

a. Float and Rod: Type 316 stainless steel.

b. Body: Type 316 stainless steel.

c. Magnetic Keeper: Type 316 stainless steel.

d. Process Connection: NPS 1-1/2 NPT.

e. Enclosure:

1) Die-cast aluminum alloy.

2) Threaded cover.

3) NEMA 250, Type 4.

4) Electrical Connection: Terminal block.

5) Conduit Connection: NPS 3/4 NPT.

2.26 LEAK-DETECTION SWITCHES

A. Point-Type, Leak-Detection Switches:


a. Veris Industries.

b. W. E. Anderson; Dwyer Instruments, Inc.

2. Features: Audible and visual alarm with relay output for remote indication.

3. Alarm activated based on change in resistance.

4. Performance:

a. Service: Water.

b. Temperature Limits: 32 to 122 deg F.

c. Switch Type: SPDT relay.

d. Electric Connection: Cable attached.

5. Construction: Acrylic, ABS plastic.

6. Field Power: 24-V ac or dc.

2.27 HUMIDITY SENSORS AND TRANSMITTERS

A. Sensor and Transmitter without Display:


a. Automation Components, Inc.

b. Vaisala.

2. Performance:

a. Accuracy including non-linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability: Within 2 percent from zero to 90 percent relative humidity and within 3 percent from 90 to 95 percent relative humidity when operating at 68 deg F.

b. Relative Humidity Range:






SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 37 OF 53


1) Duct: Zero to 100 percent.

2) Space: Zero to 95 percent relative.

c. Factory calibrated and NIST traceable with certificate included.

3. Construction for Space Applications:

a. Housing with integral sensor.

b. Housing shall be ABS plastic or powder-coated aluminum.

c. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4.

d. Provide housing with a wall-mounting plate.

4. Construction for Duct and Equipment Applications:

a. Housing with integral sensor.

b. Duct Sensor Body: 300 series stainless steel.

c. Provide sensor with sintered stainless-steel filter for duct applications.

d. Housing shall be cast aluminum.

e. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4.

5. Output Signal: Two-wire, 4- to 20-mA output signal with drive capacity of at least 500 ohms at 24-V dc.

B. Combination Humidity and Temperature Sensor and Transmitter with Display:



b. Vaisala.

2. Description:

a. Factory package consisting of humidity and temperature sensor, digital display, keypad user interface, installation hardware, interconnecting sensor cabling, installation instructions, and operating manual.

b. Each transmitter shall be individually calibrated and provided with NIST traceable calibration certifications.

c. Provide a service cable for connecting to a notebook computer and Microsoft Windows compatible software.

3. Display:

a. Alphanumeric display of the following on the face of the enclosure:

1) Percent relative humidity.

2) Absolute humidity.

3) Mixing ratio.

4) Dry-bulb temperature.

5) Wet-bulb temperature.

6) Dew point temperature.

7) Enthalpy.




SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 38 OF 53


b. Visual display of measurement trends, and minimum and maximum values over a one-year period.

4. Electronics Enclosure:

a. Integral to sensors for wall- (room-)mounted applications and remote from temperature and humidity sensors for duct and equipment applications.

b. NEMA 250, Type 4 or 4X.

c. Labeled terminal strip for field wiring connections.

d. Threaded conduit connection.

5. Programming:

a. Transmitter parameters shall be field programmable through keypad on the face of the enclosure.

b. Programmed parameters shall be stored in nonvolatile EEPROM.

6. Output Signals:

a. Three Analog Outputs: 4 to 20 mA or zero to 10-V dc for each output.

7. Temperature Sensor:

a. Temperature range matched to application, but not less than minus 40 to 140 deg F.

b. Within 0.5 deg F accuracy over the temperature range of 50 to 100 deg F and within 1 deg F over the remainder of the range.

c. Provide duct installation kit for duct applications.

8. Humidity Sensor:

a. Relative Humidity Measurement Range: Zero to 100 percent.

b. Response time in still air within 40 seconds.

c. Accuracy including non-linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability:

1) For Temperature Between 59 and 77 Deg F and Relative Humidity between Zero and 90 Percent: Within 1 percent.

2) For Temperature between 59 and 77 Deg F and Relative Humidity between 90 and 100 Percent: Within 1.7 percent.

3) For Temperature between Minus 4 and 104 Deg F: Within 1 percent plus 0.008 times relative humidity reading.

4) For Temperature between Minus 40 and 356 Deg F: Within 1.5 percent plus 0.015 times the relative humidity reading.

d. Sintered, stainless-steel filter, protecting sensor.

e. Provide duct installation kit for duct applications.

9. Power Supply:

a. Field Power: 120-V ac, 60 Hz unless otherwise required by the application.

b. Internal Power: As required by transmitter.

2.28 POSITION LIMIT SWITCHES


1. OMRON Corporation.



SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 39 OF 53


B. Description: Select type of actuating head (plunger, roller lever, or rod) to suit application.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Performance:

1. Life expectancy: Not less than 30 million mechanical operations and 750,000 electrical operations.

2. Operating Frequency: 300 mechanical operations per minute and 30 electrical operations per minute.

3. Voltage: 125-, 250-, 480-, and 600-V ac or 8-, 12-, 14-, 24-, 30-, 48-, 125-, and 250-V dc, as required by application.

4. Current Rating: As required by application.

5. Temperature Rise: 50 deg C.

6. Ambient Temperature: 14 to 175 deg F.

7. Ambient Relative Humidity: 35 to 95 percent.

D. Construction:

1. NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure.

2. Switch Type: SPDT or DPDT, as required by application.

3. Status indicator integral to switch. Field switchable to light when contacts are actuated and operating, or contacts are free and not operating.

4. Electrical Connection: Screw or plug-in terminals.

5. Conduit Connection: NPS 1/2.

2.29 AIR TEMPERATURE SWITCHES

A. Thermostat and Switch for Low Temperature Control in Duct Applications:


a. Honeywell International Inc.

b. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Two-position control.

b. Field-adjustable set point.

c. Manual reset.

d. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

3. Performance:

a. Operating Temperature Range: 15 to 55 deg F.

b. Temperature Differential: 5 deg F, non-adjustable and additive.

c. Enclosure Ambient Temperature: Minus 20 to 140 deg F.

d. Sensing Element Maximum Temperature: 250 deg F.

e. Voltage: 120-V ac.




SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 40 OF 53


f. Current: 16 FLA.

g. Switch Type: Two SPDT snap switches operate on coldest 12-inchsection along element length.

4. Construction:

a. Vapor-Filled Sensing Element: Nominal 20 feetlong.

b. Dual Temperature Scale: Fahrenheit and Celsius visible on face.

c. Set-Point Adjustment: Screw.

d. Enclosure: Painted metal, NEMA 250, Type 1.

e. Electrical Connections: Screw terminals.

f. Conduit Connection: 1/2-inch trade size.

B. Thermostat and Switch for High Temperature Control in Duct Applications:


a. Schneider Electric USA, Inc.

2. Source Limitations: Obtain temperature-measuring sensors and transmitters and airflow from single manufacturer.

3. Description:



c. Manual reset.


4. Performance:

a. Temperature Range: 100 to 160 deg F.

b. Temperature Differential: 5 deg F.

c. Ambient Temperature: Zero to 260 deg F.

d. Voltage: 120-V ac.

e. Current: 16 FLA.

f. Switch Type: SPDT snap switch.

5. Construction:

a. Sensing Element: Helical bimetal.

b. Enclosure: Metal, NEMA 250, Type 1.

c. Electrical Connections: Screw terminals.

d. Conduit Connection: 1/2-inch trade size.

2.30 LIQUID TEMPERATURE SENSORS


1. MAMAC Systems, Inc.





SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 41 OF 53


B. RTD:

1. Description:

a. Platinum with a value of 1000 ohms at zero deg C and a temperature coefficient of 0.00385 ohm/ohm/deg C.

b. Encase RTD in a stainless-steel sheath with a 0.25-inch OD.

c. Sensor Length: 4, 6, or 8 inches as required by application.

d. Process Connection: Threaded, NPS 1/2

e. Two-stranded copper lead wires.

f. Powder-coated steel enclosure, NEMA 250, Type 4.

g. Conduit Connection: 1/2-inch

h. Performance Characteristics:

1) Range: Minus 40 to 210 deg F.

2) Interchangeable Accuracy: Within 0.54 deg F at 32 deg F.

C. Thermowells:

1. Stem: Straight or stepped shank formed from solid bar stock.

2. Material: Brass or stainless steel.

3. Process Connection: Threaded, NPS 3/4.

4. Sensor Connection: Threaded, NPS 1/2.

5. Bore: Sized to accommodate sensor with tight tolerance between sensor and well.

6. Furnish thermowells installed in insulated pipes and equipment with an extended neck.

7. Length: 4, 6, or 8 inches as required by application.

8. Thermowells furnished with heat-transfer compound to eliminate air gap between wall of sensor and thermowell and to reduce time constant.

2.31 LIQUID TEMPERATURE SWITCHES

A. Thermostat and Switch for Temperature Control in Pipe Applications:


a. Honeywell International Inc.

2. Description:



c. Manual reset.


3. Performance:

a. Operating Temperature Range: 65 to 200 deg F.

b. Temperature Differential Deadband: 5 to 30 deg F, adjustable.

c. Enclosure Ambient Temperature: 150 deg F.



SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 42 OF 53


d. Sensing Element Pressure Rating: 200 psig.

e. Voltage: 120-V ac.

f. Current: 8 FLA.

g. Switch Type: SPDT snap switch.

4. Construction:

a. Vapor-Filled Immersion Element: Copper, nominal 3 inches long.

b. Temperature Scale: Fahrenheit, visible on face.

c. Set-Point Adjustment: Screw.

d. Enclosure: Painted metal, NEMA 250, Type 1.

e. Electrical Connections: Screw terminals.

f. Conduit Connection: 3/4-inch.

2.32 CURRENT SENSING SWITCHES

A. Current Sensor Switch with Relay:


a. Veris Industries.

b. Dwyer Instruments, Inc.

c. Functional Devices, Inc.

2. Features: A solid core, status sensor for monitoring positive status, and a command relay for starting or stopping motors in a single package.

3. Self-powered by inducing power from monitored load.

4. Relay: Performance: Integral N.O. command relay capable of switching 10A Resistive, 3A Inductive @ 30VDC, 240 VAC

5. Adjustment: Auto adjusting operating range from 1-135 A.

6. Indicator: Visual indication (LED’s) for output status, sensor power, and relay status.

7. Trip Setpoint: Adjustable trip set-point to +/- 1 % of the range from -15 to 60 ° C

8. Electric: Isolated to 600 VAC RMS

9. Output: N.O., Solid State, 0.1 A @ 30 VAC/DC.

2.33 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES


1. Cooper Industries, Inc.

2. Intermatic, Inc.

3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Description: Solid state; one set of NO dry contacts rated for 24 V dc at 1 A, to operate connected load, complying with UL 773, and compatible with control panelboard.






SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 43 OF 53


2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range.

3. Time Delay: Thirty-second minimum, to prevent false operation.

4. Mounting: 1/2-inch (13-mm) threaded male conduit.

5. Failure Mode: Luminaire stays ON.

6. Power Pack:

a. Digital controller capable of accepting four RJ45 inputs with two outputs rated for 20-A incandescent or LED load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A ballast or LED at 120- and 277-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

1) With integral current monitoring.

2) Compatible with digital addressable lighting interface.

3) Plenum rated.

2.34 DAYLIGHT-HARVESTING SWITCHES


1. Cooper Industries, Inc.

2. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

3. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.

B. Description: Sensing daylight and electrical lighting levels, the system adjusts the indoor electrical lighting levels. As daylight increases, the lights are dimmed.

1. Lighting control set point is based on two lighting conditions:

a. When no daylight is present (target level).

b. When significant daylight is present.

C. Ceiling-Mounted Dimming Controls: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with integrated power pack, to detect changes in indoor lighting levels that are perceived by the eye.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:


2. Sensor Output: zero- to 10-V dc to operate luminaires. Sensor is powered by controller unit.

3. Light-Level Sensor Set-Point Adjustment Range: 20 to 60 fc.

E. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast or LED load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

1. LED status lights to indicate load status.

2. Plenum rated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 44 OF 53


B. Examine roughing-in for valves installed in piping to verify actual locations of piping connections before installation.

C. Examine roughing-in for instruments installed in duct systems to verify actual locations of connections before installation.

D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Furnish and install products required to satisfy most stringent requirements indicated.

B. Install products level, plumb, parallel, and perpendicular with building construction.

C. Properly support instruments, tubing, piping, wiring, and conduits to comply with requirements indicated. Brace all products to prevent lateral movement and sway or a break in attachment.

D. Provide ceiling, floor, roof, and wall openings and sleeves required by installation. Before proceeding with drilling, punching, or cutting, check location first for concealed products that could potentially be damaged. Patch, flash, grout, seal, and refinish openings to match adjacent condition.

E. Firestop penetrations made in fire-rated assemblies and seal penetrations made in acoustically rated assemblies.

F. Fastening Hardware:

1. Stillson wrenches, pliers, and other tools that will cause injury to or mar surfaces of rods, nuts, and other parts are prohibited for assembling and tightening nuts.

2. Tighten bolts and nuts firmly and uniformly. Do not overstress threads by excessive force or by oversized wrenches.

3. Lubricate threads of bolts, nuts, and screws with graphite and oil before assembly.

G. Install products in locations that are accessible and that will permit calibration and maintenance from floor, equipment platforms, or catwalks. Where ladders are required for Owner's access, confirm unrestricted ladder placement is possible under occupied condition.

H. Corrosive Environments:

1. Use products that are suitable for environment to which they will be subjected.

2. If possible, avoid or limit use of materials in corrosive environments, including. but not limited to, the following:

a. Laboratory exhaust airstreams.

b. Pool environment and airstreams.

3. Use Type 316 stainless-steel tubing and fittings when in contact with a corrosive environment.

4. When conduit is in contact with a corrosive environment, use Type 316 stainless-steel conduit and fittings or conduit and fittings that are coated with a corrosive-resistant coating that is suitable for environment.

5. Where control devices are located in a corrosive environment and are not corrosive resistant from manufacturer, field install products in a NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure constructed of Type 316L stainless steel.

3.3 ELECTRIC POWER

A. Furnish and install electrical power to products requiring electrical connections.

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 45 OF 53


B. Furnish and install circuit breakers. Comply with requirements in Section 26 28 17

C. Furnish and install power wiring. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19.

3.4 CONTROL VALVES

A. Install pipe reducers for valves smaller than line size. Position reducers as close to valve as possible but at distance to avoid interference and impact to performance. Install with manufacturer-recommended clearance.

B. Install flanges or unions to allow drop-in and -out valve installation.

C. Install drain valves in piping upstream and downstream of each control valve installed in a three-valve manifold and for each control valve larger than NPS 4.

D. Install pressure temperature taps in piping upstream and downstream of each control valve larger than NPS 2.

E. Valve Orientation:

1. Where possible, install globe and ball valves installed in horizontal piping with stems upright and not more than 15 degrees off of vertical, not inverted.

2. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.

3. Where possible, install butterfly valves that are installed in horizontal piping with stems in horizontal position and with low point of disc opening with direction of flow.

F. Clearance:

1. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support of valves that cannot be handled by service personnel without hoisting mechanism.

2. Install valves with at least 12 inches of clear space around valve and between valves and adjacent surfaces.

G. Threaded Valves:

1. Note internal length of threads in valve ends, and proximity of valve internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.

2. Align threads at point of assembly.

3. Apply thread compound to external pipe threads, except where dry seal threading is specified.

4. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Apply wrench on valve end as pipe is being threaded.

H. Flanged Valves:

1. Align flange surfaces parallel.

2. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.

3.5 CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Install smooth transitions, not exceeding 30 degrees, to dampers smaller than adjacent duct. Install transitions as close to damper as possible but at distance to avoid interference and impact to performance. Consult manufacturer for recommended clearance.

B. Clearance:

1. Locate dampers for easy access and provide separate support of dampers that cannot be handled by service personnel without hoisting mechanism.

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 46 OF 53


2. Install dampers with at least 24 inches of clear space on sides of dampers requiring service access.

C. Service Access:

1. Dampers and actuators shall be accessible for visual inspection and service.

2. Install access door(s) in duct or equipment located upstream of damper to allow service personnel to hand clean any portion of damper, linkage, and actuator.

D. Install dampers straight and true, level in all planes, and square in all dimensions. Install supplementary structural steel reinforcement for large multiple-section dampers if factory support alone cannot handle loading.

E. Attach actuator(s) to damper drive shaft.

F. For duct-mounted and equipment-mounted dampers installed outside of equipment, install a visible and accessible indication of damper position from outside.

3.6 INSTRUMENTS, GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Mounting Location:

1. Rough-in: Outline instrument-mounting locations before setting instruments and routing cable, wiring, tubing, and conduit to final location.

2. Install switches and transmitters for air and liquid flow associated with individual air-handling units and connected ductwork and piping near air-handlings units co-located in air-handling unit system control panel, to provide service personnel a single and convenient location for inspection and service.

3. Install liquid flow switches and transmitters for indoor applications in mechanical equipment rooms. Do not locate in user-occupied space unless indicated specifically on Drawings.

4. Install airflow switches and transmitters for indoor applications in mechanical equipment rooms. Do not locate in user-occupied space unless indicated specifically on Drawings.

5. Mount switches and transmitters not required to be mounted within system control panels on walls, floor-supported freestanding pipe stands, or floor-supported structural support frames. Use manufacturer mounting brackets to accommodate field mounting. Securely support and brace products to prevent vibration and movement.

6. Install instruments in liquid, and liquid-sealed-piped services below their process connection point. Slope tubing down to instrument with a slope of 2 percent.

7. Install instruments in dry gas and non-condensable-vapor piped services above their process connection point. Slope process connection lines up to instrument with a minimum slope of 2 percent.

B. Special Mounting Requirements:

1. Protect products installed outdoors from solar radiation, building and wind effect with stand-offs and shields constructed of Type 316 stainless.

2. Temperature instruments having performance impacted by temperature of mounting substrate shall be isolated with an insulating barrier located between instrument and substrate to eliminate effect. Where instruments requiring insulation are located in finished space, conceal insulating barrier in a cover matching the instrument cover.

C. Mounting Height:

1. Mount instruments in user-occupied space to match mounting height of light switches unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Mounting height shall comply with codes and accessibility requirements.

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 47 OF 53


2. Mount switches and transmitters, located in mechanical equipment rooms and other similar space not subject to code, state, and federal accessibility requirements, within a range of 42 to 72 inches above the adjacent floor, grade, or service catwalk or platform.

a. Make every effort to mount at 60 inches.

D. Seal penetrations to ductwork, plenums, and air-moving equipment to comply with duct static-pressure class and leakage and seal classes indicated using neoprene gaskets or grommets.

3.7 TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENT INSTALLATIONS

A. Space Temperature Sensor Installation:

1. Conceal assembly in an electrical box of sufficient size to house sensor and transmitter, if provided.

2. Install electrical box with a faceplate to match sensor cover if sensor cover does not completely cover electrical box.

3. In finished areas, recess electrical box within wall.

4. In unfinished areas, electrical box may be surface mounted if electrical light switches are surface mounted. Use a cast-aluminum electric box for surface-mounted installations.

5. Align electrical box with other electrical devices such as visual alarms and light switches located in the vicinity to provide a neat and well-thought-out arrangement. Where possible, align in both horizontal and vertical axis.

B. Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor Installation:

1. Mount sensor in a discrete location facing north.

2. Protect installed sensor from solar radiation and other influences that could impact performance.

3. If required to have a transmitter, mount transmitter remote from sensor in an accessible and serviceable location indoors.

C. Single-Point Duct Temperature Sensor Installation:

1. Install single-point-type, duct-mounted, supply- and return-air temperature sensors. Install sensors in ducts with sensitive portion of the element installed in center of duct cross section and located to sense near average temperature. Do not exceed 24 inches in sensor length.

2. Install return-air sensor in location that senses return-air temperature without influence from outdoor or mixed air.

3. Rigidly support sensor to duct and seal penetration airtight.

4. If required to have transmitter, mount transmitter remote from sensor at accessible and serviceable location.

D. Averaging Duct Temperature Sensor Installation:

1. Install averaging-type air temperature sensor for temperature sensors located within air-handling units, similar equipment, and large ducts with air tunnel cross-sectional area of 20 sq. ft. and larger.

2. Install sensor length to maintain coverage over entire cross-sectional area. Install multiple sensors where required to maintain the minimum coverage.

3. Fasten and support sensor with manufacturer-furnished clips to keep sensor taut throughout entire length.

4. If required to have transmitter, mount transmitter in an accessible and serviceable location.

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 48 OF 53


E. Low-Limit Air Temperature Switch Installation:

1. Install multiple low-limit switches to maintain coverage over entire cross-sectional area of air tunnel.

2. Fasten and support sensing element with manufacturer-furnished clips to keep element taut throughout entire length.

3. Mount switches outside of airstream at a location and mounting height to provide easy access for switch set-point adjustment and manual reset.

4. Install on entering side of cooling coil unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

F. Liquid Temperature Sensor Installation:

1. Assembly shall include sensor, thermowell and connection head.

2. For pipe NPS 4 and larger, install sensor and thermowell length to extend into pipe between 50 to 75 percent of pipe cross section.

3. For pipe smaller than NPS 4:

a. Install reducers to increase pipe size to NPS 4at point of thermowell installation.

b. For pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3, thermowell and sensor may be installed at pipe elbow or tee to achieve manufacturer-recommended immersion depth in lieu of increasing pipe size.

c. Minimum insertion depth shall be 2-1/2 inches.

4. Install matching thermowell.

5. Fill thermowell with heat-transfer fluid before inserting sensor.

6. Tip of spring-loaded sensors shall contact inside of thermowell.

7. For insulated piping, install thermowells with extension neck to extend beyond face of insulation.

8. Install thermowell in top dead center of horizontal pipe positioned in an accessible location to allow for inspection and replacement. If top dead center location is not possible due to field constraints, install thermowell at location along top half of pipe.

9. For applications with transmitters, mount transmitter remote from sensor in an accessible and serviceable location from floor.

3.8 FLOW INSTRUMENTS INSTALLATION

A. Airflow Sensors:

1. Install sensors in straight sections of duct with manufacturer-recommended straight duct upstream and downstream of sensor.

2. Installed sensors shall be accessible for visual inspection and service. Install access door(s) in duct or equipment located upstream of sensor, to allow service personnel to hand clean sensors.

B. Liquid and Steam Sensors:

1. Install sensors in straight sections of piping with manufacturer-recommended straight piping upstream and downstream of sensor.

2. Alert manufacturer where installation cannot accommodate recommended clearance, and solicit recommendations for field modifications to installation, such as flow straighteners, to improve condition.

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 49 OF 53


3. Install pipe reducers for in-line sensors smaller than line size. Position reducers at distance from sensor to avoid interference and impact on accuracy.

4. Install in-line sensors with flanges or unions to provide drop-in and -out installation.

C. Liquid Flow Meters:

1. Install meters in straight sections of piping with manufacturer-recommended straight piping upstream and downstream of sensor.

2. Install pipe reducers for in-line meters smaller than line size. Install reducers at distance from meter to avoid interference and impact on accuracy.

3. Install in-line meters with flanges or unions to provide drop-in and -out installation.

4. Insertion Meters:

a. Install system process connections full size of meter connection, but not less than NPS 1. Provide stainless-steel bushing if required to mate to system connection.

b. Install meter in top dead center of horizontal pipe positioned in an accessible location to allow for inspection and replacement.

c. In applications where top-dead-center location is not possible due to field constraints, install meter at location along top half of pipe if acceptable by manufacturer for mounting orientation.

D. Liquid Switches:

1. Install system process connection full size of switch connection, but not less than NPS 1. Install stainless-steel bushing if required to mate switch to system connection.

2. Install switch in top dead center of horizontal pipe positioned in an accessible location to allow for inspection and replacement.

3. In applications where top-dead-center location is not possible due to field constraints, install switch at location along top half of pipe if switch is acceptable by manufacturer for mounting orientation.

E. Transmitters:

1. Install airflow transmitters serving an air system in a single location adjacent to or within system control panel.

2. Install liquid flow transmitters, not integral to sensors, in vicinity of sensor. Where multiple flow transmitters serving same system are located in same room, co-locate transmitters by system to provide service personnel a single and convenient location for inspection and service.

3.9 PRESSURE INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION

A. Duct Pressure Sensors:

1. Install sensors using manufacturer's recommended upstream and downstream distances.

2. Unless indicated on Drawings, locate sensors approximately 67 percent of distance of longest hydraulic run. Location of sensors shall be submitted and approved before installation.

3. Install mounting hardware and gaskets to make sensor installation airtight.

4. Route tubing from the sensor to transmitter.

5. Use compression fittings at terminations.

6. Install sensor in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 50 OF 53


7. Support sensor to withstand maximum air velocity, turbulence, and vibration encountered to prevent instrument failure.

B. Outdoor Pressure Sensors:

1. Install roof-mounted sensor in least-noticeable location and as far away from exterior walls as possible.

2. Locate wall-mounted sensor in an inconspicuous location.

3. Submit sensor location for approval before installation.

4. Verify signal from sensor is stable and consistent to all connected transmitters. Modify installation to achieve proper signal.

5. Route outdoor signal pipe full size of sensor connection to transmitters. Install branch connection of size required to match to transmitter.

6. Install sensor signal pipe with dirt leg and drain valve below roof penetration.

7. Insulate signal pipe with flexible elastomeric insulation as required to prevent condensation.

8. Connect roof-mounted signal pipe exposed to outdoors to building grounding system.

C. Air-Pressure Differential Switches:

1. Install air-pressure sensor in system for each switch connection. Install sensor in an accessible location for inspection and replacement.

2. A single sensor may be used to share a common signal to multiple pressure instruments.

3. Install access door in duct and equipment to access sensors that cannot be inspected and replaced from outside.

4. Route NPS 3/8 tubing from sensor to switch connection.

5. Do not mount switches on rotating equipment.

6. Install switches in a location free from vibration, heat, moisture, or adverse effects, which could damage the switch and hinder accurate operation.

7. Install switches in an easily accessible location serviceable from floor.

8. Install switches adjacent to system control panel if within 50 feet; otherwise, locate switch in vicinity of system connection.

D. Liquid-Pressure Differential Switches and Transmitters:

1. Where process connections are located in mechanical equipment room, install switch in convenient and accessible location near system control panel.

2. Where process connections are installed outside mechanical rooms, route processing tubing to mechanical room housing system control panel and locate switch near system control panel.

3. Where multiple switches serving same system are installed in same room, install switches by system to provide service personnel a single and convenient location for inspection and service.

4. System process tubing connection shall be full size of switch connection, but not less than NPS 1/2. Install stainless-steel bushing if required to mate switch to system connection.

5. Connect process tubing from point of system connection and extend to switch.

6. Install isolation valves in process tubing as close to system connection as practical.

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 51 OF 53


7. Install dirt leg and drain valve at each switch connection.

8. Do not mount switches on rotating equipment.

9. Install switches in a location free from vibration, heat, moisture, or adverse effects, which could damage the switch and hinder accurate operation.

10. Install switches in an easily accessible location serviceable from floor.

3.10 CARBON-MONOXIDE MONITORING SYSTEM

A. Install sample points in monitored area to provide accurate measurement of gas concentration.

B. Install exposed sampling points with a finished appearance consistent with other materials in space. Submit proposed products to be installed for review and approval.

C. Individually install each sample point to the carbon-monoxide monitoring system.

D. Install tubing in a minimum size of NPS 3/8.

E. Use compression fittings at connections to equipment.

F. If not indicated on Drawings, locate carbon-monoxide monitoring system in a secured and serviceable location accessible to authorized personnel.

G. Support carbon-monoxide monitoring system from floor or wall. Support floor-mounted systems using a structural channel frame. Provide mounting brackets.

3.11 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect electrical devices and components to electrical grounding system. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 26.

3.12 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Each piece of wire, cable, and tubing shall have the same designation at each end for operators to determine continuity at points of connection. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53.

B. Install engraved phenolic nameplate with valve identification on valve and on face of ceiling directly below valves concealed above ceilings.

3.13 CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

A. Check out installed products before continuity tests, leak tests, and calibration.

B. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.

C. Check instruments for proper installation on direction of elevation, orientation, insertion depth, or other applicable considerations that impact performance.

D. Control Valve Checkout:

1. Check installed products before continuity tests, leak tests, and calibration.

2. Check valves for proper location and accessibility.

3. Check valves for proper installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth, or other applicable considerations that will impact performance.

4. Verify that control valves are installed correctly for flow direction.

5. Verify that valve body attachment is properly secured and sealed.

6. Verify that valve actuator and linkage attachment are secure.

7. Verify that actuator wiring is complete, enclosed, and connected to correct power source.

8. Verify that valve ball, disc, and plug travel are unobstructed.

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 52 OF 53


9. After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before insulating and balancing, inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks. Replace the valve if leaks persist.

E. Control-Damper Checkout:

1. Check installed products before continuity tests, leak tests, and calibration.

2. Check dampers for proper location and accessibility.

3. Check instrument tubing for proper isolation, fittings, slope, dirt legs, drains, material, and support.

4. Verify that control dampers are installed correctly for flow direction.

5. Verify that proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided.

6. Verify that damper frame attachment is properly secured and sealed.

7. Verify that damper actuator and linkage attachment are secure.

8. Verify that actuator wiring is complete, enclosed, and connected to correct power source.

9. Verify that damper blade travel is unobstructed.

F. Flow Instrument Checkout:

1. Verify that sensors are installed correctly with respect to flow direction.

2. Verify that sensor attachment is properly secured and sealed.

3. Verify that processing tubing attachment is secure and isolation valves have been provided.

4. Inspect instrument tag against approved submittal.

5. Verify that recommended upstream and downstream distances have been maintained.

3.14 ADJUSTMENT, CALIBRATION, AND TESTING

A. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers following manufacturer's recommended procedure, from 100 percent open to 100 percent closed back to 100 percent open.

B. Stroke control valves and dampers with pilot positioners. Adjust valve and positioner following manufacturer's recommended procedure, so valve is 100 percent closed, 50 percent closed, and 100 percent open at proper air pressures.

C. Check and document open and close cycle times for applications with a cycle time of less than 30 seconds.

D. For control valves and dampers equipped with positive position indication, check feedback signal at multiple positions to confirm proper position indication.

E. Description:

1. Calibrate each instrument installed that is not factory calibrated and provided with calibration documentation.

2. Provide a written description of proposed field procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of instrument. Submit procedures before calibration and adjustment.

3. For each analog instrument, make a three-point test of calibration for both linearity and accuracy.

4. Equipment and procedures used for calibration shall meet instrument manufacturer's recommendations.

5. Provide diagnostic and test equipment for calibration and adjustment.

SECTION 23 09 13


PAGE 53 OF 53


6. Field instruments and equipment used to test and calibrate installed instruments shall have accuracy at least twice the instrument accuracy being calibrated. For example, an installed instrument with an accuracy of 1 percent shall be checked by an instrument with an accuracy of 0.5 percent.

7. Calibrate each instrument according to instrument instruction manual supplied by manufacturer.

8. If after-calibration-indicated performance cannot be achieved, replace out-of-tolerance instruments.

9. Comply with field-testing requirements and procedures indicated by ASHRAE Guideline 11, "Field Testing of HVAC Control Components," in the absence of specific requirements, and to supplement requirements indicated.

F. Analog Signals:

1. Check analog voltage signals using a precision voltage meter at zero, 50, and 100 percent.

2. Check analog current signals using a precision current meter at zero, 50, and 100 percent.

3. Check resistance signals for temperature sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of operating span using a precision-resistant source.

G. Digital Signals:

1. Check digital signals using a jumper wire.

2. Check digital signals using an ohmmeter to test for contact.

H. Sensors: Check sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

I. Switches: Calibrate switches to make or break contact at set points indicated.

J. Transmitters:

1. Check and calibrate transmitters at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

2. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at zero, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistance source.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 09 23

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC

PAGE 1 OF 67


SECTION 23 09 23 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. DDC system for monitoring and controlling of HVAC systems.


1. Section 23 09 23 Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC.

2. Section 23 09 93 Sequence of Operations for HVAC Control.

3. Section 26 05 83 - Equipment Wiring Connections.

4. Communications Cabling:

a. Section 26 05 23 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for balanced twisted pair communications cable.

5. Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for identification requirements for electrical components.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Algorithm: A logical procedure for solving a recurrent mathematical problem. A prescribed set of well-defined rules or processes for solving a problem in a finite number of steps.

B. Analog: A continuously varying signal value, such as current, flow, pressure, or temperature.

C. BACnet Specific Definitions:

1. BACnet: Building Automation Control Network Protocol, ASHRAE 135. A communications protocol allowing devices to communicate data over and services over a network.

2. BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBs): BIBB defines a small portion of BACnet functionality that is needed to perform a particular task. BIBBs are combined to build the BACnet functional requirements for a device.

3. BACnet/IP: Defines and allows using a reserved UDP socket to transmit BACnet messages over IP networks. A BACnet/IP network is a collection of one or more IP subnetworks that share the same BACnet network number.

4. BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL): Organization responsible for testing products for compliance with ASHRAE 135, operated under direction of BACnet International.

5. PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement): Written document that identifies the particular options specified by BACnet that are implemented in a device.

D. Binary: Two-state signal where a high signal level represents ON" or "OPEN" condition and a low signal level represents "OFF" or "CLOSED" condition. "Digital" is sometimes used interchangeably with "Binary" to indicate a two-state signal.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 2 OF 67


E. Controller: Generic term for any standalone, microprocessor-based, digital controller residing on a network, used for local or global control. Three types of controllers are indicated: Network Controller, Programmable Application Controller, and Application-Specific Controller.

F. Control System Integrator: An entity that assists in expansion of existing enterprise system and support of additional operator interfaces to I/O being added to existing enterprise system.

G. COV: Changes of value.

H. DDC System Provider: Authorized representative of, and trained by, DDC system manufacturer and responsible for execution of DDC system Work indicated.

I. Distributed Control: Processing of system data is decentralized and control decisions are made at subsystem level. System operational programs and information are provided to remote subsystems and status is reported back. On loss of communication, subsystems shall be capable of operating in a standalone mode using the last best available data.

J. DOCSIS: Data-Over Cable Service Interface Specifications.

K. Gateway: Bidirectional protocol translator that connects control systems that use different communication protocols.

L. HLC: Heavy load conditions.

M. I/O: System through which information is received and transmitted. I/O refers to analog input (AI), binary input (BI), analog output (AO) and binary output (BO). Analog signals are continuous and represent control influences such as flow, level, moisture, pressure, and temperature. Binary signals convert electronic signals to digital pulses (values) and generally represent two-position operating and alarm status. "Digital," (DI and (DO), is sometimes used interchangeably with "Binary," (BI) and (BO), respectively.

N. LAN: Local area network.

O. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.

P. Mobile Device: A data-enabled phone or tablet computer capable of connecting to a cellular data network and running a native control application or accessing a web interface.

Q. Modbus TCP/IP: An open protocol for exchange of process data.

R. MS/TP: Master-slave/token-passing, IEE 8802-3. Datalink protocol LAN option that uses twisted-pair wire for low-speed communication.

S. MTBF: Mean time between failures.

T. Network Controller: Digital controller, which supports a family of programmable application controllers and application-specific controllers, that communicates on peer-to-peer network for transmission of global data.

U. Network Repeater: Device that receives data packet from one network and rebroadcasts it to another network. No routing information is added to protocol.

V. Peer to Peer: Networking architecture that treats all network stations as equal partners.

W. POT: Portable operator's terminal.

X. PUE: Performance usage effectiveness.

Y. RAM: Random access memory.

Z. RF: Radio frequency.

AA. Router: Device connecting two or more networks at network layer.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 3 OF 67


BB. Server: Computer used to maintain system configuration, historical and programming database.

CC. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet protocol.

DD. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.

EE. USB: Universal Serial Bus.

FF. User Datagram Protocol (UDP): This protocol assumes that the IP is used as the underlying protocol.

GG. VAV: Variable air volume.

HH. WLED: White light emitting diode.

1.4 COORDINATION


1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. Conduct a pre-installation coordination conference before submitting on the Building Management System. Include at a minimum, the Construction Manager, owner’s representative and the mechanical design engineer.

B. This meeting will assist all representatives in coordinating and refining the installation of the Building Management System. Include at a minimum the following items:

1. Proposed control panel locations and approximate sizes.

2. Understanding of who is providing and installing control related devices. i.e. factory provided controls, Variable Frequency Drives (VFD’s), air flow stations, any additional flow devices, phase or power monitoring equipment and control dampers and actuators.

3. Use of conduit and surface mounted raceway versus concealment in walls and ceiling areas.

4. Room temperature sensor types and proposed locations for each type. i.e. plate type, setpoint adjust, unoccupied override and any display type sensors.

a. Understand plate-type sensor application in corridors, entrances, lobbies, gymnasium and cafeterias, auditoriums and other public areas.

b. Define setpoint adjust application (where owner prefers and engineer recommends), types and preferences for owner and/or BMS contractor.

c. Define override button application, type and permitted operation.

5. CO2 and humidity sensor types, quantity and placement.

6. Control sequence details and questions.

7. Proposed time schedules and building layout. How are areas grouped, how will override and occupancy sensors interact with system?

8. Describe control integration to lighting control system, boilers, chillers, VFD’s, power monitoring, natural gas monitoring, snowmelt systems, generator, fire alarm system. How and what protocols.

9. Interface to owner’s network, server type and who is providing.

10. Graphic screen examples and sequencing, navigation paths, point designation and display, point overrides, time schedule display and change procedures. Will the owner have ability to modify setpoints, parameters and graphic screens?

11. How local and remote access to graphics is accomplished. Phone, tablet and computer interface descriptions.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 4 OF 67


12. Pre-commissioning control start-up procedures contractor plans to implement.

13. Describe understanding of interaction and cooperation with TAB and commissioning process.

14. Any additional clarification requested from BMS contractor, owner, design engineer or CM.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product include the following:

1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

2. Operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories indicating process operating range, accuracy over range, control signal over range, default control signal with loss of power, calibration data specific to each unique application, electrical power requirements, and limitations of ambient operating environment, including temperature and humidity.

3. Product description with complete technical data, performance curves, and product specification sheets.

4. Installation, operation and maintenance instructions including factors effecting performance.

5. Bill of materials of indicating quantity, manufacturer, and extended model number for each unique product.

6. When manufacturer's product datasheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product model, clearly indicate and highlight only applicable information.

7. Each submitted piece of product literature shall clearly cross reference specification and drawings that submittal is to cover.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. General Requirements:

a. Include cover drawing with Project name, location, Owner, Engineer, Contractor and issue date with each Shop Drawings submission.

b. Include a drawing index sheet listing each drawing number and title that matches information in each title block.

c. Drawings Size: 24x36.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details where applicable.

3. Include details of product assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

4. Plan Drawings indicating the following:

a. Screened backgrounds of walls, structural grid lines, HVAC equipment, ductwork and piping.

b. Room names and numbers with coordinated placement to avoid interference with control products indicated.

c. Each desktop workstation, server, gateway, router, DDC controller, control panel instrument connecting to DDC controller, and damper and valve connecting to DDC controller, if included in Project.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 5 OF 67


d. Exact placement of products in rooms, ducts, and piping to reflect proposed installed condition.

e. Information, drawn to minimum scale, of 1/16”=1’-0”.

f. Proposed routing of wiring, cabling, and conduit, coordinated with building services for review before installation.

5. Schematic drawings for each controlled HVAC system indicating the following:

a. I/O points labeled with point names shown. Indicate instrument range, normal operating set points, and alarm set points. Indicate fail position of each damper and valve, if included in Project.

b. I/O listed in table format showing point name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and cross-reference to product data sheet number.

c. A graphic showing location of control I/O in proper relationship to HVAC system.

d. Wiring diagram with each I/O point having a unique identification and indicating labels for all wiring terminals.

e. Unique identification of each I/O that shall be consistently used between different drawings showing same point.

f. Elementary wiring diagrams of controls for HVAC equipment motor circuits including interlocks, switches, relays and interface to DDC controllers.

g. Narrative sequence of operation.

h. Graphic sequence of operation, showing all inputs and output logical blocks.

6. DDC system network riser diagram indicating the following:

a. Each device connected to network with unique identification for each.

b. Interconnection of each different network in DDC system.

c. For each network, indicate communication protocol, speed and physical means of interconnecting network devices, such as copper cable type, or optical fiber cable type. Indicate raceway type and size for each.

d. Each network port for connection of an operator workstation or other type of operator interface with unique identification for each.

7. DDC system electrical power riser diagram indicating the following:

a. Each point of connection to field power with requirements (volts/phase//hertz/amperes/connection type) listed for each.

b. Each control power supply including, as applicable, transformers, power-line conditioners, transient voltage suppression and high filter noise units, DC power supplies, and UPS units with unique identification for each.

c. Each product requiring power with requirements (volts/phase//hertz/amperes/connection type) listed for each.

d. Power wiring type and size, race type, and size for each.

8. Monitoring and control signal diagrams indicating the following:

a. Control signal cable and wiring between controllers and I/O.

b. Point-to-point schematic wiring diagrams for each product.

c. Control signal wiring to sensors, switches and transmitters.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 6 OF 67


d. Process signal wiring to sensors, switches and transmitters.

9. Color graphics indicating the following:

a. Itemized list of color graphic displays to be provided.

b. For each system type, a true color copy showing layout of pictures, graphics and data to be displayed.

c. Intended operator access between related hierarchical display screens.

C. System Description:

1. Full description of DDC system architecture, network configuration, operator interfaces and peripherals, servers, controller types and applications, gateways, routers and other network devices, and power supplies.

2. System and product operation under each potential failure condition including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Loss of power.

b. Loss of network communication signal.

c. Loss of controller signals to inputs and outpoints.

d. Operator workstation failure.

e. Server failure.

f. Gateway failure.

g. Network failure

h. Controller failure.

i. Instrument failure.

j. Control damper and valve actuator failure.

3. Description of testing plans and procedures.

4. Description of Owner training.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For DDC system to include in emergency, operation and maintenance manuals.

1. Include the following:

a. Project Record Drawings of as-built versions of submittal Shop Drawings provided in electronic PDF format.

b. Testing and commissioning reports and checklists of completed final versions of reports, checklists, and trend logs.

c. As-built versions of submittal Product Data.

d. Names, addresses, e-mail addresses and 24-hour telephone numbers of Installer and service representatives for DDC system and products.

e. Operator's manual with procedures for operating control systems including logging on and off, handling alarms, producing point reports, trending data, overriding computer control and changing set points and variables.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 7 OF 67


f. Programming manuals with description of programming language and syntax, of statements for algorithms and calculations used, of point database creation and modification, of program creation and modification, and of editor use.

g. Engineering, installation, and maintenance manuals that explain how to:

1) Design and install new points, panels, and other hardware.

2) Perform preventive maintenance and calibration.

3) Debug hardware problems.

4) Repair or replace hardware.

h. Documentation of all programs created using custom programming language including set points, tuning parameters, and object database.

i. Backup copy of graphic files, programs, and database on electronic media such as DVDs.

j. List of recommended spare parts with part numbers and suppliers.

k. Complete original-issue documentation, installation, and maintenance information for furnished third-party hardware including computer equipment and sensors.

l. Complete original-issue copies of furnished software, including operating systems, custom programming language, operator workstation software, and graphics software.

m. Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documents.

n. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for system components, including schedule of tasks such as inspection, cleaning, and calibration; time between tasks; and task descriptions.

o. Owner training materials.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials and parts that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

B. Include product manufacturers' recommended parts lists for proper product operation over four-year period following warranty period. Parts list shall be indicated for each year.


A. DDC System Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. Nationally recognized manufacturer of DDC systems and products.

2. DDC systems with similar requirements to those indicated for a continuous period of five years within time of bid.

3. DDC systems and products that have been successfully tested and in use on at least five past projects.

4. Having complete published catalog literature, installation, operation and maintenance manuals for all products intended for use.

5. Having full-time in-house employees for the following:

a. Product research and development.

b. Product and application engineering.

c. Product manufacturing, testing and quality control.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 8 OF 67


d. Technical support for DDC system installation training, commissioning and troubleshooting of installations.

e. Owner operator training.

B. DDC System Provider Qualifications:

1. Authorized representative of, and trained by, DDC system manufacturer.

2. In-place facility located within 50 miles of Project.

3. Demonstrated past experience with installation of DDC system products being installed for period within five consecutive years before time of bid.

4. Demonstrated past experience on five projects of similar complexity, scope and value.

5. Each person assigned to Project shall have demonstrated past experience.

6. Staffing resources of competent and experienced full-time employees that are assigned to execute work according to schedule.

7. Service and maintenance staff assigned to support Project during warranty period.

8. Product parts inventory to support on-going DDC system operation for a period of not less than 5 years after Substantial Completion.

9. DDC system manufacturer's backing to take over execution of Work if necessary to comply with requirements indicated. Include Project-specific written letter, signed by manufacturer's corporate officer, if requested.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace products, including software, that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction in service to Owner.

2. Include updates or upgrades to software and firmware if necessary to resolve deficiencies and including updating all software at the completion of the last phase of construction.

a. Install updates only after receiving Owner's written authorization.

3. Warranty service shall occur during normal business hours and commence within 16 hours of Owner's warranty service request.

4. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

5. Alternate Warranty Period: Provide alternate cost for years 3-5 from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DDC SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS


1. Building Automated Systems and Services (BASS).

2. Johnson Controls, Inc. Corporate Office

3. Schneider Electric USA, Inc.

4. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. Corporate Office

5. Grand Valley Automation.





SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 9 OF 67


6. Trane. Corporate Office

2.2 DDC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Microprocessor-based monitoring and control including analog/digital conversion and program logic. A control loop or subsystem in which digital and analog information is received and processed by a microprocessor, and digital control signals are generated based on control algorithms and transmitted to field devices to achieve a set of predefined conditions.

1. DDC system shall be Tridium Niagara 4 based system utilizing all open NIC Tridium products and consist of a high-speed, peer-to-peer network of distributed DDC controllers, other network devices, operator interfaces, and software. All JACE controllers shall be as manufactured by Vykon.

B. Maintain or transfer all existing system setpoints (damper positions, pressure setpoints, temperature setpoints, fan speeds etc).

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.3 WEB ACCESS

A. DDC system shall be Web based.

1. Web-Based Access to DDC System:

a. DDC system software shall be based on server thin-client architecture, designed around open standards of Web technology. DDC system server shall be accessed using a Web browser over DDC system network, using Owner's LAN, and remotely over Internet through Owner's LAN.

b. Intent of thin-client architecture is to provide operators complete access to DDC system via a Web browser. No special software other than a Web browser shall be required to access graphics, point displays, and trends; to configure trends, points, and controllers; and to edit programming.

c. Web access shall be password protected.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Products installed in ducts, equipment, and return-air paths shall comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

B. DDC System Speed:

1. Response Time of Connected I/O:

a. AI point values connected to DDC system shall be updated at least every five seconds for use by DDC controllers. Points used globally shall also comply with this requirement.

b. BI point values connected to DDC system shall be updated at least every five seconds for use by DDC controllers. Points used globally shall also comply with this requirement.

c. AO points connected to DDC system shall begin to respond to controller output commands within two second(s). Global commands shall also comply with this requirement.


SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 10 OF 67


d. BO point values connected to DDC system shall respond to controller output commands within two second(s). Global commands shall also comply with this requirement.

2. Display of Connected I/O:

a. Analog point COV connected to DDC system shall be updated and displayed at least every 10 seconds for use by operator.

b. Binary point COV connected to DDC system shall be updated and displayed at least every 10 seconds for use by operator.

c. Alarms of analog and digital points connected to DDC system shall be displayed within 30 seconds of activation or change of state.

d. Graphic display refresh shall update within eight seconds.

e. Point change of values and alarms displayed from workstation to workstation when multiple operators are viewing from multiple workstations shall not exceed graphic refresh rate indicated.

C. Network Bandwidth: Design each network of DDC system to include at least 30 percent available spare bandwidth with DDC system operating under normal and heavy load conditions indicated. Calculate bandwidth usage, and apply a safety factor to ensure that requirement is satisfied when subjected to testing under worst case conditions.

D. DDC System Data Storage:

1. Include capability to archive not less than 36 consecutive months of historical data for all I/O points connected to system, including alarms, event histories, transaction logs, trends and other information indicated.

2. Local Storage:

a. Provide server with data storage indicated. Server(s) shall use IT industry standard database platforms and be capable of functions described in "DDC Data Access" Paragraph.

E. DDC Data Access:

1. When logged into the system, operator shall be able to also interact with any DDC controller connected to DDC system as required for functional operation of DDC system.

2. System(s) shall be used for application configuration; for archiving, reporting and trending of data; for operator transaction archiving and reporting; for network information management; for alarm annunciation; and for operator interface tasks and controls application management.

F. Future Expandability:

1. DDC system size shall be expandable to an ultimate capacity of at least two times total I/O points indicated.

2. Additional DDC controllers, I/O and associated wiring shall be all that is needed to achieve ultimate capacity. Initial network infrastructure shall be designed and installed to support ultimate capacity.

3. Operator interfaces installed initially shall not require hardware and software additions and revisions for ultimate capacity.

G. Input Point Displayed Accuracy: Input point displayed values shall meet following end-to-end overall system accuracy, including errors associated with meter, sensor, transmitter, lead wire or cable, and analog to digital conversion.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 11 OF 67


1. Energy: Within 5 percent of reading.

2. Flow:

a. Air: Within 5 percent of design flow rate.

b. Water: Within 2 percent of design flow rate.

c. Steam: Within 5 percent of design flow rate.

3. Gas:

a. Carbon Dioxide: Within 50 ppm.

b. Carbon Monoxide: Within 5 percent of reading.

c. Oxygen: Within 5 percent of reading.

d. Refrigerant: Within 50 ppm.

4. Pressure: 1 percent of instrument range.

5. Speed: Within 10 percent of reading.

6. Temperature, Dry Bulb: Within 1 deg F (Temperature Difference: Within 0.25 deg F.

7. Temperature, Wet Bulb: Within 1 deg F.

H. Precision of I/O Reported Values: Values reported in database and displayed shall have following precision:

1. Current:

a. Milliamperes: Nearest 1/100th of a milliampere.

b. Amperes: Nearest 1/10th of an ampere up to 100 A; nearest ampere for 100 A and more.

2. Energy:

a. Electric Power:

1) Rate (Watts): Nearest 1/10th of a watt through 1000 W.

2) Rate (Kilowatts): Nearest 1/10th of a kilowatt through 1000 kW; nearest kilowatt above 1000 kW.

3) Usage (Kilowatt-Hours): Nearest kilowatt through 10,000 kW; nearest 10 kW between 10,000 and 100,000 kW; nearest 100 kW for above 100,000 kW.

b. Thermal, Rate:

1) Heating: For Btu/h, nearest Btu/h up to 1000 Btu/h; nearest 10 Btu/h between 1000 and 10,000 Btu/h; nearest 100 Btu/h for above 10,000 Btu/h. For Mbh, round to nearest Mbh up to 1000 Mbh; nearest 10 Mbh between 1000 and 10,000 Mbh; nearest 100 Mbh above 10,000 Mbh.

2) Cooling: For tons, nearest ton up to 1000 tons; nearest 10 tons between 1000 and 10,000 tons; nearest 100 tons above 10,000 tons.

c. Thermal, Usage:

1) Heating: For Btu, nearest Btu up to 1000 Btu; nearest 10 Btu between 1000 and 10,000 Btu; nearest 100 Btu for above 10,000 Btu. For Mbtu, round to nearest Mbtu up to 1000 Mbtu; nearest 10 Mbtu between 1000 and 10,000 Mbtu; nearest 100 Mbtu above 10,000 Mbtu.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 12 OF 67


2) Cooling: For ton-hours, nearest ton-hours up to 1000 ton-hours; nearest 10 ton-hours between 1000 and 10,000 ton-hours; nearest 100 tons above 10,000 tons.

3. Flow:

a. Air: Nearest 1/10th of a cfm through 100 cfm; nearest cfm between 100 and 1000 cfm; nearest 10 cfm between 1000 and 10,000 cfm; nearest 100 cfm above 10,000 cfm.

b. Water: Nearest 1/10th gpm through 100 gpm; nearest gpm between 100 and 1000 gpm; nearest 10 gpm between 1000 and 10,000 gpm; nearest 100 gpm above 10,000 gpm.

c. Steam: Nearest 1/10th lb/hr through 100 lbs/hr; nearest lbs/hr between 100 and 1000 lbs/hr; nearest 10 lbs/hr above 1000 lbs/hr.

4. Gas:

a. Carbon Dioxide (ppm): Nearest ppm.

b. Carbon Monoxide (ppm): Nearest ppm.

c. Oxygen (Percentage): Nearest 1/10th of 1 percent.

d. Refrigerant (ppm): Nearest ppm.

5. Speed:

a. Rotation (rpm): Nearest 1 rpm.

b. Velocity: Nearest 1/10th fpm through 100 fpm; nearest fpm between 100 and 1000 fpm; nearest 10 fpm above 1000 fpm.

6. Position, Dampers and Valves (Percentage Open): Nearest 1 percent.

7. Pressure:

a. Air, Ducts and Equipment: Nearest 1/10th in. w.c.

b. Space: Nearest 1/100th in. w.c.

c. Steam: Nearest 1/10th psig through 100 psig; nearest psig above 100 psig.

d. Water: Nearest 1/10 psig through 100 psig; nearest psig above 100 psig.

8. Temperature:

a. Air, Ducts and Equipment: Nearest 1/10th of a degree.

b. Outdoor: Nearest degree.

c. Space: Nearest 1/10th of a degree.

d. Chilled Water: Nearest 1/10th of a degree.

e. Condenser Water: Nearest 1/10th of a degree.

f. Heating Hot Water: Nearest degree.

g. Heat Recovery Runaround: Nearest 1/10th of a degree.

h. Steam: Nearest degree.

9. Voltage: Nearest 1/10 volt up to 100 V; nearest volt above 100 V.

I. Control Stability: Control variables indicated within the following limits:

1. Energy: Within 5 percent of reading.

2. Flow:

a. Air: Within 5 percent of design flow rate.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 13 OF 67


b. Water: Within 2 percent of design flow rate.

3. Gas:

a. Carbon Dioxide: Within 50 ppm.

b. Carbon Monoxide: Within 5 percent of reading.

c. Oxygen: Within 5 percent of reading.

d. Refrigerant: Within 50 ppm.

4. Pressure: 1 percent of instrument range.

5. Speed: Within 10 percent of reading.

6. Temperature, Dry Bulb: Within 1 deg F (Temperature Difference: Within 0.25 deg F.

7. Temperature, Wet Bulb: Within 1 deg F.

J. Environmental Conditions for Controllers, Gateways, Routers Instruments and Actuators:

1. Products shall operate without performance degradation under ambient environmental temperature, pressure and humidity conditions encountered for installed location.

a. If product alone cannot comply with requirement, install product in a protective enclosure that is isolated and protected from conditions impacting performance. Enclosure shall be internally insulated, electrically heated, cooled and ventilated as required by product and application.

2. Products shall be protected with enclosures satisfying the following minimum requirements unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Products not available with integral enclosures complying with requirements indicated shall be housed in protective secondary enclosures. Installed location shall dictate the following NEMA 250 enclosure requirements:

a. Outdoors: Type 4X.

b. Indoors: Type 2.

c. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Type 4.

d. Localized Areas Exposed to Washdown: Type 4X.

e. Hazardous Locations: Explosion-proof rating for condition.

K. Backup Power Source:

1. HVAC systems and equipment served by a backup power source shall have associated DDC system products that control such systems and equipment also served from a backup power source.

L. Continuity of Operation after Electric Power Interruption:

1. Equipment and associated factory-installed controls, field-installed controls, electrical equipment, and power supply connected to building normal and backup power systems shall automatically return equipment and associated controls to operating state occurring immediately before loss of normal power, without need for manual intervention by operator when power is restored either through backup power source or through normal power if restored before backup power is brought online.

2.5 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. System architecture shall consist of no more than two or three levels of LANs.

1. Level one LAN shall connect network controllers and operator server.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 14 OF 67


2. Level two LAN shall connect programmable application controllers to other programmable application controllers, and to network controllers.

3. Level two or Level three LAN shall connect application-specific controllers to programmable application controllers and network controllers.

B. Minimum Data Transfer and Communication Speed:

1. LAN Connecting Operator Workstations and Network Controllers: 2.5 Mbps.

2. LAN Connecting Programmable Application Controllers: 1000 kbps.

3. LAN Connecting Application-Specific Controllers: 76,800 bps.

C. DDC system shall consist of dedicated and separated LANs that are not shared with other building systems and tenant data and communication networks.

D. System architecture shall be modular and have inherent ability to expand to not less than two times system size indicated with no impact to performance indicated.

E. System architecture shall perform modifications without having to remove and replace existing network equipment.

F. Number of LANs and associated communication shall be transparent to operator. All I/O points residing on any LAN shall be capable of global sharing between all system LANs.

G. System design shall eliminate dependence on any single device for system alarm reporting and control execution. Each controller shall operate independently by performing its' own control, alarm management and historical data collection.

2.6 DDC SYSTEM OPERATOR INTERFACES

A. Operator Means of System Access: Operator shall be able to access entire DDC system through any of multiple means, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Desktop and portable workstation with hardwired connection through LAN port.

2. Portable operator terminal with hardwired connection through LAN port.

3. Portable operator workstation with wireless connection through LAN router.

4. Mobile device and application with secured wireless connection through LAN router or cellular data service.

5. Remote connection through web access.

B. Access to system, regardless of operator means used, shall be transparent to operator.

C. Network Ports: For hardwired connection of desktop or portable workstation. Network port shall be easily accessible, properly protected, clearly labeled, and installed at the following locations:

1. Each mechanical equipment room.

2. Each boiler room.

3. Each chiller room or outdoor chiller yard.

4. Each different roof level with roof-mounted air-handling units or rooftop units.

5. Each Custodial Office.

D. Desktop Workstations:

1. Connect to DDC system Level one LAN through a communications port directly on LAN or through a communications port on a DDC controller.

2. Able to communicate with any device located on any DDC system LAN.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 15 OF 67


E. Portable Workstations:

1. Connect to DDC system Level one LAN through a communications port directly on LAN or through a communications port on a DDC controller.

2. Able to communicate with any device located on any DDC system LAN.

3. Connect to DDC system Level two or Level three LAN through a communications port on an application-specific controller, or a room temperature sensor connected to an application-specific controller.

4. Connect to system through a wireless router connected to Level one LAN.

5. Connect to system through a cellular data service.

6. Portable workstation shall be able to communicate with any device connected to any system LAN regardless of point of physical connection to system.

7. Monitor, program, schedule, adjust set points, and report capabilities of I/O connected anywhere in system.

8. Have dynamic graphic displays that are identical to desktop workstations.

F. Mobile Device:

1. Connect to system through a wireless router connected to LAN and cellular data service.

2. Able to communicate with any DDC controller connected to DDC system using secure web access.

G. Critical Alarm Reporting:

1. Operator-selected critical alarms shall be sent by DDC system to notify operator of critical alarms that require immediate attention.

2. DDC system shall send alarm notification to multiple recipients that are assigned for each alarm.

3. DDC system shall notify recipients by any or all means, including e-mail, text message and prerecorded phone message to mobile and landline phone numbers.

H. Simultaneous Operator Use: Capable of accommodating up to 10 simultaneous operators that are accessing DDC system through any one of operator interfaces indicated.

2.7 NETWORKS

A. Acceptable networks for connecting workstations, mobile devices, and network controllers include the following:

1. ATA 878.1, ARCNET.

2. IP.

3. IEEE 8802-3, Ethernet.

2.8 NETWORK COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL

A. Network communication protocol(s) used throughout entire DDC system shall be open to Owner and available to other companies for use in making future modifications to DDC system.

B. ASHRAE 135 Protocol:

1. ASHRAE 135 communication protocol shall be sole and native protocol used throughout entire DDC system.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 16 OF 67


2. DDC system shall not require use of gateways except to integrate HVAC equipment and other building systems and equipment, not required to use ASHRAE 135 communication protocol.

3. If used, gateways shall connect to DDC system using ASHRAE 135 communication protocol and Project object properties and read/write services indicated by interoperability schedule.

4. Operator workstations, controllers and other network devices shall be tested and listed by BACnet Testing Laboratories.

2.9 SERVERS

A. Description: x86 based permanently installed computer used for client-server computing.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Dell Inc.

2. Hewlett-Packard.

C. Mounting: Tower able to be rack-mounted.

D. Power: Single power supply, minimum 300 W.

E. Performance Requirements:

1. Performance requirements shall comply with owner technology standards but may dictate equipment exceeding minimum requirements indicated.

2. Energy Star compliant.

3. Color, flat-screen display.

4. Keyboard and mouse.

5. Next-day on-site warranty for two-year period following Substantial Completion.

F. Servers shall include the following:

1. Full-feature backup server (server and backup minimum requirement).

2. Software licenses.

3. Cable installation between server(s) and network.

G. Web Server:

1. If required to be separate, include Web server hardware and software to match, except backup server is not required.

2. Firewalls between server Web and networks.

3. Password protection for access to server from Web server.

4. Cable installation between the server(s) and building Ethernet network.

H. Power each server through aUPS unit.

2.10 SYSTEM SOFTWARE

A. System Software Minimum Requirements:

1. Real-time multitasking and multiuser 64-bit operating system that allows concurrent multiple operator workstations operating and concurrent execution of multiple real-time programs and custom program development.

2. Operating system shall be capable of operating DOS and Microsoft Windows applications.



SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 17 OF 67


3. Database management software shall manage all data on an integrated and non-redundant basis. Additions and deletions to database shall be without detriment to existing data. Include cross linkages so no data required by a program can be deleted by an operator until that data have been deleted from respective programs.

4. Network communications software shall manage and control multiple network communications to provide exchange of global information and execution of global programs.

5. Operator interface software shall include day-to-day operator transaction processing, alarm and report handling, operator privilege level and data segregation control, custom programming, and online data modification capability.

6. Scheduling software shall schedule centrally based time and event, temporary, and exception day programs.

B. Operator Interface Software:

1. Minimize operator training through use of English language prorating and English language point identification.

2. Minimize use of a typewriter-style keyboard through use of a pointing device similar to a mouse.

3. Operator sign-off shall be a manual operation or, if no keyboard or mouse activity takes place, an automatic sign-off.

4. Automatic sign-off period shall be programmable from one to 60 minutes in one-minute increments on a per operator basis.

5. Operator sign-on and sign-off activity shall be recorded and sent to printer.

6. Security Access:

a. Operator access to DDC system shall be under password control.

b. An alphanumeric password shall be field assignable to each operator.

c. Operators shall be able to access DDC system by entry of proper password.

d. Operator password shall be same regardless of which computer or other interface means is used.

e. Additions or changes made to passwords shall be updated automatically.

f. Each operator shall be assigned an access level to restrict access to data and functions the operator is cable of performing.

g. Software shall have at least five access levels.

h. Each menu item shall be assigned an access level so that a one-for-one correspondence between operator assigned access level(s) and menu item access level(s) is required to gain access to menu item.

i. Display menu items to operator with those capable of access highlighted. Menu and operator access level assignments shall be online programmable and under password control.

7. Data Segregation:

a. Include data segregation for control of specific data routed to a workstation, to an operator or to a specific output device, such as a printer.

b. Include at least 32 segregation groups.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 18 OF 67


c. Segregation groups shall be selectable such as "fire points," "fire points on second floor," "space temperature points," "HVAC points," and so on.

d. Points shall be assignable to multiple segregation groups. Display and output of data to printer or monitor shall occur where there is a match of operator or peripheral segregation group assignment and point segregations.

e. Alarms shall be displayed and printed at each peripheral to which segregation allows, but only those operators assigned to peripheral and having proper authorization level will be allowed to acknowledge alarms.

f. Operators and peripherals shall be assignable to multiple segregation groups and all assignments are to be online programmable and under password control.

8. Operators shall be able to perform commands including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Start or stop selected equipment.

b. Adjust set points.

c. Add, modify, and delete time programming.

d. Enable and disable process execution.

e. Lock and unlock alarm reporting for each point.

f. Enable and disable totalization for each point.

g. Enable and disable trending for each point.

h. Override control loop set points.

i. Enter temporary override schedules.

j. Define holiday schedules.

k. Change time and date.

l. Enter and modify analog alarm limits.

m. Enter and modify analog warning limits.

n. View limits.

o. Enable and disable demand limiting.

p. Enable and disable duty cycle.

q. Display logic programming for each control sequence.

9. Reporting:

a. Generated automatically and manually.

b. Sent to displays, printers and disk files.

c. Types of Reporting:

1) General listing of points.

2) List points currently in alarm.

3) List of off-line points.

4) List points currently in override status.

5) List of disabled points.

6) List points currently locked out.

7) List of items defined in a "Follow-Up" file.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 19 OF 67


8) List weekly schedules.

9) List holiday programming.

10) List of limits and deadbands.

10. Summaries: For specific points, for a logical point group, for an operator selected group(s), or for entire system without restriction due to hardware configuration.

C. Graphic Interface Software:

1. Include a full interactive graphical selection means of accessing and displaying system data to operator. Include at least five levels with the penetration path operator assignable (for example, site, building, floor, air-handling unit, and supply temperature loop). Native language descriptors assigned to menu items are to be operator defined and modifiable under password control.

2. Include a hierarchical-linked dynamic graphic operator interface for accessing and displaying system data and commanding and modifying equipment operation. Interface shall use a pointing device with pull-down or penetrating menus, color and animation to facilitate operator understanding of system.

3. Include at least 10 levels of graphic penetration with the hierarchy operator assignable.

4. Descriptors for graphics, points, alarms and such shall be modified through operator's workstation under password control.

5. Graphic displays shall be online user definable and modifiable using the hardware and software provided.

6. Data to be displayed within a graphic shall be assignable regardless of physical hardware address, communication or point type.

7. Graphics are to be online programmable and under password control.

8. Points may be assignable to multiple graphics where necessary to facilitate operator understanding of system operation.

9. Graphics shall also contain software points.

10. Penetration within a graphic hierarchy shall display each graphic name as graphics are selected to facilitate operator understanding.

11. Back-trace feature shall permit operator to move upward in the hierarchy using a pointing device. Back trace shall show all previous penetration levels. Include operator with option of showing each graphic full screen size with back trace as horizontal header or by showing a "stack" of graphics, each with a back trace.

12. Display operator accessed data on the monitor.

13. Operator shall select further penetration using pointing device to click on a site, building, floor, area, equipment, and so on. Defined and linked graphic below that selection shall then be displayed.

14. Include operator with means to directly access graphics without going through penetration path.

15. Dynamic data shall be assignable to graphics.

16. Display points (physical and software) with dynamic data provided by DDC system with appropriate text descriptors, status or value, and engineering unit.

17. Use color, rotation, or other highly visible means, to denote status and alarm states. Color shall be variable for each class of points, as chosen by operator.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 20 OF 67


18. Points shall be dynamic with operator adjustable update rates on a per point basis from one second to over a minute.

19. For operators with appropriate privilege, points shall be commanded directly from display using pointing device.

a. For an analog command point such as set point, current conditions and limits shall be displayed and operator can position new set point using pointing device.

b. For a digital command point such as valve position, valve shall show its current state such as open or closed and operator could select alternative position using pointing device.

c. Keyboard equivalent shall be available for those operators with that preference.

20. Operator shall be able to split or resize viewing screen into quadrants to show one graphic on one quadrant of screen and other graphics or spreadsheet, bar chart, word processing, curve plot and other information on other quadrants on screen. This feature shall allow real-time monitoring of one part of system while displaying other parts of system or data to better facilitate overall system operation.

21. Help Features:

a. On-line context-sensitive help utility to facilitate operator training and understanding.

b. Bridge to further explanation of selected keywords. Document shall contain text and graphics to clarify system operation.

1) If help feature does not have ability to bridge on keywords for more information, a complete set of user manuals shall be provided in an indexed word-processing program, which shall run concurrently with operating system software.

c. Available for Every Menu Item:

1) Index items for each system menu item.

22. Graphic generation software shall allow operator to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays.

a. Include libraries of symbols depicting HVAC symbols such as fans, coils, filters, dampers, valves pumps, and electrical symbols similar to those indicated.

b. Graphic development package shall use a pointing device in conjunction with a drawing program to allow operator to perform the following:

1) Define background screens.

2) Define connecting lines and curves.

3) Locate, orient and size descriptive text.

4) Define and display colors for all elements.

5) Establish correlation between symbols or text and associated system points or other displays.

D. Project-Specific Graphics: Graphics documentation including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Site plan showing each building, and additional site elements, which are being controlled or monitored by DDC system.

2. Plan for each building floor, including interstitial floors, and each roof level of each building, showing the following:

a. Room layouts with room identification and name.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 21 OF 67


b. Locations and identification of all monitored and controlled HVAC equipment and other equipment being monitored and controlled by DDC system. This includes each Chiller, Air Handler, Fan Coil, Boiler, and Cooling Tower.

c. Location and identification of each hardware point being controlled or monitored by DDC system.

d. Graphics Library: Furnish a complete library of common HVAC equipment such as chillers, boilers, air handlers, and terminals. This library shall also include symbols for other equipment including fans, pumps, valves, piping, and ductwork.

3. Control schematic for each of following, including a graphic system schematic representation, similar to that indicated on Drawings, with point identification, set point and dynamic value indication, sequence of operation and control logic diagram.

4. Graphic display for each piece of equipment connected to DDC system through a data communications link. Include dynamic indication of all points associated with equipment.

5. DDC system network riser diagram that shows schematic layout for entire system including all networks and all controllers, gateways operator workstations and other network devices.

E. Customizing Software:

1. Software to modify and tailor DDC system to specific and unique requirements of equipment installed, to programs implemented and to staffing and operational practices planned.

2. Online modification of DDC system configuration, program parameters, and database using menu selection and keyboard entry of data into preformatted display templates.

3. As a minimum, include the following modification capability:

a. Operator assignment shall include designation of operator passwords, access levels, point segregation and auto sign-off.

b. Peripheral assignment capability shall include assignment of segregation groups and operators to consoles and printers, designation of backup workstations and printers, designation of workstation header points and enabling and disabling of print-out of operator changes.

c. System configuration and diagnostic capability shall include communications and peripheral port assignments, DDC controller assignments to network, DDC controller enable and disable, assignment of command trace to points and application programs and initiation of diagnostics.

d. System text addition and change capability shall include English or native language descriptors for points, segregation groups and access levels and action messages for alarms, run time and trouble condition.

e. Time and schedule change capability shall include time and date set, time and occupancy schedules, exception and holiday schedules and daylight savings time schedules.

f. Point related change capability shall include the following:

1) System and point enable and disable.

2) Run-time enable and disable.

3) Assignment of points to segregation groups, calibration tables, lockout, and run time and to a fixed I/O value.

4) Assignment of alarm and warning limits.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 22 OF 67


g. Application program change capability shall include the following:

1) Enable and disable of software programs.

2) Programming changes.

3) Assignment of comfort limits, global points, time and event initiators, time and event schedules and enable and disable time and event programs.

4. Software shall allow operator to add points, or groups of points, to DDC system and to link them to energy optimization and management programs. Additions and modifications shall be online programmable using operator workstation, downloaded to other network devices and entered into their databases. After verification of point additions and associated program operation, database shall be uploaded and recorded on hard drive and disk for archived record.

5. Include high-level language programming software capability for implementation of custom DDC programs. Software shall include a compiler, linker, and up- and down-load capability.

6. Include a library of DDC algorithms, intrinsic control operators, arithmetic, logic and relational operators for implementation of control sequences. Also include, as a minimum, the following:

a. Proportional control (P).

b. Proportional plus integral (PI).

c. Proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID).

d. Adaptive and intelligent self-learning control.

1) Algorithm shall monitor loop response to output corrections and adjust loop response characteristics according to time constant changes imposed.

2) Algorithm shall operate in a continuous self-learning manner and shall retain in memory a stored record of system dynamics so that on system shut down and restart, learning process starts from where it left off.

7. Fully implemented intrinsic control operators including sequence, reversing, ratio, time delay, time of day, highest select AO, lowest select AO, analog controlled digital output, analog control AO, and digitally controlled AO.

8. Logic operators such as "And," "Or," "Not," and others that are part of a standard set available with a high-level language.

9. Arithmetic operators such as "Add," "Subtract," "Multiply," "Divide," and others that are part of a standard set available with a high-level language.

10. Relational operators such as "Equal To," "Not Equal To," "Less Than," "Greater Than," and others that are part of a standard set available with a high-level language.

F. Alarm Handling Software:

1. Include alarm handling software to report all alarm conditions monitored and transmitted through DDC controllers, gateways and other network devices.

2. Include first in, first out handling of alarms according to alarm priority ranking, with most critical alarms first, and with buffer storage in case of simultaneous and multiple alarms.

3. Alarm handling shall be active at all times to ensure that alarms are processed even if an operator is not currently signed on to DDC system.

4. Alarms display shall include the following:

a. Indication of alarm condition such as "Abnormal Off," "Hi Alarm," and "Low Alarm."

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 23 OF 67


b. "Analog Value" or "Status" group and point identification with native language point descriptor such as "Space Temperature, Building 110, 2nd Floor, Room 212."

c. Discrete per point alarm action message, such as "Call Maintenance Dept. Ext-5561."

d. Include extended message capability to allow assignment and printing of extended action messages. Capability shall be operator programmable and assignable on a per point basis.

5. Alarms shall be directed to appropriate operator workstations, printers, and individual operators by privilege level and segregation assignments.

6. Send e-mail alarm messages to designated operators.

7. Send e-mail, page, text and voice messages to designated operators for critical alarms.

8. Alarms shall be categorized and processed by class.

a. Class 1:

1) Associated with fire, security and other extremely critical equipment monitoring functions; have alarm, trouble, return to normal, and acknowledge conditions printed and displayed.

2) Unacknowledged alarms to be placed in unacknowledged alarm buffer.

3) All conditions shall cause an audible sound and shall require individual acknowledgment to silence audible sound.

b. Class 2:

1) Critical, but not life-safety related, and processed same as Class 1 alarms, except do not require individual acknowledgment.

2) Acknowledgement may be through a multiple alarm acknowledgment.

c. Class 3:

1) General alarms; printed, displayed and placed in unacknowledged alarm buffer queues.

2) Each new alarm received shall cause an audible sound. Audible sound shall be silenced by "acknowledging" alarm or by pressing a "silence" key.

3) Acknowledgement of queued alarms shall be either on an individual basis or through a multiple alarm acknowledgement.

4) Alarms returning to normal condition shall be printed and not cause an audible sound or require acknowledgment.

d. Class 4:

1) Routine maintenance or other types of warning alarms.

2) Alarms to be printed only, with no display, no audible sound and no acknowledgment required.

9. Include an unacknowledged alarm indicator on display to alert operator that there are unacknowledged alarms in system. Operator shall be able to acknowledge alarms on an individual basis or through a multiple alarm acknowledge key, depending on alarm class.

10. To ensure that no alarm records are lost, it shall be possible to assign a backup printer to accept alarms in case of failure of primary printer.

G. Reports and Logs:

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 24 OF 67


1. Include reporting software package that allows operator to select, modify, or create reports using DDC system I/O point data available.

2. Each report shall be definable as to data content, format, interval and date.

3. Report data shall be sampled and stored on DDC controller, within storage limits of DDC controller, and then uploaded to archive on server for historical reporting.

4. Operator shall be able to obtain real-time logs of all I/O points by type or status, such as alarm, point lockout, or normal.

5. Reports and logs shall be stored on server hard drives in a format that is readily accessible by other standard software applications, including spreadsheets and word processing.

6. Reports and logs shall be readily printed and set to be printed either on operator command or at a specific time each day.

H. Standard Reports: Standard DDC system reports shall be provided and operator shall be able to customize reports later.

1. All I/O: With current status and values.

2. Alarm: All current alarms, except those in alarm lockout.

3. Disabled I/O: All I/O points that are disabled.

4. Alarm Lockout I/O: All I/O points in alarm lockout, whether manual or automatic.

5. Alarm Lockout I/O in Alarm: All I/O in alarm lockout that are currently in alarm.

6. Logs:

a. Alarm history.

b. System messages.

c. System events.

d. Trends.

I. Custom Reports: Operator shall be able to easily define any system data into a daily, weekly, monthly, or annual report. Reports shall be time and date stamped and shall contain a report title.

J. Utility Reports: Prepare Project-specific reports.

1. Electric Report:

a. Include weekly report showing daily electrical consumption and peak electrical demand with time and date stamp for each meter.

b. Include monthly report showing the daily electrical consumption and peak electrical demand with time and date stamp for each meter.

c. Include annual report showing the monthly electrical consumption and peak electrical demand with time and date stamp for each meter.

2. Natural Gas Report:

a. Include weekly report showing daily natural gas consumption and peak natural gas demand with time and date stamp for each meter.

b. Include monthly report showing the daily natural gas consumption and peak natural gas demand with time and date stamp for each meter.

c. Include annual report showing the monthly natural gas consumption and peak natural gas demand with time and date stamp for each meter.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 25 OF 67


d. For each weekly, monthly and annual report, include sum total of submeters combined by load type, such as boilers and service water heaters showing daily natural gas consumption and peak natural gas demand.

e. For each weekly, monthly and annual report, include sum total of all submeters in building showing natural gas consumption and peak natural gas demand.

K. Standard Trends:

1. Trend all I/O point present values, set points, and other parameters indicated for trending.

2. Trends shall be associated into groups, and a trend report shall be set up for each group.

3. Trends shall be stored within DDC controller and uploaded to hard drives automatically on reaching 75 percent of DDC controller buffer limit, or by operator request, or by archiving time schedule.

4. Preset trend intervals for each I/O point after review with Owner.

5. Trend intervals shall be operator selectable from 10 seconds up to 60 minutes. Minimum number of consecutive trend values stored at one time shall be 100 per variable.

6. When drive storage memory is full, most recent data shall overwrite oldest data.

7. Archived and real-time trend data shall be available for viewing numerically and graphically by operators.

L. Custom Trends: Operator shall be able to define a custom trend log for any I/O point in DDC system.

1. Each trend shall include interval, start time, and stop time.

2. Data shall be sampled and stored on DDC controller, within storage limits of DDC controller, and then uploaded to archive on server hard drives.

3. Data shall be retrievable for use in spreadsheets and standard database programs.

M. Programming Software:

1. Include programming software to execute sequences of operation indicated.

2. Include programming routines in simple and easy to follow logic with detailed text comments describing what the logic does and how it corresponds to sequence of operation.

3. Programming software shall be any of the following:

a. Graphic Based: Programming shall use a library of function blocks made from preprogrammed code designed for DDC control systems.

1) Function blocks shall be assembled with interconnection lines that represent to control sequence in a flowchart.

2) Programming tools shall be viewable in real time to show present values and logical results of each function block.

b. Menu Based: Programming shall be done by entering parameters, definitions, conditions, requirements and constraints.

c. Line by Line and Text Based: Programming shall declare variable types such as local, global, real, integer, and so on, at the beginning of the program. Use descriptive comments frequently to describe programming code.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 26 OF 67


4. Include means for detecting programming errors and testing software control strategies with a simulation tool before implementing in actual control. Simulation tool may be inherent with programming software or as a separate product.

N. Data Logs

1. Data Log data shall be sampled and stored on the System Controller panel and shall be capable of being archived to a server for longer term storage.

a. Data Log sample types shall include interval, start-time, and stop-time.

b. Data Log intervals shall be configurable as frequently as 1 minute and as infrequently as 1 year.

2. Data Logs

a. The system controller shall contain Data Log information for defined key measurements for each controlled HVAC device and HVAC application.

b. The Data Logs shall monitor these parameters for a minimum of 7 days at 15 minute intervals. The Data Logs intervals shall be user adjustable.

c. The following is a list of minimum key measurements required to be data logged:

1) Air Handling Systems

a) Discharge Air Temperature and Setpoint

b) Space Temperature and Setpoint

c) Airflow and Setpoint

d) Outdoor Air Airflow

2) Heating Plant

a) Equipment Operation Capacity

b) Boiler(s) Entering and Leaving Temperature

c) Building Supply and Return Temperature and Setpoint

3) Cooling Plant

a) Chiller Operation Capacity

b) Ice Storage Capacity

c) Cooling Equipment Entering and Leaving Temperature

d) Building Supply and Return Temperature and Setpoint

4) Building Zones

a) Average Space Temperature and Setpoint

b) Heating or Cooling Mode

c) Maximum Space Temperature

d) Minimum Space Temperature

O. Database Management Software:

1. Where a separate SQL database is used for information storage, DDC system shall include database management software that separates database monitoring and managing functions by supporting multiple separate windows.

2. Database secure access shall be accomplished using standard SQL authentication including ability to access data for use outside of DDC system applications.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 27 OF 67


3. Database management function shall include summarized information on trend, alarm, event, and audit for the following database management actions:

a. Backup.

b. Purge.

c. Restore.

4. Database management software shall support the following:

a. Statistics: Display database server information and trend, alarm, event, and audit information on database.

b. Maintenance: Include method of purging records from trend, alarm, event and audit databases by supporting separate screens for creating a backup before purging, selecting database, and allowing for retention of a selected number of day's data.

c. Backup: Include means to create a database backup file and select a storage location.

d. Restore: Include a restricted means of restoring a database by requiring operator to have proper security level.

5. Database management software shall include information of current database activity, including the following:

a. Ready.

b. Purging record from a database.

c. Action failed.

d. Refreshing statistics.

e. Restoring database.

f. Shrinking a database.

g. Backing up a database.

h. Resetting Internet information services.

i. Starting network device manager.

j. Shutting down the network device manager.

k. Action successful.

6. Database management software monitoring functions shall continuously read database information once operator has logged on.

7. Include operator notification through on-screen pop-up display and e-mail message when database value has exceeded a warning or alarm limit.

8. Monitoring settings window shall have the following sections:

a. Allow operator to set and review scan intervals and start times.

b. E-mail: Allow operator to create and review e-mail and phone text messages to be delivered when a warning or an alarm is generated.

c. Warning: Allow operator to define warning limit parameters, set reminder frequency and link e-mail message.

d. Alarm: Allow operator to define alarm limit parameters, set reminder frequency and link e-mail message.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 28 OF 67


e. Database Login: Protect system from unauthorized database manipulation by creating a read access and a write access for each of trend, alarm, event and audit databases as well as operator proper security access to restore a database.

9. Monitoring settings taskbar shall include the following informational icons:

a. Normal: Indicates by color and size, or other easily identifiable means that all databases are within their limits.

b. Warning: Indicates by color and size, or other easily identifiable means that one or more databases have exceeded their warning limit.

c. Alarm: Indicates by color and size, or other easily identifiable means that one or more databases have exceeded their alarm limit.

2.11 OFFICE APPLICATION SOFTWARE


1. Microsoft Corporation.

B. Include current version of office application software at time of Substantial Completion.

C. Office application software package shall include multiple separate applications and use a common platform for all applications, similar to Microsoft's "Office Professional."

1. Database.

2. E-mail.

3. Presentation.

4. Publisher.

5. Spreadsheet.

6. Word processing.

2.12 ASHRAE 135 GATEWAYS

A. Include BACnet communication ports, whenever available as an equipment OEM standard option, for integration via a single communication cable. BACnet-controlled plant equipment includes, but is not limited to, boilers, chillers and variable-speed drives.

B. Include gateways to connect BACnet to legacy systems, existing non-BACnet devices, and existing non-BACnet DDC-controlled equipment, only when specifically requested and approved by Owner.

C. Include with each gateway an interoperability schedule showing each point or event on legacy side that BACnet "client" will read, and each parameter that BACnet network will write to. Describe this interoperability of BACnet services, or BIBBs, defined in ASHRAE 135, Annex K.

D. Gateway Minimum Requirements:

1. Read and view all readable object properties on non-BACnet network to BACnet network and vice versa where applicable.

2. Write to all writeable object properties on non-BACnet network from BACnet network and vice versa where applicable.

3. Include single-pass (only one protocol to BACnet without intermediary protocols) translation from non-BACnet protocol to BACnet and vice versa.



SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 29 OF 67


4. Comply with requirements of Data Sharing Read Property, Data Sharing Write Property, Device Management Dynamic Device Binding-B, and Device Management Communication Control BIBBs according to ASHRAE 135.

5. Hardware, software, software licenses, and configuration tools for operator-to-gateway communications.

6. Backup programming and parameters on CD media and the ability to modify, download, backup, and restore gateway configuration.

2.13 DDC CONTROLLERS

A. DDC system shall consist of a combination of network controllers, programmable application controllers and application-specific controllers to satisfy performance requirements indicated.

B. DDC controllers shall perform monitoring, control, energy optimization and other requirements indicated.

C. DDC controllers shall use a multitasking, multiuser, real-time digital control microprocessor with a distributed network database and intelligence.

D. Each DDC controller shall be capable of full and complete operation as a completely independent unit and as a part of a DDC system wide distributed network.

E. Environment Requirements:

1. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.

2. Controllers located in conditioned space shall be rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F.

3. Controllers located outdoors shall be rated for operation at -40 to 150 deg F.

F. Power and Noise Immunity:

1. Controller shall operate at 90 to 110 percent of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80 percent of nominal voltage.

2. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios with up to 5 W of power located within36 inches of enclosure.

G. DDC Controller Spare I/O Point Capacity: Include 20 percent spare I/O point capacity for each Network, Programmable Application and Application Specific Controller.

H. Maintenance and Support: Include the following features to facilitate maintenance and support:

1. Mount microprocessor components on circuit cards for ease of removal and replacement.

2. Means to quickly and easily disconnect controller from network.

3. Means to quickly and easily access connect to field test equipment.

4. Visual indication that controller electric power is on, of communication fault or trouble, and that controller is receiving and sending signals to network.

I. Input and Output Point Interface:

1. Hardwired input and output points shall connect to network, programmable application and application-specific controllers.

2. Input and output points shall be protected so shorting of point to itself, to another point, or to ground will not damage controller.

3. Input and output points shall be protected from voltage up to 24 V of any duration so that contact will not damage controller.

4. AIs:

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 30 OF 67


a. AIs shall include monitoring of low-voltage (zero- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA) and resistance signals from thermistor and RTD sensors.

b. AIs shall be compatible with, and field configurable to, sensor and transmitters installed.

c. Controller AIs shall perform analog-to-digital (A-to-D) conversion with a minimum resolution of 12 bits or better to comply with accuracy requirements indicated.

d. Signal conditioning including transient rejection shall be provided for each AI.

e. Capable of being individually calibrated for zero and span.

f. Incorporate common-mode noise rejection of at least 50 dB from zero to 100 Hz for differential inputs, and normal-mode noise rejection of at least 20 dB at 60 Hz from a source impedance of 10000 ohms.

5. AOs:

a. Controller AOs shall perform analog-to-digital (A-to-D) conversion with a minimum resolution of 12 bits or better to comply with accuracy requirements indicated.

b. Output signals shall have a range of 4 to 20 mA dc or zero- to 10-V dc as required to include proper control of output device.

c. Capable of being individually calibrated for zero and span.

d. AOs shall not exhibit a drift of greater than 0.4 percent of range per year.

6. BIs:

a. Controller BIs shall accept contact closures and shall ignore transients of less than 5-ms duration.

b. Isolation and protection against an applied steady-state voltage of up to 180-V ac peak.

c. BIs shall include a wetting current of at least 12 mA to be compatible with commonly available control devices and shall be protected against effects of contact bounce and noise.

d. BIs shall sense "dry contact" closure without external power (other than that provided by the controller) being applied.

e. Pulse accumulation input points shall comply with all requirements of BIs and accept up to 10 pulses per second for pulse accumulation. Buffer shall be provided to totalize pulses. Pulse accumulator shall accept rates of at least 20 pulses per second. The totalized value shall be reset to zero on operator's command.

7. BOs:

a. Controller BOs shall include relay contact closures or triac outputs for momentary and maintained operation of output devices.

1) Relay contact closures shall have a minimum duration of 0.1 second. Relays shall include at least 180 V of isolation. Electromagnetic interference suppression shall be provided on all output lines to limit transients to non-damaging levels. Minimum contact rating shall be 1 A at 24-V ac.

2) Triac outputs shall include at least 180 V of isolation. Minimum contact rating shall be 1 A at 24-V ac.

b. BOs shall include for two-state operation or a pulsed low-voltage signal for pulse-width modulation control.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 31 OF 67


c. BOs shall be selectable for either normally open or normally closed operation.

d. Include tristate outputs (two coordinated BOs) for control of three-point floating-type electronic actuators without feedback.

e. Limit use of three-point floating devices to VAV terminal unit control applications. Control algorithms shall operate actuator to one end of its stroke once every 12 hours for verification of operator tracking.

2.14 NETWORK CONTROLLERS

A. General Network Controller Requirements:

1. Include adequate number of controllers to achieve performance indicated.

2. System shall consist of one or more independent, standalone, microprocessor-based network controllers to manage global strategies indicated.

3. Controller shall have enough memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements.

4. Data shall be shared between networked controllers and other network devices.

5. Operating system of controller shall manage input and output communication signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow for central monitoring and alarms.

6. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-time clock.

7. Controller shall continually check status of its processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, controller shall assume a predetermined failure mode and generate an alarm notification.

8. Controllers shall be fully programmable.

B. Communication:

1. Network controllers shall communicate with other devices on DDC system Level one network.

2. Network controller also shall perform routing if connected to a network of programmable application and application-specific controllers.

C. Operator Interface:

1. Controller shall be equipped with a service communications port for connection to a portable operator's workstation or mobile device.

D. Serviceability:

1. Controller shall be equipped with diagnostic LEDs or other form of local visual indication of power, communication, and processor.

2. Wiring and cable connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable.

3. Controller shall maintain BIOS and programming information in event of a power loss for at least 72 hours.

2.15 PROGRAMMABLE APPLICATION CONTROLLERS

A. General Programmable Application Controller Requirements:

1. Include adequate number of controllers to achieve performance indicated.

2. Controller shall have enough memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 32 OF 67



4. Operating system of controller shall manage input and output communication signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow for central monitoring and alarms.

5. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-time clock.

6. Controller shall continually check status of its processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, controller shall assume a predetermined failure mode and generate an alarm notification.

7. Controllers shall be fully programmable.

B. Communication:

1. Programmable application controllers shall communicate with other devices on network.

C. Operator Interface:

1. Controller shall be equipped with a service communications port for connection to a portable operator's workstation or mobile device.

D. Serviceability:



3. Controller shall maintain BIOS and programming information in event of a power loss for at least 72 hours.

2.16 APPLICATION-SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS

A. Description: Microprocessor-based controllers, which through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a specific piece of equipment. Controllers are not fully user-programmable but are configurable and customizable for operation of equipment they are designed to control.

1. Capable of standalone operation and shall continue to include control functions without being connected to network.


B. Communication: Application-specific controllers shall communicate with other application-specific controller and devices on network, and to programmable application and network controllers.

C. Operator Interface: Controller shall be equipped with a service communications port for connection to a portable operator's workstation.

D. Serviceability:



3. Controller shall use nonvolatile memory and maintain all BIOS and programming information in event of power loss.

2.17 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

A. General Controller Software Requirements:

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 33 OF 67


1. Software applications shall reside and operate in controllers. Editing of applications shall occur at operator workstations.

2. I/O points shall be identified by up to 30-character point name and up to 16-character point descriptor. Same names shall be used at operator workstations.

3. Control functions shall be executed within controllers using DDC algorithms.

4. Controllers shall be configured to use stored default values to ensure fail-safe operation. Default values shall be used when there is a failure of a connected input instrument or loss of communication of a global point value.

B. Security:

1. Operator access shall be secured using individual security passwords and user names.

2. Passwords shall restrict operator to points, applications, and system functions as assigned by system manager.

3. Operator log-on and log-off attempts shall be recorded.

4. System shall protect itself from unauthorized use by automatically logging off after last keystroke. The delay time shall be operator-definable.

C. Scheduling: Include capability to schedule each point or group of points in system as well as the capability to completely integrate with school district scheduling software. Each schedule shall consist of the following:

1. Weekly Schedule:

a. Include separate schedules for each day of week.

b. Each schedule should include the capability for start, stop, optimal start, optimal stop, and night economizer.

c. Each schedule may consist of up to 10 events.

d. When a group of objects are scheduled together, include capability to adjust start and stop times for each member.

2. Exception Schedules:

a. Include ability for operator to designate any day of the year as an exception schedule.

b. Exception schedules may be defined up to a year in advance. Once an exception schedule is executed, it will be discarded and replaced by regular schedule for that day of week.

3. Holiday Schedules:

a. Include capability for operator to define up to 99 special or holiday schedules.

b. Schedules may be placed on scheduling calendar and will be repeated each year.

c. Operator shall be able to define length of each holiday period.

D. System Coordination:

1. Include standard application for proper coordination of equipment.

2. Application shall include operator with a method of grouping together equipment based on function and location.

3. Group may then be used for scheduling and other applications.

E. Binary Alarms:

1. Each binary point shall be set to alarm based on operator-specified state.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 34 OF 67


2. Include capability to automatically and manually disable alarming.

F. Analog Alarms:

1. Each analog object shall have both high and low alarm limits.

2. Alarming shall be able to be automatically and manually disabled.

G. Alarm Reporting:

1. Operator shall be able to determine action to be taken in event of an alarm.

2. Alarms shall be routed to appropriate operator workstations based on time and other conditions.

3. Alarm shall be able to start programs, print, be logged in event log, generate custom messages, and display graphics.

H. Remote Communication:

1. System shall have ability to dial out in the event of an alarm.

I. Electric Power Demand Limiting:

1. Demand-limiting program shall monitor building or other operator-defined electric power consumption from signals connected to electric power meter or from a watt transducer or current transformer.

2. Demand-limiting program shall predict probable power demand such that action can be taken to prevent exceeding demand limit. When demand prediction exceeds demand limit, action will be taken to reduce loads in a predetermined manner. When demand prediction indicates demand limit will not be exceeded, action will be taken to restore loads in a predetermined manner.

3. Demand reduction shall be accomplished by the following means:

a. Reset air-handling unit supply temperature set points.

b. Reset space temperature set points.

c. De-energize equipment based on priority.

4. Demand-limiting parameters, frequency of calculations, time intervals, and other relevant variables shall be based on the means by which electric power service provider computes demand charges.

5. Include demand-limiting prediction and control for any individual meter monitored by system or for total of any combination of meters.

6. Include means operator to make the following changes online:

a. Addition and deletion of loads controlled.

b. Changes in demand intervals.

c. Changes in demand limit for meter(s).

d. Maximum shutoff time for equipment.

e. Minimum shutoff time for equipment.

f. Select rotational or sequential shedding and restoring.

g. Shed and restore priority.

7. Include the following information and reports, to be available on an hourly, daily, weekly, monthly and annual basis:

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 35 OF 67


a. Total electric consumption.

b. Peak demand.

c. Date and time of peak demand.

d. Daily peak demand.

J. Maintenance Management: System shall monitor equipment status and generate maintenance messages based on operator-designated run-time, starts, and calendar date limits.

K. Sequencing: Include application software based on sequences of operation indicated to properly sequence chillers, boilers, and all other applicable HVAC equipment.

L. Control Loops:

1. Support any of the following control loops, as applicable to control required:

a. Two-position (on/off, open/close, slow/fast) control.

b. Proportional control.

c. Proportional plus integral (PI) control.

d. Proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID) control.

1) Include PID algorithms with direct or reverse action and anti-windup.

2) Algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog value used to position an output or stage a series of outputs.

3) Controlled variable, set point, and PID gains shall be operator-selectable.

e. Adaptive (automatic tuning).

M. Staggered Start: Application shall prevent all controlled equipment from simultaneously restarting after a power outage. Order which equipment (or groups of equipment) is started, along with the time delay between starts, shall be operator-selectable.

N. Energy Calculations:

1. Include software to allow instantaneous power or flow rates to be accumulated and converted to energy usage data.

2. Include an algorithm that calculates a sliding-window average (rolling average). Algorithm shall be flexible to allow window intervals to be operator specified (such as 15, 30, or 60 minutes).

3. Include an algorithm that calculates a fixed-window average. A digital input signal shall define start of window period (such as signal from utility meter) to synchronize fixed-window average with that used by utility.

O. Anti-Short Cycling:

1. BO points shall be protected from short cycling.

2. Feature shall allow minimum on-time and off-time to be selected.

P. On and Off Control with Differential:

1. Include an algorithm that allows a BO to be cycled based on a controlled variable and set point.

2. Algorithm shall be direct- or reverse-acting and incorporate an adjustable differential.

Q. Run-Time Totalization:

1. Include software to totalize run-times for all BI and BO points.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 36 OF 67


2. A high run-time alarm shall be assigned, if required, by operator.

2.18 ENCLOSURES

A. General Enclosure Requirements:

1. House each controller and associated control accessories in an enclosure. Enclosure shall serve as central tie-in point for control devices such as switches, transmitters, transducers, power supplies and transformers.

2. Do not house more than one controller in a single enclosure.

3. Include enclosure door with key locking mechanism. Key locks alike for all enclosures and include one pair of keys per enclosure.

B. Internal Arrangement:

1. Internal layout of enclosure shall group and protect electronic components associated with a controller, but not an integral part of controller.

2. Arrange layout to group similar products together.

3. Include a barrier between line-voltage and low-voltage electrical and electronic products.

4. Factory or shop install products, cabling and wiring complying with requirements and standards indicated.

5. Terminate field cable and wire using heavy-duty terminal blocks.

6. Include spare terminals, equal to not less than 20 percent of used terminals.

7. Include spade lugs for stranded cable and wire.

8. Install a maximum of two wires on each side of a terminal.

9. Include enclosure field power supply with a toggle-type switch located at entrance inside enclosure to disconnect power.

10. Mount products within enclosure on removable internal panel(s).

11. Include products mounted in enclosures with engraved, laminated phenolic nameplates (black letters on a white background). The nameplates shall have at least 1/4-inch-high lettering.

12. Route cable and wire located inside enclosure within a raceway with a continuous removable cover.

13. Label each end of cable and wire in enclosure following an approved identification system that extends from field I/O connection and all intermediate connections throughout length to controller connection.

14. Size enclosure internal panel to include at least 25 percent spare area on face of panel.

C. Environmental Requirements:

1. Evaluate temperature and humidity requirements of each product to be installed within each enclosure.

2. Calculate enclosure internal operating temperature considering heat dissipation of all products installed within enclosure and ambient effects (solar, conduction and wind) on enclosure.

3. Where required by application, include temperature-controlled electrical heat to maintain inside of enclosure above minimum operating temperature of product with most stringent requirement.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 37 OF 67


4. Where required by application, include temperature-controlled ventilation fans with filtered louver(s) to maintain inside of enclosure below maximum operating temperature of product with most stringent requirement.

5. Include temperature-controlled cooling within the enclosure for applications where ventilation fans cannot maintain inside temperature of enclosure below maximum operating temperature of product with most stringent requirement.

6. Where required by application, include humidity-controlled electric dehumidifier or cooling to maintain inside of enclosure below maximum relative humidity of product with most stringent requirement and to prevent surface condensation within enclosure.

2.19 RELAYS

A. General-Purpose Relays:

1. Relays shall be heavy duty and rated for at least 10 A at 250-V ac and 60 Hz.

2. Relays shall be either double pole double throw (DPDT) or three-pole double throw, depending on the control application.

3. Use a plug-in-style relay with an eight-pin octal plug for DPDT relays and an 11-pin octal plug for three-pole double-throw relays.

4. Construct the contacts of either silver cadmium oxide or gold.

5. Enclose the relay in a clear transparent polycarbonate dust-tight cover.

6. Relays shall have LED indication and a manual reset and push-to-test button.

7. Performance:

a. Mechanical Life: At least 10 million cycles.

b. Electrical Life: At least 100,000 cycles at rated load.

c. Pickup Time: 15 ms or less.

d. Dropout Time: 10 ms or less.

e. Pull-in Voltage: 85 percent of rated voltage.

f. Dropout Voltage: 50 percent of nominal rated voltage.

g. Power Consumption: 2 VA.

h. Ambient Operating Temperatures: Minus 40 to 115 deg F.

8. Equip relays with coil transient suppression to limit transients to non-damaging levels.

9. Plug each relay into an industry-standard, 35-mm DIN rail socket. Plug all relays located in control panels into sockets that are mounted on a DIN rail.

10. Relay socket shall have screw terminals. Mold into the socket the coincident screw terminal numbers and associated octal pin numbers.

B. Multifunction Time-Delay Relays:

1. Relays shall be continuous duty and rated for at least 10 A at 240-V ac and 60 Hz.

2. Relays shall be DPDT relay with up to eight programmable functions to provide on/off delay, interval and recycle timing functions.

3. Use a plug-in-style relay with either an 8- or 11-pin octal plug.


5. Enclose the relay in a dust-tight cover.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 38 OF 67


6. Include knob and dial scale for setting delay time.

7. Performance:



c. Timing Ranges: Multiple ranges from 0.1 seconds to 100 minutes.

d. Repeatability: Within 2 percent.

e. Recycle Time: 45 ms.

f. Minimum Pulse Width Control: 50 ms.

g. Power Consumption: 5 VA or less at 120-V ac.





C. Latching Relays:

1. Relays shall be continuous duty and rated for at least 10 A at 250-V ac and 60 Hz.

2. Relays shall be either DPDT or three-pole double throw, depending on the control application.

3. Use a plug-in-style relay with a multibladed plug.


5. Enclose the relay in a clear transparent polycarbonate dust-tight cover.

6. Performance:



c. Pickup Time: 15 ms or less.

d. Dropout Time: 10 ms or less.

e. Pull-in Voltage: 85 percent of rated voltage.

f. Dropout Voltage: 50 percent of nominal rated voltage.

g. Power Consumption: 2 VA.





D. Current Sensing Relay:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following (or approved equal):


SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 39 OF 67


a. Square D; by Schneider Electric.

2. Monitors ac current.

3. Independent adjustable controls for pickup and dropout current.

4. Energized when supply voltage is present and current is above pickup setting.

5. De-energizes when monitored current is below dropout current.

6. Dropout current is adjustable from 50 to 95 percent of pickup current.

7. Include a current transformer, if required for application.

8. House current sensing relay and current transformer in its own enclosure. Use NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure for indoors and NEMA 250, Type 4 for outdoors.

E. Combination On-Off Status Sensor and On-Off Relay:

1. Description:

a. On-off control and status indication in a single device.

b. LED status indication of activated relay and current trigger.

c. Closed-Open-Auto override switch located on the load side of the relay.

2. Performance:

a. Ambient Temperature: Minus 30 to 140 deg F.

b. Voltage Rating: Single-phase loads rated for 300-V ac. Three-phase loads rated for 600-V ac.

3. Status Indication:

a. Current Sensor: Integral sensing for single-phase loads up to 20 A and external solid or split sensing ring for three-phase loads up to 150 A.

b. Current Sensor Range: As required by application.

c. Current Set Point: Fixed or adjustable as required by application.

d. Current Sensor Output:

1) Analog, zero- to 5- or 10-V dc.

2) Analog, 4 to 20 mA, loop powered.

4. Relay: Single-pole double-throw, continuous-duty coil; rated for 10-million mechanical cycles.

5. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.

2.20 ELECTRICAL POWER DEVICES

A. Transformers:

1. Transformer shall be sized for the total connected load, plus an additional 25 percent of connected load.

2. Transformer shall be at least 40 VA.

3. Transformer shall have both primary and secondary fuses.

B. Power-Line Conditioner:

1. General Power-Line Conditioner Requirements:

a. Design to ensure maximum reliability, serviceability and performance.


SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 40 OF 67


b. Overall function of the power-line conditioner is to receive raw, polluted electrical power and purify it for use by electronic equipment. The power-line conditioner shall provide isolated, regulated, transient and noise-free sinusoidal power to loads served.

2. Standards: NRTL listed per UL 1012.

3. Performance:

a. Single phase, continuous, 100 percent duty rated KVA/KW capacity. Design to supply power for linear or nonlinear, high crest factor, resistive and reactive loads.

b. Automatically regulate output voltage to within 2 percent or better with input voltage fluctuations of plus 10 to minus 20 percent of nominal when system is loaded 100 percent. Use Variable Range Regulation to obtain improved line voltage regulation when operating under less than full load conditions.

1) At 75 Percent Load: Output voltage automatically regulated to within 3 percent with input voltage fluctuations of plus 10 to minus 35 percent of nominal.



c. With input voltage distortion of up to 40 percent, limit the output voltage sine wave to a maximum harmonic content of 5 percent.

d. Automatically regulate output voltage to within 2.5 percent when load (resistive) changes from zero percent to 100 percent to zero percent.

e. Output voltage returns to 95 percent of nominal level within two cycles and to 100 percent within three cycles when the output is taken from no load to full resistive load or vice-versa. Recovery from partial resistive load changes is corrected in a shorter period of time.

f. K Factor: 30, designed to operate with nonlinear, non-sinusoidal, high crest factor loads without overheating.

g. Input power factor within 0.95 approaching unity with load power factor as poor as 0.6.

h. Attenuate load-generated odd current harmonics 23 dB at the input.

i. Electrically isolate the primary from the secondary. Meet isolation criteria as defined in NFPA 70, Article 250-5D.

j. Lighting and Surge Protection: Compares to UL 1449 rating of 330 V when subjected to Category B3 (6000 V/3000 A) combination waveform as established by IEEE C62.41.

k. Common-mode noise attenuation of 140 dB.

l. Transverse-mode noise attenuation of 120 dB.

m. With loss of input power for up to 16.6 ms, the output sine wave remains at usable ac voltage levels.

n. Reliability of 200,000 hours' MTBF.

o. At full load, when measured at 1-m distance, audible noise is not to exceed 54 dB.

p. Approximately 92 percent efficient at full load.

4. Transformer Construction:

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 41 OF 67


a. Ferroresonant, dry type, convection cooled, 600V class. Transformer windings of Class H (220 deg C) insulated copper.

b. Use a Class H installation system throughout with operating temperatures not to exceed 150 deg C over a 40-deg C ambient temperature.

c. Configure transformer primary for multi-input voltage. Include input terminals for source conductors and ground.

d. Manufacture transformer core using M-6 grade, grain-oriented, stress-relieved transformer steel.

e. Configure transformer secondary in a 240/120-V split with a 208-V tap or straight 120 V, depending on power output size.

f. Electrically isolate the transformer secondary windings from the primary windings. Bond neutral conductor to cabinet enclosure and output neutral terminal.

g. Include interface terminals for output power hot, neutral and ground conductors.

h. Label leads, wires and terminals to correspond with circuit wiring diagram.

i. Vacuum impregnate transformer with epoxy resin.

5. Cabinet Construction:

a. Design for panel or floor mounting.

b. NEMA 250, Type 1, general-purpose, indoor enclosure.

c. Manufacture the cabinet from heavy gauge steel complying with UL 50.

d. Include a textured baked-on paint finish.

C. Transient Voltage Suppression and High-Frequency Noise Filter Unit:

1. The maximum continuous operating voltage shall be at least 125 percent.

2. The operating frequency range shall be 47 to 63 Hz.

3. Protection modes according to NEMA LS-1.

4. The rated single-pulse surge current capacity, for each mode of protection, shall be no less than the following:

a. Line to Neutral: 45,000 A.

b. Neutral to Ground: 45,000 A.

c. Line to Ground: 45,000 A.

d. Per Phase: 90,000 A.

5. Clamping voltages shall be in compliance with test and evaluation procedures defined in NEMA LS-1. Maximum clamping voltage shall be as follows:

a. Line to Neutral: 360 V.

b. Line to Ground: 360 V.

c. Neutral to Ground: 360 V.

6. Electromagnetic interference and RF interference noise rejection or attenuation values shall comply with test and evaluation procedures defined in NEMA LS-1.

a. Line to Neutral:

1) 100 kHz: 42 dB.

2) 1 MHz: 25 dB.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 42 OF 67


3) 10 MHz: 21 dB.

4) 100 MHz: 36 dB.

b. Line to Ground:

1) 100 kHz: 16 dB.

2) 1 MHz: 55 dB.

3) 10 MHz: 81 dB.

4) 100 MHz: 80 dB.

7. Unit shall have LED status indicator that extinguishes to indicate a failure.

8. Unit shall be listed by an NRTL as a transient voltage surge suppressor per UL 1449, and as an electromagnetic interference filter per UL 1283.

9. Unit shall not generate any appreciable magnetic field.

10. Unit shall not generate an audible noise.

D. DC Power Supply:

1. Plug-in style suitable for mating with a standard eight-pin octal socket. Include the power supply with a mating mounting socket.

2. Enclose circuitry in a housing.

3. Include both line and load regulation to ensure a stable output. To protect both the power supply and the load, power supply shall have an automatic current limiting circuit.

4. Performance:

a. Output voltage nominally 25-V dc within 5 percent.

b. Output current up to 100 mA.

c. Input voltage nominally 120-V ac, 60 Hz.

d. Load regulation within 0.5 percent from zero- to 100-mA load.

e. Line regulation within 0.5 percent at a 100-mA load for a 10 percent line change.

f. Stability within 0.1 percent of rated volts for 24 hours after a 20-minute warmup.

2.21 CONTROL WIRE AND CABLE

A. Wire: Single conductor control wiring above 24 V.

1. Wire size shall be at least No. 14 AWG.

2. Conductor shall be 7/24 soft annealed copper strand with 2- to 2.5-inch lay.

3. Conductor insulation shall be 600 V, Type THWN or Type THHN, and 90 deg C according to UL 83.

4. Conductor colors shall be black (hot), white (neutral), and green (ground).

5. Furnish wire on spools.

B. Single Twisted Shielded Instrumentation Cable above 24 V:

1. Wire size shall be a minimum No. 18 AWG.

2. Conductors shall be a twisted, 7/24 soft annealed copper strand with a 2- to 2.5-inch lay.

3. Conductor insulation shall have a Type THHN/THWN or Type TFN rating.

4. Shielding shall be 100 percent type, 0.35/0.5-mil aluminum/Mylar tape, helically applied with 25 percent overlap, and aluminum side in with tinned copper drain wire.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 43 OF 67


5. Outer jacket insulation shall have a 600-V, 90-deg C rating and shall be Type TC cable.

6. For twisted pair, conductor colors shall be black and white. For twisted triad, conductor colors shall be black, red and white.


C. Single Twisted Shielded Instrumentation Cable 24 V and Less:

1. Wire size shall be a minimum No. 18 AWG.

2. Conductors shall be a twisted, 7/24 soft annealed copper stranding with a 2- to 2.5-inch lay.

3. Conductor insulation shall have a nominal 15-mil thickness, constructed from flame-retardant PVC.

4. Shielding shall be 100 percent type, 1.35-mil aluminum/polymer tape, helically applied with 25 percent overlap, and aluminum side in with tinned copper drain wire.

5. Outer jacket insulation shall have a 300-V, 105-deg C rating and shall be Type PLTC cable.

6. For twisted pair, conductor colors shall be black and white. For twisted triad, conductor colors shall be black, red and white.


D. LAN and Communication Cable: Comply with DDC system manufacturer requirements for network being installed.

1. Cable shall be balanced twisted pair.

2. Comply with the following requirements and for balanced twisted pair cable described in Section 26 05 23 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables.

a. Cable shall be plenum rated.

b. Cable shall have a unique color that is different from other cables used on Project.

2.22 RACEWAYS

A. All required raceways and conduit necessary for installation of the DDC System shall be provided and installed by the Control Contractor.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 27 05 28 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for raceways for balanced twisted pair cables and optical fiber cables.

2.23 ACCESSORIES

A. Pressure Electric Switches:

1. Diaphragm-operated snap acting switch.

2. Set point adjustable from 3 to 20 psig.

3. Differential adjustable from 2 to 6 psig.

4. Rated for resistance loads at 120-V ac.

5. Body and switch housing shall be metal.

B. Damper Blade Limit Switches:

1. Sense positive open and/or closed position of the damper blades.

2. NEMA 250, Type 13, oil-tight construction.

3. Arrange for the mounting application.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 44 OF 67


4. Additional waterproof enclosure when required by its environment.

5. Arrange to prevent "over-center" operation.

C. Instrument Enclosures:

1. Include instrument enclosure for secondary protection to comply with requirements indicated in "Performance Requirements" Article.

2. NRTL listed and labeled to UL 50.

3. Sized to include at least 25 percent spare area on subpanel.

4. Instrument(s) mounted within enclosure on internal subpanel(s).

5. Enclosure face with engraved, laminated phenolic nameplate for each instrument within enclosure.

6. Enclosures housing multiple instruments shall route wiring within enclosure in a raceway having a continuous removable cover.

7. Enclosures larger than 12 inches shall have a hinged full-size face cover.

D. Wall-Mounted Portable Workstation Cabinet:

1. Surface-mounted wall cabinet for tilt-out operation of laptop computers and large-format mobile devices.

2. Cabinet shall have a load limit of 50 lb.

3. Cabinet shall include the following:

a. Oil-filled dampers for controlled lowering of equipment to operational position.

b. 3RU EIA mounting rails.

c. Removable laptop shelf.

d. Separate top compartment with mounting area, hinged rail and security lock.

e. Front ventilation slots.

f. Knockouts for conduit connections on top and bottom of cabinet.

4. Cabinet shall be constructed of steel and painted with a powder-coat epoxy.

5. Inside center of backbox shall have provision to mount a field-furnished and -installed, single gang electrical outlet box.

2.24 IDENTIFICATION

A. Control Equipment, Instruments, and Control Devices:

1. Laminated acrylic or melamine plastic sign bearing unique identification.

a. Include instruments with unique identification identified by equipment being controlled or monitored, followed by point identification.

2. Letter size shall be a minimum of 0.5 inches high.

3. Legend shall consist of white lettering on black background.

4. Laminated acrylic or melamine plastic sign shall be engraved phenolic consisting of three layers of rigid laminate. Top and bottom layers are color-coded black with contrasting white center exposed by engraving through outer layer and shall be fastened with drive pins.

5. Instruments, control devices and actuators with Project-specific identification tags having unique identification numbers following requirements indicated and provided by original manufacturer do not require additional identification.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 45 OF 67


B. Valve Tags:

1. Brass tags and brass chains attached to valve.

2. Tags shall be at least 1.5 inches in diameter.

3. Include tag with unique valve identification indicating control influence such as flow, level, pressure, or temperature; followed by location of valve, and followed by three-digit sequential number. For example: TV-1.001.

4. Valves with Project-specific identification tags having unique identification numbers following requirements indicated and provided by original manufacturer do not require an additional tag.

C. Raceway and Boxes:

1. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2. Paint cover plates on junction boxes and conduit same color as the tape banding for conduits. After painting, label cover plate "HVAC Controls," using an engraved phenolic tag.

D. Equipment Warning Labels:

1. Self-adhesive label with pressure-sensitive adhesive back and peel-off protective jacket.

2. Lettering size shall be at least 14-point type with white lettering on red background.

3. Warning label shall read "CAUTION-Equipment operated under remote automatic control and may start or stop at any time without warning. Switch electric power disconnecting means to OFF position before servicing."

4. Lettering shall be enclosed in a white line border. Edge of label shall extend at least 0.5 inch beyond white border.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates.

B. Examine roughing-in for products to verify actual locations of connections before installation.

1. Examine roughing-in for instruments installed in piping to verify actual locations of connections before installation.

2. Examine roughing-in for instruments installed in duct systems to verify actual locations of connections before installation.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings for suitable conditions where product will be installed.

D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 DDC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROL

A. Control of Systems and Equipment:

1. Equipment to Be Controlled shall include but not limited to:

a. Hot water heating system and pumps

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 46 OF 67


b. Chilled water cooling system and pumps

c. Domestic water system and pumps

d. Ejector pumps

e. Air handling systems and equipment

f. Air-terminal units

g. Kitchen hoods

h. Boilers

i. Chillers

j. Heat wheels and heat exchangers

k. Computer-room air-conditioning units

l. Fan-coil units

m. Unit ventilators

n. Dehumidification units

o. Pool Equipment

p. Generators

3.3 DDC SYSTEM INTERFACE WITH OTHER SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Communication Interface to Equipment with Integral, Manufacturer Provided, Controls:

1. DDC system shall have communication interface with equipment having integral controls and having a communication interface for remote monitoring or control.

2. Provide separate or integral graphic screens to display points, setting and setpoints for each system listed below. Allow provision for modifying setpoints and settings as necessary.

3. Equipment to Be Connected:

a. Generators - BMS shall integrate the generator(s) provided by the electrical contractor. At a minimum BMS contractor shall provide generator status and any alarms.

b. Domestic water heater – BMS shall integrate the domestic water heater controller. At a minimum BMS shall provide:

1) Water temperature and setpoint.

2) Run status and firing rate.

3) Diagnostic and alarm points.

c. Kitchen hoods - BMS shall integrate the kitchen hoods / makeup air units. At a minimum BMS contractor shall provide run status and any alarms

d. Boilers – In addition to controlling boiler systems per sequence of control and plans, BMS shall integrate the boiler controller / sequencer. At a minimum BMS contractor shall provide:

1) Temperature setpoint from BMS to boiler controller / sequencer

2) Run status and any alarms

3) Flame rate or output percentage

4) Entering and leaving temperatures

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 47 OF 67


5) Any additional alarm points, settings and setpoints provided that may be pertinent to operation

e. Chillers – In addition to controlling chiller systems per sequence of control and plans, BMS shall integrate the chiller controller. At a minimum BMS contractor shall provide:

1) Temperature and/or limit setpoints from BMS to chiller controller

2) Run status and any alarms

3) Compressor load and output percentage

4) Any electrical data points, i.e. amperage, kW, kWh, etc.

5) Entering and leaving temperatures

6) Any additional alarm points, settings and setpoints provided that may be pertinent to unit operation

f. Packaged air-handling units and Roof-top units – In addition to external control points per sequence of control and plans, BMS shall integrate the unit controller. At a minimum BMS contractor shall provide:

1) Room temperature and setpoints

2) All unit control and monitoring points, settings and parameters.

3) Any additional alarm points and setpoints provided that may be pertinent to unit operation.

g. Dedicated outdoor-air units – In addition to external control points per sequence of control and plans, BMS shall integrate the unit controller. At a minimum BMS contractor shall provide:

1) All unit temperature and monitoring points

2) All unit control settings and parameters

3) Any additional alarm points and setpoints provided that may be pertinent to unit operation

h. Heat wheels and heat exchangers – In addition to external interlock points per sequence of control and plans, BMS shall integrate the unit controller. At a minimum BMS contractor shall provide:

1) All unit temperature and monitoring points

2) All unit control settings and parameters


i. Computer-room air-conditioning units – In addition to any external control points per sequence of control and plans, BMS shall integrate the unit controller. At a minimum BMS contractor shall provide:

1) Room temperature and setpoints

2) Room humidity and minimum and maximum setpoints

3) All unit control and monitoring points, settings and parameters.


B. Communication Interface to Other Building Systems:

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 48 OF 67


1. DDC system shall have a communication interface with systems having a communication interface.

2. Systems to Be Connected:

a. Power monitoring - BMS shall integrate the Main Distribution Panel electric meter provided by the electrical contractor. At a minimum BMS contractor shall provide:

1) Voltage and current for each phase

2) kW and kWh accumulated to line up with utility billing cycle

3) Power factor, voltage spikes

4) Other points requested by owner or design team.

5) Provide a trend for above power usage points.

b. Natural gas meter - BMS shall provide and install any required relay or interface to utility meter(s) and calibrate to receive proper volume and rate measurements.

1) Provide graphic screen to display data such as current CCF usage rate and accumulated CCF lined up with utility billing cycle.

2) Provide a trend for natural gas usage points.

c. Fire-alarm system

3.4 CONTROL DEVICES FOR INSTALLATION BY INSTALLERS

A. Deliver selected control devices, specified in indicated HVAC instrumentation and control device Sections, to identified equipment and systems manufacturers for factory installation and to identified installers for field installation.

B. Deliver the following to duct fabricator and Installer for installation in ductwork. Include installation instructions to Installer and supervise installation for compliance with requirements.

1. DDC control dampers

2. Airflow measuring stations

C. Deliver the following to plumbing and HVAC piping installers for installation in piping. Include installation instructions to Installer and supervise installation for compliance with requirements.

1. DDC control valves"

2. Pipe-mounted flow meters

D. Deliver the following to electrical installers for installation. Include installation instructions to Installer and supervise installation for compliance with requirements.

1. Variable Frequency Drives

3.5 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. The systems shall be complete in all respects, tested and ready for operation.

B. Install products to satisfy more stringent of all requirements indicated.

C. Install products level, plumb, parallel, and perpendicular with building construction.

D. Support products, piping, wiring and raceways. Brace products to prevent lateral movement and sway or a break in attachment.

E. Comply with UL, NEC and state and local codes. If codes and referenced standards are more stringent than requirements indicated, comply with requirements in codes and referenced standards.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 49 OF 67


F. Provide labor for coordination with test and balancing and commissioning work

G. Fabricate openings and install sleeves in ceilings, floors, roof, and walls required by installation of products. Before proceeding with drilling, punching, and cutting, check for concealed work to avoid damage. Patch, flash, grout, seal, and refinish openings to match adjacent condition.

H. Provide installation and interlock of ionization type smoke detectors for air handling systems.

I. Firestop Penetrations Made in Fire-Rated Assemblies: Comply with specified requirements.

J. Seal penetrations made in acoustically rated assemblies.

K. Welding Requirements:

1. Restrict welding and burning to supports and bracing.

2. No equipment shall be cut or welded without approval. Welding or cutting will not be approved if there is risk of damage to adjacent Work.

3. Welding, where approved, shall be by inert-gas electric arc process and shall be performed by qualified welders according to applicable welding codes.

4. If requested on-site, show satisfactory evidence of welder certificates indicating ability to perform welding work intended.

L. Fastening Hardware:

1. Stillson wrenches, pliers, and other tools that damage surfaces of rods, nuts, and other parts are prohibited for work of assembling and tightening fasteners.

2. Tighten bolts and nuts firmly and uniformly. Do not overstress threads by excessive force or by oversized wrenches.

3. Lubricate threads of bolts, nuts and screws with graphite and oil before assembly.

M. If product locations are not indicated, install products in locations that are accessible and that will permit service and maintenance from floor, equipment platforms, or catwalks without removal of permanently installed furniture and equipment.

N. Corrosive Environments:

1. Avoid or limit use of materials in corrosive airstreams and environments, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Laboratory exhaust-air streams.

b. Pool environments

2. When conduit is in contact with a corrosive airstream and environment, use Type 316 stainless-steel conduit and fittings or conduit and fittings that are coated with a corrosive-resistant coating that is suitable for environment. Comply with requirements for installation of raceways and boxes specified in Section 26.

3. Where instruments are located in a corrosive airstream and are not corrosive resistant from manufacturer, field install products in NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure constructed of Type 316L stainless steel.

3.6 SERVER INSTALLATION

A. Install one server(s) at location(s) directed by Owner.

B. Install software indicated on server(s) and verify that software functions properly.

C. Develop Project-specific graphics, trends, reports, logs, and historical database.

D. Power servers through UPS unit. Locate UPS adjacent to server.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 50 OF 67


3.7 GATEWAY INSTALLATION

A. Install gateways as required for DDC system communication interface.

B. Test gateway to verify that communication interface functions properly.

3.8 ROUTER INSTALLATION

A. Install routers if required for DDC system communication interface.

B. Test router to verify that communication interface functions properly.

3.9 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION

A. Install controllers in enclosures to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Connect controllers to field power supply.

C. Install controller with latest version of applicable software and configure to execute requirements indicated.

D. Test and adjust controllers to verify operation of connected I/O to achieve performance indicated requirements while executing sequences of operation.

E. Installation of Network Controllers:

1. Quantity and location of network controllers shall be determined by DDC system manufacturer to satisfy requirements indicated.

2. Install controllers in a protected location that is easily accessible by operators.

3. Top of controller shall be within 84 inches of finished floor.

F. Installation of Programmable Application Controllers:

1. Quantity and location of programmable application controllers shall be determined by DDC system manufacturer to satisfy requirements indicated.

2. Install controllers in a protected location that is easily accessible by operators.

3. Top of controller shall be within 84 inches of finished floor.

G. Application-Specific Controllers:

1. Quantity and location of application-specific controllers shall be determined by DDC system manufacturer to satisfy requirements indicated.

2. For controllers not mounted directly on equipment being controlled, install controllers in a protected location that is easily accessible by operators.

3.10 ENCLOSURES INSTALLATION

A. Install the following items in enclosures, to comply with indicated requirements:

1. Gateways.

2. Routers.

3. Controllers.

4. Electrical power devices.

5. UPS units.

6. Relays.

7. Accessories.

8. Instruments.

9. Actuators

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 51 OF 67


B. Attach wall-mounted enclosures to wall using the following types of steel struts:

1. For all Indoor Enclosures: Use galvanized-steel strut and hardware.

2. For all Outdoor Enclosures and Enclosures: Use stainless-steel strut and hardware.

3. For all Enclosures and Enclosures Installed in Corrosive Environment (e.g. Pool Equipment): Use Fiberglass Reinforce Polyurethane strut and hardware.

4. Install plastic caps on exposed cut edges of strut.

C. Align top or bottom of adjacent enclosures of like size.

D. Install floor-mounted enclosures located in mechanical equipment rooms on concrete housekeeping pads. Attach enclosure legs using galvanized- or stainless-steel anchors.

3.11 ELECTRIC POWER CONNECTIONS

A. Connect electrical power to DDC system products requiring electrical power connections.

B. Design and installation of electrical power to products not indicated with electric power or on electrical plans is delegated to DDC system provider and installing trade. Work shall comply with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC) and all applicable state and local codes.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for electrical power conductors and cables.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 34 and 26 05 35 for electrical power raceways and boxes.

3.12 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for identification products and installation.

B. Install laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with unique identification on face for each of the following:

1. Operator workstation.

2. Server.

3. Printer.

4. Gateway.

5. Router.

6. Protocol analyzer.

7. DDC controller.

8. Enclosure.

9. Electrical power device.

10. UPS unit.

11. Accessory.

C. Install unique instrument identification on face of each instrument connected to a DDC controller.

D. Install unique identification on face of each control damper and valve actuator connected to a DDC controller.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 52 OF 67


E. Where product is installed above accessible tile ceiling, also install matching identification on face of ceiling grid located directly below.

F. Where product is installed above an inaccessible ceiling, also install identification on face of access door directly below.

G. Warning Labels and Signs:

1. Shall be permanently attached to equipment that can be automatically started by DDC control system.

2. Shall be located in highly visible location near power service entry points.

3.13 NETWORK INSTALLATION

A. Install balanced twisted pair or optical fiber cable when connecting between the following network devices located in same building:

1. Network controllers.

B. Install balanced twisted pair or copper cable (as required by equipment) when connecting between the following:

1. Gateways.

2. Gateways and network controllers or programmable application controllers.

3. Routers.

4. Routers and network controllers or programmable application controllers.

5. Network controllers and programmable application controllers.

6. Programmable application controllers.

7. Programmable application controllers and application-specific controllers.

8. Application-specific controllers.

C. Install cable in continuous raceway.

1. Where indicated on Drawings, cable trays may be used for copper cable in lieu of conduit.

3.14 NETWORK NAMING AND NUMBERING

A. Coordinate with Owner and provide unique naming and addressing for networks and devices.

B. ASHRAE 135 Networks:

1. MAC Address:

a. Every network device shall have an assigned and documented MAC address unique to its network.

b. Ethernet Networks: Document MAC address assigned at its creation.

c. ARCNET or MS/TP networks: Assign from 00 to 64.

2. Network Numbering:

a. Assign unique numbers to each new network.

b. Provide ability for changing network number through device switches or operator interface.

c. DDC system, with all possible connected LANs, can contain up to 65,534 unique networks.

3. Device Object Identifier Property Number:

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 53 OF 67


a. Assign unique device object identifier property numbers or device instances for each device network.

b. Provide for future modification of device instance number by device switches or operator interface.

c. LAN shall support up to 4,194,302 unique devices.

4. Device Object Name Property Text:

a. Device object name property field shall support 32 minimum printable characters.

b. Assign unique device "Object Name" property names with plain-English descriptive names for each device.

1) Example 1: Device object name for device controlling boiler plant at Building 1000 would be "HW System B1000."

2) Example 2: Device object name for a VAV terminal unit controller could be "VAV unit 102".

5. Object Name Property Text for Other Than Device Objects:

a. Object name property field shall support 32 minimum printable characters.

b. Assign object name properties with plain-English names descriptive of application.

1) Example 1: "Zone 1 Temperature."

2) Example 2 "Fan Start and Stop."

6. Object Identifier Property Number for Other Than Device Objects:

a. Assign object identifier property numbers according to Drawings indicated.

b. If not indicated, object identifier property numbers may be assigned at Installer's discretion but must be approved by Owner in advance, be documented and be unique for like object types within device.

3.15 CONTROL WIRE, CABLE AND RACEWAYS INSTALLATION

A. New control wiring shall be provided for entire new DDC system. Reuse of existing control wiring is not acceptable.

B. Comply with NECA 1.

C. Wire and Cable Installation:

1. Comply with installation requirements in Section 26 05 23 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

2. Comply with installation requirements in Section 27 for communications cabling.

3. Install cables with protective sheathing that is waterproof and capable of withstanding continuous temperatures of 90 deg C with no measurable effect on physical and electrical properties of cable.

a. Provide shielding to prevent interference and distortion from adjacent cables and equipment.

4. Terminate wiring in a junction box.

a. Clamp cable over jacket in junction box.

b. Individual conductors in the stripped section of the cable shall be slack between the clamping point and terminal block.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 54 OF 67


5. Terminate field wiring and cable not directly connected to instruments and control devices having integral wiring terminals using terminal blocks.

6. Install signal transmission components according to IEEE C2, REA Form 511a, NFPA 70, and as indicated.

7. Use shielded cable to transmitters.

8. Use shielded cable to temperature sensors.

9. Perform continuity and meager testing on wire and cable after installation.

D. Conduit Installation:

1. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 34 and 26 05 35 for electrical power raceways and boxes.

3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Testing:

1. Perform preinstallation, in-progress, and final tests, supplemented by additional tests, as necessary.

2. Preinstallation Cable Verification: Verify integrity and serviceability for new cable lengths before installation. This assurance may be provided by using vendor verification documents, testing, or other methods. As a minimum, furnish evidence of verification for cable attenuation and bandwidth parameters.

3. In-Progress Testing: Perform standard tests for correct pair identification and termination during installation to ensure proper installation and cable placement. Perform tests in addition to those specified if there is any reason to question condition of material furnished and installed. Testing accomplished is to be documented by agency conducting tests. Submit test results for Project record.

4. Final Testing: Perform final test of installed system to demonstrate acceptability as installed. Testing shall be performed according to a test plan supplied by DDC system manufacturer. Defective Work or material shall be corrected and retested. As a minimum, final testing for cable system, including spare cable, shall verify conformance of attenuation, length, and bandwidth parameters with performance indicated.

5. Test Equipment: Use an optical fiber time domain reflectometer for testing of length and optical connectivity.

6. Test Results: Record test results and submit copy of test results for Project record.

3.17 DDC SYSTEM I/O CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

A. Check installed products before continuity tests, leak tests and calibration.

B. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.

C. Check instruments for proper installation on direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth, or other applicable considerations that will impact performance.

D. Control Damper Checkout:

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 55 OF 67


1. Verify that control dampers are installed correctly for flow direction.

2. Verify that proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided.

3. Verify that damper frame attachment is properly secured and sealed.

4. Verify that damper actuator and linkage attachment is secure.

5. Verify that actuator wiring is complete, enclosed and connected to correct power source.

6. Verify that damper blade travel is unobstructed.

E. Control Valve Checkout:

1. Verify that control valves are installed correctly for flow direction.

2. Verify that valve body attachment is properly secured and sealed.

3. Verify that valve actuator and linkage attachment is secure.

4. Verify that actuator wiring is complete, enclosed and connected to correct power source.

5. Verify that valve ball, disc or plug travel is unobstructed.

6. After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before insulating and balancing, inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks. Replace the valve if leaks persist.

F. Instrument Checkout:

1. Verify that instrument is correctly installed for location, orientation, direction and operating clearances.

2. Verify that attachment is properly secured and sealed.

3. Verify that conduit connections are properly secured and sealed.

4. Verify that wiring is properly labeled with unique identification, correct type and size and is securely attached to proper terminals.

5. Inspect instrument tag against approved submittal.

6. For flow instruments, verify that recommended upstream and downstream distances have been maintained.

7. For temperature instruments:

a. Verify sensing element type and proper material.

b. Verify length and insertion.

3.18 DDC SYSTEM I/O ADJUSTMENT, CALIBRATION AND TESTING:

A. Calibrate each instrument installed that is not factory calibrated and provided with calibration documentation.

B. Provide a written description of proposed field procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of instrument. Submit procedures before calibration and adjustment.

C. For each analog instrument, make a three-point test of calibration for both linearity and accuracy.

D. Equipment and procedures used for calibration shall comply with instrument manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Provide diagnostic and test equipment for calibration and adjustment.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 56 OF 67


F. Field instruments and equipment used to test and calibrate installed instruments shall have accuracy at least twice the instrument accuracy being calibrated. An installed instrument with an accuracy of 1 percent shall be checked by an instrument with an accuracy of 0.5 percent.

G. Calibrate each instrument according to instrument instruction manual supplied by manufacturer.

H. If after calibration indicated performance cannot be achieved, replace out-of-tolerance instruments.

I. Comply with field testing requirements and procedures indicated by ASHRAE's Guideline 11, "Field Testing of HVAC Control Components," in the absence of specific requirements, and to supplement requirements indicated.

J. Analog Signals:

1. Check analog voltage signals using a precision voltage meter at zero, 50, and 100 percent.

2. Check analog current signals using a precision current meter at zero, 50, and 100 percent.

3. Check resistance signals for temperature sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of operating span using a precision-resistant source.

K. Digital Signals:

1. Check digital signals using a jumper wire.

2. Check digital signals using an ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking.

L. Control Dampers:

1. Stroke and adjust control dampers following manufacturer's recommended procedure, from 100 percent open to 100 percent closed and back to 100 percent open.

2. Stroke control dampers with pilot positioners. Adjust damper and positioner following manufacturer's recommended procedure, so damper is 100 percent closed, 50 percent closed and 100 percent open at proper air pressure.

3. Check and document open and close cycle times for applications with a cycle time less than 30 seconds.

4. For control dampers equipped with positive position indication, check feedback signal at multiple positions to confirm proper position indication.

M. Control Valves:

1. Stroke and adjust control valves following manufacturer's recommended procedure, from 100 percent open to 100 percent closed and back to 100 percent open.

2. Stroke control valves with pilot positioners. Adjust valve and positioner following manufacturer's recommended procedure, so valve is 100 percent closed, 50 percent closed and 100 percent open at proper air pressures.

3. Check and document open and close cycle times for applications with a cycle time less than 30 seconds.

4. For control valves equipped with positive position indication, check feedback signal at multiple positions to confirm proper position indication.

N. Meters: Check sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

O. Sensors: Check sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

P. Switches: Calibrate switches to make or break contact at set points indicated.

Q. Transmitters:

1. Check and calibrate transmitters at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 57 OF 67


2. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at zero, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistant source.

3.19 DDC SYSTEM CONTROLLER CHECKOUT

A. Verify power supply.

1. Verify voltage, phase and hertz.

2. Verify that protection from power surges is installed and functioning.

3. Verify that ground fault protection is installed.

4. If applicable, verify if connected to UPS unit.

5. If applicable, verify if connected to a backup power source.

6. If applicable, verify that power conditioning units, transient voltage suppression and high-frequency noise filter units are installed.

B. Verify that wire and cabling is properly secured to terminals and labeled with unique identification.

C. Verify that spare I/O capacity is provided.

3.20 DDC CONTROLLER I/O CONTROL LOOP TESTS

A. Testing:

1. Test every I/O point connected to DDC controller to verify that safety and operating control set points are as indicated and as required to operate controlled system safely and at optimum performance.

2. Test every I/O point throughout its full operating range.

3. Test every control loop to verify operation is stable and accurate.

4. Adjust control loop proportional, integral and derivative settings to achieve optimum performance while complying with performance requirements indicated. Document testing of each control loop's precision and stability via trend logs.

5. Test and adjust every control loop for proper operation according to sequence of operation.

6. Test software and hardware interlocks for proper operation. Correct deficiencies.

7. Operate each analog point at the following:

a. Upper quarter of range.

b. Lower quarter of range.

c. At midpoint of range.

8. Exercise each binary point.

9. For every I/O point in DDC system, read and record each value at operator workstation, at DDC controller and at field instrument simultaneously. Value displayed at operator workstation, at DDC controller and at field instrument shall match.

10. Prepare and submit a report documenting results for each I/O point in DDC system and include in each I/O point a description of corrective measures and adjustments made to achieve desire results.

3.21 DDC SYSTEM VALIDATION TESTS

A. Perform validation tests before requesting final review of system. Before beginning testing, first submit Pretest Checklist and Test Plan.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 58 OF 67


B. After approval of Test Plan, execute all tests and procedures indicated in plan.

C. After testing is complete, submit completed test checklist.

D. Pretest Checklist: Submit the following list with items checked off once verified:

1. Detailed explanation for any items that are not completed or verified.

2. Required mechanical installation work is successfully completed and HVAC equipment is working correctly.

3. HVAC equipment motors operate below full-load amperage ratings.

4. Required DDC system components, wiring, and accessories are installed.

5. Installed DDC system architecture matches approved Drawings.

6. Control electric power circuits operate at proper voltage and are free from faults.

7. Required surge protection is installed.

8. DDC system network communications function properly, including uploading and downloading programming changes.

9. Each controller's programming is backed up.

10. Equipment, products, wiring cable and conduits are properly labeled.

11. All I/O points are programmed into controllers.

12. Testing, adjusting and balancing work affecting controls is complete.

13. Dampers and actuators zero and span adjustments are set properly.

14. Each control damper and actuator goes to failed position on loss of power.

15. Valves and actuators zero and span adjustments are set properly.

16. Each control valve and actuator goes to failed position on loss of power.

17. Meter, sensor and transmitter readings are accurate and calibrated.

18. Control loops are tuned for smooth and stable operation.

19. View trend data where applicable.

20. Each controller works properly in standalone mode.

21. Safety controls and devices function properly.

22. Interfaces with fire-alarm system function properly.

23. Electrical interlocks function properly.

24. Operator workstations and other interfaces are delivered, all system and database software is installed, and graphic are created.

25. Record Drawings are completed.

E. Test Plan:

1. Prepare and submit a validation test plan including test procedures for performance validation tests.

2. Test plan shall address all specified functions of DDC system and sequences of operation.

3. Explain detailed actions and expected results to demonstrate compliance with requirements indicated.

4. Explain method for simulating necessary conditions of operation used to demonstrate performance.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 59 OF 67


5. Include a test checklist to be used to check and initial that each test has been successfully completed.

6. Submit test plan documentation 20 business days before start of tests.

F. Validation Test:

1. Verify operating performance of each I/O point in DDC system.

a. Verify analog I/O points at operating value.

b. Make adjustments to out-of-tolerance I/O points.

1) Identify I/O points for future reference.

2) Simulate abnormal conditions to demonstrate proper function of safety devices.

3) Replace instruments and controllers that cannot maintain performance indicated after adjustments.

2. Simulate conditions to demonstrate proper sequence of control.

3. Readjust settings to design values and observe ability of DDC system to establish desired conditions.

4. After 24 Hours following Initial Validation Test:

a. Re-check I/O points that required corrections during initial test.

b. Identify I/O points that still require additional correction and make corrections necessary to achieve desired results.

5. After 24 Hours of Second Validation Test:

a. Re-check I/O points that required corrections during second test.

b. Continue validation testing until I/O point is normal on two consecutive tests.

6. Completely check out, calibrate, and test all connected hardware and software to ensure that DDC system performs according to requirements indicated.

7. After validation testing is complete, prepare and submit a report indicating all I/O points that required correction and how many validation re-tests it took to pass. Identify adjustments made for each test and indicate instruments that were replaced.

G. DDC System Response Time Test:

1. Simulate HLC.

a. Heavy load shall be an occurrence of 50 percent of total connected binary COV, one-half of which represent an "alarm" condition, and 50 percent of total connected analog COV, one-half of which represent an "alarm" condition, that are initiated simultaneously on a one-time basis.

2. Initiate 10 successive occurrences of HLC and measure response time to typical alarms and status changes.

3. Measure with a timer having at least 0.1-second resolution and 0.01 percent accuracy.

4. Purpose of test is to demonstrate DDC system, as follows:

a. Reaction to COV and alarm conditions during HLC.

b. Ability to update DDC system database during HLC.

5. Passing test is contingent on the following:

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 60 OF 67


a. Alarm reporting at printer beginning no more than two seconds after the initiation (time zero) of HLC.

b. All alarms, both binary and analog, are reported and printed; none are lost.

c. Compliance with response times specified.

6. Prepare and submit a report documenting HLC tested and results of test including time stamp and print out of all alarms.

H. DDC System Network Bandwidth Test:

1. Test network bandwidth usage on all DDC system networks to demonstrate bandwidth usage under DDC system normal operating conditions and under simulated HLC.

2. To pass, none of DDC system networks shall use more than 70 percent of available bandwidth under normal and HLC operation.

3.22 FINAL REVIEW

A. Submit written request to Engineer, Commissioning Agent and Construction Manager when DDC system is ready for final review. Written request shall state the following:

1. DDC system has been thoroughly inspected for compliance with contract documents and found to be in full compliance.

2. DDC system has been calibrated, adjusted and tested and found to comply with requirements of operational stability, accuracy, speed and other performance requirements indicated.

3. DDC system monitoring and control of HVAC systems results in operation according to sequences of operation indicated.

4. DDC system is complete and ready for final review.

B. Review by Commissioning Agent and Construction Manager shall be made after receipt of written request. A field report shall be issued to document observations and deficiencies.

C. Take prompt action to remedy deficiencies indicated in field report and submit a second written request when all deficiencies have been corrected. Repeat process until no deficiencies are reported.

D. Should more than two reviews be required, DDC system manufacturer and Installer shall compensate entity performing review for total costs, labor and expenses, associated with third and subsequent reviews. Estimated cost of each review shall be submitted and approved by DDC system manufacturer and Installer before making the review.

E. Prepare and submit closeout submittals when no deficiencies are reported.

F. A part of DDC system final review shall include a demonstration to parties participating in final review.

1. Provide staff familiar with DDC system installed to demonstrate operation of DDC system during final review.

2. Provide testing equipment to demonstrate accuracy and other performance requirements of DDC system that is requested by reviewers during final review.

3. Demonstration shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

a. Accuracy and calibration of 20 I/O points randomly selected by reviewers. If review finds that some I/O points are not properly calibrated and not satisfying performance requirements indicated, additional I/O points may be selected by reviewers until total I/O points being reviewed that satisfy requirements equals quantity indicated.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 61 OF 67


b. HVAC equipment and system hardwired and software safeties and life-safety functions are operating according to sequence of operation. Up to 20 I/O points shall be randomly selected by reviewers. Additional I/O points may be selected by reviewers to discover problems with operation.

c. Correct sequence of operation after electrical power interruption and resumption after electrical power is restored for randomly selected HVAC systems.

d. Operation of randomly selected dampers and valves in normal-on, normal-off and failed positions.

e. Reporting of alarm conditions for randomly selected alarms, including different classes of alarms, to ensure that alarms are properly received by operators and operator workstations.

f. Trends, summaries, logs and reports set-up for Project.

g. For up to three HVAC systems per building randomly selected by reviewers, use graph trends to show that sequence of operation is executed in correct manner and that HVAC systems operate properly through complete sequence of operation including different modes of operations indicated. Show that control loops are stable and operating at set points and respond to changes in set point of 20 percent or more.

h. Software's ability to communicate with controllers, operator workstations, uploading and downloading of control programs.

i. Software's ability to edit control programs off-line.

j. Data entry to show Project-specific customizing capability including parameter changes.

k. Step through penetration tree, display all graphics, demonstrate dynamic update, and direct access to graphics.

l. Execution of digital and analog commands in graphic mode.

m. Spreadsheet and curve plot software and its integration with database.

n. Online user guide and help functions.

o. Multitasking by showing different operations occurring simultaneously on four quadrants of split screen.

p. System speed of response compared to requirements indicated.

q. For Each Network and Programmable Application Controller:

1) Memory: Programmed data, parameters, trend and alarm history collected during normal operation is not lost during power failure.

2) Operator Interface: Ability to connect directly to each type of digital controller with a portable workstation and mobile device. Show that maintenance personnel interface tools perform as indicated in manufacturer's technical literature.

3) Standalone Ability: Demonstrate that controllers provide stable and reliable standalone operation using default values or other method for values normally read over network.

4) Electric Power: Ability to disconnect any controller safely from its power source.

5) Wiring Labels: Match control drawings.

6) Network Communication: Ability to locate a controller's location on network and communication architecture matches Shop Drawings.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 62 OF 67


7) Nameplates and Tags: Accurate and permanently attached to control panel doors, instrument, actuators and devices.

r. For Each Operator Workstation:

1) I/O points lists agree with naming conventions.

2) Graphics are complete.

3) UPS unit, if applicable, operates.

s. Communications and Interoperability: Demonstrate proper interoperability of data sharing, alarm and event management, trending, scheduling, and device and network management. Requirements must be met even if only one manufacturer's equipment is installed.

1) Data Presentation: On each operator workstation, demonstrate graphic display capabilities.

2) Reading of Any Property: Demonstrate ability to read and display any used readable object property of any device on network.

3) Set Point and Parameter Modifications: Show ability to modify set points and tuning parameters indicated. Modifications are made with messages and write services initiated by an operator using workstation graphics, or by completing a field in a menu with instructional text.

4) Peer-to-Peer Data Exchange: Network devices are installed and configured to perform without need for operator intervention to implement Project sequence of operation and to share global data.

5) Alarm and Event Management: Alarms and events are installed and prioritized according to Owner. Demonstrate that time delays and other logic are set up to avoid nuisance tripping. Show that operators with sufficient privileges are permitted.

6) Schedule Lists: Schedules are configured for start and stop, mode change, occupant overrides, and night setback as defined in sequence of operations.

7) Schedule Display and Modification: Ability to display any schedule with start and stop times for calendar year. Show that all calendar entries and schedules are modifiable from any connected operator workstation by an operator with sufficient privilege.

8) Archival Storage of Data: Data archiving is handled by operator workstation and server and local trend archiving and display is accomplished.

9) Modification of Trend Log Object Parameters: Operator with sufficient privilege can change logged data points, sampling rate, and trend duration.

10) Device and Network Management:

a) Display of network device status.

b) Display of BACnet Object Information.

c) Silencing devices transmitting erroneous data.

d) Time synchronization.

e) Remote device re-initialization.

f) Backup and restore network device programming and master database(s).

g) Configuration management of routers.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 63 OF 67


3.23 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.24 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative with complete knowledge of Project-specific system installed to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain DDC system.

B. Extent of Training:

1. Base extent of training on scope and complexity of DDC system indicated and training requirements indicated. Provide extent of training required to satisfy requirements indicated even if more than minimum training requirements are indicated.

2. Inform Owner of anticipated training requirements if more than minimum training requirements are indicated.

3. Minimum Training Requirements:

a. Provide not less than five days of training total.

b. Stagger training over multiple training classes to accommodate Owner's requirements. All training shall occur before end of warranty period.

c. Total days of training shall be broken into not more than four separate training classes.

d. Each training class shall be not less than two consecutive day(s).

C. Training Schedule:

1. Schedule training with Owner 20 business days before expected Substantial Completion.

2. Schedule training to provide Owner with at least 10 business days of notice in advance of training.

3. Training shall occur within normal business hours at a mutually agreed on time. Unless otherwise agreed to, training shall occur Monday through Friday, except on U.S. Federal holidays, with two morning sessions and two afternoon sessions. Each morning session and afternoon session shall be split in half with 30-minute break between sessions. Morning and afternoon sessions shall be separated by 60-minute lunch period. Training, including breaks and excluding lunch period, shall not exceed eight hours per day.

4. Provide staggered training schedule as requested by Owner.

D. Training Attendee List and Sign-in Sheet:

1. Request from Owner in advance of training a proposed attendee list with name, phone number and e-mail address.

2. Provide a preprinted sign-in sheet for each training session with proposed attendees listed and no fewer than six blank spaces to add additional attendees.

3. Preprinted sign-in sheet shall include training session number, date and time, instructor name, phone number and e-mail address, and brief description of content to be covered during session. List attendees with columns for name, phone number, e-mail address and a column for attendee signature or initials.

4. Circulate sign-in sheet at beginning of each session and solicit attendees to sign or initial in applicable location.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 64 OF 67


5. At end of each training day, send Owner an e-mail with an attachment of scanned copy (PDF) of circulated sign-in sheet for each session.

E. Training Attendee Headcount:

1. Plan in advance of training for five attendees.

2. Make allowance for Owner to add up to two attendee(s) at time of training.

3. Headcount may vary depending on training content covered in session. Attendee access may be restricted to some training content for purposes of maintaining system security.

F. Training Attendee Prior Knowledge: For guidance in planning required training and instruction, assume attendees have the following:

1. Basic user knowledge of computers and office applications.

2. Basic knowledge of HVAC systems.

3. Basic knowledge of DDC systems.

4. Basic knowledge of DDC system and products installed.

G. Attendee Training Manuals:

1. Provide each attendee with a color hard copy of all training materials and visual presentations.

2. Hard-copy materials shall be organized in a three-ring binder with table of contents and individual divider tabs marked for each logical grouping of subject matter. Organize material to provide space for attendees to take handwritten notes within training manuals.

3. In addition to hard-copy materials included in training manual, provide each binder with a sleeve or pocket that includes a DVD or flash drive with PDF copy of all hard-copy materials.

H. Instructor Requirements:

1. One or multiple qualified instructors, as required, to provide training.

2. Instructors shall have not less than five years of providing instructional training on not less than five past projects with similar DDC system scope and complexity to DDC system installed.

I. Organization of Training Sessions:

1. Organize training sessions into logical groupings of technical content and to reflect different levels of operators having access to system. Plan training sessions to accommodate the following three levels of operators:

a. Daily operators.

b. Advanced operators.

c. System managers and administrators.

2. Plan and organize training sessions to group training content to protect DDC system security. Some attendees may be restricted to some training sessions that cover restricted content for purposes of maintaining DDC system security.

J. Training Outline:

1. Submit training outline for Owner review at least 10 business day before scheduling training.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 65 OF 67


2. Outline shall include a detailed agenda for each training day that is broken down into each of four training sessions that day, training objectives for each training session and synopses for each lesson planned.

K. On-Site Training:

1. Owner will provide conditioned classroom or workspace with ample desks or tables, chairs, power and data connectivity for instructor and each attendee.

2. Instructor shall provide training materials, projector and other audiovisual equipment used in training.

3. Provide as much of training located on-site as deemed feasible and practical by Owner.

4. On-site training shall include regular walk-through tours, as required, to observe each unique product type installed with hands-on review of operation, calibration and service requirements.

5. Operator workstation provided with DDC system shall be used in training. If operator workstation is not indicated, provide a temporary workstation to convey training content.

L. Off-Site Training:

1. Provide conditioned training rooms and workspace with ample tables desks or tables, chairs, power and data connectivity for each attendee.

2. Provide capability to remotely access to Project DDC system for use in training.

3. Provide a workstation for use by each attendee.

M. Training Content for Daily Operators:

1. Basic operation of system.

2. Understanding DDC system architecture and configuration.

3. Understanding each unique product type installed including performance and service requirements for each.

4. Understanding operation of each system and equipment controlled by DDC system including sequences of operation, each unique control algorithm and each unique optimization routine.

5. Operating operator workstations, printers and other peripherals.

6. Logging on and off system.

7. Accessing graphics, reports and alarms.

8. Adjusting and changing set points and time schedules.

9. Recognizing DDC system malfunctions.

10. Understanding content of operation and maintenance manuals including control drawings.

11. Understanding physical location and placement of DDC controllers and I/O hardware.

12. Accessing data from DDC controllers.

13. Operating portable operator workstations.

14. Review of DDC testing results to establish basic understanding of DDC system operating performance and HVAC system limitations as of Substantial Completion.

15. Running each specified report and log.

16. Displaying and demonstrating each data entry to show Project-specific customizing capability. Demonstrating parameter changes.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 66 OF 67


17. Stepping through graphics penetration tree, displaying all graphics, demonstrating dynamic updating, and direct access to graphics.

18. Executing digital and analog commands in graphic mode.

19. Demonstrating control loop precision and stability via trend logs of I/O for not less than 10 percent of I/O installed.

20. Demonstrating DDC system performance through trend logs and command tracing.

21. Demonstrating scan, update, and alarm responsiveness.

22. Demonstrating spreadsheet and curve plot software, and its integration with database.

23. Demonstrating on-line user guide, and help function and mail facility.

24. Demonstrating multitasking by showing dynamic curve plot, and graphic construction operating simultaneously via split screen.

25. Demonstrating the following for HVAC systems and equipment controlled by DDC system:

a. Operation of HVAC equipment in normal-off, -on and failed conditions while observing individual equipment, dampers and valves for correct position under each condition.

b. For HVAC equipment with factory-installed software, show that integration into DDC system is able to communicate with DDC controllers or gateways, as applicable.

c. Using graphed trends, show that sequence of operation is executed in correct manner, and HVAC systems operate properly through complete sequence of operation including seasonal change, occupied and unoccupied modes, warm-up and cool-down cycles and other modes of operation indicated.

d. Hardware interlocks and safeties function properly and DDC system performs correct sequence of operation after electrical power interruption and resumption after power is restored.

e. Reporting of alarm conditions for each alarm, and confirm that alarms are received at assigned locations, including operator workstations.

f. Each control loop responds to set point adjustment and stabilizes within time period indicated.

g. Sharing of previously graphed trends of all control loops to demonstrate that each control loop is stable and set points are being maintained.

N. Training Content for Advanced Operators:

1. Making and changing workstation graphics.

2. Creating, deleting and modifying alarms including annunciation and routing.

3. Creating, deleting and modifying point trend logs including graphing and printing on an ad-hoc basis and operator-defined time intervals.

4. Creating, deleting and modifying reports.

5. Creating, deleting and modifying points.

6. Creating, deleting and modifying programming including ability to edit control programs off-line.

7. Creating, deleting and modifying system graphics and other types of displays.

8. Adding DDC controllers and other network communication devices such as gateways and routers.

9. Adding operator workstations.

SECTION 23 09 23


PAGE 67 OF 67


10. Performing DDC system checkout and diagnostic procedures.

11. Performing DDC controllers operation and maintenance procedures.

12. Performing operator workstation operation and maintenance procedures.

13. Configuring DDC system hardware including controllers, workstations, communication devices and I/O points.

14. Maintaining, calibrating, troubleshooting, diagnosing and repairing hardware.

15. Adjusting, calibrating and replacing DDC system components.

O. Training Content for System Managers and Administrators:

1. DDC system software maintenance and backups.

2. Uploading, downloading and off-line archiving of all DDC system software and databases.

3. Interface with Project-specific, third-party operator software.

4. Understanding password and security procedures.

5. Adding new operators and making modifications to existing operators.

6. Operator password assignments and modification.

7. Operator authority assignment and modification.

8. Workstation data segregation and modification.

P. Video of Training Sessions:

1. Provide a digital video and audio recording of each training session. Create a separate recording file for each session.

2. Stamp each recording file with training session number, session name and date.

3. Provide Owner with two copies of digital files on DVDs or flash drives for later reference and for use in future training.

4. Owner retains right to make additional copies for intended training purposes without having to pay royalties.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 09 93

SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS

PAGE 1 OF 94


SECTION 23 09 93 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. This section defines the manner and method by which controls function. Requirements for each type of control system operation are specified. Equipment, devices, and system components required for control systems are specified in other sections.

2. Sequence of operation for:

a. General Requirements

b. Emergency Generator

c. Utility Monitoring

d. Hot Water/Glycol Heating Systems

e. Chilled Water/Glycol Cooling and Pumping Systems

f. Air Handling Unit Systems

g. Fan Coil Units

h. Unit Ventilators

i. Kitchen Exhaust and Makeup Air System

j. VAV Reheat Boxes

k. Fan Powered VAV Boxes

l. Constant Volume Reheat Boxes

m. Reheat Coils

n. Cabinet and Unit Heaters

o. Finned Tube Radiation

p. Radiant Panels

q. Exhaust Fans

r. Intake and Relief Ventilators and Louvers

s. Snowmelt

t. Radiant Floor

u. Exterior Security & Building Lights

v. Kitchen Gas Valve

w. Domestic Hot Water Heating Systems

x. Control of Duct Condensation

y. Head End Technology Rooms

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 2 OF 94


z. Misc. Building Monitoring Points

1.3 COORDINATION


PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All safety devices shall be hardwired to the starter/VFD and shall have a second contact for monitoring via the BMS.

B. Freezestats shall be automatic reset type and shall be installed with time delay and latching relays. A freezestat must sense a temperature below 40°F (adj.) for a period of 180 seconds (adj.) prior to initiating a response to a freeze condition. Once the freezestat condition response has been activated, manual reset at the BMS panel shall be required to allow the system to return to normal.

C. Air pressure switches shall be manual reset type and a manual reset at the switch shall be required to allow the system to restart.

D. All setpoints including setpoints internal to control algorithms shall be adjustable from all BMS operator interfaces. All commands shall be over writable from all BMS operator interfaces. All control points shall be adjustable or over writable from the same graphic page that displays the points.

E. Maintain or transfer all existing system setpoints (damper positions, pressure setpoints, temperature setpoints, fan speeds etc.).

F. All points for a specific mechanical system shall be connected to and controlled by the same DDC controller unless otherwise specified. For example, it is not acceptable to control a supply fan with one (1) DDC controller located at a motor control center and to control the rest of the air-handling unit points with a DDC controller located at the air-handling unit.

G. All points required by the sequence of operation as well as all of the points’ associated values, shall be connected to the BMS and available to the BMS operators on all operator workstations and all operator interface devices as part of a graphical display that depicts the mechanical system controlled.

H. All initial field settings applied shall be saved as the default values. These values shall be downloaded to the controller such that they are the default value if the controller loses power. A printed copy shall also be provided to the owner as part of the O & M manuals.

I. When the motor controller is equipped with an HOA, the motors shall only be controlled by the BMS when the HOA switch is in the auto position.

J. Freezestats, pressure safeties, interlocked dampers, etc. shall be wired to shutdown motors when the HOA switch is in both the hand and auto positions. It shall not be possible to override these or any other safety devices or any fire alarm system control functions.

K. BMS/ATC System Points: The system shall include as a minimum those points indicated in the control diagrams.

L. Where fans and dampers are to be hardwire interlocked, provide hardwire interlocks between the motor terminal strip and dampers such that the damper shall be driven open then the motor is required to start. Motor start-up shall not occur until the damper end switch indicates the damper is in the full open position. Where fans and dampers are hardwire interlocked, the

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 3 OF 94


interlocks shall apply in both the “hand” and “auto” positions of the HOA switch at the motor controller.

M. All points required to provide the Sequence of Operation shall be included.

N. Provide runtimes of all pumps and fans at the BMS.

O. All setpoints shall be adjustable from the BMS graphic.

P. Where heating is provided for vestibules, the temperature setpoint shall be a maximum of 60°F and shall be only be enabled when the outside air temperature is below 45°F.

Q. Zone temperature controls for heated and cooled spaces shall have a minimum 5°F dead band and setpoint overlap restriction.

R. Optimal Start/Stop: Using outside temperature and room temperature or representative room temperature(s) compared to occupied heating and cooling setpoints, calculate the optimum time to start the unit before programmed occupied period to achieve comfort settings by scheduled occupancy. Automatically and continuously recalculate the algorithm to better predict building performance. When the optimal stop mode is active the unit controller shall maintain the space temperature to the space temperature offset setpoint. Outside air damper shall remain enabled to provide ventilation.

S. Zone temperature setback controls shall be provided that maintain the unoccupied heating setpoint a minimum of 10°F below the occupied heating setpoint (Radiant floor zone temperature setback shall be a minimum of 4°F below the occupied setpoint) and the unoccupied cooling setpoint a minimum of 5°F above the occupied cooling setpoint.

3.2 UTILITY MONITORING

A. Provide graphic screen(s) to display current data such as voltage / current for each phase, kW, kWh accumulated to line up with billing cycle, peak kW with time set, power factor, and other points requested by the owner or design team. Provide a trend for all monitored points. Send alarm if voltage is more than 8% above or below nominal or power factor falls below 0.75 for a period of 5 minutes (adj.).

B. BMS shall monitor natural gas meter(s) provided by utility. Display current usage rate and accumulated volume to line up with utility billing cycle. Provide a trend for these points.

3.3 EMERGENCY GENERATOR

A. This sequence applies to the following schools:

1. Oakview Middle School (5-4815)

2. New Early Childhood Center (5-4745)

B. For schools equipped with an emergency generator, the BMS shall monitor the operation of the generator and shall alarm if generator is energized. BMS shall provide/install relay at contacts to annunciator panels.

3.4 EMERGENCY GENERATOR - INDOOR


1. Lake Orion High School (5-4818)

B. When the generator is not running, intake and exhaust dampers shall be closed.

C. When generator is running, intake damper (EX. OAH-1D) and exhaust damper (at louver) shall open. Monitor damper status and alarm if dampers do not open when required. Dampers shall be normally open, power closed.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 4 OF 94


D. Recirculation bypass damper shall modulate open to allow warm exhaust air to be recirculated back into the generator room during startup in cold conditions. Damper shall modulate to maintain the room at 75°F (adj.). Damper shall be normally closed.

E. The BMS shall monitor the operation of the generator and shall alarm if generator is energized. BMS shall provide/install relay at contacts to annunciator panels.

3.5 VARIABLE-PRIMARY HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEM


1. Carpenter Elementary (5-4810)

2. Webber Elementary (5-4814)


B. The hot water system consists of (2) boilers and (2) primary pumps. New boiler sequencer controls will continue to control boiler enable and firing rate, sequencing, isolation valve operation and boiler system bypass valve operation. The BMS controller shall provide boiler system enable/disable and supply temperature setpoint.

C. Heating System Enable/Disable: The heating system shall be enabled when there is demand from any of the sub-systems or when the outside air temperature drops below 45°F. When enabled, the BMS controller shall start the lead hot water distribution pump and enable the boiler system. The boiler sequence controller shall operate the boilers and isolation valves to maintain system supply setpoint.

D. Monitor boiler system supply temperature. If the boiler system is unable to maintain system supply temperature setpoint during extremely cold weather, the fresh air load of all non 100% OA systems shall be incrementally reduced as required to lower the load on the heating system.

E. Hot Water Supply Temperature Reset: The system hot water supply temperature setpoint shall be reset from 140°F (adj.) down to 110°F (adj.) supply temperature. The reset setpoint shall be determined based on building heating demand as determined from heating valve positions, not based on outdoor air temperature. Reset the supply water temperature setpoint downward by 2°F (adj.) every 10 minutes until the most open system control valve is 95% open.

F. Heating Hot Water Distribution Pumps:

1. Start/Stop: The BMS controller shall start a hot water pump through a contact closure of the pump’s variable frequency drive (VFD) run-enable contacts.

2. Pump Status: The BMS controller shall detect hot water pump run status by a VFD current switch.

3. Lead/Lag: The pump lead/standby sequence shall be determined automatically based on a weekly schedule. An operator shall be able to manually change the lead/lag sequence. The BMS system shall equalize runtime for both main circulating pumps using scheduled lead/lag (change each day, week, or month at choice of owner).

4. Pump Failure: If the lead pump is enabled and the status is off for more than 30 seconds (adj.), start the lag pump and the BMS shall annunciate lead pump failure alarm. When a pump failure exists, lead/lag automation shall be disabled and the currently running pump becomes the lead pump. Once the problem has been corrected, the operator shall be able to clear the alarm failure from the BMS. This action shall re-enable the lead/lag sequence.

5. Pump Speed: The BMS controller shall monitor a minimum of (2) remote system differential pressure sensors located near the furthest hot water coils. When the pump VFD is enabled, the BMS controller shall control the pump speed to maintain a hot water differential pressure setpoint of 15 psig (adj.).

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 5 OF 94


6. Pump Optimization: The BMS shall continually monitor the control valve position of all coils in the system.

a. Reset supply water temperature setpoint first. If hot water supply temperature setpoint is reset to minimum setting and maximum control valve is less than 90%, reset hot water system DP setpoint based on maximum heating coil control valve position.

b. At hot water system startup, the pressure setpoint is set to maximum pressure setpoint. When all hot water valves are less than 85% open and the hot water supply temperature is reset to its minimum, the hot water differential pressure setpoint shall be lowered by 0.1 psig (adj.) of the current hot water differential pressure setpoint. This occurs every 5 minutes until at least one valve is more than 85% open, or if the setpoint is equal to the minimum hot water differential pressure setpoint, or if the pump VFD's are at a minimum speed setting (22 Hz). Coordinate proper differential pressure settings with TAB contractor.

c. When any hot water valve is more than 95% open, the hot water pressure setpoint shall increase by 0.1 psig (adj.) of the current hot water differential setpoint. This occurs every 5 minutes until no valve is more than 95% open, or if the hot water differential pressure setpoint has risen to the system’s maximum setting, or if the pump VFD's are at the maximum setting (60 Hz).

G. Makeup glycol / water to the heating hot water system shall be totalized and alarmed by the BMS/ATC System using boiler makeup flow meter.

H. Emergency Boiler Stop: An alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS if the emergency boiler stop(s) has been activated.

I. Water filter pump shall operate on a time of day schedule as long as a primary pump is running. If the differential pressure across the filter exceeds 20 psig. (adj.), the pump will be shut down and the system will alarm.

J. Additional system points to monitor and system alarms include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Run status for each boiler

2. High water filter pressure drop

3. High make up water flow

4. Pump failure

5. High system differential pressure

6. Low system supply temperature

7. Boiler controller alarms

8. Low glycol fill tank level

9. High carbon monoxide level

3.6 PRIMARY-SECONDARY VARIABLE FLOW HEATING HOT WATER SYSTEM WITH MODULATING SECONDARY VALVE


1. Stadium Drive Elementary School (5-4813)


3. Pine Tree Center (5-4821)

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 6 OF 94


B. The hot water system consists of multiple boilers and associated pumps, refer to individual schematics. The BMS controller shall provide control and sequencing of boilers, pumps and valves.

C. Heating System Enable/Disable: The heating system shall be enabled when there is demand from any of the sub-systems or outside temperature is below 45°F.

D. Heating Hot Water Distribution Pumps:

1. Start/Stop: The BMS controller shall start a hot water pump through a contact closure of the pump’s variable frequency drive (VFD) run-enable contacts. When heating system is enabled both system pumps shall be enabled and run continuously. At Stadium Drive Elementary (5-4813) and Pine Tree Center (5-4821), enable the system booster pumps whenever the main distribution pumps are enabled.

2. Pump Status: The BMS controller shall detect hot water pump status by the VFD run status output.



5. Pump Speed: The BMS controller shall monitor one or more remote system differential pressure sensors located near the furthest hot water coils, refer to drawings for quantity and location. Enable the lead pump and modulate pump speed to maintain a system differential pressure setpoint of 15 psig (adj.) at the minimum of the DP sensor(s), coordinate proper differential pressure setting with TAB contractor. If the lead pump is at 95% speed and system pressure is below calculated DP setpoint, enable lag pump and modulate both pumps at the same speed to maintain calculated DP setpoint. If both pump speeds drop below 40%, disable the lag pump. Set minimum pump speed at the BMS to 20%. At a minimum, one pump must be running continuously anytime the heating system is enabled.

6. The distribution pump sequences above also apply to the tertiary hot water distribution loop pumps at Oakview Middle School (5-4815).

E. Hot Water Supply Temperature Reset:

1. Monitor the positions of all the heating coil control valves in the system and determine maximum valve position. The hot water supply temperature setpoint shall be reset based on the maximum heating control valve position (not outside air temperature).

2. Reset hot water system setpoint from 160°F maximum (adj.) to 100°F minimum (adj.) to maintain the maximum control valve position at 95% open. If any system control valve is open above 95%, increment the hot water supply temperature setpoint up toward maximum setpoint. If all system control valves are open less than 90%, increment hot water supply temperature setpoint down toward minimum setpoint.

3. Limit all setpoint changes to a maximum of 2°F in 10 minutes.

F. Secondary Loop Control Valve:

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 7 OF 94


1. Modulate secondary loop control valve to maintain hot water system calculated setpoint.

2. Monitor boiler return temperature. Limit the maximum the secondary loop valve can open to maintain boiler return temperature above 135°F.

G. Boiler Control: The boiler lead/lag sequence shall be on a weekly schedule. From the BMS workstation, an operator shall be able to manually change the lead/lag sequence.

1. When the heating system is enabled, enable the boiler pumps to run continuously. If any pump status indicates off for more than 1 minute, send alarm.

2. Boiler leaving temperature set point reset: Add 5°F to the calculated secondary loop and use the boiler loop setpoint. Limit the boiler loop setpoint range from 185°F maximum to 140°F minimum.

3. When lead boiler leaving temperature drops below calculated heating system setpoint, and lead boiler pump is enabled and status indicates running, enable lead boiler and stage / modulate to maintain boiler leaving temperature at the calculated boiler loop setpoint.

4. If the hot water distribution system supply temperature falls more than 25°F (adj.) below setpoint for a period longer than 15 minutes (adj.), or if an active boiler signals a failure alarm, the BMS shall send alarm. When a boiler failure exists, lead/lag automation shall be disabled and the currently running boiler shall become the lead boiler. Once the problem is corrected, the operator shall be able to clear the alarm failure from the BMS. This shall re-enable the lead/lag sequence.

5. Once the lead boiler is enabled, the add sequence of additional boilers shall be disabled for a period of 30 minutes (adj.). Additional boilers are added if the hot leaving temperature is not able to maintain boiler water leaving temperature setpoint.

6. The last boiler enabled shall be disabled when the hot water temperature rises 5.0°F (adj.) above the hot water setpoint for a period of 10 minutes (adj.) or more. Additional boilers shall be disabled following the same subtraction sequence if the hot water temperature remains 5.0°F (adj.) above the hot water setpoint for a period of 10 minutes (adj.) or more.

7. If the boiler system is unable to keep up with the load during extremely cold weather, the fresh air load of all non 100% OA systems shall be incrementally reduced as required to fall within the boiler output capability.

8. Provide a manual bypass switch for each boiler that allows manual boiler operation if the BMS/ATC fails.

H. Makeup glycol / water to the heating hot water system shall be totalized and alarmed by the BMS/ATC System using boiler makeup flow meter.

I. System alarms include, but are not limited to the following:



3. Pump failure






3.7 PRIMARY-SECONDARY VARIABLE FLOW HEATING HOT WATER SYSTEM

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 8 OF 94



1. Orion Oaks Elementary (5-4811)

2. Paint Creek Elementary School (5-4812)

3. Scripps Middle School (5-4816)

4. Waldon Middle School (5-4817)


B. The hot water system consists of multiple boilers and associated pumps, refer to individual schematics. The BMS controller shall provide control and sequencing of boilers and pumps.

C. Heating System Enable/Disable: The heating system shall be enabled when there is demand from any of the sub-systems or outside temperature is below 45°F.

D. Heating Hot Water Distribution Pumps:

1. Start/Stop: The BMS controller shall start a hot water pump through a contact closure of the pump’s variable frequency drive (VFD) run-enable contacts. When heating system is enabled both system pumps shall be enabled and run continuously.




5. Pump Speed: The BMS controller shall monitor one or more remote system differential pressure sensors located near the furthest hot water coils, refer to drawings for quantity and location. Enable the lead pump and modulate pump speed to maintain a system differential pressure setpoint of 15 psig (adj.) at the minimum of the DP sensor(s), coordinate proper differential pressure setting with TAB contractor. If the lead pump is at 95% speed and system pressure is below calculated DP setpoint, enable lag pump and modulate both pumps at the same speed to maintain calculated DP setpoint. If both pump speeds drop below 40%, disable the lag pump. Set minimum pump speed at the BMS to 20%. At a minimum, one pump must be running continuously anytime the heating system is enabled.

E. Hot Water Supply Temperature Reset:

1. Monitor the positions of all the heating coil control valves in the system and determine maximum valve position. The hot water supply temperature setpoint shall be reset based on the maximum heating control valve position (not outside air temperature).

2. Reset hot water system setpoint from 160°F maximum (adj.) to 140°F minimum (adj.) to maintain the maximum control valve position at 95% open. If any system control valve is open above 95%, increment the hot water supply temperature setpoint up toward maximum setpoint. If all system control valves are open less than 90%, increment hot water supply temperature setpoint down toward minimum setpoint.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 9 OF 94


3. Limit all setpoint changes to a maximum of 2°F in 10 minutes.

F. Boiler Control: The boiler lead/lag sequence shall be on a weekly schedule. From the BMS workstation, an operator shall be able to manually change the lead/lag sequence.

1. When hot water system supply temperature drops below calculated setpoint, enable the lead boiler pump. If lead pump status indicates running, enable lead boiler and stage / modulate to maintain boiler leaving temperature at the calculated heating system setpoint plus 5°F.

2. If the hot water system supply temperature falls more than 25°F (adj.) below setpoint for a period longer than 15 minutes (adj.), or if an active boiler signals a failure alarm, the BMS shall enable the lag boiler(s) and alarm. When a boiler failure exists, lead/lag automation shall be disabled and the currently running boiler shall become the lead boiler. Once the problem is corrected, the operator shall be able to clear the alarm failure from the BMS. This shall re-enable the lead/lag sequence.

3. Once the lead boiler is enabled, the add sequence of additional boilers shall be disabled for a period of 30 minutes (adj.). Additional boilers are added if the hot water system supply temperature falls 5.0°F (adj.) below the calculated hot water setpoint for a period of 10 minutes (adj.) or more.

4. When additional boilers are required, enable the associated boiler pump and when status indicates running, enable boiler and stage / modulate to maintain boiler leaving temperature at the calculated heating system setpoint plus 5°F.

5. The last boiler enabled shall be disabled when the hot water temperature rises 5.0°F (adj.) above the hot water setpoint for a period of 10 minutes (adj.) or more. Additional boilers shall be disabled following the same subtraction sequence if the hot water temperature remains 5.0°F (adj.) above the hot water setpoint for a period of 10 minutes (adj.) or more. When a boiler is disabled, run the associated boiler pump for an additional 5 minutes to dissipate boiler heat.

6. If the boiler system is unable to keep up with the load during extremely cold weather, the fresh air load of all non 100% OA systems shall be incrementally reduced as required to fall within the boiler output capability.

7. Provide a manual bypass switch for each boiler that allows manual boiler operation if the BMS/ATC fails.

G. At Lake Orion High School (5-4818) only, monitor primary header temperatures as shown on the control diagrams.

H. Makeup glycol / water to the heating hot water system shall be totalized and alarmed by the BMS/ATC System using boiler makeup flow meter.

I. Combustion Air: Where indicated on control diagrams, combustion air damper must prove open before and while the lead boiler is enabled. If damper is not proven open, an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS and the boilers disabled.

J. Emergency Boiler Stop: At the following schools, an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS if the emergency boiler stop(s) has been activated:




K. System alarms include, but are not limited to the following:

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 10 OF 94




3. Pump failure






3.8 VARIABLE PRIMARY AIR COOLED CHILLER PLANT


1. Carpenter Elementary School (5-4810)


3. Paint Creek Elementary (5-4812)


B. The chilled water system consists of (1) chiller and (1 or 2) primary pumps. The BMS controller shall provide stand-alone control of the supply water temperature setpoint (adj.) by controlling the chillers enable/disable boiler signal.

C. Chilled Water System Enable/Disable: The chilled water system shall be enabled when a related system (any equipment with cooling coils) is in the occupied mode and calling for cooling. When enabled, the BMS shall start the lead chilled water pump. When the chilled water system is disabled, the chilled water pump(s) shall be off.

D. Chiller Status: Flow shall be verified internally to the chiller by its Unit Control Module and the external differential pressure sensor.

E. Chilled Water Supply Temperature Setpoint:

1. Monitor the positions of all the chilled water coil control valves in the system. The chilled water supply temperature setpoint shall be reset based on the maximum control valve position (not outside air temperature).

2. Reset chilled water system setpoint from 48°F maximum (adj.) to 42°F minimum (adj.) to maintain the maximum control valve position at 95% open. If any system control valve is open above 95%, increment the chilled water supply temperature setpoint down toward minimum setpoint. If all system control valves are open less than 90%, increment chilled water supply temperature setpoint up toward maximum setpoint.

3. Limit all setpoint changes to a maximum of 0.5°F increments every 15 minutes.

F. Chilled Water Distribution Pumps:

1. Start/Stop: The BMS controller shall start a chilled water pump through a contact closure of the pumps VFD run-enable contacts.

2. Pump Status: The BMS controller shall detect chilled water pump status from pump VFD run status output.

3. Lead/Lag: For schools with multiple pumps, the pump lead/standby sequence shall be determined automatically based on a weekly schedule. An operator shall be able to manually change the lead/lag sequence. The BMS system shall equalize runtime for both

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 11 OF 94


main circulating pumps using scheduled lead/lag (change each day, week, or month at choice of owner).

4. Pump Failure: If the lead pump start/stop relay is enabled and the pump status is off for more than 15 seconds (adj.), the BMS controller shall annunciate a chilled water pump failure alarm to the BMS workstation, start the next pump in the sequence and disable the lead/standby functionality.

5. Pump Speed: The BMS controller shall monitor a minimum of (2) remote system differential pressure sensors located near the furthest chilled water coils. When the pump VFD is enabled, the BMS controller shall control the pump speed to maintain a hot water differential pressure setpoint of 15 psig (adj.).

6. Pump Optimization: The BMS shall continually monitor the control valve position of all coils in the system.

a. At chilled water system startup, the pressure setpoint is 100% of the maximum pressure setpoint. When all chilled water valves are less than 85% open and the chilled water supply temperature is reset to its maximum, the differential pressure setpoint shall be lowered by 0.1 psig (adj.) of the current differential pressure setpoint. This occurs every 5 minutes until at least one valve is more than 85% open, or if the setpoint is equal to the minimum differential pressure setpoint, or if the pump VFD's are at a minimum speed setting (22 Hz). Coordinate proper differential pressure setting with TAB contractor.

b. When any chilled water valve is more than 95% open, the pressure setpoint shall increase by 0.1 psig (adj.) of the current differential setpoint. This occurs every 5 minutes until no valve is more than 95% open, or if the differential pressure setpoint has risen to the system’s maximum setting, or if the pump VFD's are at the maximum setting (60 Hz).

G. Chilled Water Bypass Valve Control: The BMS controller shall monitor the differential pressure across the evaporator of the chiller to determine flow and shall modulate the Chiller Minimum Flow Bypass Valve to maintain flow above the manufacturer recommended minimum flow at low system flow conditions.

H. The chilled glycol/water system setpoint during normal operation shall be approximately 56F

entering, 42F leaving.

I. Provide BMS override to shutdown Cooling System via building management system.

J. Water filter pump shall operate on a time of day schedule as long as the system pumps are running. If the differential pressure across the filter exceeds 20 psig. (adj.), the pump will be shut down and the system will alarm.

K. System alarms include, but are not limited to the following:



3. Pump failure


5. Low system differential pressure

6. Low system supply and return temperatures

7. High system supply and return temperatures

8. Chiller controller alarms

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 12 OF 94



3.9 PRIMARY/SECONDARY VARIABLE FLOW AIR COOLED CHILLER PLANT


1. Stadium Drive Elementary (5-4813)






B. The chilled water system consists of one or more chillers, primary pumps, and secondary pumps. Some schools also include a remote evaporator, refer to control diagrams. The BMS controller shall provide stand-alone control of the supply water temperature setpoint by controlling the chillers enable/disable signal.

C. Chilled Water System Enable / Disable:

1. The chilled water system shall be enabled when a related system (any equipment with cooling coils) is in the occupied mode and calling for cooling. When enabled, the BMS shall start the lead chilled water recirculation pump, the chiller circulation pump, open the chiller isolation valve if applicable, and then enable the lead chiller. Stage / modulate to maintain chiller leaving temperature at the chilled water supply temperature setpoint.

2. If all related systems are satisfied, the chilled water system shall stay enabled for a period of 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, disable any enabled chiller and hold isolation valve (if applicable) open for a period of 10 minutes. System pump(s) to remain running for the same period.

3. Provide a manual bypass switch for each chiller that will open isolation valve (if applicable) and enable operation at local setpoint, if the BMS fails.

D. Chiller Status: Flow shall be verified internally to the chiller by its Unit Control Module and the external differential pressure sensor or flow switch.

E. Chilled Water Supply Temperature Setpoint:

1. Monitor the positions of all the chilled water coil control valves in the system. The chilled water supply temperature setpoint shall be reset based on the maximum control valve position (not outside air temperature).

2. Reset chilled water system setpoint from 50°F maximum (adj.) to 44°F minimum (adj.) to maintain the maximum control valve position at 95% open. If any system control valve is open above 95%, increment the chilled water supply temperature setpoint down toward minimum setpoint. If all system control valves are open less than 90%, increment chilled water supply temperature setpoint up toward maximum setpoint.

3. Limit all setpoint changes to a maximum of 0.5°F increments every 10 minutes.

F. Chilled Water Distribution Pump(s):

1. Start/Stop: The BMS controller shall start a hot water pump through a contact closure of the pump’s variable frequency drive (VFD) run-enable contacts. When heating system is enabled both system pumps shall be enabled and run continuously.


SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 13 OF 94




5. Pump Speed: The BMS controller shall monitor one or more remote system differential pressure sensors located near the furthest chilled water coils, refer to drawings for quantity and location. Enable the lead pump and modulate pump speed to maintain a system differential pressure setpoint of 15 psig (adj.) at the minimum of the DP sensor(s), coordinate proper differential pressure setting with TAB contractor. If the lead pump is at 95% speed and system pressure is below calculated DP setpoint, enable lag pump and modulate both pumps at the same speed to maintain calculated DP setpoint. If both pump speeds drop below 40%, disable the lag pump. Set minimum pump speed at the BMS to 20%. At a minimum, one pump must be running continuously anytime the heating system is enabled.

6. The distribution pump sequences above also apply to the tertiary chilled water distribution loop pumps at Oakview Middle School (5-4815).

G. Chiller Control and Sequencing (Lake Orion High School Only):

1. Chiller Staging: Switch lead chiller on a weekly schedule. Operator shall be able to change the schedule or override manually. The two (2) 300-ton chillers shall alternate as lead chiller, and the smaller 100-ton chiller shall always be the second chiller to be enabled / disabled. In other words, the staging will always be 300 ton – 100 ton – 300 ton, with alternating chillers taking the lead.

2. When the chilled water system is enabled (as indicated above), all chiller circulation pumps shall be enabled for the primary loop and any isolation valves opened (if applicable).

3. Chiller sequencing shall be provided by the BMS by enabling each chiller individually. A chiller shall be enabled only after the associated chiller recirculation pump is enabled and status proven, and, if applicable, the associated chiller isolation valve has been opened and status proven.

4. Use a type of Proportional + Integral calculation to determine cooling demand percentage based on chilled water secondary loop supply temperature versus calculated chilled water setpoint.

5. Set each enabled chiller’s leaving water temperature setpoint from the BMS to 1°F below the calculated chilled water supply temperature setpoint.

6. As calculated cooling demand rises, enable the lead chiller.

a. Chiller pump and isolation valve (if applicable) should already be enabled and status proven.

b. Along with the chiller’s internal flow switch, use DP to confirm flow before enabling chiller.

c. Monitor chiller run status. If lead chiller fails to indicate run status within 10 minutes, enable lag chiller and send alarm.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 14 OF 94


7. When lead chiller indicates run status, hold any additional chiller(s) off for a period of 30 minutes. If calculated cooling demand percentage continues to rise, after the hold period, enable the lag chiller (pump and isolation valve if applicable should already have been enabled and status proven), prove flow using the evaporator DP sensor and enable chiller.

8. If calculated cooling demand percentage continues to rise, after an additional hold period of 20 minutes, enable the third chiller (pump and isolation valve if applicable should already have been enabled and status proven), prove flow using the evaporator DP sensor and enable chiller.

9. As the chilled water supply temperature approaches calculated setpoint, and calculated cooling demand percentage drops, disable each chiller in the reverse order as they were added.

H. Provide BMS override to shutdown Cooling System via building management system.

I. System alarms include, but are not limited to the following:


2. Pump failure


4. Low system differential pressure

5. Low system supply and return temperatures

6. High system supply and return temperatures

7. Chiller controller alarms


3.10 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME AIR HANDLING UNIT WITH EXHAUST FAN


1. Carpenter Elementary (5-4810) (RTU-20.1, RTU-20.3)

2. Orion Oaks Elementary (5-4811) (RTU-20.1, RTU-20.2)

3. Webber Elementary (5-4814) (AHU 20.2, RTU-20.2)

4. New Early Childhood Center (5-4745) (RTU-20.1)

B. Occupied mode:

1. During occupied periods as indicated by occupied status of the system VAV boxes, the supply fan shall run continuously and the outside air damper shall open to maintain minimum ventilation requirements.

2. All associated VAV boxes shall be enabled prior to the supply fan starting.

3. The heating and cooling systems shall modulate to maintain the required discharge air temperature. The discharge air temperature setpoint shall be dynamically reset based on the system VAV box damper positions.

4. If economizing is enabled the outside air damper shall also modulate to maintain the mixed air temperature setpoint.

C. Unoccupied mode:

1. “Moisture Purge” Cycle: If the cooling has been active, put unit into a Moisture Purge Mode immediately after occupied mode to dry out the cooling coil before supply fan is disabled. Leave the unit supply fan enabled and modulating to duct pressure setpoint, close chilled water valve, and close the outdoor air and relief dampers for a period of 15 minutes.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 15 OF 94


2. If any of the designated zone temperatures drops below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) the supply fan shall start, fan speed shall modulate to maintain duct pressure setpoint, the outside air damper shall remain closed, and the heating shall be enabled.

3. When the space temperature rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) plus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop and the heating disabled.

4. If any of the designated zones rise above the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) the supply fan shall start, fan speed shall modulate to maintain duct pressure setpoint, the outside air damper shall open if economizing is enabled and remain closed if economizing is disabled and the cooling shall be enabled.

5. When the space temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) minus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop, the cooling disabled and the outside air damper shall close.

D. Morning Warm-Up Mode: During optimal start, if the average space temperature is below the occupied heating setpoint a morning warm-up mode shall be activated. When morning warm-up is initiated the unit shall enable the heating and supply fan. The outside air damper shall remain closed. When the space temperature reaches the occupied heating setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.

E. Pre-Cool Mode: During optimal start, if the average space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint, pre-cool mode shall be activated. When pre-cool is initiated the unit shall enable the fan and cooling or economizer. The outside air damper shall remain closed, unless economizing. When the space temperature reaches occupied cooling setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.

F. Supply and Exhaust Fan: If the supply or exhaust fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, all cooling and heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.

G. Heating Operation: When the unit heating mode is enabled, the hot water control valve shall open and modulate or the gas burner enable and modulate to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint. When the heating is disabled, the heating coil control valve shall slowly close or gas burner be disabled.

H. Cooling Operation: When the unit cooling mode is enabled, the chilled water control valve shall open (or DX cooling staged) and modulate to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint. When the cooling is disabled, the chilled water coil control valve shall slowly close or DX cooling staged off.

I. Supply air temperature and static pressure reset control:

1. The supply fan(s) duct static pressure setpoint will be automatically adjusted between 0.5 in WC and 1.2 in WC (adj) as measured by the sensor(s) in the duct.

2. The discharge air temperature setpoint will be reset between 55° and 60° F (adj.).

3. Both setpoint values are determined per the sequence below, based on the critical zone terminal unit. The critical zone is defined as the terminal unit having the highest percentage demand. The BMS continuously monitors all terminal units’ damper position and selects the critical zone. The critical zone can change from one terminal unit to another as often as every minute. The two setpoints are adjusted in sequence to maintain the critical zone terminal unit at slightly less than full output, as follows:

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 16 OF 94


a. As the critical zone reaches full output, the supply air temperature setpoint is lowered (or raised in heating mode), until the critical zone output drops back to 95% (adj.) of full output.

b. When the supply air temperature setpoint reaches the minimum temperature (or maximum in heating mode), the duct static pressure setpoint is raised, until the critical zone output drops back to 95% (adj). The duct static pressure setpoint can continue to be raised, if needed, until it reaches the maximum of 1.2 in WC (adj.).

c. As the critical zone output drops below 85% (adj) of full output, the static pressure setpoint is adjusted downward to maintain the critical zone output at 85%. The duct static pressure setpoint can continue to be lowered as necessary, maintaining 85% output on the critical zone, until the setpoint reaches its minimum of 0.5 in WC (adj.).

d. When the critical zone output drops below 85%, and the duct static setpoint is at its minimum, the supply air temperature setpoint will be raised (or lowered in heating mode) to maintain the critical zone at 85% output. The supply air setpoint can continue to be raised until it reaches its maximum (or minimum in heating mode).

J. Economizer Cycle:

1. Economizer shall be available whenever the outside air enthalpy is less than 28 btu/lb and the outside air temperature is less than 75°F.

2. If economizer is available and there is a rise in mixed air temperature above the mixed air temperature setpoint, the outside air dampers shall be modulated open from minimum

position to 100% open as necessary to maintain minimum 55F (adj.) mixed air temperature setpoint.

3. The return air dampers shall modulate closed proportionately as the outside air damper modulates open.

4. If the outside air damper is 100% open and there is a further rise in temperature above supply air temperature setpoint, the outside air damper shall remain 100% open and the cooling system shall be enabled and modulated as necessary to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint.

K. Outside Air Control: The outside air quantities shall be tracked by air flow measuring stations and the outside air damper modulated to maintain the outdoor air flow rate setpoint. The outside airflow rate setpoint shall be dynamically reset according to ASHRAE 62.1-2013 calculations by reviewing which zones are scheduled occupied and tabulating the respective outside air required for those zones. The control logic shall calculate real time system ventilation efficiency. The BMS/ATC system will then use the ASHRAE 62.1-2013 method for determination of required outside air percentage.

L. Building Pressure Control: After the fan startup delay expires, building static pressure shall be controlled by staging and modulating the exhaust fan. A differential pressure transducer shall actively monitor the difference in pressure between the building (indoor) and outdoor. As the building pressure increases over the building pressure setpoint (adj.), the fan speed shall increase to maintain setpoint. If the building pressure falls below setpoint, the fan speed shall decrease. Note that the exhaust fan discharge damper shall be open whenever the exhaust fan is operating.

M. Supply Duct High Pressure Safety: A manual reset differential pressure (DP) switch shall measure the differential pressure between the unit discharge air duct and outside of the unit. If the duct DP rises above setpoint (+4”wc-adj.), disable all unit fans and close outside air and relief dampers. Send alarm. Manually reset switch to enable normal operation.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 17 OF 94


N. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Monitor the supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

O. Electronic Air Filtration: BMS shall monitor status of the electronic air filtration equipment and alarm upon system failure or low ion count as measured by the associated ion sensor.

P. Smoke Detection: When the smoke detectors sense smoke, the supply fans of the related system and all return/exhaust fans shall be turned off by the fire alarm system. Refer to Electrical Specifications.

Q. Control Valve Fail Position: Chilled water and heating hot water control valves shall fail last position.

R. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the Air Handling System Controller shall operate in the Occupied Mode.

S. Filter Status: A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the filter(s) when the fan is running. If the switch closes during normal operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

T. System alarms include, but are not limited to the following:

1. High air filter pressure drop

2. Fan failure

3. Control valve failure

4. Low supply air temperature

5. High duct static pressure

6. Low duct static pressure

7. High building differential pressure

8. Smoke detector status


3.11 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME AIR HANDLING UNIT WITH RETURN FAN


1. Waldon Middle School (5-4817) (EX. AH-2101)

2. Lake Orion High School (5-4818) (EX. AHU-301)

B. Occupied mode:

1. During occupied periods as indicated by occupied status of the system VAV boxes, the supply and return fans shall run continuously and the outside air damper shall open to maintain minimum ventilation requirements.

2. All associated VAV boxes shall be enabled prior to the supply and return fans starting.



C. Unoccupied mode:

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 18 OF 94


1. “Moisture Purge” Cycle: If the cooling has been active, put unit into a Moisture Purge Mode immediately after occupied mode to dry out the cooling coil before supply and return fans are disabled. Leave the unit supply and return fans enabled and modulating to duct pressure setpoint, close chilled water valve, and close the outdoor air and relief dampers for a period of 15 minutes.

2. If any of the designated zone temperatures drops below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) the supply and return fans shall start, fan speed modulate to maintain duct pressure setpoint, the outside air damper shall remain closed, and the heating shall be enabled.

3. When the space temperature rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) plus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply and return fans shall stop and the heating disabled.

4. If any of the designated zones rise above the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) the supply and return fans shall start, fan speed shall modulate to maintain duct pressure setpoint, the outside air damper shall open if economizing is enabled and remain closed if economizing is disabled and the cooling shall be enabled.

5. When the space temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) minus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply and return fans shall stop, the cooling disabled and the outside air damper shall close.



F. Supply and Return Fans: If the supply or return fans fail to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, all cooling and heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan. Supply and return fans are interlocked via software, a failure of either shall disable both.

G. Heating Operation: When the unit heating mode is enabled, the hot water control valve shall open and modulate to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint. When the heating is disabled, the heating coil control valve shall slowly close.

H. Cooling Operation: When the unit cooling mode is enabled, the chilled water control valve shall open and modulate to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint. When the cooling is disabled, the chilled water coil control valve shall slowly close.



2. The discharge air temperature setpoint will be reset between 55° and 60°F (adj.).

3. Both setpoint values are determined per the sequence below, based on the critical zone terminal unit. The critical zone is defined as the terminal unit having the highest

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 19 OF 94


percentage demand. The BMS continuously monitors all terminal units’ damper position and selects the critical zone. The critical zone can change from one terminal unit to another as often as every minute. The two setpoints are adjusted in sequence to maintain the critical zone terminal unit at slightly less than full output, as follows:











K. Building Pressure Control: After the fan startup delay expires, building static pressure shall be controlled by modulating the relief air damper. A differential pressure transducer shall actively monitor the difference in pressure between the building (indoor) and outdoor. As the building pressure increases over the building pressure setpoint (adj.), the relief air damper shall be modulated in parallel to maintain setpoint. If the building pressure falls below setpoint, the relief air damper shall close.

L. Supply Duct High Pressure Safety: A manual reset differential pressure (DP) switch shall measure the differential pressure between the unit discharge air duct and outside of the unit. If the duct DP rises above setpoint (+4”wc-adj.), disable all unit fans and close outside air and relief dampers. Send alarm. Manually reset switch to enable normal operation.

M. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Monitor the supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 20 OF 94


N. Smoke Detection: When the smoke detectors sense smoke, the supply fans of the related system and all return/exhaust fans shall be turned off by the fire alarm system. Refer to Electrical Specifications.

O. Control Valve Fail Position: Chilled water and heating hot water control valves shall fail last position.

P. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the Air Handling System Controller shall operate in the Occupied Mode.

Q. Filter Status: A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the filter(s) when the fan is running. If the switch closes during normal operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

R. System alarms include, but are not limited to the following:


2. Fan failure







3.12 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME AIR HANDLING UNIT


1. Scripps Middle School (EX. AHU-202)

B. Occupied mode:





C. Unoccupied mode:

1. “Moisture Purge” Cycle: If the cooling has been active, put unit into a Moisture Purge Mode immediately after occupied mode to dry out the cooling coil before supply fan is disabled. Leave the unit supply fan enabled and modulating to duct pressure setpoint, close chilled water valve, and close the outdoor air and relief dampers for a period of 15 minutes.

2. If any of the designated zone temperatures drops below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) the supply fan shall start, modulate fan speed to maintain duct pressure setpoint, the outside air damper shall remain closed, and the heating shall be enabled.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 21 OF 94







F. Supply Fan: If the supply fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, all cooling and heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.




1. The supply fan(s) duct static pressure setpoint will be automatically adjusted between 0.5 in WC and 1.0 in WC (adj.) as measured by the sensor(s) in the duct.




b. When the supply air temperature setpoint reaches the minimum temperature (or maximum in heating mode), the duct static pressure setpoint is raised, until the critical

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 22 OF 94


zone output drops back to 95% (adj). The duct static pressure setpoint can continue to be raised, if needed, until it reaches the maximum of 1.0 in WC (adj.).









K. Building Pressure Control: After the fan startup delay expires, building static pressure shall be controlled by modulating the relief air hood damper. A differential pressure transducer shall actively monitor the difference in pressure between the building (indoor) and outdoor. As the building pressure increases over the building pressure setpoint (adj.), the relief air hood damper shall be modulated in parallel to maintain setpoint. If the building pressure falls below setpoint, the relief air hood damper shall close.

L. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Monitor the supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

M. Smoke Detection: When the smoke detectors sense smoke, the supply fans of the related system and all return/exhaust fans shall be turned off by the fire alarm system. Refer to Electrical Specifications.

N. Control Valve Fail Position: Chilled water and heating hot water control valves shall fail last position.

O. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the Air Handling System Controller shall operate in the Occupied Mode.

P. Filter Status: A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the filter(s) when the fan is running. If the switch closes during normal operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

Q. System alarms include, but are not limited to the following:


2. Fan failure

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 23 OF 94








3.13 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME COOLING ONLY AIR HANDLING UNIT WITH RETURN FAN


1. Lake Orion High School (5-4818) (EX. AHU-4C, -1E, -2E, -3E, -1H, -2H, -1J, -5J)

B. Occupied mode:

1. During occupied periods as indicated by occupied status of the system VAV boxes, the supply and return fans shall run continuously and the outside air damper shall open to maintain minimum ventilation requirements.

2. All associated VAV boxes shall be enabled prior to the supply and return fans starting.

3. The cooling system shall modulate to maintain the required discharge air temperature. The discharge air temperature setpoint shall be dynamically reset based on the system VAV box damper positions.


C. Unoccupied mode:

1. “Moisture Purge” Cycle: If the cooling has been active, put unit into a Moisture Purge Mode immediately after occupied mode to dry out the cooling coil before supply fan is disabled. Leave the unit supply fan enabled and modulating to duct pressure setpoint, close chilled water valve or stage off DX cooling, and close the outdoor air and relief dampers for a period of 15 minutes.

2. If any of the designated zones drop below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) the supply and return fans shall start and the outside air damper shall remain closed.

3. When the space temperature rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) plus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply and return fans shall stop.

4. When the space temperature is above the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) the supply fan shall start, the outside air damper shall open if economizing is enabled and remain closed if economizing is disabled and the cooling shall be enabled.


D. Morning Warm-Up Mode: During optimal start, if the average space temperature is below the occupied heating setpoint a morning warm-up mode shall be activated. When morning warm-up is initiated the unit shall enable the supply fan. The outside air damper shall remain closed. When the space temperature reaches the occupied heating setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.

E. Pre-Cool Mode: During optimal start, if the average space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint, pre-cool mode shall be activated. When pre-cool is initiated the unit shall enable the fan and cooling or economizer. The outside air damper shall remain closed, unless

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 24 OF 94


economizing. When the space temperature reaches occupied cooling setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.

F. Supply and Return Fans: If the supply or return fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, all cooling and heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan. Supply and return fans are interlocked via software, a failure of either shall disable both.

G. Heating Operation: When the unit heating mode is enabled, the supply fan shall run continuously and all associated VAV boxes shall be enabled.

H. Cooling Operation: When the unit cooling mode is enabled, the chilled water control valve shall open and modulate (or DX cooling stage) to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint. When the cooling is disabled, the chilled water coil control valve shall slowly close or DX cooling stage off.













SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 25 OF 94




K. Building Pressure Control: After the fan startup delay expires, building static pressure shall be controlled by modulating the relief air damper. A differential pressure transducer shall actively monitor the difference in pressure between the building (indoor) and outdoor. As the building pressure increases over the building pressure setpoint (adj.), the relief air damper shall be modulated in parallel to maintain setpoint. If the building pressure falls below setpoint, the relief air damper shall close.

L. Supply Duct High Pressure Safety: A manual reset differential pressure (DP) switch shall measure the differential pressure between the unit discharge air duct and outside of the unit. If the duct DP rises above setpoint (+4”wc-adj.), disable all unit fans and close outside air and relief dampers. Send alarm. Manually reset switch to enable normal operation.

M. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Monitor the supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.


O. Control Valve Fail Position: Chilled water and heating hot water control valves shall fail last position.

P. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the Air Handling System Controller shall operate in the Occupied Mode.

Q. Filter Status: A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the filter(s) when the fan is running. If the switch closes during normal operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

R. System alarms include, but are not limited to the following:


2. Fan failure







3.14 SINGLE ZONE VARIABLE AIR VOLUME AIR HANDLING SYSTEMS WITH INTEGRAL EXHAUST


1. Carpenter Elementary (5-4810) (RTU-20.2)

2. Orion Oaks Elementary (5-4811) (AHU-20.1, Alternates: RTU-20.3, RTU-20.4, RTU-20.5)

3. Webber Elementary (5-4814) (AHU-20.1)

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 26 OF 94


B. Occupied mode:

1. During occupied periods as indicated by time of day schedule, the supply fan shall run continuously and the outside air damper shall open to maintain minimum ventilation requirements.

2. The heating and cooling systems shall modulate to maintain the required discharge air temperature. The discharge air temperature setpoint shall be dynamically reset based on the deviation of actual space temperature from the active space temperature setpoint.


C. Unoccupied mode:

1. “Moisture Purge” Cycle: If the chilled water cooling has been active, put unit into a Moisture Purge Mode immediately after occupied mode to dry out the cooling coil before supply fan is disabled. Leave the unit supply fan enabled and set to 75% speed, close chilled water valve, and close the outdoor air and relief dampers for a period of 15 minutes.

2. During scheduled unoccupied period, disable supply fan and close outside air damper. If occupancy sensor indicates the room is occupied, run unit in occupied mode.

3. When the space temperature is below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) the supply fan shall start, the outside air damper shall remain closed and the heating shall be enabled.




D. Morning Warm-Up Mode: During optimal start, if the space temperature is below the occupied heating setpoint a morning warm-up mode shall be activated. When morning warm-up is initiated the unit shall enable the heating and supply fan. The outside air damper shall remain closed. When the space temperature reaches the occupied heating setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.

E. Pre-Cool Mode: During optimal start, if the space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint, pre-cool mode shall be activated. When pre-cool is initiated the unit shall enable the supply fan and cooling or economizer. The outside air damper shall remain closed, unless economizing. When the space temperature reaches occupied cooling setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.

F. Heat/Cool Mode: When the space temperature rises above the occupied cooling setpoint the mode shall transition to cooling. When the space temperature falls below the occupied heating setpoint the mode shall transition to heating. When the space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint or below the occupied heating setpoint the mode shall remain in its last state. If the space temperature sensor fails the mode shall remain in its last state.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 27 OF 94



H. Cooling Operation: When the unit cooling mode is enabled, the chilled water control valve shall open and modulate or DX cooling stage on to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint. When the cooling is disabled, the chilled water coil control valve shall slowly close.

I. Supply and Exhaust Fan: If the supply or exhaust fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, all cooling and heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.

J. Supply Air Temperature Reset

1. The fan modulates to maintain space temperature while maintaining the discharge air setpoint of 55°F (adj.). As the cooling load decreases, the fans will modulate down to minimum speed. As the space temperature continues to fall below the cooling setpoint by 1.0°F (adj.) and remains at minimum speed for a period of time (10 minutes adj.) the fan will remain at minimum speed and enter into a discharge air reset mode.

2. As the space temperature continues to drop toward the space occupied heating setpoint, the discharge air setpoint is reset from 55°F up to 70°F (adj.).

3. When the space temperature decreases to 1.0°F below the heating setpoint, the heat will be enabled. The supply fan shall remain at minimum speed while the discharge air temperature is reset from 70°F (adj.) up to 90°F (adj.) maximum. If the space temperature continues to fall, the supply fan shall modulate up maintain space temperature setpoint. Reset of the discharge air setpoint will occur every 5-10 minutes (adj.). When the space temperature exceeds the heating setpoint +1.0°F the heat will be disabled.

4. When the space temperature exceeds the cooling setpoint +1.0°F for 10 minutes (adj.), the system will revert to its fan modulating mode with its discharge setpoint equal to the discharge air cooling setpoint.

K. Economizer Cycle:


2. If economizer is available and there is a rise in mixed air temperature above the mixed air temperature setpoint, the outside air dampers shall be modulated open from minimum position to 100% open as necessary to maintain minimum 55°F (adj.) mixed air temperature setpoint.


4. If the outside air damper is 100% open and there is a further rise in temperature above supply air temperature setpoint, the outside air damper shall remain 100% open and the chilled water valve shall modulate open or DX cooling stage as necessary to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint.

L. Outside Air Control: The outside air quantities shall be tracked by air flow measuring stations and the outside air damper modulated to maintain the outdoor air flow rate setpoint.

M. Building Pressure Control: After the fan startup delay expires, building static pressure shall be controlled by modulating the exhaust fan. As building pressure increases over the building

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 28 OF 94


pressure setpoint (adj.), the fan speed shall increase to maintain setpoint. If the building pressure falls below the setpoint, the fan speed shall decrease.

N. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

O. Space Sensor Failure: If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. Space sensor failure shall cause the unit to operate at minimum airflow in the occupied mode or shut down in the unoccupied mode.


Q. Electronic Air Filtration: BMS shall monitor status of the electronic air filtration equipment and alarm upon system failure or low ion count as measured by the associated ion sensor.

R. Control Valve Fail Position: Chilled water and hot water control valve shall fail last position.

S. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the Air Handling System Controller shall operate in the Occupied Mode.

T. Filter Status: A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the filter when the fan is running. If the switch closes during normal operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

3.15 SINGLE ZONE VARIABLE AIR VOLUME AIR HANDLING SYSTEMS


1. Carpenter Elementary (5-4810) (EX. AHU-201)

2. Paint Creek Elementary (5-4812) (EX. AH-201, -202)

3. Stadium Drive Elementary (5-4813) (EX. AHU-201, -202, -203)

4. Webber Elementary (5-4814) (EX. AHU-201, -202)

5. Oakview Middle School (5-4815) (EX. AHU-201, -301, -302, -501)

6. Scripps Middle School (5-4816) (EX. AHU-101, -201, -301, -302, -303, -501)

7. Waldon Middle School (5-4817) (EX. AHU-2102, -2103, -2104)

8. Lake Orion High School (5-4818) (EX. AHU-1A, -2A, -3A, -4A, -3B, -1G)

9. Pine Tree Center (5-4821) (EX. AHU-201, -202, -204)

B. Occupied mode:




C. Unoccupied mode:

1. “Moisture Purge” Cycle: If the chilled water cooling has been active, put unit into a Moisture Purge Mode immediately after occupied mode to dry out the cooling coil before supply fan

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 29 OF 94


is disabled. Leave the unit supply fan enabled and set to 75% speed, close chilled water valve or stage DX cooling off, and close the outdoor air and relief dampers for a period of 15 minutes.




5. When the space temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) minus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop, the cooling disabled and the outside air dampers shall close.





H. Cooling Operation: When the unit cooling mode is enabled, the chilled water control valve shall open and modulate or DX cooling shall stage to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint. When the cooling is disabled, the chilled water coil control valve shall slowly close or DX cooling shall be disabled.

I. Supply Fan: If the supply fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, all cooling and heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.

J. Coil Pump: If unit is equipped with a heating coil pump, enable pump when outside air temperature drops below 40°F (adj.). At Lake Orion High School (5-4818) only, coil pumps shall be enabled whenever there is a call for heat.

K. Supply Air Temperature Reset

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 30 OF 94




3. When the space temperature decreases to 1.0°F below the heating setpoint, the heat will be enabled. The supply fan shall remain at minimum speed while the discharge air temperature is reset from 70°F (adj.) up to 90°F (adj.) maximum. If the space temperature continues to fall, the supply fan shall modulate up to maintain space temperature setpoint. Reset of the discharge air setpoint will occur every 5-10 minutes (adj.). When the space temperature exceeds the heating setpoint +1.0°F the heat will be disabled.


L. Economizer Cycle:




4. If the outside air damper is 100% open and there is a further rise in temperature above supply air temperature setpoint, the outside air damper shall remain 100% open and the chilled water valve shall modulate open as necessary to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint.

M. Building Pressure Control: For units with an associated minimum outside air exhaust fan (refer to control diagrams), the exhaust fan shall run continuously during occupied periods. For units with motorized relief hoods/louvers, building static pressure shall be controlled by modulating the relief air hood/louver damper. As building pressure increases over the building pressure setpoint (adj.), the damper shall modulate towards fully open to maintain setpoint. If the building pressure falls below the setpoint, the damper shall modulate towards closed.

N. Mezzanine Pressure Control: At Paint Creek Elementary (5-4812) only, mezzanine static pressure shall be controlled by the associated relief air louver damper. As the mezzanine pressure increases over the mezzanine pressure setpoint (adj.) due to changes in AHU relief air, the damper shall modulate towards fully open to maintain setpoint. If the pressure falls below the setpoint, the damper shall modulate towards closed. If damper fails to prove status an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

O. Demand Control Ventilation: For units provided with CO2 sensors as indicated by the control diagrams, monitor CO2 sensor in unit return air. If CO2 level is below 1000ppm, modulate outside air damper to 30% (adj.) (to maintain room pressure). As CO2 rises above 1000ppm, modulate minimum outdoor air damper position from 30% to fully open as required to maintain

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 31 OF 94


acceptable CO2 levels. Limit the outside air damper position to maintain a minimum mixed air temperature of 45°F (adj.).

P. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

Q. Space Sensor Failure: If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. Space sensor failure shall cause the unit to operate at minimum airflow in the occupied mode, or shut down in the unoccupied mode.

R. Freeze Protection: Where indicated in control diagrams, a hardwired, low limit temperature switch shall be electrically interlocked with the motor starter. If the low limit temperature switch is tripped at 38°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, all valves shall open to 100% and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset of the low limit temperature switch shall be required to restart the fan.

S. Smoke Detection: When the smoke detectors sense smoke, the supply fans of the related system and all return/exhaust fans shall be turned off by the fire alarm system. Refer to Electrical Specifications.

T. Control Valve Fail Position: Chilled water and hot water control valve shall fail last position.

U. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the Air Handling System Controller shall operate in the Occupied Mode.

V. Filter Status: A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the filter when the fan is running. If the switch closes during normal operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

3.16 SINGLE ZONE VARIABLE AIR VOLUME AIR HANDLING SYSTEMS WITH RETURN AIR FAN


1. Lake Orion High School (5-4818) (EX. AHU-2B, -2C, -3H)

B. Occupied mode:

1. During occupied periods as indicated by time of day schedule, the supply and return fan shall run continuously and the outside air damper shall open to maintain minimum ventilation requirements.



C. Unoccupied mode:


2. When the space temperature is below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) the supply and return air fans shall start, the outside air damper shall remain closed and the heating shall be enabled.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 32 OF 94


3. When the space temperature rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) plus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply and return fans shall stop and the heating disabled.

4. When the space temperature is above the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) the supply and return fans shall start, the outside air damper shall open if economizing is enabled and remain closed if economizing is disabled and the cooling shall be enabled.

5. When the space temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) minus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply and return fans shall stop, the cooling disabled and the outside air damper shall close.

D. Morning Warm-Up Mode: During optimal start, if the space temperature is below the occupied heating setpoint a morning warm-up mode shall be activated. When morning warm-up is initiated the unit shall enable the heating and supply and return fans. The outside air damper shall remain closed. When the space temperature reaches the occupied heating setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.

E. Pre-Cool Mode: During optimal start, if the space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint, pre-cool mode shall be activated. When pre-cool is initiated the unit shall enable the supply and return fans and cooling or economizer. The outside air damper shall remain closed, unless economizing. When the space temperature reaches occupied cooling setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.




I. Supply and Return Fan: If the supply or return fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, all cooling and heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan. Supply and return fans are interlocked via software, a failure of either shall disable both.

J. Return Fan Control: Return fan shall be modulated in tandem with the associated supply fan.

K. Coil Pump: At Lake Orion High School (5-4818) only, coil pumps shall be enabled whenever there is a call for heat.

L. Supply Air Temperature Reset

1. The fans modulate to maintain space temperature while maintaining the discharge air setpoint of 55°F (adj.). As the cooling load decreases, the fans will modulate down to minimum speed. As the space temperature continues to fall below the cooling setpoint by 1.0°F (adj.) and remains at minimum speed for a period of time (10 minutes adj.) the fans will remain at minimum speed and enter into a discharge air reset mode.


SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 33 OF 94


3. When the space temperature decreases to 1.0°F below the heating setpoint, the heat will be enabled. The fans shall remain at minimum speed while the discharge air temperature is reset from 70°F (adj.) up to 90°F (adj.) maximum. If the space temperature continues to fall, the supply fan shall modulate up to maintain space temperature setpoint. Reset of the discharge air setpoint will occur every 5-10 minutes (adj.). When the space temperature exceeds the heating setpoint +1.0°F the heat will be disabled.


M. Economizer Cycle:





N. Building Pressure Control: For units with associated motorized relief hoods/louvers, building static pressure shall be controlled by modulating the associated relief air hood/louver damper. As building pressure increases over the building pressure setpoint (adj.), the damper shall slowly open to maintain setpoint. If the building pressure falls below the setpoint, the damper shall slowly close.

O. Demand Control Ventilation: For units provided with CO2 sensors as indicated by the control diagrams, monitor CO2 sensor in unit return air. If CO2 level is below 1000ppm, modulate outside air damper to 30% (adj.) (to maintain room pressure). As CO2 rises above 1000ppm, modulate minimum outdoor air damper position from 30% to fully open as required to maintain acceptable CO2 levels. Limit the outside air damper position to maintain a minimum mixed air temperature of 45°F (adj.).

P. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

Q. Space Sensor Failure: If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. Space sensor failure shall cause the unit to operate at minimum airflow in the occupied mode or shut down in the unoccupied mode.

R. Freeze Protection: Where indicated in control diagrams, a hardwired, low limit temperature switch shall be electrically interlocked with the motor starter. If the low limit temperature switch is tripped at 38°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, all valves shall open to 100% and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset of the low limit temperature switch shall be required to restart the fan.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 34 OF 94


S. Smoke Detection: When the smoke detectors sense smoke, the supply fans of the related system and all associated return/exhaust fans shall be turned off by the fire alarm system. Refer to Electrical Specifications.

T. Control Valve Fail Position: Chilled water and hot water control valve shall fail last position.

U. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the Air Handling System Controller shall operate in the Occupied Mode.

V. Filter Status: A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the filter when the fan is running. If the switch closes during normal operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

3.17 SINGLE ZONE CONSTANT VOLUME AIR HANDLING SYSTEMS


1. Carpenter Elementary (5-4810) (EX. AHU-202)

2. Stadium Drive Elementary (5-4813) (EX. AHU-101)

3. Webber Elementary (5-4814) (EX. AHU-203, -204)

4. Scripps Elementary (5-4816) (EX. AHU-102, -502)

5. Lake Orion High School (5-4818) (EX. AHU-3G)

6. Pine Tree Center (5-4821) (EX. AHU-203)

B. Occupied mode:




C. Unoccupied mode:

1. “Moisture Purge” Cycle: If the chilled water cooling has been active, put unit into a Moisture Purge Mode immediately after occupied mode to dry out the cooling coil before supply fan is disabled. Leave the unit supply fan enabled, close chilled water valve or stage DX cooling off, and close the outdoor air and relief dampers for a period of 15 minutes.





SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 35 OF 94







I. Supply Fan: If the supply fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air and any associated relief air dampers shall close, all cooling and heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.

J. Coil Pump: If unit is equipped with a heating coil pump, enable pump when outside air temperature drops below 40°F (adj.). At Lake Orion High School (5-4818) only, coil pumps shall be enabled whenever there is a call for heat.


1. As the cooling load decreases, as the space temperature falls below the cooling setpoint by 1.0°F (adj.) the unit will enter into a discharge air reset mode. As the space temperature continues to drop toward the space occupied heating setpoint, the discharge air setpoint is reset from 55°F up to 70°F (adj.).

2. When the space temperature decreases to 1.0°F below the heating setpoint, the heat will be enabled. The discharge air temperature is reset from 70°F (adj.) up to 90°F (adj.) maximum. Reset of the discharge air setpoint will occur every 5-10 minutes (adj.). When the space temperature exceeds the heating setpoint +1.0°F the heat will be disabled.

3. When the space temperature exceeds the cooling setpoint +1.0°F for 10 minutes (adj.), the system will resume normal operation with a discharge setpoint equal to the discharge air cooling setpoint.




SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 36 OF 94


position to 100% open as necessary to maintain minimum 55°F (adj.) mixed air temperature setpoint.



M. Building Pressure Control: For units with an associated minimum outside air exhaust fan (refer to control diagrams), the exhaust fan shall run continuously during occupied periods. For units with motorized relief hoods/louvers, building static pressure shall be controlled by modulating the relief air hood/louver damper. As building pressure increases over the building pressure setpoint (adj.), the damper shall modulate towards fully open to maintain setpoint. If the building pressure falls below the setpoint, the damper shall modulate towards closed.

N. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.


P. Freeze Protection: Where indicated in control diagrams, a hardwired, low limit temperature switch shall be electrically interlocked with the motor starter. If the low limit temperature switch is tripped at 38°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, all valves shall open to 100% and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset of the low limit temperature switch shall be required to restart the fan.

Q. Smoke Detection: When the smoke detectors sense smoke, the supply fans of the related system and all associated return/exhaust fans shall be turned off by the fire alarm system. Refer to Electrical Specifications.




3.18 SINGLE ZONE DX COOLING VARIABLE VOLUME AIR HANDLING SYSTEMS



B. Occupied mode:



SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 37 OF 94



C. Unoccupied mode:

1. “Moisture Purge” Cycle: If the cooling has been active, put unit into a Moisture Purge Mode immediately after occupied mode to dry out the cooling coil before supply fan is disabled. Leave the unit supply fan enabled, close chilled water valve or stage DX cooling off, and close the outdoor air and relief dampers for a period of 15 minutes.









H. Cooling Operation: When the unit cooling mode is enabled, the DX cooling shall be staged to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint. When the cooling is disabled, the DX cooling shall be staged off.

I. Supply Fan: If the supply fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, all cooling and heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.

J. Coil Pump: At Lake Orion High School (5-4818) only, coil pumps shall be enabled whenever there is a call for heat.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 38 OF 94



1. The fan modulates to maintain space temperature while maintaining the discharge air set point of 55.0°F (adj.). As the cooling load decreases, the supply fan will modulate down to minimum speed. As the space temperature continues to fall below the cooling set point by 1.0°F (adj.) and remains at minimum speed for a period of time (10 minutes adj.) the supply fan will remain at minimum speed and enter into a discharge air reset mode.

2. As the space temperature continues to drop toward the space occupied heating set point, the discharge air set point is reset from 55.0°F up to 70°F (adj.).

3. When the space temperature decreases to 1.0°F below the heating set point, the heat will be enabled. The supply fan shall remain at minimum speed while the discharge air temperature is reset from 70°F (adj.) up to 90°F (adj.) maximum. If the space temperature continues to fall, the supply fan shall modulate up maintain space temperature set point. Reset of the discharge air set point will occur every 5-10 minutes (adj.). When the space temperature exceeds the heating set point +1.0°F the heat will be disabled.

4. When the space temperature exceeds the cooling set point +1.0°F for 10 minutes (adj.), the system will revert to its fan modulating mode with its discharge set point equal to 55.0°F (adj.).





4. If the outside air damper is 100% open and there is a further rise in temperature above supply air temperature setpoint, the outside air damper shall remain 100% open and the DX cooling shall stage as necessary to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint.

M. Demand Control Ventilation: Monitor CO2 sensor in unit return air. If CO2 level is below 1000ppm, modulate outside air damper to 30% (adj.) (to maintain room pressure). As CO2 rises above 1000ppm, modulate minimum outdoor air damper position from 30% to fully open as required to maintain acceptable CO2 levels. Limit the outside air damper position to maintain a minimum mixed air temperature of 45°F (adj.).

N. Exhaust Fan Operation: EX. EF-9 shall operate continuously when AHU fan is running and outside air damper is at minimum position. EX. EF-7 shall be enabled at low speed when AHU outside air damper opens above 50% (adj.). EX EF-7 shall be enabled at high speed when AHU outside damper opens 100% (adj.). Coordinate these settings with the TAB contractor.

O. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

P. Space Sensor Failure: If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. Space sensor failure shall cause the unit to operate at minimum airflow in the occupied mode or shut down in the unoccupied mode.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 39 OF 94


Q. Freeze Protection: Where indicated in control diagrams, a hardwired, low limit temperature switch shall be electrically interlocked with the motor starter. If the low limit temperature switch is tripped at 38°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, all valves shall open to 100% and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset of the low limit temperature switch shall be required to restart the fan.

R. Smoke Detection: When the smoke detectors sense smoke, the supply fans of the related system and all associated return/exhaust fans shall be turned off by the fire alarm system. Refer to Electrical Specifications.

S. Control Valve Fail Position: Chilled water and hot water control valve shall fail last position.

T. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the Air Handling System Controller shall operate in the Occupied Mode.

U. Filter Status: A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the filter when the fan is running. If the switch closes during normal operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

3.19 SINGLE ZONE HEATING ONLY VARIABLE AIR VOLUME AIR HANDLING SYSTEMS


1. Lake Orion High School (5-4818) (EX. AHU-2G)

B. Occupied mode:




C. Unoccupied mode:



3. When the space temperature is above the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) and economizing is enabled, the supply fan shall start and the outside air damper shall open.

4. When the space temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) minus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop and the outside air damper shall close.


SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 40 OF 94


E. Pre-Cool Mode: During optimal start, if the space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint and economizing is enabled, pre-cool mode shall be activated. When pre-cool is initiated the unit shall enable the supply fan and economizer. When the space temperature reaches occupied cooling setpoint, the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.



H. Cooling Operation: When the unit cooling mode is enabled, the supply fan shall run continuously and if economizing is enabled the outside air and return air dampers shall modulate accordingly.

I. Supply Fan: If the supply fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, all cooling and heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.

J. Coil Pump: At Lake Orion High School (5-4818) only, coil pumps shall be enabled whenever there is a call for heat.




3. When the space temperature decreases to 1.0°F below the heating setpoint, the heat will be enabled. The supply fan shall remain at minimum speed while the discharge air temperature is reset from 70°F (adj.) up to 90°F (adj.) maximum. If the space temperature continues to fall, the supply fan shall modulate up to maintain space temperature setpoint. Reset of the discharge air setpoint will occur every 5-10 minutes (adj.). When the space temperature exceeds the heating setpoint +1.0°F the heat will be disabled.

4. When the space temperature exceeds the cooling setpoint +1.0°F for 10 minutes (adj.), the system will revert to its fan modulating mode with its discharge setpoint equal to 55°F (adj.).




SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 41 OF 94



M. The BMS shall monitor CO and NO2 levels in the space. Upon detection of high gas level from the gas detection system, the outside air damper and exhaust air damper shall modulate to fully open and run at this “gas detection airflow” until levels are within acceptable levels (less than 25 ppm CO and 3 ppm NO2) but not less than 30 minutes. An alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

N. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. If the unit is running at “gas detection airflow”, the outside air damper shall remain fully open but an alarm shall still be annunciated at the BMS.


P. Freeze Protection: Where indicated in control diagrams, a hardwired, low limit temperature switch shall be electrically interlocked with the motor starter. If the low limit temperature switch is tripped at 38°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, all valves shall open to 100% and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset of the low limit temperature switch shall be required to restart the fan.

Q. Smoke Detection: When the smoke detectors sense smoke, the supply fans of the related system and all return/exhaust fans shall be turned off by the fire alarm system. Refer to Electrical Specifications.




3.20 SINGLE ZONE 100% OA CONSTANT VOLUME HEATING ONLY AIR HANDLING UNIT


1. Waldon Middle School (5-4818) (EX. AH-1100 & EX. AH-1101)

B. Occupied mode:

1. During occupied periods as indicated by time of day schedule, the supply fan shall run continuously, the outside air damper shall fully open, and the associated exhaust fan shall be enabled.

2. The heating system shall modulate to maintain the required discharge air temperature. The discharge air temperature setpoint shall be dynamically reset based on the deviation of actual space temperature from the active space temperature setpoint.

C. Unoccupied mode:

1. Unit fan and associated exhaust fan shall be off and outside air damper closed. Heating valve shall remain active and controlling to maintain the discharge air temperature at a setpoint of 60°F.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 42 OF 94


2. When the space temperature falls below unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) the outside air damper shall fully open and end switch prove open. The supply fan shall start and when status is proven, enable the associated exhaust fan. Modulate heating valve to maintain a constant discharge temperature setpoint of 95°F (adj.).

3. When the space temperature rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint plus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply fan and associated exhaust fan shall stop and the outside air damper shall close.

D. Morning Warm-Up Mode: During optimal start, if the space temperature is below the occupied heating setpoint, a morning warm-up mode shall be activated. When morning warm-up is initiated the outside air damper shall fully open and end switch prove open. The supply fan shall start and when status is proven enable the associated exhaust fan. Modulate the heating valve to maintain calculated discharge temperature setpoint. When the space temperature reaches the occupied heating setpoint, the unit shall transition to occupied mode.

E. Pre-Cool Mode: During optimal start, if the space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint and outside air temperature is below 65°F (adj.), pre-cool mode shall be activated. When pre-cool is initiated the outside air damper shall fully open and end switch prove open. The supply fan shall start and when status is proven enable the associated exhaust fan. Modulate the heating valve to maintain a calculated discharge air temperature setpoint. When the space temperature reaches occupied cooling setpoint, the unit shall transition to occupied mode.

F. Supply and Exhaust Fan: If the supply fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the supply fan shall be commanded off, the associated exhaust fan disabled and outside air damper closed. An alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. Heating valve shall remain active. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.

G. Coil Pump: Enable pump when outside air temperature drops below 45°F (adj.)

H. Supply Air Temperature Reset:

1. With no heating or cooling demand (room temperature between heating and cooling setpoints) maintain a supply temperature setpoint of 72°F.

2. As room temperature drops below occupied heating setpoint of 72°F (adj.), reset the calculated discharge temperature setpoint from 72°F to a maximum of 95°F (adj.) at a room temperature of 68°F (adj.).

3. If room temperature rises above occupied cooling setpoint of 76°F, reset the calculated discharge temperature setpoint from 72°F down to a minimum of 60°F (adj.) at a room temperature of 80°F.

4. Modulate the heating valve to maintain calculated discharge temperature setpoint.

I. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outdoor air damper shall close, the supply and exhaust fans shall be disabled, the heating valve shall open to 100%, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

J. Space Sensor Failure: If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. Space sensor failure shall cause the unit to operate at a constant discharge temperature of 72°F in the occupied mode or shut down in the unoccupied mode.

K. Freeze Protection: Where indicated in control diagrams, a hardwired, low limit temperature switch shall be electrically interlocked with the motor starter. If the low limit temperature switch is tripped at 38°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, heating valve shall open to 100% and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset of the low limit temperature switch shall be required to restart the fan.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 43 OF 94


L. Smoke Detection: When the smoke detectors sense smoke, the supply fan of the related system and associated exhaust fan shall be turned off by the fire alarm system. Refer to Electrical Specifications.

M. Control Valve Fail Position: Hot water control valve shall fail to 100% open.

N. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the Air Handling System Controller shall operate in the occupied mode.

O. Filter Status: A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the filter when the fan is running. If the switch closes during normal operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

3.21 SINGLE ZONE 100% OA CONSTANT VOLUME HEATING ONLY AIR HANDLING UNIT


1. Transportation Building (5-4823) (EX. AHU-101)

B. Occupied mode:

1. During occupied periods, the supply fan shall be enabled. The outside air damper shall open prior to fan starting.

2. The gas heat shall be staged to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint.

C. Unoccupied mode:

1. When the space temperature is below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 55°F (adj.) the outside air damper shall open, supply fan and associated exhaust fan shall start, and the gas heat shall be staged on.

2. When the space temperature rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint of 55°F (adj.) plus the unoccupied differential of 4.0° F (adj.), the supply and exhaust fans shall stop, outside air damper close and the gas heat staged off.

D. Override: Provide local override control in space for air handling unit based on time of day schedule. During occupied hours, when activated, unit shall operate in the occupied mode at 100% OA. When deactivated, unit shall operate in the unoccupied mode as outlined above. During unoccupied hours, local override shall be disabled and unit shall operate in the unoccupied mode.

E. Supply Fan: If the supply fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, all heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.

F. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

G. Filter Status: A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the filter when the fan is running. If the switch closes during normal operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

H. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the Air Handling System Controller shall operate in the Occupied Mode.

I. Smoke Detection: When the smoke detectors sense smoke, the supply fans of the related system and all return/exhaust fans shall be turned off by the fire alarm system. Refer to Electrical Specifications.

3.22 MULTI-ZONE VARIABLE VOLUME AIR HANDLING UNIT

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 44 OF 94



1. Stadium Drive Elementary (5-4813) (EX. AHU-200)

2. Waldon Middle School (5-4817) (EX. AHU-2105, -3001, -3002, 3003 & -3004)

3. Pine Tree Center (5-4821) (EX. AHU-200)

B. Occupied mode:


2. The hot water control valve and chilled water control valve shall be modulated (or DX cooling staged) to maintain the hot deck/cold deck discharge air temperature setpoint.

3. If economizing is enabled the outside air damper shall also modulate to maintain the mixed air temperature setpoint at the calculated discharge air temperature setpoint.

C. Unoccupied mode:


2. When any space temperature is below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) the supply fan shall start, the outside air damper shall remain closed and the heating shall be enabled.

3. When any space temperature rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) plus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop and the heating disabled.

4. When any space temperature is above the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) the supply fan shall start, the outside air damper shall open if economizing is enabled and remain closed if economizing is disabled and the cooling shall be enabled.

5. When any space temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) minus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop, the cooling disabled and the outside air damper shall close.



F. Supply Air Temperature Setpoint:

1. Cold Deck

a. The cold deck discharge air temperature setpoint will be reset from 70° to 55°F (adj.) as the cooling critical zone demand rises from 35% to 85% (adj.).

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 45 OF 94


b. The cooling critical zone is defined as the zone with the highest percentage cooling demand. The BMS continuously monitors all zones and selects the cooling critical zone and can change as often as every minute.

2. Hot Deck

a. The hot deck discharge air temperature will be reset between 70° and 90°F (adj.) as the heating critical zone demand rises from 30% to 80% (adj.).

b. The heating critical zone is defined as the zone with the highest percentage heating demand. The BMS continuously monitors all zones and selects the heating critical zone and can change as often as every minute.

G. Zone Damper Control:

1. Calculate zone heating demand from 0-100% as room temperature drops below current heating setpoint. Calculate zone cooling demand from 0-100% as room temperature rises above the current cooling setpoint.

2. Reset zone discharge air temperature setpoint from 70° to 90°F as zone heating demand rises from 35% to 85%. Reset zone discharge air temperature setpoint from 70°F to 55°F as zone cooling demand rises from 35% to 85%.

3. Modulate the zone damper to maintain the calculated zone discharge air temperature setpoint.

4. Space Sensor Failure: If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS and the zone damper shall be set to mid-point.

H. Supply Fan: If the supply fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, all cooling and heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.

I. Coil Pump: If unit is equipped with a heating coil pump, enable pump when outside air temperature drops below 40°F (adj.).



2. If economizer is available and there is a rise in the cold deck supply air temperature above the supply air temperature setpoint, the outside air dampers and exhaust/relief air dampers shall be modulated open from minimum position to 100% open as necessary to maintain minimum 55°F (adj.) mixed air temperature setpoint.

3. The return air dampers shall modulate closed proportionately as the outside air and exhaust dampers modulates open.

4. If the outside air damper is 100% open and there is a further rise in temperature above supply air temperature setpoint, the outside air damper shall remain 100% open and the chilled water valve shall modulate open or DX cooling staged as necessary to maintain the cold deck supply air temperature setpoint.

K. Building Pressure Control: Building static pressure shall be controlled by modulating the exhaust/relief air damper. As building pressure increases over the building pressure setpoint (adj.), the damper shall modulate towards fully open to maintain setpoint. If the building pressure falls below the setpoint, the damper shall modulate toward fully closed.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 46 OF 94


L. Fan Speed Control: Unit supply fan speed shall be reset from 50% to 100% as the maximum of either the heating or cooling critical zone demand rises from 45% to 90% (adj.). The unit return fan speed shall track the supply fan speed less an offset of 10% (adj.).

M. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

N. Freeze Protection: Where indicated in control diagrams, a hardwired, low limit temperature switch shall be electrically interlocked with the motor starter. If the low limit temperature switch is tripped at 38°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, all valves shall open to 100% and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset of the low limit temperature switch shall be required to restart the fan.


P. Filter Status: A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the filter when the fan is running. If the switch closes during normal operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.




3.23 MULTI-ZONE VARIABLE VOLUME AIR HANDLING UNIT WITH RETURN FAN


1. Lake Orion High School (5-4818) (Ex. AHU-1B, -1C, -3C, -2J, -3J, -4J)

B. Occupied mode:

1. During occupied periods as indicated by time of day schedule, the supply and return fans shall run continuously and the outside air damper shall open to maintain minimum ventilation requirements.

2. The hot water control valve and chilled water control valve shall be modulated (or DX cooling staged) to maintain the hot deck/cold deck discharge air temperature setpoint.

3. If economizing is enabled the outside air damper shall also modulate to maintain the mixed air temperature setpoint at the calculated discharge air temperature setpoint.

C. Unoccupied mode:


2. When any space temperature is below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) the supply and return fan shall start, the outside air damper shall remain closed and the heating shall be enabled.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 47 OF 94


3. When any space temperature rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) plus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply and return fan shall stop and the heating disabled.

4. When any space temperature is above the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) the supply and return fan shall start, the outside air damper shall open if economizing is enabled and remain closed if economizing is disabled and the cooling shall be enabled.

5. When any space temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) minus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply and return fan shall stop, the cooling disabled and the outside air damper shall close.

D. Morning Warm-Up Mode: During optimal start, if the space temperature is below the occupied heating setpoint a morning warm-up mode shall be activated. When morning warm-up is initiated the unit shall enable the heating, supply and return fan. The outside air damper shall remain closed. When the space temperature reaches the occupied heating setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.

E. Pre-Cool Mode: During optimal start, if the space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint, pre-cool mode shall be activated. When pre-cool is initiated the unit shall enable the supply and return fan and cooling or economizer. The outside air damper shall remain closed, unless economizing. When the space temperature reaches occupied cooling setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.

F. Supply Air Temperature Setpoint:

1. Cold Deck

a. The cold deck discharge air temperature setpoint will be reset from 70° to 55°F (adj.) as the cooling critical zone demand rises from 35% to 85% (adj.).

b. The cooling critical zone is defined as the zone with the highest percentage cooling demand. The BMS continuously monitors all zones and selects the cooling critical zone and can change as often as every minute.

2. Hot Deck

a. The hot deck discharge air temperature will be reset between 70° and 90°F (adj.) as the heating critical zone demand rises from 30% to 80% (adj.).

b. The heating critical zone is defined as the zone with the highest percentage heating demand. The BMS continuously monitors all zones and selects the heating critical zone and can change as often as every minute.

G. Zone Damper Control:

1. Calculate zone heating demand from 0-100% as room temperature drops below current heating setpoint. Calculate zone cooling demand from 0-100% as room temperature rises above the current cooling setpoint.

2. Reset zone discharge air temperature setpoint from 70° to 90°F as zone heating demand rises from 35% to 85%. Reset zone discharge air temperature setpoint from 70°F to 55°F as zone cooling demand rises from 35% to 85%.

3. Modulate the zone damper to maintain the calculated zone discharge air temperature setpoint.

4. Space Sensor Failure: If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS and the zone damper shall be set to mid-point.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 48 OF 94


H. Supply and Return Fan: If the supply or return fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, all cooling and heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan. Supply and return fans are interlocked via software, a failure of either shall disable both.

I. Coil Pump: At Lake Orion High School (5-4818) only, coil pumps shall be enabled whenever there is a call for heat.



2. If economizer is available and there is a rise in the cold deck supply air temperature above the supply air temperature setpoint, the outside air dampers and exhaust air dampers shall be modulated open from minimum position to 100% open as necessary to maintain minimum 55°F (adj.) mixed air temperature setpoint.

3. The return air dampers shall modulate closed proportionately as the outside air and exhaust dampers modulates open.

4. If the outside air damper is 100% open and there is a further rise in temperature above supply air temperature setpoint, the outside air damper shall remain 100% open and the chilled water valve shall modulate open or DX cooling stage as necessary to maintain the cold deck supply air temperature setpoint.

K. Building Pressure Control: Building static pressure shall be controlled by modulating the exhaust/relief air damper. As building pressure increases over the building pressure setpoint (adj.), the relief air damper shall modulate towards fully open to maintain setpoint. If the building pressure falls below the setpoint, the damper shall modulate towards full closed.

L. Fan Speed Control: Unit supply fan speed shall be reset from 50% to 100% as the maximum of either the heating or cooling critical zone demand rises from 45% to 90% (adj.). The unit return fan speed shall track the supply fan speed less an offset of 10% (adj.).

M. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.






SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 49 OF 94



3.24 CONSTANT VOLUME PLATE HX ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT


1. Oakview Middle School (5-4815) (EX. HR-101)

B. Occupied mode:

1. During occupied periods as indicated by time of day schedule, the supply and exhaust fans shall run continuously and the outside and exhaust air dampers shall open 100%.

2. The heating system shall modulate to maintain the required discharge air temperature.

C. Unoccupied mode:

1. During unoccupied period as indicated by the time of day schedule, the supply and exhaust fans shall be disabled and the outside air and exhaust dampers shall fully close.

D. Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint: The discharge air temperature setpoint shall be 65°F (adj.). When the discharge air temperature falls below setpoint the mode shall transition to heating.

E. Heating Operation: When the unit heating mode is enabled, the hot water control valve shall open and modulate to maintain the supply air temperature. When the heating is disabled, the heating coil control valve shall slowly close.

F. Supply and Exhaust Fan: If the supply or exhaust fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, all heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.

G. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

H. Heat Exchanger Frost Protection: Where unit is equipped with a face / bypass damper (field-verify), if heat exchanger exhaust-side leaving air temperature drops below 36°F (adj.), slowly modulate the face / bypass damper to increase bypass air until leaving temperature rises back above setpoint.

I. Freeze Protection: Where indicated in control diagrams, a hardwired, low limit temperature switch shall be electrically interlocked with the motor starter. If the low limit temperature switch is tripped at 38°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, all valves shall open to 100% and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset of the low limit temperature switch shall be required to restart the fan.

J. Smoke Detection: When the smoke detectors sense smoke, the supply fans of the related system and all return/exhaust fans shall be turned off by the fire alarm system. Refer to Electrical Specifications.

K. Control Valve Fail Position: Hot water control valve shall fail last position.

L. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the Air Handling System Controller shall operate in the Occupied Mode.

M. Filter Status: A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the filter when the fan is running. If the switch closes during normal operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

3.25 CONSTANT VOLUME HEAT WHEEL ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT WITH PREHEAT

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 50 OF 94



1. Oakview Middle School (EX. HR-201, -301, -801, -802)

B. Occupied mode:



C. Unoccupied mode:

1. During unoccupied periods as indicated by time of day schedule, the supply and exhaust fans shall be disabled and the outside air and exhaust dampers shall fully close.


E. Heating Operation: When the unit heating mode is enabled, the hot water control valve shall open and modulate to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint. The associated hot water coil pump shall also be started, if applicable. When the heating is disabled, the heating coil control valve shall slowly close.

F. Supply and Exhaust Fan: If the supply or exhaust fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, all heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.

G. Energy Recovery Wheel Operation:

1. The energy recovery wheel shall be enabled whenever the unit is in occupied mode.

2. If the OA temperature drops below the frost threshold setpoint (adj.), the energy recovery wheel shall modulate speed down to maintain the exhaust-side leaving temperature at setpoint. If modulating capability is not available, wheel shall be started/stopped at regular intervals until temperature rises above the frost threshold setpoint. If the exhaust air temperature stays below setpoint for more than 5 minutes (adj.), the wheel shall be turned off to prevent frosting and alarm.

3. If the energy recovery wheel fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the wheel, supply fan, and exhaust fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

H. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), disable the supply fan, close the outside air damper, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.


J. Smoke Detection: When the smoke detectors sense smoke, the supply fans of the related system and all return/exhaust fans shall be turned off by the fire alarm system. Refer to Electrical Specifications.

K. Control Valve Fail Position: Hot water control valve shall fail last position.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 51 OF 94




3.26 CONSTANT VOLUME HEAT WHEEL ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT


1. Paint Creek Elementary (5-4812) (EX. HR-201)

B. Occupied mode:


C. Unoccupied mode:

1. During unoccupied periods as indicated by the time of day schedule, the supply and exhaust fans shall be disabled and the outside air and exhaust dampers fully closed.

D. Supply and Exhaust Fan: If the supply or exhaust fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.

E. Energy Recovery Wheel Operation:


2. If the OA temperature drops below the frost threshold setpoint (adj.), the energy recovery wheel shall modulate speed down to maintain the exhaust-side leaving temperature at setpoint. If modulating capability is not available, wheel shall be started/stopped at regular intervals until temperature rises above the frost threshold setpoint. If the exhaust air temperature stays below setpoint for more than 5 minutes (adj.), the wheel shall be turned off to prevent frosting and alarm.


F. Low Limit Temperature Switch: Where indicated in control diagrams, a hardwired, low limit temperature switch shall be electrically interlocked with the motor starter. If the low limit temperature switch is tripped at 38°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset of the low limit temperature switch shall be required to restart the fan.


H. Smoke Detection: When the smoke detectors sense smoke, the supply fan of the related system and exhaust fan shall be turned off by the fire alarm system. Refer to Electrical Specifications.

I. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the Air Handling System Controller shall operate in the Occupied Mode.

J. Filter Status: A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across each filter when the fan is running. If the switch closes during normal operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 52 OF 94


3.27 HEATING ONLY ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT WITH PLATE HX


1. Transportation (5-4823) (EX. HR-101)

B. Occupied mode:


2. The gas heating system shall modulate to maintain the required discharge air temperature. The discharge air temperature setpoint shall be dynamically reset based on the deviation of actual space temperature from the active space temperature setpoint.


C. Unoccupied mode:

1. When the space temperature is below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) the supply fan shall start, the outside air damper shall remain closed, the recirculation bypass damper shall open and the heating shall be enabled.



4. When the space temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) minus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop, the cooling shall be disabled and the outside air damper shall close.

D. Morning Warm-Up Mode: During optimal start, if the space temperature is below the occupied heating setpoint a morning warm-up mode shall be activated. When morning warm-up is initiated the unit shall enable the heating and supply fan. The outside air damper shall remain closed and recirculation bypass damper opened. When the space temperature reaches the occupied heating setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.

E. Pre-Cool Mode: During optimal start, if the space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint and higher than the outside air temperature, pre-cool mode shall be activated. When pre-cool is initiated the unit shall enable the supply fan and economizer. When the space temperature reaches occupied cooling setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.


G. Heating Operation: When the unit heating mode is enabled, the recirculation bypass damper shall modulate to maintain minimum outside air requirements and the gas heating shall be staged to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint.

H. Cooling Operation: When the unit cooling mode is enabled, the supply and exhaust fan shall run continuously, and if the space temperature is higher than outside air temperature then the energy recovery bypass damper shall open (field-verify energy recovery bypass damper).

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 53 OF 94


I. Supply and Exhaust Fan: If the supply or exhaust fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, all cooling and heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.

J. The BMS shall monitor CO and NO2 levels in the space. Upon detection of high gas level from the gas detection system, the outside air damper and exhaust air damper shall modulate to fully open and run at this “gas detection airflow” until levels are within acceptable levels (less than 25 ppm CO and 3 ppm NO2) but not less than 30 minutes. An alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

K. Fan Control: Airflow must stay within manufacturer limitations for gas heat exchanger operation.

L. Supply Air Temperature Reset

1. The fan modulates to maintain space temperature while maintaining the discharge air setpoint of 55°F (adj.). As the cooling load decreases, the fans will modulate down to minimum speed as recommended by the manufacturer. As the space temperature continues to fall below the cooling setpoint by 1.0°F (adj.) and remains at minimum speed for a period of time (10 minutes adj.) the fan will remain at minimum speed and enter into a discharge air reset mode.




M. Economizer Cycle:



3. The return air bypass dampers shall modulate closed proportionately as the outside air damper modulates open.

N. Building Pressure Control: After the fan startup delay expires, building static pressure shall be controlled by modulating the exhaust fan. As building pressure increases over the building pressure setpoint (adj.), the exhaust fan speed shall increase to maintain setpoint. If the building pressure falls below the setpoint, the exhaust fan speed shall decrease.

O. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. If the unit is running at “gas detection airflow”, the outside air damper shall remain fully open but an alarm shall still be annunciated at the BMS.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 54 OF 94


P. Heat Exchanger Frost Protection: Where unit is equipped with a face / bypass damper (field-verify), if heat exchanger exhaust-side leaving air temperature drops below 36°F (adj.), slowly modulate the face / bypass damper to increase bypass air until leaving temperature rises back above setpoint.

Q. Space Sensor Failure: If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor or gas detection sensors an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. Space sensor failure shall cause the unit to operate at minimum airflow in the occupied mode, or shut down in the unoccupied mode.

R. Smoke Detection: When the smoke detectors sense smoke, the supply fans of the related system and all return/exhaust fans shall be turned off by the fire alarm system. Refer to Electrical Specifications.


T. Filter Status: A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across each filter when the fan is running. If the switch closes during normal operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

3.28 SINGLE ZONE PLATE HX ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT WITH PREHEAT


1. Scripps Middle School (5-4816) (Ex. HR-101)

B. Occupied mode:



C. Unoccupied mode:

1. Unit supply and exhaust fans shall be disabled and outside and exhaust dampers remain closed. Heating valve will remain active and modulate to maintain 60°F at the discharge air temperature sensor.

2. When any representative space temperature drops below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.), the supply fan shall be enabled and the outside and exhaust damper shall remain closed. The recirculation bypass damper shall open and the heating valve shall modulate to maintain a constant discharge temperature setpoint of 85°F.

3. When the space temperature rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) plus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop.

D. Morning Warm-Up Mode: During optimal start, if the space temperature is below the occupied heating setpoint a morning warm-up mode shall be activated. When morning warm-up is initiated the unit shall enable the heating and supply fan. The outside and exhaust air dampers shall remain closed and recirculation bypass damper opened. Modulate heating valve to maintain a constant discharge temperature setpoint of 80°F. When the space temperature reaches the occupied heating setpoint, the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.

E. Heat/Cool Mode: When the space temperature rises above the occupied cooling setpoint the mode shall transition to cooling. When the space temperature falls below the occupied heating setpoint the mode shall transition to heating. When the space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint or below the occupied heating setpoint the mode shall remain in its last state.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 55 OF 94


F. Heating Operation: When the unit heating mode is enabled, the recirculation bypass damper shall be closed and the hot water control valve shall open and modulate to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint. The associated hot water coil pump shall also be started, if applicable. When the heating is disabled, the heating coil control valve shall slowly close.

G. Cooling Operation: When the unit cooling mode is enabled, the supply and exhaust fan shall run and if the space temperature is higher than the outside air temperature then the energy recovery bypass damper shall open (field-verify existing energy recovery bypass dampers).

H. Supply and Exhaust Fan: If the supply or exhaust fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, all cooling and heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.

I. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

J. Heat Exchanger Frost Protection: Where unit is equipped with a face / bypass damper (field-verify), if heat exchanger exhaust-side leaving air temperature drops below 36°F (adj.), slowly modulate the face / bypass damper to increase bypass air until leaving temperature rises back above setpoint.

K. Freeze Protection: Where indicated in control diagrams, a hardwired, low limit temperature switch shall be electrically interlocked with the motor starter. If the low limit temperature switch is tripped at 38°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, all valves shall open to 100% and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset of the low limit temperature switch shall be required to restart the fan.

L. Smoke Detection: When the smoke detectors sense smoke, the supply fans of the related system and all return/exhaust fans shall be turned off by the fire alarm system. Refer to Electrical Specifications.

M. Control Valve Fail Position: Hot water control valve shall fail last position.

N. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the Air Handling System Controller shall operate in the Occupied Mode.

O. Filter Status: A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the filter when the fan is running. If the switch closes during normal operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

3.29 SINGLE ZONE PLATE HX ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT


1. Oakview Middle School (5-4815) (EX. HR-302)

B. Occupied/Unoccupied mode:

1. During occupied periods as indicated by time of day schedule, the supply and exhaust fans shall run continuously and the outside and exhaust air dampers shall open 100%. During unoccupied periods as indicated by the time of day schedule, the supply and exhaust fans shall be disabled and the outside air and exhaust dampers fully closed.

C. Morning Warm-Up Mode: During optimal start, if the space temperature is below the occupied heating setpoint a morning warm-up mode shall be activated. When morning warm-up is initiated the unit shall enable the supply fan and the associated reheat coils. The outside and exhaust air dampers shall remain closed and recirculation bypass damper opened. When the

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 56 OF 94


space temperature reaches the occupied heating setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.

D. Energy Recovery Bypass (if applicable): When unit is in cooling season only, when space temperature is higher than the outside air temperature the energy recovery bypass damper shall open (field-verify existing energy recovery bypass dampers).

E. Supply and Exhaust Fan: If the supply or exhaust fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, all cooling and heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.

F. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

G. Heat Exchanger Frost Protection: Where unit is equipped with a face / bypass damper (field-verify), if heat exchanger exhaust-side leaving air temperature drops below 36°F (adj.), slowly modulate the face / bypass damper to increase bypass air until leaving temperature rises back above setpoint.

H. Smoke Detection: When the smoke detectors sense smoke, the supply fans of the related system and all return/exhaust fans shall be turned off by the fire alarm system. Refer to Electrical Specifications.

I. Control Valve Fail Position: Hot water control valve shall fail last position.

J. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the Air Handling System Controller shall operate in the Occupied Mode.

K. Filter Status: A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the filter when the fan is running. If the switch closes during normal operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

3.30 CONSTANT VOLUME LOCKER ROOM AIR HANDLING UNITS


1. Lake Orion High School (5-4818) (EX. AHU-4B, EX. AHU-5)

B. Occupied/Unoccupied mode:

1. During occupied periods as indicated by time of day schedule, the supply fan and associated exhaust fan shall run continuously and the return air damper shall open. During unoccupied periods, the supply fan and associated exhaust fan shall be disabled and the return air damper shall close.

C. Supply and Exhaust Fan: If the supply or associated exhaust fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the return air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.

D. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 45°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

E. Smoke Detection: When the smoke detectors sense smoke, the supply fans of the related system and all return/exhaust fans shall be turned off by the fire alarm system. Refer to Electrical Specifications.

F. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the Air Handling System Controller shall operate in the Occupied Mode.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 57 OF 94


G. Filter Status: A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the filter when the fan is running. If the switch closes during normal operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

3.31 POOL AIR HANDLING UNIT


1. Lake Orion High School (EX. AHU-1, EX. AHU-2)

B. Space Temperature Control: Space temperature setpoint shall be 82°F (adj.) or 2°F above pool water temperature, field-verify existing pool temp.

C. Supply Air Temperature Setpoint:

1. As space temperature rises 2.0°F above space temperature setpoint, slowly reset the supply air temperature setpoint down toward a minimum of 65°F (adj.).

2. As the space temperature drops 2°F below space temperature setpoint slowly reset supply air temperature setpoint up toward a maximum of 95°F (adj.).

3. When space temperature is within ±1°F of space temperature setpoint, maintain supply setpoint of approximately 80-82°F.

D. Full water flow is maintained through the heating coil at all times. Modulate the face/bypass damper to maintain the supply temperature setpoint as outlined above. If the damper is open to full bypass, supply air temperature is above space temperature setpoint, and outside air temperature is below space temperature setpoint, open outside air damper above minimum position and modulate to maintain space temperature setpoint.

E. Space Humidity Control: As room humidity rises above 60% setpoint (adj.), modulate the outside air damper open. If mixed air temperature drops below a minimum setpoint of 45°F limit outside air damper from opening any further. Open outside air damper greater than minimum position only if outside air RH conditions are between 40% and 60% and outside air temperature is below space temperature setpoint.

F. Event Mode:

1. When the time schedule is set for event mode, run the supply fan continuously at maximum speed setpoint of 100% (adj.) and the outside air damper set to minimum position setpoint of 15% (adj.).

2. Modulate face and bypass and outside air damper to maintain room temperature and humidity setpoints as outlined above.

G. Non-Event Mode:

1. When the time schedule is set for non-event mode, run the supply fan continuously at a minimum speed setpoint of 70% (adj.).

2. Modulate face and bypass damper and outside air damper to maintain space temperature and humidity setpoints as outlined above.

3. If space temperature or humidity setpoints cannot be maintained, slowly increase fan speed toward maximum setpoint until setpoints are achieved. Then slowly reduce fan speed toward 70% minimum speed setpoint.

H. Building Pressure Control: Modulate associated exhaust fan speed to maintain building pressure setpoint of -0.05”wc.

I. Carbon Dioxide Monitoring: Monitor CO2 levels in the return air as indicated.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 58 OF 94


J. Dew Point Monitoring: Monitor presence of moisture on outside windows in various locations around the pool area as indicated on drawings via condensate sensor.

K. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, the unit supply fan shall shut down and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

L. Space Sensor Failure: If there is a fault with the operation of any of the zone sensors an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. Space sensor failure shall cause the unit to operate at minimum supply airflow in the occupied mode or shut down in the unoccupied mode.

M. Freeze Protection: Where indicated in control diagrams, a hardwired, low limit temperature switch shall be electrically interlocked with the motor starter. If the low limit temperature switch is tripped at 38°F (adj.), the unit supply fan shall shut down, the outside air damper shall close, all valves shall open to 100% and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset of the low limit temperature switch shall be required to restart the fan.


O. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the Air Handling System Controller shall operate in ”Event Mode.”


3.32 POOL SPECTATOR VARIABLE VOLUME AIR HANDLING UNIT



B. Space Temperature Control: Space temperature setpoint shall be 82°F (adj.) or 2°F above pool water temperature, field-verify existing pool temp.

C. Supply Air Temperature Setpoint:

1. As space temperature rises 2.0°F above space temperature setpoint, slowly reset the supply air temperature setpoint down toward a minimum of 65°F (adj.).

2. As the space temperature drops 2.0°F below space temperature setpoint slowly reset supply air temperature setpoint up toward a maximum of 95°F (adj.).

3. When space temperature is within ±1°F of space temperature setpoint, maintain supply setpoint of approximately 80-82°F.

D. Modulate the unit heating valve and condensing unit to maintain calculated supply temperature setpoint.

E. Condensing Unit Cooling Mode. With outside temperature below 65°F disable condensing unit cooling. If heating valve is closed and supply temperature is above space temperature setpoint and outside air temperature is below space temperature setpoint, slowly open outside air damper above minimum position and modulate to maintain space temperature setpoint.

F. Space Humidity Control: As room humidity rises above 60% setpoint (adj.) and outside temperature below condensing unit enable setpoint of 65°F (ad.), slowly modulate the outside air damper open. If mixed air temperature drops below a minimum setpoint of 45°F limit outside air damper from opening any further. If outside temperature is above condensing unit enable

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 59 OF 94


setpoint of 65°F (adj.) enable cooling. Open outside air damper greater than minimum position only if outside air RH conditions are between 40% and 60%.

G. Event Mode:

1. When the time schedule is set for event mode, run the supply fan continuously at maximum speed setpoint of 100% (adj.) and the outside air damper set to minimum position setpoint of 15% (adj.).

2. Modulate heating valve, condensing unit and outside air damper to maintain room temperature and humidity setpoints as outlined above.

H. Non-Event Mode:

1. When the time schedule is set for non-event mode, run the supply fan continuously at a minimum speed setpoint of 50% (adj.).

2. Modulate heating valve and outside air damper to maintain room temperature and humidity setpoints as outlined above.

3. If room temperature or humidity setpoints cannot be maintained, slowly increase fan speed toward maximum setpoint until setpoints are achieved. Then slowly reduce fan speed toward 50% minimum speed setpoint.

I. Building Pressure Control: Modulate associated exhaust fan speed to maintain building pressure setpoint of -0.05”wc.

J. Carbon Dioxide Monitoring: As return air CO2 level rises above 1,000ppm setpoint (adj.), slowly open the outside air damper to ventilate area. If mixed air temperature drops below a minimum setpoint of 45°F limit outside air damper from opening any further.

K. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, the unit supply fan shall shut down and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

L. Space Sensor Failure: If there is a fault with the operation of any of the zone sensors an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. Space sensor failure shall cause the unit to operate at minimum airflow in the occupied mode or shut down in the unoccupied mode.

M. Freeze Protection: Where indicated in control diagrams, a hardwired, low limit temperature switch shall be electrically interlocked with the motor starter. If the low limit temperature switch is tripped at 38°F (adj.), the unit supply fan shall shut down, the outside air damper shall close, all valves shall open to 100% and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset of the low limit temperature switch shall be required to restart the fan.


O. Control Valve Fail Position: Hot water control valve shall fail to 100% open.

P. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the Air Handling System Controller shall operate in “Event Mode.”

Q. Filter Status: A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the filter when the fan is running. If the switch closes during normal operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

3.33 POOL MECHANICAL 100% OA CONSTANT VOLUME AIR HANDLING UNIT



SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 60 OF 94


B. Ventilation Mode:

1. This unit is intended to run continuously at 100% outside air. Both the supply fan and associated exhaust fan shall be enabled at all times.

2. The hot water control valve shall modulate to maintain the required space temperature setpoint. The discharge air temperature setpoint shall be dynamically reset based on the deviation of actual space temperature from the active space temperature setpoint.

C. Supply and Exhaust Fan: If the supply or associated exhaust fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, all cooling and heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.

D. Supply Air Temperature Reset

1. When the space temperature decreases to 2.0°F below the heating setpoint, the heat will be enabled. The supply fan shall remain at minimum speed while the discharge air temperature is reset from 70°F (adj.) up to 90°F (adj.) maximum. Reset of the discharge air setpoint will occur every 5-10 minutes (adj.). When the space temperature exceeds the heating setpoint +2.0°F the heat will be disabled.

E. Face and Bypass Damper:

1. Above 40°F (adj.) outside air temperature, set the face damper to 100% face (0% bypass) and modulate the heating coil control to maintain the calculated discharge air temperature.

2. Below 40°F (adj.) outside air temperature, the heating coil control valve shall be open 100% and the face and bypass dampers shall modulate to maintain the calculated discharge air temperature.

F. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, the unit supply fan shall shut down and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

G. Freeze Protection: Where indicated in control diagrams, a hardwired, low limit temperature switch shall be electrically interlocked with the motor starter. If the low limit temperature switch is tripped at 38°F (adj.), the unit supply fan shall shut down, the outside air damper shall close, all valves shall open to 100% and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset of the low limit temperature switch shall be required to restart the fan.

H. Space Sensor Failure: If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. Space sensor failure shall cause the unit to operate at minimum airflow in the occupied mode or shut down in the unoccupied mode.


J. Control Valve Fail Position: Hot water control valve shall fail last position.

K. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the Air Handling System Controller shall operate in the Occupied Mode.

L. Filter Status: A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the filter when the fan is running. If the switch closes during normal operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

3.34 CONSTANT VOLUME HEATING ONLY MAKEUP AIR UNIT


SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 61 OF 94


1. Stadium Drive Elementary (5-4813) (EX. MAU-1)

B. Occupied mode:

1. During occupied periods as indicated by time of day schedule, the supply fan shall run continuously and the outside air damper shall modulate open as follows:

a. If kitchen hood fan is enabled, damper shall fully open.

b. If kitchen hood fan is not enabled, damper shall modulate to 80% recirculation position.

2. The heating shall modulate/stage to maintain the required discharge air temperature. The discharge air temperature setpoint shall be dynamically reset based on the deviation of actual space temperature from the active space temperature setpoint.

3. If economizing is enabled the outside air damper shall also modulate to maintain the mixed air temperature setpoint when the kitchen hood fan is NOT enabled.

C. Unoccupied mode:




4. When the space temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) minus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop and the outside air damper shall close.


E. Pre-Cool Mode: During optimal start, if the space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint and economizing is enabled, pre-cool mode shall be activated. When pre-cool is initiated the unit shall enable the supply fan and economizer. When the space temperature reaches occupied cooling setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.


G. Heating Operation: When the unit heating mode is enabled, the gas heating shall stage/modulate to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint. When the heating is disabled, the gas heating shall be disabled.

H. Cooling Operation: If economizer is enabled, the outside air damper shall modulate up to fully open to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint. This only applies when the kitchen hood fan is not in operation.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 62 OF 94


I. Supply Fan and Kitchen Hood Fan: If the supply or exhaust fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, all cooling and heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.




K. Economizer Cycle (Only available when kitchen hood fan is NOT enabled):


2. If economizer is available and there is a rise in mixed air temperature above the mixed air temperature setpoint, the outside air damper shall be modulated open from minimum position to 100% open as necessary to maintain minimum 55°F (adj.) mixed air temperature setpoint.

3. The return air damper shall modulate closed proportionately as the outside air damper modulates open.

L. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

M. Space Sensor Failure: If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. Space sensor failure shall cause the unit to operate at minimum airflow in the occupied mode or shut down in the unoccupied mode.


O. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the Air Handling System Controller shall operate in the Occupied Mode.


3.35 ROOFTOP GAS-FIRED KITCHEN EXHAUST AND MAKEUP AIR SYSTEM



2. Webber Elementary School (5-4814)






SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 63 OF 94


B. BMS/ATC System shall monitor hood operation, refer to associated control diagram points.

C. Where provided (Lake Orion High School only), supply air fan shall be interconnected to kitchen hood switch and activate when kitchen hood fan is energized.

3.36 KITCHEN EXHAUST AND MAKEUP AIR SYSTEM


1. Waldon Middle School (5-4817) (EX. MAU)

B. BMS/ATC System shall monitor hood exhaust fan operation. Upon failure of the kitchen exhaust hood, an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS and the supply fan of the associated AHU shall be disabled.

C. Fan Control: Supply fan operation shall be interlocked with kitchen hood exhaust fan operation.


E. Heating Operation: When the unit heating mode is enabled, the hot water control valve shall open and modulate to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint. If the outside air temperature drops below 45°F enable the coil pump. When the heating is disabled, the heating coil control valve shall slowly close and the coil pump disabled.

F. Supply Fan: If the supply fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air and any associated kitchen hood exhaust fan shall be disabled, all heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.


H. Space Sensor Failure: If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.


J. Smoke Detection: When the smoke detectors sense smoke, the supply fans of the related system shall be turned off by the fire alarm system. Refer to Electrical Specifications.

K. Control Valve Fail Position: Hot water control valve shall fail 100% open.



3.37 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME REHEAT BOXES



2. Orion Oaks Elementary School (5-4811)

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 64 OF 94







B. Occupied Mode: Normal operating mode as indicated by time of day schedule or occupancy sensor (as indicated in control diagrams). When the unit is in the occupied mode the VAV shall maintain the space temperature at the active occupied heating or cooling setpoint. Applicable ventilation and airflow setpoints shall be enforced. The occupied mode shall be the default mode of the VAV.

C. Unoccupied Mode:

1. Set active heating setpoint to unoccupied heating setpoint (60°F – adj.) and active cooling setpoint to unoccupied cooling setpoint (80°F – adj.). Disregard local setpoint adjust and occupancy sensor status (if applicable).

2. Set minimum airflow setpoint to 0 CFM. Heating and maximum cooling airflow setpoints remain the same.

3. If zone temperature drops below unoccupied heating setpoint:

a. If zone has perimeter or radiant heat, modulate this control valve open as needed to maintain room temperature at the unoccupied heating setpoint and leave zone damper closed.

b. If the zone does not have perimeter or radiant heat, send a heat request to AHU, modulate zone damper to maintain heating airflow setpoint and open zone heating valve.

4. If zone temperature rises above unoccupied cooling setpoint, send a cooling request to the AHU and modulate the zone damper to maintain cooling maximum airflow setpoint.

D. Heat/Cool Setpoint: The space temperature setpoint shall be determined either by a local setpoint, the VAV default setpoint or a communicated value. The VAV shall use the locally stored default setpoints when neither a local setpoint nor communicated setpoint is present. If both a local setpoint and communicated setpoint exist, the VAV shall use the communicated value.

E. Airflow Setpoints:

1. Minimum airflow settings:

a. Set zone minimum airflow setpoint to match existing. Minimum airflow setpoint must be set at or below heating minimum airflow setpoint.

2. Set heating airflow setpoint to match existing setpoint. Heating airflow setpoint must be at or above minimum airflow setpoint.

3. Set cooling maximum airflow setpoint to match existing setpoint. Cooling maximum airflow setpoint must be at or above heating airflow setpoint.

F. Control damper operation – Modulate VAV zone control damper to maintain zone airflow at active airflow setpoint.

G. Ventilation Mode:

1. VAV zone is in ventilation mode when room temperature is between the active heating and cooling setpoints.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 65 OF 94


2. Set active airflow setpoint to the calculated minimum airflow setpoint as outlined above.

H. Cooling Mode: When the space temperature is above setpoint the VAV unit shall operate in cooling mode. The VAV controller shall maintain the space temperature at the active cooling setpoint by modulating the airflow between the active cooling minimum airflow setpoint to the maximum cooling airflow setpoint. The VAV shall use the measured space temperature and the active cooling setpoint to determine the requested cooling capacity of the unit. The outputs will be controlled based on the unit configuration and the requested cooling capacity.

I. Heating Mode: When the space temperature is below setpoint the VAV unit shall operate in heating mode. The VAV controller shall maintain the space temperature at the active heating setpoint by modulating the reheat valve at the active heating minimum airflow setpoint up to the maximum allowable heating supply air temperature of 90°F (adj.). For spaces with radiant or perimeter heating, the radiant / perimeter heat shall be the first stage of heating followed by the reheat coil. Upon a further fall in space temperature the VAV controller shall modulate the airflow between the minimum heating airflow setpoint and the maximum heating airflow setpoint. The VAV controller shall use the measured space temperature and the active heating setpoint to determine the requested heating capacity of the unit. The outputs will be controlled based on the unit configuration and the requested heating capacity.

J. Where occupancy is indicated in the control diagrams, when there is no occupancy detected, after a predetermined stop delay (10 to 15 min. adjustable time delay), the VAV zone shall be removed from the air handling unit ventilation calculation. The unit shall continue to operate to maintain temperature setpoint according to the scheduled occupancy. When occupancy is reestablished based on the occupancy sensor, the unit shall be restored to the air handling unit ventilation calculation and follow its occupied sequence.

K. Reheat Control: The reheat shall be enabled when the space temperature drops below the active cooling or heating setpoint and the airflow is at the minimum airflow setpoint.

1. If the space temperature is below the setpoint the hot water reheat valve shall modulate as required to maintain the active discharge air temperature setpoint.

2. The VAV discharge air temperature setpoint shall be reset to maintain the space temperature setpoint. When the space temperature setpoint has been achieved, the discharge air temperature shall be reset to the space heating temperature setpoint or 70°F (adj.).

L. Control Valve Fail Position: The reheat hot water control valve shall fail open.

M. Space Sensor Failure: If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. Space sensor failure shall cause the VAV to drive the damper to minimum air flow if the VAV is in the occupied mode, or drive it closed if the VAV is in the unoccupied mode.

3.38 CONSTANT AIR VOLUME REHEAT BOXES



B. Occupied Mode: Normal operating mode as indicated by time of day schedule. When the unit is in the occupied mode the CVB shall maintain the space temperature at the active occupied setpoint while maintaining the airflow setpoint. The occupied mode shall be the default mode of the CVB.

C. Unoccupied Mode: Normal operating mode for unoccupied spaces or nighttime operation. When the unit is in unoccupied mode the CVB controller shall maintain the space temperature at the stored unoccupied heating or cooling setpoint regardless of the presence of a hardwired or

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 66 OF 94


communicated setpoint. If space temperature falls below the unoccupied heating setpoint, the reheat valve shall open and modulate to maintain discharge air temperature setpoint. When the space temperature exceeds the active unoccupied setpoint the air valve shall fully close.

D. Heat/Cool Setpoint: The space temperature setpoint shall be determined either by a local setpoint, the CVB default setpoint or a communicated value. The CVB shall use the locally stored default setpoints when neither a local setpoint nor communicated setpoint is present. If both a local setpoint and communicated setpoint exist, the CVB shall use the communicated value.

E. Heating/Cooling Mode: When the space temperature is above setpoint the VAV unit shall operate in cooling mode. When the space temperature is below setpoint the VAV unit shall operate in heating mode. The VAV controller shall maintain the space temperature at the active heating setpoint by modulating the reheat valve up to the maximum allowable heating supply air temperature of 90°F (adj.). For spaces with radiant or perimeter heating, the radiant / perimeter heat shall be the first stage of heating followed by the reheat coil.

F. Reheat Control: The reheat shall be enabled when the space temperature drops below the active cooling or heating setpoint.

1. If the space temperature is below the setpoint the hot water reheat valve shall modulate as required to maintain the active discharge air temperature setpoint.

2. The CVB discharge air temperature setpoint shall be reset to maintain the space temperature setpoint. When the space temperature setpoint has been achieved, the discharge air temperature shall be reset to the space heating temperature setpoint or 70°F (adj.).

G. Control Valve Fail Position: The reheat hot water control valve shall fail open.

H. Space Sensor Failure: If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

3.39 PARALLEL FAN POWERED VARIABLE AIR VOLUME REHEAT BOXES



B. Occupied Mode: Normal operating mode as indicated by time of day schedule. When the unit is in the occupied mode the FPVAV shall maintain the space temperature at the active occupied heating or cooling setpoint. Applicable ventilation and airflow setpoints shall be enforced. The occupied mode shall be the default mode of the FPVAV.

C. Unoccupied Mode:

1. Set active heating setpoint to unoccupied heating setpoint (60°F – adj.) and active cooling setpoint to unoccupied cooling setpoint (80°F – adj.). Disregard local setpoint adjust and occupancy sensor status (if applicable).

2. Set minimum airflow setpoint to 0 CFM. Heating and maximum cooling airflow setpoints remain the same.

3. If zone temperature drops below unoccupied heating setpoint:

a. If zone has perimeter or radiant heat, modulate this control valve open as needed to maintain room temperature at the unoccupied heating setpoint and leave zone damper closed.

b. If the zone does not have perimeter or radiant heat, enable the parallel fan and modulate open zone heating valve. Primary airflow damper shall remain closed.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 67 OF 94


4. If zone temperature rises above unoccupied cooling setpoint, send a cooling request to the AHU and modulate the zone damper to maintain cooling maximum airflow setpoint.

D. Morning Warm-Up Mode: When Morning-Warm-Up Mode is indicated by the AHU controller, the VAV zone damper shall remain shut, parallel fan shall be enabled and heating valve shall modulate open until room temperature reaches occupied heating setpoint. If room temperature is at or above the occupied heating setpoint, close the heating valve and shut off the parallel fan and hold until occupied mode.

E. Pre-Cool Mode: When pre-cool mode is indicated by the AHU controller, VAV zone will modulate its zone damper to maintain cooling airflow setpoint until room temperature reaches occupied cooling setpoint. If room temperature is at or below occupied cooling setpoint, close the zone damper and hold until occupied.

F. Heat/Cool Setpoint: The space temperature setpoint shall be determined either by a local setpoint, the FPVAV default setpoint or a communicated value. The FPVAV shall use the locally stored default setpoints when neither a local setpoint nor communicated setpoint is present. If both a local setpoint and communicated setpoint exist, the FPVAV shall use the communicated value.

G. Airflow Setpoints:

1. Minimum airflow settings: Set zone minimum airflow setpoint to match existing. Minimum airflow setpoint must be set at or below heating minimum airflow setpoint

2. Set heating airflow setpoint to match existing setpoint. Heating airflow setpoint must be at or above minimum airflow setpoint.

3. Set cooling maximum airflow setpoint to match existing setpoint. Cooling maximum airflow setpoint must be at or above heating airflow setpoint.

H. Control damper operation – Modulate VAV zone control damper to maintain zone airflow at active airflow setpoint.

I. Ventilation Mode:

1. VAV zone is in ventilation mode when room temperature is between the active heating and cooling setpoints.

2. Set active airflow setpoint to the calculated minimum airflow setpoint as outlined above.

J. Heating Mode:

1. When the space temperature is below setpoint the FPVAV unit shall operate in heating mode.

2. If the zone has perimeter or radiant heat, modulate this valve as the first stage of heating and use VAV zone heat as heating call increase.

3. Enable parallel fan and modulate zone heating valve open as heating call increases up to a maximum discharge air temperature of 90°F (adj.).

4. As heating call decreases, reduce fan speed and modulate zone heating valve closed.

K. Cooling Mode:

1. When the space temperature rises above active cooling setpoint the FPVAV unit shall operate in cooling mode.

2. Reset active airflow setpoint up from calculated minimum airflow setpoint toward cooling maximum setpoint as cooling call increases.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 68 OF 94


3. As cooling call decreases, lower the airflow setpoint down toward calculated minimum airflow setpoint.

L. Control Valve Fail Position: The reheat hot water control valve shall fail in place.

M. Space Sensor Failure: If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. Space sensor failure shall cause the FPVAV to drive the damper to minimum air flow if the FPVAV is in the occupied mode, or drive it closed if the FPVAV is in the unoccupied mode.

3.40 TYPICAL REHEAT / BOOSTER COILS






B. Occupied Mode: The hot water control valve shall modulate to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint. Provide heating and cooling discharge air temperature setpoint (adj.) such that when unit has achieved space temperature setpoint, the discharge air temperature shall be reset to the space heating temperature set point or 70°F (adj.).

C. Unoccupied Mode:

1. Hot water control valve is closed. When room temperature drops below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) the hot water valve shall open.

2. When space temperature rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F plus the unoccupied differential of 4.0° the hot water valve shall close.

D. Space Temperature Control: The space temperature shall be maintained between the occupied cooling setpoint of 75°F (adj.) and the occupied heating setpoint of 70°F (adj.). The unit shall transition to the cooling mode when the space temperature rises one degree above the occupied cooling setpoint of 75°F (adj.). The unit shall transition to the heating mode when the space temperature drops one degree below the occupied heating setpoint of 70°F (adj.). If heating valve is open and coil supply temperature is not significantly above unit supply temperature, send low priority alarm indicating heating valve failure.

E. Control Valve Fail Position: The reheat hot water control valve shall fail open.

F. Space Sensor Failure: If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

3.41 FAN COIL – HEATING AND COOLING

A. This sequence applies under-window, ceiling cassette, and concealed fan coil configurations at the following schools:








SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 69 OF 94


B. Occupied Mode:

1. During occupied periods the supply fan shall run continuously and the outside air damper shall open to maintain minimum ventilation requirements.

2. The hot water control valves and chilled water control valve shall be modulated to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint.

C. Unoccupied Mode:

1. “Moisture Purge” Cycle: If cooling has been active, put unit into a Moisture Purge Mode immediately after occupied mode to dry out the cooling coil before supply fan is disabled. Leave the unit supply fan enabled for a period of 10 minutes.

2. When the space temperature is below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) the supply fan shall start, the outside air damper shall remain closed and the hot water valve shall open.

3. When the space temperature rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) plus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop and the hot water valve shall close.

4. When the space temperature is above the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) the supply fan shall start, the outside air damper shall open if economizing is enabled and remain closed if economizing is disabled and the chilled water valve shall open or DX cooling staged on.

5. When the space temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) minus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop, the chilled water valve shall close or DX cooling staged off and the outside air damper shall close.


E. Pre-Cool Mode: During optimal start, if the space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint, pre-cool mode shall be activated. When pre-cool is initiated the unit shall enable the fan and cooling. The outside air damper shall remain closed. When the space temperature reaches occupied cooling setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.

F. Space Temperature Control: The space temperature shall be maintained between the occupied cooling setpoint of 75°F (adj.) and the occupied heating setpoint of 70°F (adj.). The unit shall transition to the cooling mode when the space temperature rises one degree above the occupied cooling setpoint of 75°F (adj.). The unit shall transition to the heating mode when the space temperature drops one degree below the occupied heating setpoint of 70°F (adj.).

G. Supply Fan Operation: The supply fan shall be off in the unoccupied mode. When the controller is in the occupied mode, the supply fan shall operate continuously to maintain space temperature. The supply fan status shall be monitored and if the supply fan fails the fan shall be commanded off and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.

H. Condensate Overflow Monitoring: Maintain existing condensate overflow monitoring. If the condensate level reaches the trip point, a condensate overflow diagnostic shall be annunciated at the BMS. To prevent the condensate drain pan from overflowing and causing water damage to the building the fan shall be disabled and the chilled water valve shall close.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 70 OF 94



J. Freeze Protection: Where indicated in control diagrams, a hardwired, low limit temperature switch shall be electrically interlocked with the motor starter. If the low limit temperature switch is tripped at 38°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, all valves shall open to 100% and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset of the low limit temperature switch shall be required to restart the fan.

K. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the unit shall operate in the Occupied Mode.


1. Economizer cycle is only available on under-window & concealed units (NOT ceiling cassette style) at the following schools:

a. Carpenter Elementary School (5-4810)

b. Stadium Drive Elementary School (5-4813)

c. Webber Elementary School (5-4814)

d. Pine Tree Center (5-4821)

2. Economizer shall be available whenever the outside air enthalpy is less than 28 btu/lb and the outside air temperature is less than 75 deg.





3.42 FAN COIL – HEATING ONLY




B. Occupied Mode:


2. The hot water control valve shall be modulated to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint.

C. Unoccupied Mode:


SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 71 OF 94




E. Space Temperature Control: The space temperature shall be maintained at a setpoint of 70°F (adj.). The unit shall transition to the heating mode when the space temperature drops one degree below the occupied setpoint.

F. Supply Fan Operation: The supply fan shall be off in the unoccupied mode. When the controller is in the occupied mode, the supply fan shall operate continuously to maintain space temperature. The supply fan status shall be monitored and if the supply fan fails the fan shall be commanded off and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.


H. Freeze Protection: Where indicated in control diagrams, a hardwired, low limit temperature switch shall be electrically interlocked with the motor starter. If the low limit temperature switch is tripped at 38°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, all valves shall open to 100% and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset of the low limit temperature switch shall be required to restart the fan.

I. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the unit shall operate in the Occupied Mode.

3.43 FAN COIL – HEATING & COOLING (PRECONDITIONED OA OR NO OA)









B. Occupied Mode:

1. During occupied periods the supply fan shall run continuously.

2. The hot water control valves and chilled water control valve shall be modulated (or DX cooling staged) to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint.

C. Unoccupied Mode:


SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 72 OF 94


2. When the space temperature is below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) the supply fan shall start and the hot water valve shall open.


4. When the space temperature is above the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) the supply fan shall start and the chilled water valve shall open or DX cooling staged on.

5. When the space temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) minus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop and the chilled water valve shall close or DX cooling staged off.

D. Morning Warm-Up Mode: During optimal start, if the space temperature is below the occupied heating setpoint a morning warm-up mode shall be activated. When morning warm-up is initiated the unit shall enable the heating and supply fan. When the space temperature reaches the occupied heating setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.

E. Pre-Cool Mode: During optimal start, if the space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint, pre-cool mode shall be activated. When pre-cool is initiated the unit shall enable the fan and cooling. When the space temperature reaches occupied cooling setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.

F. Space Temperature Control: The space temperature shall be maintained between the occupied cooling setpoint of 75°F (adj.) and the occupied heating setpoint of 70°F (adj.). The unit shall transition to the cooling mode when the space temperature rises one degree above the occupied cooling setpoint of 75°F (adj.). The unit shall transition to the heating mode when the space temperature drops one degree below the occupied heating setpoint of 70°F (adj.).

G. Supply Fan Operation: The supply fan shall be off in the unoccupied mode. When the controller is in the occupied mode, the supply fan shall operate continuously to maintain space temperature. The supply fan status shall be monitored and if the supply fan fails the fan shall be commanded off and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.

H. Condensate Overflow Monitoring: Maintain existing condensate overflow monitoring. If the condensate level reaches the trip point, a condensate overflow diagnostic shall be annunciated at the BMS. To prevent the condensate drain pan from overflowing and causing water damage to the building the fan shall be disabled and the DX cooling shall be staged off.


J. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the unit shall operate in the Occupied Mode.

3.44 BLOWER COIL UNIT – HEATING AND COOLING




B. Occupied Mode:


SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 73 OF 94


2. The hot water control valve and chilled water control valve or DX cooling shall be staged to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint.

C. Standby Mode (New Early Childhood Center only):

1. During scheduled occupied mode, if zone occupancy sensor indicates space is unoccupied set the unit to Standby Mode. Occupancy status to be obtained from auxiliary contacts on lighting control system occupancy sensor wired to BMS controller where indicated on plans.

a. Lower active heating setpoint 2°F and raise active cooling setpoint 2°F, disable supply and relief fans and close outside air damper.

b. If room temperature drops below active (standby) heating setpoint, enable supply fan. Operate heating similar to Morning Warmup Mode.

c. If room temperature rises above active (standby) cooling setpoint, enable supply fan. Operate cooling similar to Morning Cooldown Mode.

2. If occupancy sensor indicates space is occupied, operate unit in Occupied Mode.

D. Unoccupied Mode:





5. When the space temperature is above the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) the supply and return fan shall start, the outside air damper shall open if economizing is enabled and remain closed if economizing is disabled and the chilled water valve shall open or DX cooling shall be staged on.

6. When the space temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) minus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop, the chilled water valve shall close or DX cooling staged off and the outside air damper shall close.

E. Morning Warm-Up Mode: During optimal start, if the space temperature is below the occupied heating setpoint a morning warm-up mode shall be activated. When morning warm-up is initiated the unit shall enable the heating and supply fan. The outside air damper shall remain closed. When the space temperature reaches the occupied heating setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.

F. Pre-Cool Mode: During optimal start, if the space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint, pre-cool mode shall be activated. When pre-cool is initiated the unit shall enable the fan and cooling. The outside air damper shall remain closed. When the space temperature reaches occupied cooling setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.

G. Space Temperature Control: Cascade zone control shall be used in the occupied modes. It maintains zone temperature by controlling the discharge air temperature to control the zone temperature while minimizing the fan speed. The space temperature shall be maintained

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 74 OF 94


between the occupied cooling setpoint of 75°F (adj.) and the occupied heating setpoint of 70°F (adj.). The unit shall transition to the cooling mode when the space temperature rises one degree above the occupied cooling setpoint of 75°F (adj.). The unit shall transition to the heating mode when the space temperature drops one degree below the occupied heating setpoint of 70°F (adj.).

H. Supply Fan Operation: The supply fan shall be off in the unoccupied mode. When the controller is in the occupied mode, the supply fan shall operate continuously at the lowest minimum speed required to maintain space temperature. The supply fan status shall be monitored by the ECM motor controller. If the supply fan fails the fan shall be commanded off and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.

I. Condensate Overflow Monitoring: If the condensate level reaches the trip point, a condensate overflow diagnostic shall be annunciated at the BMS. To prevent the condensate drain pan from overflowing and causing water damage to the building the fan shall be disabled and the chilled water valve shall close.

J. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

K. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the unit shall operate in the Occupied Mode.







3.45 VARIABLE VOLUME VERTICAL UNIT VENTILATORS



2. Orion Oaks Elementary School (5-4811)



B. Occupied mode:

1. During occupied periods as indicated by time of day schedule, the supply fan and exhaust fan shall run continuously and the outside air damper shall open to maintain minimum ventilation requirements.

2. The hot water control valve and chilled water control valve (or self-contained cooling) shall be modulated to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint. The discharge air

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 75 OF 94


temperature setpoint shall be dynamically reset based on the deviation of actual space temperature from the active space temperature setpoint.


C. Standby Mode (New Early Childhood Center and Webber Elementary Addition only):

1. During scheduled occupied mode, if zone occupancy sensor indicates space is unoccupied set the unit to Standby Mode. Occupancy status to be obtained from auxiliary contacts on lighting control system occupancy sensor wired to BMS controller where indicated on plans.

a. Lower active heating setpoint 2°F and raise active cooling setpoint 2°F, disable supply and relief fans and close outside air damper.

b. If room temperature drops below active (standby) heating setpoint, enable supply fan. Operate heating similar to Morning Warmup Mode.

c. If room temperature rises above active (standby) cooling setpoint, enable supply fan. Operate cooling similar to Morning Cooldown Mode.

2. If occupancy sensor indicates space is occupied, operate unit in Occupied Mode.

D. Unoccupied mode:




4. When the space temperature rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60° F (adj.) plus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop and the hot water valve shall close.

5. When the space temperature is above the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85° F (adj.) the supply fan shall start, the outside air damper shall open if economizing is enabled and remain closed if economizing is disabled and the chilled water valve shall open or self-contained cooling stage on.

6. When the space temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85° F (adj.) minus the unoccupied differential of 4.0° F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop, the chilled water valve shall close or self-contained cooling stage off and the outside air damper shall close.

E. Morning Warm-Up Mode: During optimal start, if the space temperature is below the occupied heating setpoint a morning warm-up mode shall be activated. When morning warm-up is initiated the unit shall enable the heating and supply fan. The outside air damper shall remain closed. When the space temperature reaches the occupied heating setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.

F. Pre-Cool Mode: During optimal start, if the space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint, pre-cool mode shall be activated. When pre-cool is initiated the unit shall enable the supply fan and cooling or economizer. The outside air damper shall remain closed, unless economizing. When the space temperature reaches occupied cooling setpoint (adj.), the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 76 OF 94


G. Heat/Cool Mode: When the space temperature rises above the occupied cooling setpoint the mode shall transition to cooling. When the space temperature falls below the occupied heating setpoint the mode shall transition to heating. When the space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint or below the occupied heating setpoint the mode shall remain in its last state. If the space temperature sensor fails the mode shall remain in its last state and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

H. Economizer Cycle:


2. If economizer is available and there is a rise in supply air temperature above the supply air temperature setpoint, the outside air dampers and exhaust air dampers shall be modulated open from minimum position to 100% open as necessary to maintain discharge air temperature setpoint.

3. The return air dampers shall modulate closed proportionately as the outside air and exhaust air dampers modulate open.

4. If the outside air damper is 100% open and there is a further rise in temperature above supply air temperature setpoint, the outside air damper shall remain 100% open and the chilled water valve shall modulate open or DX cooling staged on as necessary to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint.

I. Supply and Exhaust Fan: If the supply or exhaust fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, all cooling and heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.






K. Relief Fan Control: Integral relief fan speed shall be modulated proportional to the outside air damper position.


SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 77 OF 94


M. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40 deg. F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

N. Freeze Protection: Where indicated in control diagrams, a hardwired, low limit temperature switch shall be electrically interlocked with the motor starter. If the low limit temperature switch is tripped at 38°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, all valves shall open to 100% and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset of the low limit temperature switch

O. Electronic Air Filtration: If status of the electronic air filtration equipment is not proven during unit operation an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

3.46 CONSTANT VOLUME VERTICAL UNIT VENTILATORS WITH INTEGRAL EXHAUST




B. Occupied mode

1. During occupied periods as indicated by time of day schedule as shown in drawings, the supply fan and exhaust fan shall run continuously and the outside air damper shall open to maintain minimum ventilation requirements.

2. The hot water control valves and chilled water control valve shall be modulated (or DX cooling staged) to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint. The discharge air temperature setpoint shall be dynamically reset based on the deviation of actual space temperature from the active space temperature setpoint.


C. Unoccupied mode:


2. When the space temperature is below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60° F (adj.) the supply fan shall start, the outside air damper shall remain closed and the hot water valve shall open.

3. When the space temperature rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60° F (adj.) plus the unoccupied differential of 4.0° F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop and the hot water valve shall close.

4. When the space temperature is above the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85° F (adj.) the supply fan shall start, the outside air damper shall open if economizing is enabled and remain closed if economizing is disabled and the chilled water valve shall open.

5. When the space temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85° F (adj.) minus the unoccupied differential of 4.0° F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop, the chilled water valve shall close and the outside air damper shall close.


SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 78 OF 94



F. Heat/Cool Mode: When the space temperature rises above the occupied cooling setpoint the mode shall transition to cooling. When the space temperature falls below the occupied heating setpoint the mode shall transition to heating. When the space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint or below the occupied heating setpoint the mode shall remain in its last state. If the space temperature sensor fails the mode shall remain in its last state and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

G. Economizer Cycle:



3. The return air dampers shall modulate closed proportionately as the outside air and exhaust air (where applicable) dampers modulate open.

4. If the outside air damper is 100% open and there is a further rise in temperature above supply air temperature setpoint, the outside air damper shall remain 100% open and the chilled water valve shall modulate open or DX cooling stage on as necessary to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint.

H. Supply and Exhaust Fan: If the supply or exhaust fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, all cooling and heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

I. Supply Air Temperature Reset

1. The system resets the discharge air temperature (normally 55°F adj.) to maintain space temperature. As the space temperature falls below the cooling setpoint by 1.0°F (adj.) and remains for a period of time (10 minutes adj.) the unit will enter into a discharge air reset mode.



J. Relief Fan Control: Integral relief fan airflow shall be set to minimum OA cfm, set zone minimum airflow setpoint to match existing.

K. Building Pressure Control: For units with associated motorized relief hoods/louvers, building static pressure shall be controlled by modulating the associated relief air hood/louver damper. As building pressure increases over the building pressure setpoint (adj.), the damper shall slowly open to maintain setpoint. If the building pressure falls below the setpoint, the damper shall slowly close.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 79 OF 94


L. Emergency Exhaust: For science labs or other spaces provided with an emergency exhaust fan, relief air hood motorized damper shall fully close when fan is activated.

M. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the Air Handling System Controller shall operate in the Occupied Mode.


O. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40° F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

3.47 CONSTANT VOLUME UNIT VENTILATORS

A. This sequence applies to vertical and horizontal unit ventilators at the following schools:






B. Occupied mode

1. During occupied periods as indicated by time of day schedules, the supply fan shall run continuously and the outside air damper shall open to maintain minimum ventilation requirements.

2. The hot water control valves and chilled water control valve shall be modulated or DX cooling staged on to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint. The discharge air temperature setpoint shall be dynamically reset based on the deviation of actual space temperature from the active space temperature setpoint.


C. Unoccupied mode:


2. When the space temperature is below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60° F (adj.) the supply fan shall start, the outside air damper shall remain closed and the hot water valve shall open.

3. When the space temperature rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60° F (adj.) plus the unoccupied differential of 4.0° F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop and the hot water valve shall close.

4. When the space temperature is above the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85° F (adj.) the supply fan shall start, the outside air damper shall open if economizing is enabled and remain closed if economizing is disabled and the chilled water valve shall open or DX cooling staged.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 80 OF 94


5. When the space temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85° F (adj.) minus the unoccupied differential of 4.0° F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop, the chilled water valve shall close or DX cooling staged off and the outside air damper shall close.



F. Heat/Cool Mode: When the space temperature rises above the occupied cooling setpoint the mode shall transition to cooling. When the space temperature falls below the occupied heating setpoint the mode shall transition to heating. When the space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint or below the occupied heating setpoint the mode shall remain in its last state. If the space temperature sensor fails the mode shall remain in its last state and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

G. Economizer Cycle:



3. The return air dampers shall modulate closed proportionately as the outside air and exhaust air dampers modulate open.

4. If the outside air damper is 100% open and there is a further rise in temperature above supply air temperature setpoint, the outside air damper shall remain 100% open and the chilled water valve shall modulate open or DX cooling staged on as necessary to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint.

H. Supply Fan: If the supply fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, all cooling and heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

I. Supply Air Temperature Reset

1. The system resets the discharge air temperature (normally 55° F adj.) to maintain space temperature. As the space temperature falls below the cooling setpoint by 1.0°F (adj.) and remains for a period of time (10 minutes adj.) the unit will enter into a discharge air reset mode.



SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 81 OF 94


J. Face and Bypass Damper:

1. This applies to unit ventilators at the following schools:

a. Stadium Drive Elementary (5-4813)

b. Pine Tree Center (5-4821)

2. Above 40°F (adj.) outside air temperature, modulate the heating coil control to maintain the calculated discharge air temperature.

3. Below 40°F (adj.) outside air temperature, the heating coil control valve shall be open 100% and the face and bypass dampers shall modulate to maintain the calculated discharge air temperature.


L. Building Pressure Control: For units with associated motorized relief hoods/louvers, building static pressure shall be controlled by modulating the associated relief air hood/louver damper. As building pressure increases over the building pressure setpoint (adj.), the damper shall slowly open to maintain setpoint. If the building pressure falls below the setpoint, the damper shall slowly close.

M. Freeze Protection: Where indicated in control diagrams, a hardwired, low limit temperature switch shall be electrically interlocked with the motor starter. If the low limit temperature switch is tripped at 38°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, all valves shall open to 100% and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset of the low limit temperature switch shall be required to restart the fan.

N. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40° F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

3.48 FORCED AIR FURNACE – HEATING AND COOLING


1. Transportation Building (5-4823)

B. Occupied Mode:

1. During occupied periods the supply fan shall run continuously and any associated outside air dampers shall open to maintain minimum ventilation requirements.

2. Heating and cooling shall be staged as required to maintain to maintain the space temperature setpoint.

C. Unoccupied Mode:

1. When the space temperature is below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) the supply fan shall start and the gas heat staged on.

2. When the space temperature rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) plus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop and the gas heat be staged off.

3. When the space temperature is above the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) the supply fan shall start and the cooling shall be staged on.

4. When the space temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85°F (adj.) minus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop and the cooling shall be staged off.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 82 OF 94


D. Space Temperature Control: The space temperature shall be maintained between the occupied cooling setpoint of 75°F (adj.) and the occupied heating setpoint of 70°F (adj.). The unit shall transition to the cooling mode when the space temperature rises one degree above the occupied cooling setpoint of 75°F (adj.). The unit shall transition to the heating mode when the space temperature drops one degree below the occupied heating setpoint of 70°F (adj.). Provide remote override capability of local setpoints along with capability to resume localized control.

E. Supply Fan Operation: The supply fan shall be off in the unoccupied mode and operate continuously during occupied mode. If the supply fan fails the fan shall be commanded off and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

F. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.) or rises above 150°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

G. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the unit shall operate in the Occupied Mode.

H. Space Sensor Failure: If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor or thermostat an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. Space sensor failure shall cause the unit to operate at minimum airflow in the occupied mode or shut down in the unoccupied mode.

3.49 FORCED AIR FURNACE – MONITOR ONLY


1. Moose Tree Nature Preserve (5-4820)

2. Administration Building (5-4822)

B. BMS/ATC system shall monitor furnace operation, refer to associated control diagram points.

C. Space Temperature: Provide remote override capability of local setpoints along with capability to resume localized control.

D. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Where indicated in control diagrams, monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.) or rises above 150°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

E. Space Sensor Failure: If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor or thermostat an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. Space sensor failure shall cause the unit to operate at minimum airflow in the occupied mode or shut down in the unoccupied mode.

3.50 CABINET AND UNIT HEATERS












SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 83 OF 94



B. Field-verify existing cabinet or unit heater control and replicate as follows:

1. If the current unit is controlled by a space temperature sensor:

a. If the space temperature is below the heating setpoint, the coil shutoff valve shall open and the unit fan shall operate to maintain space temperature. When the space is satisfied the fan shall shut off and the shutoff valve close. If space temperature falls below 40°F (adj.) an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

2. If the current unit is controlled by a local thermostat:

a. Local control only, BMS to monitor space temperature and alarm if room falls below 40°F (adj.).

3. If the current unit is controlled by a standalone RA sensor:

a. Local control only, BMS to monitor space temperature and alarm if room falls below 40°F (adj.).

C. Where cabinet unit heaters are being added as part of renovation or new construction projects:

1. Provide local thermostat control only, with BMS to monitor space temperature and alarm if room falls below 40°F (adj.).

D. Space Sensor Failure: If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. Room temperatures shall be monitored and alarmed if the room falls more than 5°F below setpoint for longer than 5 minutes.

3.51 ELECTRIC CABINET AND UNIT HEATERS


1. Moose Tree Nature Preserve (5-4820)


B. Local control by thermostat or RA sensor; BMS to monitor space temperature and alarm if room falls below 40°F (adj.).

C. Space Sensor Failure: If there is a fault with the operation of the space sensor an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

3.52 FINNED TUBE AND CONVECTOR RADIATION












B. Most finned tube and convectors are controlled by existing modulating thermostatic valves.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 84 OF 94


C. Where existing finned tube elements include control valves, the valve shall cycle open/close to maintain space temperature setpoint. Where spaces are served by finned tube and other heating equipment, finned tube shall be first stage of heating.

D. For all new finned tube installed as part of the renovation or new construction work, control valves shall be provided. The valve shall cycle open/close to maintain space temperature setpoint. Where spaces are served by finned tube and other heating equipment, finned tube shall be first stage of heating.

3.53 RADIANT CEILING OR WALL PANELS











B. Radiant panel control valve shall cycle open to maintain space temperature setpoint. Where spaces are served by radiant panels and other heating equipment, radiant panels shall be the first stage of heating unless the panels have an independent temperature sensor.

3.54 EXHAUST FANS

A. Maintain all existing exhaust fan interlocks and schedules; consult with engineer and owner for any exhaust fan control that is unclear.

B. In most cases, the operation of exhaust fans relative to BMS/ATC control should be clear. For example, toilet room fans, janitor room fans, storage room fans, locker room fans, and minimum exhaust fans run based on occupancy schedule input into the BMS/ATC System. Spaces with significant exhaust fans beyond those used for personal ventilation (e.g. fume hoods, auxiliary ventilation fans for heat or odor removal) shall be associated with their respective air handling unit and increase the unit fresh air to balance the exhausted air. Where motorized dampers are provided, the dampers shall prove open prior to fan operation.

C. Mechanical & Electrical Rooms: Exhaust fan shall operate only to maintain space temperature at 80°F (adj.). Where provided, associated motorized intake damper shall open whenever exhaust fan operates.

D. Art Room: Room exhaust fan shall operate according to the classroom occupancy schedule. Exhaust fan operation shall be interlocked with the room VAV box to maintain appropriate space pressurization at all times.

E. Science Room: Exhaust fan controlled by wall switch. Monitor exhaust operation and alarm if left on after normal operation period.

F. Kiln Room: Exhaust fan controlled by wall switch near kiln hood. Monitor exhaust operation and alarm if left on after normal operation period.

3.55 INTAKE & EXHAUST/RELIEF VENTILATORS AND LOUVERS

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 85 OF 94


A. Where intake/exhaust ventilators or intake/exhaust louvers are furnished with dampers, the dampers shall open as part of the operating sequence of the particular equipment served. Where their opening is critical to a space like a boiler room or room with fume removal or gas-fired equipment, such that the occupants of the room could be at risk due to failure to open a damper, the position of the damper shall be proven open.

3.56 SNOWMELT & RADIANT FLOOR BOILER SYSTEM

A. This sequence applies to the following school:


B. The snowmelt system, radiant floor system, and associated equipment shall be controlled by the BMS.

C. BMS Contractor shall install the new slab temperature and snow/ice detectors (or combination temperature and snow/ice detector) in the same location as the existing sensors.

D. The snowmelt circulating pump shall operate continuously whenever the slab surface temperature falls below 36°F (adj.), with proof of operation using a current sensor. The radiant floor circulating pump shall operate continuously whenever the slab surface temperature falls below 65°F (adj.), with proof of operation using a current sensor. If flow failure is detected at either pump the pump shall be commanded off and an alarm annunciated at the BMS.

E. The boiler, boiler circulation pump and primary loop pump shall be enabled as required to maintain a primary loop glycol temperature of approximately 120°F (adj.). The boiler shall only be enabled when flow is proven on the boiler circulation pump. The boiler internal control system shall modulate the boiler burner as needed to provide the glycol supply temperature necessary to maintain the slab surface setpoint temperatures. Boiler operating hours shall be logged. The BMS shall monitor the entering and leaving glycol temperatures from the boiler and shall monitor the boiler alarm contact.

F. When outdoor air temperatures are at or below 36°F (adj.) and the snow/ice detector does not detect the presence of snow or ice, the snowmelt circulation pump shall enable and operate as needed to maintain the slab surface at an idle setpoint temperature of 30°-32°F (adj.).

G. When the snow/ice detector indicates the presence of snow or ice, the slab surface temperature shall be raised to a snow-melt setpoint temperature. The snow-melt setpoint shall be determined based on outdoor air temperature and slab temperature, typically with a supply glycol temperature of approximately 120°F (adj.) and a slab surface temperature of 38°-40°F (adj.). The rate of temperature rise shall be controlled to prevent thermal shock to the concrete slab. The system shall return to the idle setpoint when the snow/ice detector indicates the lack of moisture.

H. The BMS/ATC shall monitor the loop supply and return temperatures. The supply temperature shall be prevented from rising above 140°F. The return glycol temperature shall be maintained above the boiler manufacturer’s recommended minimum. The difference between supply and return temperatures shall be limited to 25°F (adj.) to prevent excessive thermal stress in the slab; if the difference approaches 25°F, the supply temperature shall be decreased to control the differential.

3.57 POOL BOILER CONSTANT FLOW HEATING HOT WATER SYSTEM

A. This sequence applies to the follow school:


SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 86 OF 94


B. The hot water system consists of multiple boilers and pumps. The BMS controller shall provide stand-alone control of the supply heating water temperature setpoint (adj.) by controlling the boiler’s enable/disable boiler signal.

C. Heating System Operation: The BMS controller shall enable the hot water distribution pump enable the lead boiler when there is a call for pool water heating from either pool water system. The boiler factory control shall operate the boiler to maintain its local supply setpoint. Control of heat exchanger 3-way valve by standalone pool control system.

D. Boiler Control: The pool boilers shall work in tandem to maintain supply temperature setpoint. EX. B-1 shall serve as the lead boiler and EX. B-3 as the lag boiler.

1. If the hot water distribution system supply temperature falls more than 10°F (adj.) below setpoint for a period longer than 15 minutes (adj.), or if the lead boiler signals a failure alarm, the BMS shall enable the lag boiler and associated pump and alarm. When a boiler failure exists, lead/lag automation shall be disabled and the currently running boiler shall become the lead boiler. Once the problem is corrected, the operator shall be able to clear the alarm failure from the BMS. This shall re-enable the lead/lag sequence.

2. Additional boiler EX. B-3 is added if the hot water distribution system supply temperature falls 5.0°F (adj.) below the hot water setpoint for a period of 10 minutes (adj.) or more. Enable associated boiler circulation pump when EX. B-3 is energized.

3. The lag boiler shall be disabled when the hot water temperature rises 5.0°F (adj.) above the hot water setpoint for a period of 10 minutes (adj.) or more.

E. Makeup water to the heating hot water system shall be totalized and alarmed by the BMS/ATC System using boiler makeup water meter.

F. Where indicated on control diagrams, combustion air damper must prove open before and while either boiler is enabled. If damper is not proven open, an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS and the boilers disabled.

G. Heating Hot Water Distribution Pump (EX. P-3):

1. Start/Stop: The BMS controller shall start the primary hot water pump through a contact closure of the pump’s run-enable contacts.

2. Pump Status: The BMS controller shall detect hot water pump run status by a current switch.

3. Pump Operation: The distribution pump shall operate continuously whenever the heating system is enabled.

4. Pump Failure: If the start/stop relay is enabled and the current switch status is off for more than 30 seconds (adj.), the BMS shall annunciate a hot water pump failure alarm.

H. System alarms include, but are not limited to the following:


2. Pump failure




3.58 RADIANT FLOOR HEATING



SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 87 OF 94



B. To clarify the coordination of work between the radiant floor equipment vendor, Mechanical Contractor, and the BMS/ATC Contractor, figure as follows:

1. Radiant floor supplier provides tubing, manifolds, manifold shutoff valves, and other system accessories.

2. Mechanical contractor shall install tubing, manifolds, and manifold shutoff valves, control valves, and other system accessories.

3. BMS/ATC contractor shall furnish control valves and furnish and install the room temperature sensors, slab temperature sensors (one per room), transformers, and any required zone control modules. Room sensors must be installed inside an electrical box.

C. Radiant Control:

1. Occupied mode:

a. If the outside air temperature is below 70°F (adj.) and there is a call for heating the radiant floor heating shall be enabled. If the outside air temperature is above 70°F (adj.), the radiant floor heating shall be disabled and the radiant floor heating control valve shall slowly close.

b. Upon a call for heating, the temperature control valve shall be opened at 10% increments (adj.) at 10 minute (adj.) intervals (adj.) per step. The hot water valve will continue to open until the space temperature setpoint is achieved or a maximum slab temperature of 85°F (adj.) is achieved. At that point, the hot water control valve will be maintained in the last position.

c. If the space temperature continues to rise, the hot water valve shall be closed in 5% increments (adj.) at 10 minute (adj.) intervals per step. The control system shall reduce the hot water valve increment adjustment in order to reach a steady-state valve position.

d. Once steady-state is achieved any valve adjustments shall occur in 1% increments (adj.) each over 10 minute (adj.) intervals. This shall continue until the call for heating has ended.

2. Unoccupied Mode: During unoccupied hours the radiant floor shall control to the unoccupied space temperature setpoint or a slab temperature of 65°F (adj.).

3. In areas served by both heating coils and radiant floor heating, the radiant floor heating shall be staged on first, and the reheat second.

4. On loss of power the temperature control valve shall fail closed to allow water to recirculate.

5. The BMS/ATC Contractor is responsible for tuning of the PID constants to minimize over and undershoot of setpoints.

3.59 DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEMS

A. For buildings with recirculation pumps, the BMS shall schedule the recirculation pump(s) on during occupied periods. The recirculation pump(s) shall operate to maintain the return water temperature above 115°F (adj.). The pump(s) shall be disabled during unoccupied periods and shall be enabled one hour prior to a scheduled occupancy.

B. For buildings with recirculation pumps and storage tanks, the BMS shall schedule the recirculation pump(s) on during occupied periods and monitor heater circulation pump status and storage tank temperature (minimum storage tank temperature of 140°F). If the water

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 88 OF 94


heater(s) or heat exchanger(s), heater circulation pump or recirculation pump(s) fail an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. The recirculation pump(s) shall operate to maintain the return water temperature above 115°F (adj.). The pump(s) shall be disabled during unoccupied periods and shall be enabled one hour prior to a scheduled occupancy.

C. For systems with electric water heater systems, the BMS shall monitor water heater status; if the water heater fails an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

D. Control system shall monitor hot water supply temperature and alarm if temperature drops below 120°F (adj.).

E. Combustion Air: For schools with a combustion air damper, the combustion air damper shall be interlocked with water heater control and must be proven open before the water heater is enabled. This applies to the following schools:


2. Lake Orion High School (5-4818) – Pool Addition DWH

3.60 DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEM

A. This sequence applies to the following school:


B. The BMS shall schedule the domestic hot water heating system and related pump(s) on during occupied periods as defined by occupancy schedule, disable the system/pumps during unoccupied periods, and enable the system one hour prior to a scheduled occupancy.

C. Heating Operation: The heat exchanger shall be the primary means of heating for the domestic hot water system. When hot water supply temperature in the tank/heat exchanger drops below 140°F, the heating hot water circulation pump shall be enabled. If the heat exchanger is unable to handle the building hot water demand or when the boiler system is turned off, the supplementary domestic water heater and associated circulation pump shall be enabled to maintain hot water supply temperature.

D. The BMS shall monitor status of all equipment. If the heat exchanger, water heater, or any associated pump(s) fail an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

E. The recirculation pump(s) shall operate to maintain the return water temperature above 115°F (adj.).

F. Control system shall monitor hot water supply temperature and alarm if temperature drops below 120°F (adj.).

3.61 CONTROL OF DUCT CONDENSATION

A. For cooling air handling systems, BMS/ATC system shall be programmed to gradually pull system temperature down on startup to avoid duct condensation and potential water damage. Drawdown shall be achieved using outside air and return/space temperature information and maintaining the duct supply air temperature above the dewpoint in the space and gradually resetting the supply temperature down as the space temperature decreases.

3.62 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

A. Standalone hard-wired thermostats shall control and modulate split system cooling units to maintain space temperature setpoint (adj.).

3.63 LIGHTING CONTROL

A. The BMS shall directly control various exterior lighting circuits and contactors at the following schools. The BMS shall integrate with existing lighting circuits and contactors. Field-verify quantity of existing lighting relays. Field-verify existing photocells and provide new as required.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 89 OF 94


1. Carpenter Elementary School (5-4810) – 5 lighting relays/zones, 1 photocell

2. Orion Oaks Elementary School (5-4811) – 4 lighting relays/zones, 1 photocell

3. Paint Creek Elementary School (5-4812) – 3 lighting relays/zones, 1 photocell

4. Stadium Drive Elementary School (5-4813) – 3 lighting relays/zones, 1 photocell

5. Webber Elementary School (5-4814) – 4 lighting relays/zones, 1 photocell

6. Oakview Middle School (5-4815) – 4 lighting relays/zones, 1 photocell

7. Scripps Middle School (5-4816) – 4 lighting relays/zones, 1 photocell

8. Waldon Middle School (5-4817) – 4 lighting relays/zones, 1 photocell

9. Lake Orion High School (5-4818) – 5 lighting relays/zones, 2 photocells

10. Moose Tree Nature Preserve (5-4820) – 1 lighting relay/zone, 1 photocell

11. Pine Tree Center (5-4821) – 3 lighting relays/zones, 1 photocell

12. Administration Building (5-4822) – 1 lighting relay/zone, 1 photocell

13. Transportation Facility (5-4823) – 1 lighting relay/zone, 1 photocell

14. New Early Childhood Center (5-4745) – 2 lighting relays/zones

B. Parking lot / site lighting - Exterior lighting shall be enabled and disabled based on an astronomical clock in conjunction with a photocell. Mount photocell with sensor facing west when possible.

C. Interior lobby / corridor lighting (Lake Orion High School only)

1. For areas utilizing a photocell for daylight harvesting:

a. Locate sensor in an area to properly sense outside ambient light levels.

b. When any time schedule affecting this area of the building indicates occupied mode and light level is low, enable lighting circuit. Disable lighting circuit if time schedule indicates off or photocell indicates light.

2. For areas with an occupancy sensor:

a. When any time schedule affecting this area of the building indicates occupied mode enable lighting circuit. Disable lighting circuit if all time schedules indicate unoccupied.

b. If occupancy sensor indicates area is occupied, enable lighting circuit.

3. For areas controlled by time schedule only, enable lighting circuit when any time schedule affecting this area is on occupied mode.

3.64 HEAD END TECHNOLOGY ROOMS

A. BMS shall monitor space temperature at the primary Community Education Resource Center (CERC) MDF room and generate alarm if space temperature rises above 85° F (adj.).

3.65 MISC BUILDING MONITORING POINTS

A. BMS shall monitor the freezer and walk-in cooler/refrigerator temperatures at Lake Orion High School (5-4818), Waldon Middle School (5-4817), Scripps Middle School (5-4816) and Oakview Middle School (5-4815) and alarm on high temperature.

B. BMS shall monitor the pool pump status at the High School (5-4818) and alarm on pump failure.

C. BMS shall monitor the sewage ejector status at the High School (5-4818) and alarm on failure.

D. BMS shall monitor greenhouse temperature at the High School (5-4818) and alarm on high or low temperature.

SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 90 OF 94


E. BMS shall monitor the well pump status at Oakview Middle School (5-4815) and alarm on pump failure.

3.66 CONSTANT VOLUME HEAT WHEEL ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT (ERU-21.1B)

A. Occupied mode



B. Unoccupied mode:

1. The unit is not intended to be operated during unoccupied mode and should only be enabled for emergency heating as follows:

a. During unoccupied hours as indicated by the time of day schedule, the supply and exhaust fans shall be disabled and the outside air and exhaust dampers fully closed.

b. When any representative space temperature drops below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.), the supply fan shall be enabled and the outside and exhaust air dampers shall open. The heating valve shall modulate to maintain a constant discharge temperature setpoint of 55°F and work in tandem with the associated booster coils to heat the space.

c. When the space temperature rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) plus the unoccupied differential of 4.0°F (adj.) the supply fan shall stop and the heating valve modulate closed.

C. Morning Warm-Up Mode: During optimal start, if the space temperature is below the occupied heating setpoint a morning warm-up mode shall be activated. When morning warm-up is initiated the unit shall enable the heating and supply fan. The outside and exhaust air dampers shall remain closed and recirculation bypass damper opened. Modulate heating valve to maintain a constant discharge temperature setpoint of 55°F. When the space temperature reaches the occupied heating setpoint, the unit shall transition to the occupied mode.

D. Heating Operation: When the unit heating mode is enabled, the hot water control valve shall open and modulate to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint of 55°F (adj.). The associated hot water coil pump shall also be enabled and continue to operate whenever there is a call for heat.

E. Supply and Exhaust Fan: If the supply or exhaust fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, all cooling and heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BAS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.

F. Energy Recovery Wheel Operation:


2. If the OA temperature drops below the frost threshold set point (adj.), the energy recovery wheel shall modulate down to maintain the exhaust-side leaving temperature at set point. If modulating capability is not available, wheel shall be started/stopped at regular intervals until temperature rises above the frost threshold set point. If the exhaust air temperature stays below setpoint for more than 5 minutes (adj.), the wheel shall be turned off to prevent frosting and alarm.


SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 91 OF 94


G. Freeze Protection: Where indicated in control diagrams, a hardwired, low limit temperature switch shall be electrically interlocked with the motor starter. If the low limit temperature switch is tripped at 38.0°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BAS. A manual reset of the low limit temperature switch shall be required to restart the fan.

H. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Monitor supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40.0°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, the supply and exhaust fans shall be disabled, the heating valve shall open to 100%, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BAS.


J. Control Valve Fail Position: Hot water control valve shall fail to 100% open.


L. Filter Status: A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across each filter when the fan is running. If the switch closes during normal operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BAS.

3.67 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME AIR HANDLING UNIT WITH EXHAUST FAN


1. Webber Elementary (5-4814) (RTU-20.1)

B. Occupied mode:





C. Unoccupied mode:

1. If any of the designated zone temperatures drops below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60°F (adj.) the supply fan shall start, fan speed shall modulate to maintain duct pressure setpoint, the outside air damper shall remain closed, and the heating shall be enabled.




SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 92 OF 94




F. Supply and Exhaust Fan: If the supply or exhaust fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be commanded off, the outside air damper shall close, all cooling and heating shall be disabled and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan.

G. Heating Operation: When the unit heating mode is enabled, the packaged unit controls will operate to maintain heating discharge air temperature setpoint. Monitor heating status and alarm if an alarm is received from the packaged unit controls.

H. Cooling Operation: When the unit cooling mode is enabled, the packaged unit controls will operate to maintain cooling discharge air temperature setpoint. Monitor cooling status and alarm if an alarm is received from the packaged unit controls.



2. The discharge air temperature setpoint will be reset between 55° and 60° F (adj.).







SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 93 OF 94



2. If economizer mode is available, enable economizer and the packaged unit controls will modulate outside air damper to maintain mixed air temperature to calculated discharge air setpoint and modulate / stage cooling to maintain discharge air temperature as required.

3. If economizer is disabled, packaged unit controls will modulate outside air damper to maintain minimum outside airflow (as outlined above) and modulate / stage cooling to maintain calculated discharge air setpoint.

K. Outside Air Control: The outside air quantities shall be tracked by air flow measuring stations and the outside air damper modulated to maintain the outdoor air flow rate setpoint. The outside airflow rate setpoint shall be dynamically reset according to ASHRAE 62.1-2013 calculations by reviewing which zones are scheduled occupied and tabulating the respective outside air required for those zones. The control logic shall calculate real time system ventilation efficiency. The BMS/ATC system will then use the ASHRAE 62.1-2013 method for determination of required outside air percentage.

L. Building Pressure Control: After the fan startup delay expires, building static pressure shall be controlled by staging and modulating the exhaust fan. A differential pressure transducer shall actively monitor the difference in pressure between the building (indoor) and outdoor. As the building pressure increases over the building pressure setpoint (adj.), the fan speed shall increase to maintain setpoint. If the building pressure falls below setpoint, the fan speed shall decrease. Note that the exhaust fan discharge damper shall be open whenever the exhaust fan is operating.

M. Supply Duct High Pressure Safety: Packaged unit controls shall monitor the differential pressure between the unit discharge air duct and outside of the unit. If the duct DP rises above setpoint (+4”wc-adj.), disable unit and send alarm.

N. Discharge Air Temperature Alarm: Packaged unit controls shall monitor the supply air temperature and if the temperature falls below 40°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close, and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

O. Electronic Air Filtration: BMS shall monitor status of the electronic air filtration equipment and alarm upon system failure or low ion count as measured by the associated ion sensor.


Q. Control Valve Fail Position: Chilled water and heating hot water control valves shall fail last position.

R. Upon loss of communication with the BMS/ATC, the Air Handling System Controller shall operate in the Occupied Mode.

S. Filter Status: A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the filter(s) when the fan is running. If the switch closes during normal operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BMS.

T. System alarms include, but are not limited to the following:


2. Fan failure



SECTION 23 09 93


PAGE 94 OF 94






END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 21 13

HYDRONIC PIPING, VALVES, AND ACCESSORIES

PAGE 1 OF 17


SECTION 23 21 13 - HYDRONIC PIPING, VALVES, AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Pipe and pipe fittings for:

a. Heating water piping

b. Chilled water piping

c. Condenser water piping

d. Radiant heating system.

e. Equipment drains and overflows

2. Accessories

a. Pipe hangers and supports

b. Hangers, anchors, and supports for pools and corrosive areas

c. Unions, flanges, couplings, and dielectric connections

d. Strainers

e. High Efficiency Strainers

3. Valves:

a. Ball valves.

b. Butterfly valves.

c. Gate valves.

d. Globe valves.

e. Check valves.

f. Balancing Valves

g. Flow Controls (Automatic Flow Limiters)

4. Coil Connection Kits

B. Related Sections

1. Section 07 84 13 - Firestopping

2. Section 23 05 29 – Roof-Mounted Piping, Ductwork and Equipment Supports

3. Section 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.

4. Section 23 07 19 – Hydronic Piping Insulation.

5. Section 23 25 00 - Hydronic Water Treatment: Pipe cleaning.

C. System Description

1. Where more than one piping system material is specified, ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.

2. If grooved pipe is used, only one manufacturer shall be used per Bid Division. The manufacturer's representative shall conduct on-site training of field personnel and shall visit the project during construction and review for proper installation of their product. In addition, contractor shall inspect the project with the owner to establish the system is leak

SECTION 23 21 13


PAGE 2 OF 17


tight prior to expiration of the one year guarantee following substantial completion, and repair any leaks.

3. Use unions, flanges, and couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment, or other apparatus.

4. Where required for pump or other equipment vibration attenuation and stress relief, grooved flexible couplings may be used near the equipment with engineer's approval for the specific application.

5. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals.

6. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.9 unless indicated otherwise.

7. Use ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

8. Use globe or characterized ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

9. Use spring loaded check valves on discharge of all pumps which don't have triple duty valves.

10. Use butterfly valves in heating water systems or chilled and condenser water systems interchangeably with gate and globe valves.

11. Use lug or grooved end butterfly valves to isolate equipment.

12. Use 3/4 inch gate valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. Pipe to nearest floor drain.


A. ASME (BPV IX) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and Brazing Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007.

B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2006.

C. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005) (ANSI B16.18).

D. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005).

E. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2008 (ANSI/ASME B31.9).

F. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2007.

G. ASTM A 234/A 234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2007.

H. ASTM B 32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008.

I. ASTM B 88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009.

J. ASTM B 88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2005.

K. ASTM D 1785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120; 2006.

L. ASTM D 2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series); 2009.

M. ASTM D 2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40; 2006.

SECTION 23 21 13


PAGE 3 OF 17


N. ASTM D 2467 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80; 2006.

O. ASTM D 2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2002).

P. ASTM F 876 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing; 2009.

Q. ASTM F 877 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems; 2007.

R. ASTM F1476 - Standard for Performance of Gasketed Mechanical Couplings in Piping Applications; 2007.

S. AWS A5.8/A5.8M - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; American Welding Society; 2004 and errata.

T. AWWA C606 - Standard Specification for Grooved and Shouldered Joints; American Water Works Association; 2006.

U. Conform to ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping system.

V. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME (BPV IX) and applicable state labor regulations.

1.4 COORDINATION


1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HYDRONIC SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with ASME B31.9 and applicable federal, state, and local regulations.

B. Piping: Provide piping, fittings, hangers and supports as required, as indicated, and as follows:

1. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide joining fittings that are compatible with piping materials and ensure that the integrity of the system is not jeopardized.

2. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals.

3. Grooved mechanical joints may be used in accessible locations and risers.

a. Accessible locations include those exposed on interior of building, in pipe chases, and in mechanical rooms, aboveground outdoors, and as approved by Architect/Engineer.

b. Use rigid joints unless otherwise indicated.

4. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.9 unless indicated otherwise.

C. Pipe-to-Valve and Pipe-to-Equipment Connections: Use flanges, unions, or grooved couplings to allow disconnection of components for servicing; do not use direct welded, soldered, or threaded connections.

D. Valves: Provide valves where indicated and as follows:

2.2 HEATING WATER PIPING

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black, using one of the following joint types:

1. Welded Joints: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wrought steel welding type fittings; ASME B31.1 welded.

2. Threaded Joints: ASTM B 16.3, malleable iron fittings.

SECTION 23 21 13


PAGE 4 OF 17


3. Grooved Joints: AWWA C606 grooved pipe, fittings of same material, and mechanical couplings.

4. Sizes: Through 10".

5. Fittings: ASTM B 16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A 234/A 234M, wrought steel welding type fittings.

6. Joints: Threaded through 2.1/2", or ASME B31.1 welded 3" and larger.

7. Alternate fittings and joints for piping 2" and larger: Roll grooved Victaulic Style 107 rigid couplings and Style 741 flange adapters; or equivalent by Grinnel Gruvlok, or Shurjoint. Gaskets shall be EPDM, NSF 61 rated for hot water to 250°F.

B. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type L (B), drawn, using one of the following joint types:

1. Sizes: Through 1.1/2" minimum, or through 2.1/2" at Contractors option.

2. Solder Joints: ASME B16.18 cast brass/bronze or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper fittings.

a. Solder: ASTM B 32 lead-free solder, HB alloy (95-5 tin-antimony) or tin and silver.

b. Braze: AWS A5.8/A5.8M BCuP copper/silver alloy.

3. Grooved Joints: AWWA C606 grooved tube, fittings of same material, and copper-tube-dimension mechanical couplings.

4. Alternate for fittings and joints for piping 2" and larger: Roll grooved Victaulic Style 607 Installation-Ready rigid coupling with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads and Style 641 flange adapters with Grade EHP EPDM gaskets, rated for hot water to 250°F; or equivalent by Grinnell, Anvil Gruvlok, or Shurjoint.

5. In lieu of all soldered copper system, Contractor may use the following: Copper piping (Type L ASTM B-88) sizes 1/2" through 2.1/2" shall be assembled using the Pro-Press system by VIEGA/RIDGID or NIBCO Press System using copper press fittings and EPDM gaskets rated to 250°F. Install per manufacturer's recommendations.

2.3 CHILLED WATER PIPING

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black; using one of the following joint types:

1. Welded Joints: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wrought steel welding type fittings; ASME B31.1 welded.

2. Threaded Joints: ASTM B 16.3, malleable iron fittings.


4. Sizes: Through 10".

5. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A 234/A 234M, wrought steel welding type.

6. Joints: Threaded through 2.1/2", or ASME B31.1 welded 3" and larger.

7. Alternate fittings and joints for piping 2" and larger: Roll grooved Victaulic Installation-Ready Style 107N rigid joints and Style 741 flange adapters; or equivalent by Grinnell, Anvil Gruvlok, or Shurjoint. Gaskets shall be EPDM-HP.

B. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type L (B), hard drawn; using one of the following joint types:

1. Sizes: Through 1.1/2" minimum, or through 2.1/2" at Contractors option.

2. Solder Joints: ASME B16.18 cast brass/bronze or ASME B16.22, solder wrought copper fittings.

a. Solder: ASTM B 32 lead-free solder, HB alloy (95-5 tin-antimony) or tin and silver.

b. Braze: AWS A5.8/A5.8M BCuP copper/silver alloy.

SECTION 23 21 13


PAGE 5 OF 17


3. Grooved Joints: AWWA C606 grooved tube, fittings of same material, and copper-tube-dimension mechanical couplings.

4. Tee Connections: Mechanically extracted collars with notched and dimpled branch tube.

5. Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B 32, HB alloy (95-5 tin-antimony), or tin and silver.

6. Alternate for fittings and joints for piping 2" and larger: Roll grooved Victaulic Style 607 Installation-Ready rigid coupling with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads and Style 641 flange adapters with Grade EHP EPDM gaskets, rated for hot water to 250°F; or equivalent by Grinnell, Anvil Gruvlok, or Shurjoint.

7. In lieu of all soldered copper system, Contractor may use the following: Type L ASTM B-88 hard drawn copper sizes 1/2" through 2.1/2" shall be assembled using the Pro-Press system by VIEGA/RIDGID or NIBCO Press System using copper press fittings and EPDM gaskets rated to 250°F. Install per manufacturer's recommendations.

2.4 CONDENSER WATER PIPING

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black.

1. Welded Joints: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wrought steel welding type fittings with finish matching piping; ASME B31.1 welded.

2. Threaded Joints: ASTM B 16.3, malleable iron fittings with finish matching piping.


4. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A 234/A 234M, wrought steel welding type.

5. Joints: Threaded, or ASME B31.1 welded.

6. Alternate fittings and joints for piping 2" and larger: Roll grooved Victaulic Installation-Ready Style 107N rigid joints and Style 741 flange adapters; or equivalent by Grinnell, Anvil Gruvlok, or Shurjoint. Gaskets shall be EPDM-HP, rated for hot water to 250°F.

2.5 RADIANT HEATING PIPING

A. Approved manufacturers:

1. Uponor Wirsbo hePex.

2. Heatlink PEX-a.

3. Zurn PEX White or Red.

4. Watts Radiant PEX+.

5. Mr. PEX Systems.

B. Polyethylene Tubing: SDR 9, ASTM F 876 or ASTM F 877, Type A or Type B cross-linked polyethylene, 100 psig operating pressure at 180 degrees F, with oxygen diffusion barrier.

1. Fittings: Brass and polyethylene.

2. Joints: Insertion tubing fittings. If brass fittings are buried, use stainless steel crimp bands, and/or cover fitting with shrink wrap plastic or PVC tape.

C. Manifolds: 1.1/2" Brass manifold with mounting brackets, vent/drain valves, tubing balancing & isolation valves.

1. Uponor TruFlow Classic brass manifold assembly with balancing and isolation valves.

2. Heatlink 76100 Series stainless steel manifold with balancing and isolation valves, flow meters, and hose bib/ air vent.

3. Zurn Accuflow preassembled brass manifold with balancing valves, flow meters, header isolation valves, and vent kit.

4. Mr. PEX preassembled stainless steel manifold with balancing valves, flow meters, header isolation valves, and vent/drain valves.

SECTION 23 21 13


PAGE 6 OF 17


5. Watts Radiant stainless steel manifold with balancing valves, flow meters and vent/purge assembly.

D. Insulation:

1. Slab-on-grade systems must be installed on minimum 3 inch thick extruded polystyrene insulation (minimum R-15) within 2 feet of exterior walls and minimum of 1 inch (minimum R-5) for the rest of the radiant floor area. Extend the insulation at least 12 inches beyond the hydronic line limits. See Section 07 21 00 for insulation specifications.

2. Creatherm radiant floor panels by BASF shall also be permitted for this application, if used in conjunction with the under slab insulation at radiant areas as required to achieve a composite minimum R-level at in floor heat areas as stated above.

3. Physical Characteristics shall meet or exceed the following:

a. Temperature range (per ASTM C411): -50F to 180F.

b. Compression strength: 40 psi minimum.

c. Flexural Strength (ASTM C203): 60 psi minimum.

d. Thermal resistance (per ASTM C518, C177): R-5 @ 75°F mean temperature.

e. Water vapor transmission (per ASTM E96): Less than 1.0 perms.

f. Resistance to fungi and bacteria (per ASTM C1338): Does not promote growth.

2.6 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type L (B), drawn; using one of the following joint types:

1. Solder Joints: ASME B16.18 cast brass/bronze or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper fittings; ASTM B 32 lead-free solder, HB alloy (95-5 tin-antimony) or tin and silver.


a. Alternate for fittings and joints for piping 3" and larger: Roll grooved Victaulic Style 607 Installation-Ready rigid coupling with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads and Style 641 flange adapters with Grade EHP EPDM gaskets, rated for hot water to 250°F.

3. Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B 32, HB alloy (95-5 tin-antimony), or tin and silver.

B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40, or ASTM D 2241, SDR 21 or 26.

1. Locations: PVC allowed underground, inside walls, floors, and fire rated chases only.

2. Fittings: ASTM D 2466 or D2467, PVC.

3. Joints: Solvent welded.

2.7 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Conform to ASME B31.9.

B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.

C. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

D. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

E. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger.

F. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

G. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.

H. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.

I. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.

SECTION 23 21 13


PAGE 7 OF 17


J. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll.

K. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

L. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

M. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

N. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.

O. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

P. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.

Q. Exterior pipe hangers shall be galvanized.

R. Piping routed over roofs shall be supported as shown on the plans or if not shown, supported in a manner that protects the roofing system, using prefab roller or strut pipe supports equal to Erico Pipe Pier or similar by Miro Industries.

2.8 UNIONS, FLANGES, COUPLINGS AND DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONS

A. Unions for Pipe 2 Inches and Under:

1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig malleable iron, threaded.

2. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints.

B. Flanges for Pipe Over 2 Inches:

1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig forged steel, slip-on.

2. Copper Piping: Bronze.

3. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene.

C. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved and Shouldered Joints: Two curved housing segments with continuous key to engage pipe groove, circular C-profile gasket, and bolts to secure and compress gasket.

1. Dimensions and Testing: In accordance with AWWA C606.

2. Housing Material: ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12, ductile iron, galvanized.

3. Gasket Material: EPDM suitable for operating temperature range from -30 degrees F to 230 degrees F or Installation-Ready EPDM-HP suitable for operating temperature range from -30 degrees F to 250 degrees F.

4. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A449 zinc-electroplated steel.

5. When pipe is field grooved, provide coupling manufacturer's grooving tools.

a. Victaulic grooved pipe shall be produced using a Victaulic fully automated (RG5200i) grooving tool with touch screen controls and integral laser sensors. Tools provide traceable measurements that can be recorded locally or exported as required. Measurements include groove traceability documents, corresponding identification marks on the pipe, and confirm all critical dimensions fall into the required tolerance range as listed by the tool manufacturer for each groove. Validation records provided for the gasket sealing surface, groove width, groove diameter, pipe flare, and pipe OD.

D. Merchant couplings or pipe protectors are not allowed to be used as a coupling.

E. Dielectric Connections:

1. Isolate all dissimilar piping materials with insulating nipples or couplings that prevent joint corrosion by electrically isolating the dissimilar materials.

a. Mifab Series MI-DE dielectric nipples.

SECTION 23 21 13


PAGE 8 OF 17


b. ClearFlow nipples made by Precision Plumbing Products.

c. Legend Model T-578.

d. Gruvlok Figure 7088, 7089, or 7090 dielectric pipe connections or equivalent by Victaulic.

2.9 STRAINERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Hammond Valve.

2. Yarway/Tyco.

3. Keckley

4. Spirax/Sarco.

5. Victaulic Company.

B. Size 2 inch and Under: Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psi working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen.

C. Size 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: Grooved or flanged ductile iron body for 300 psi working pressure, Y pattern with 3/64, 1/16, or 1/8 inch stainless steel perforated screen.

D. Size 5 inch and Larger: Grooved or flanged ductile iron body for 300 psi working pressure, basket, or T-pattern pattern with 1/8 inch stainless steel perforated screen.

2.10 STRAINERS – HIGH EFFICIENCY

A. Manufacturer and model:

1. Metraflex LPD.

B. Size 1.1/2 inch and Under:

1. Threaded brass body for 175 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen.

2. Class 150 threaded bronze body 300 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen.

C. Size 2 inch to 12 inch: Class 125, flanged iron body, Y pattern, low pressure drop type, with 304 stainless steel screen. Strainer shall have a screen pitch of 22.5 degrees. Screen shall be removable via an access cover sealed with O-ring. Strainer shall have differential pressure ports on each side of the screen.

1. Screen perforations shall be 0.045” for 2” to 3”; and screen perforations shall be 0.125” for 4” to 12”

2.11 BALL VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Conbraco Industries; Apollo Model 77C-A.

2. Nibco, Inc; Model T-585-70 threaded, S-585-70 sweat.

3. Milwaukee Valve Company; Model BA-400, BA-450 sweat.

4. Watts LFB6080G2 threaded, LFB6081G2 sweat.

5. Bonomi 161N threaded, 171N sweat.

B. Up To and Including 4 inches: Bronze two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, 600 psig CWP, 125 psig SWP, PTFE seats and stuffing box ring, full port, lever handle, solder, or threaded ends.

2.12 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Keystone Model 222-784.

SECTION 23 21 13


PAGE 9 OF 17


2. Apollo Model 143.

3. Nibco LD Series.

4. Victaulic Vic-300 MasterSeal and AGS Vic300, Grinnel B302, or Anvil Gruvlok 7700 for grooved butterfly valve.

5. Milwaukee Valve Company; Model ML Series.

B. Construction 1-1/2 Inches and Larger: 200 psi CWP, ductile iron body, aluminum bronze disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, lug ends, extended neck, 10 position lever handle.

C. Grooved Valve Construction 2 Inches and Larger: 300 psi CWP, ductile iron body, EPDM pressure responsive seat or disc mounted seal, coated ductile iron disc, stainless steel stem (offset from the disc centerline to provide complete 360-degree circumferential seating), grooved ends, extended neck, 10 position lever handle. Gear operator for 8" and larger.

2.13 GATE VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Nibco, Inc; Model T134 threaded, S134 sweat, F617-O flanged.

2. Milwaukee Valve Company; Model 1151 threaded, 1169 sweat, F-2885A flanged.

3. Stockham B120 threaded, B124 sweat, G623 flanged.

4. Watts B3100 threaded, B3111 sweat, F503 flanged.

B. Up To and Including 2.1/2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, union bonnet, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge disc, solder, or threaded ends.

C. Over 2.1/2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, rising stem, handwheel, outside screw and yoke, solid wedge disc with bronze seat rings, flanged ends.

2.14 GLOBE VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Nibco, Inc; Model T234-Y threaded, S235-Y sweat, F-718-B: www.nibco.com.

2. Milwaukee Valve Company; Model 590T threaded, 1590T sweat, F-2981 flanged: www.milwaukeevalve.com.

3. Stockham B-22T threaded, B-24T sweat.

4. Hammond IB413T threaded, IB 423 sweat.

5. Watts B4010-T threaded, B4011-T sweat.

B. Up To and Including 2.1/2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, union bonnet, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc and bronze seat, solder, or threaded ends.

C. Over 2.1/2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, rising stem, handwheel, outside screw and yoke, rotating plug-type disc with renewable seat ring and disc, flanged ends.

2.15 CHECK VALVES, SWING

A. Manufacturers:

1. Nibco, Inc; Model T433 threaded, F918-B flanged.

2. Milwaukee Valve Company; Model 510T threaded, F-2974 flanged.

3. Stockham Model B-322T threaded, G-931 flanged.

B. Up To and Including 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, bronze rotating swing disc, with composition disc, solder, or threaded ends.

C. Over 2 Inches:

1. Iron body, bronze trim, bronze, or bronze faced rotating swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends.

SECTION 23 21 13


PAGE 10 OF 17


2. Grooved:

a. 2"-4" horizontal swing check valves shall be Victaulic Series 712,

b. 4 -12" spring-assisted for vertical or horizontal installation, Victaulic series 716 or venturi check valves Victaulic Series 779.

c. 14" and larger check valves shall be Victaulic Series W715. Equivalent by Grinnel or Gruvlok may be acceptable is approved by the Engineer.

2.16 CHECK VALVES, SPRING LOADED

A. Manufacturers:

1. Milwaukee Valve Company.

B. Iron body, bronze trim, split plate, hinged with stainless steel spring, resilient seal bonded to body, wafer, or threaded lug ends.

C. Grooved swing loaded check valves shall be Victaulic Series 716; or approved equivalent by Grinnell, Anvil Gruvlok, or Shurjoint.

2.17 CALIBRATED BALANCING VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Bell & Gossett, Circuit Setter Plus; Model CB

2. Pro Hydronics Specialties

a. Model CBV up to 2”

b. Model CBVF or CBVG for 2.1/2” and larger.

3. Flow Design Inc.

4. Griswold Controls; Model Quickset.

5. Macon Balancing Model MB or MBF

6. Nibco 1810 or M1-F739 Series

7. Taco, Inc.; Model Accu-Flo

8. Victaulic / Tour & Anderson.

9. Watts Model CSM

B. Up To and Including 2 inches:

1. Bronze two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle with balancing stops, solder, or threaded ends.

C. 3 Inches and Larger:

1. Cast steel or ductile iron body, globe type or chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals, multiple turn handwheel for precise balancing or lever handle with flow indicator plate, flanged or grooved. Victaulic Series 788 and 789.

2. Alternate is flow measuring device with butterfly valve. Include lever handle with memory stop, flanged or grooved.

2.18 FLOW CONTROLS (AUTOMATIC FLOW LIMITERS)

A. Manufacturers:

1. Griswold Controls

a. Model Isolator “R” up to 2.1/2”.

b. Model Wafer or Grooved End for 3” and larger.

2. Macon Balancing Model AB or ABW

3. Nibco 1880 Series


SECTION 23 21 13


PAGE 11 OF 17


a. Model AFLB up to 2”

b. Model AFLW for 2.1/2” and larger.

5. Bell & Gossett, Circuit Sentry

6. Victaulic Series 76.

B. Up To and Including 2.1/2” inches: Bronze or brass body, solder or threaded ends, chrome plated brass ball, union with tail piece, replaceable factory preset flow limiter cartridge, P/T ports for measuring flow. The control range shall be 2-60+ psig; and start up head loss shall not exceed 5 feet of head. Maximum working pressure shall be at least 275 psig @ 250°F. The factory automatic flow limiter shall be present at the factory within +/-5% of specified GPM.

C. 3 inches and larger: Carbon steel or ductile iron body, wafer flanged or grooved connections, replaceable factory preset flow limiter cartridge(s), P/T ports for measuring flow. The control range shall be 2-60+ psig; and start up head loss shall not exceed 5 feet of head. Maximum working pressure shall be at least 200 psig @ 250°F. The factory automatic flow limiter shall be present at the factory within +/-5% of specified GPM.

2.19 COIL CONNECTION KITS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Bell & Gossett

2. Griswold Controls

3. Macon Balancing

4. Nibco


6. Trane

B. General: Provide a coil kit including a calibrated balancing valve or flow limiting valve assembly on the supply side as indicated on the drawings, full port ball valve on the return side, two foot braided stainless steel hose, wye strainer with blowdown valve on supply side, unions on both sides, and reducers (if required). P/T connection

1. See the valve and other items specifications above.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. In areas having a metal roof deck, support piping and accessories directly from the building structure. Provide supplementary steel where required. No piping or accessories shall be supported from the roof deck.

C. Grooved joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s latest published instructions. The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the intended service. Gaskets shall be molded and produced by the grooved coupling manufacturer. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. Grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained field representative shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools, application of groove, and installation of grooved piping products. Factory trained representative shall periodically inspect the product installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products.

D. Install heating water, glycol, chilled water, and condenser water piping to ASME B31.9 requirements.

E. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D 2855.

F. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.

G. Install piping to conserve building space and to avoid interference with use of space.

SECTION 23 21 13


PAGE 12 OF 17


H. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

I. Pipe Penetrations passing through walls, floors, partitions, ceilings, and foundations

1. Pipe penetrations shall be neatly cut or cored allowing adequate space around the pipe, including insulation, and jacketing as necessary.

2. Pipe insulation and jacketing shall pass through non-rated penetrations. Maintain vapor barrier for cold services.

3. At pipe penetrations through fire-rated walls, floors, ceiling, partitions, and foundations, the cavity between pipes and sleeves shall be filled with mineral wool (refer to Section 23 07 19), and each end sealed with intumescent material. Refer to Section 07 84 13.

4. Except where indicated otherwise, sleeves are required for all piping passing through concrete or block walls, floors, ceiling, partitions, and foundations.

a. Sleeves through non-rated wall, floor, ceiling, partition, and foundation penetrations shall be 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal unless otherwise specified. Seal around the outside of the sleeve with mortar compatible with the wall material.

b. Sleeves through fire-rated areas wall, floor, ceiling, partition, and foundation penetrations shall be standard weight steel pipe, cast iron pipe, or other material approved by the firestopping manufacturer. Seal around the outside of the sleeve with mortar compatible with the wall material and approved by the firestopping manufacturer. See Firestopping Section 07 84 13.

c. Pipes passing through walls or foundations below grade where fire rating is not required shall utilize cast-in-place mechanical joint wall sleeves. Link-Seal, Metraflex, or equivalent bolted rubber seals may also be used.

5. Penetrations through gypsum board, acoustical tile or similar “soft” materials shall be neatly cut allowing space around the pipe and insulation. Cover the penetration with chrome plated or painted escutcheons in finished areas.

6. Penetrations through metal sandwich panel walls or ceilings shall be neatly cut and sealed or sleeved to protect the sandwich panel insulation.

7. Seal around pipes through fire rated penetrations with fire stopping material. See Firestopping Section 07 84 13.

8. Sleeves shall be flush with walls unless otherwise indicated. Cover the penetrations with chrome plated or painted escutcheons in finished areas.

9. Penetrations into food or pharmaceutical shall be sealed on the process side with the standard PipeTite boots. These shall have stainless steel rings bolted to the wall and hygienic silicone rubber boots sealed around the pipes.

J. Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.

2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.

3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.

4. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

5. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

6. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 09 90 00. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

7. Beam clamps shall not be used on open web joists, unless approved by the structural engineer. If approved, the beam clamps shall be attached to the top chord of the joists.

SECTION 23 21 13


PAGE 13 OF 17


8. Oversized pipe hangers shall be installed for all pipes carrying fluids below ambient temperature ("cold pipes") to allow the insulation to pass through the hanger without cutting or piecing. Maintain a continuous vapor barrier. Install pipe shields indicated in Insulation Specification Section 23 07 19 to protect insulation and vapor barrier.

9. No piping shall be hung from the piping of other trades or systems. Hangers shall be same material as the piping such that neither the hanger nor suspended piping is subject to electrolytic decay.

10. Locate hanger supports and accessories to support pipe, lines, valves, joints, and additional concentrated loads. They shall not restrict free thermal expansion unless otherwise shown. Hangers shall not be hung from structural steel or intermediate members or cross bracing in a manner that may contribute to unnatural deflection and potential failure of the member, e.g., lateral load from cross brace in compression could yield to cross brace failure and risk of damage to main structure.

11. Install pipe hangers on rod with double nuts to prevent movement from vibration. After the final pipe elevations at set with the insulation inserts installed (if any), secure the hanger with the double nuts.

K. The following is a schedule of maximum spacing for hangers and supports and size of suspension rods for all steel and copper piping, unless otherwise indicated or required. (Rods shall meet ASTM A 575). The support spacing shall comply with this table or MSS SP-69, whichever is more stringent.

1. Pipe Size Rod Diameter Maximum Spacing

2. up to 1-1/4" 3/8" 7'-0"

3. 1-1/2" to 2" 3/8" 9'-0"

4. 2-1/2" to 3" 1/2" 11'-0"

5. 4" to 5" 5/8" 14'-0"

6. 6" 3/4" 17'-0"

7. 8" 7/8" 19'-0"

8. 10" 7/8" 20'-0"

9. 12" 7/8" 22'-0"

10. 14" and larger see hanger mfr info 25'-0"

L. Refer to Section 23 05 29 for roof pipe support requirements.

M. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 23 07 19.

N. Prepare steel, cast iron, and galvanized unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 90 00. Do not paint copper, stainless steel, or nonmetallic pipe, or insulated pipe with PVC, vinyl, or aluminum jacket.

O. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

P. PEX Radiant Tubing Installation:

1. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Attach the tubing to the insulation or subfloor per the manufacturer's instructions and materials suitable for the material the tubing is attached to. For example, for on grade projects piping can be tied to either 6" x 6" WWM or reinforcing bar with an even grid pattern, using electric tie wraps. Pipe must not be tied with binding wire. For fastening pipe to Styrofoam insulation fasten with Styrofoam staples.

3. Piping shall have a fully enclosed protective conduit elbow where pipes penetrate the concrete flooring. (Also see plans for details.)

4. Provide a 12 inch protective sleeve where PEX pipe crosses expansion joints.

SECTION 23 21 13


PAGE 14 OF 17


5. If in slab repair joints are made, stainless steel or plastic insert compression couplings approved by the manufacturer shall be used. If brass couplings are used, wrap all couplings with PVC tape or compatible material prior to pouring topping slab to prevent any possible corrosion.

6. Provide expansion stripping where topping comes in contact with a wall plate.

7. Pressure test PEX lines by using 80 to 100 psig for a minimum of 8 hours prior to and during concrete pour.

8. All loop numbers must be marked on PEX pipe before connecting to the manifold. Room identification plus loop number must be printed and placed on each individual module in the manifold tag slot with the identification tags provided. All loops must be identified for future balancing.

9. Prior to system start-up, thoroughly clean, degrease and flush the new system before water or anti-freeze solution is added.

10. Add chemical corrosion inhibitor with main hydronic system. Review selection of inhibitor with Owner prior to adding to system.

11. Make all necessary adjustments to floor heating equipment and verify that system is tested, balanced, and left in operable condition. Include maintenance instructions, a copy of the piping layout, and provide 25 year manufacturer's guarantee on PEX pipe, and 18 months on all other components.

3.2 AIR VENTS AND DRAINS

A. Manual air vents with air chambers shall be provided at high points of the system and as indicated on the drawings. Provide ¼” tubing if necessary to position the air vents to permit access with a screwdriver without cutting or removing walls, ceilings or heating unit covers. Include valve cock on air vents. Position to minimize potential of openings of vents by unauthorized personnel.

B. Install boiler drain valve at all low points, positioned to minimize opening by unauthorized personnel. Include cap on drain valve.

C. Provide drain and vent valves on all heating and cooling coil sections at manufacturer’s recommended locations, whether shown on the plans or not. Note that some coils are specified with extended valved drain and vent connections.

3.3 TESTING

A. General Requirements:

1. Comply with the requirements described herein, and with the 2012 Michigan Mechanical Code.

2. Tests shall be available for witness by the A/E, the Construction Manager or the General Contractor who may, at their discretion, choose to witness tests. Provide 24 hours’ notice prior to pressure tests.

3. Furnish all required personnel and equipment to conduct all required tests in a safe manner. Every precaution shall be taken during testing to ensure the safety of the operator.

4. Do not insulate piping prior to pressure testing.

5. Do not conceal portions of piping prior to pressure testing. All joints shall be left exposed for examination during testing. Inspectors representing the Owner shall have access to the entire systems during testing.

6. Test equipment shall be equipped with a calibrated pressure gauge.

B. Preparation for Testing

1. All relief valves, expansion tanks, vents, gauge glasses, instruments and equipment connected to the piping shall be excluded from the tests.

SECTION 23 21 13


PAGE 15 OF 17


2. Control valves, unless removed, shall be set, and maintained in the wide-open position.

3. All piping to be tested shall be visually inspected by the Contractor prior to the test.

4. Expansion joints shall be provided with temporary restraint, if required, for the additional pressure load under test, or shall be isolated from the pressure tests.

5. Lines that are spring or counterweight supported, and all vapor or gas lines shall be temporarily supported during test in order to support the test fluid load, if necessary.

C. Testing Requirements:

1. As far as is practicable, all pressure tests shall be complete system tests.

2. Lines containing check valves shall have the pressure applied upstream of the check valves so that pressure is applied under the seat.

3. All tested systems shall be tested to one and one-half (1-1/2) times the design pressure or to a minimum pressure of one hundred (100) psig, whichever is greater.

4. Except where indicated otherwise, hydrostatic test pressures shall not be applied until the piping system and the testing medium have reached thermal equilibrium.

5. Testing for radiant floor tubing and manifolds: Test radiant tubing and manifolds separate from the remainder of the hydronic system. Pressure test PEX lines for a minimum of 4 hours prior to concrete pour. Maintain pressure during concrete pour.

6. Test pressures shall not exceed the maximum allowable working pressure of any component included in the test.

7. All test pressures shall be maintained a minimum of fifteen minutes before visual examination of joints begins.

8. Once test pressure has been achieved, isolate pressurizing pumps/compressors (do not continue to provide pressurization) and maintain pressurized systems for a minimum of two hours. After two hours, the maximum allowable pressure loss is 2 percent or 2 psig, whichever is less.

9. All joints shall be visually examined for leakage during the test.

10. Joints found to be defective shall be repaired and retested.

11. No repairs shall be done on any section of piping that contains water.

12. Caulking of threaded joints or peening of welds shall not be permitted. In the event leakage occurs, pipe shall be dismantled, re-threaded or re-welded and new fittings shall be installed. Repeat tests after defects have been corrected.

13. Tested systems shall be vented and drained immediately upon successful completion of the test.

14. All process and solvent lines shall be dried by passing clean dry oil-free air through them until they are dried to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer or his representative.

D. Test Reports:

1. All test results shall be recorded on the attached Piping Pressure Test Report, or on another approved test report form.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After testing, provide chemical cleaning for steel hydronic systems. Provide all necessary mechanical equipment, chemicals, control equipment and service. See Section 23 25 00.

B. Prior to flushing, install fine mesh construction strainers at inlets to all equipment with connections 2.5 inches and larger. Install fine mesh construction element in permanent strainers periodically. At completion of final flush, clean permanent strainers and remove construction strainers.

C. Pre-Cleaning Flushing: Remove all control valves. Thoroughly flush all piping systems and equipment with fresh water. Remove and clean all strainers, open drip legs or other non-flow

SECTION 23 21 13


PAGE 16 OF 17


piping to remove debris. Mains shall be flushed at flow rates of 10 ft/second or greater. After the pre-cleaning flush is complete, replace the control valves.

1. Determine loop capacity in gallons by carefully filling the loop from completely drained dry to fill with air bled out. Loop capacity shall be taken from water meter readings. Submit written report of loop capacity to water treatment subcontractor and owner.

D. Cleaning and Flushing of Steel Systems: Refill system with fresh water along with alkaline detergent cleaner equal to Turco A Cleaner at recommended use rates. Heating systems shall then be brought up to operating temperatures for a suitable period, per recommendations of equipment manufacturers and cleaning compound manufacturers. (See Boiler cleaning and startup instructions below.) Circulate 8-24 hours for hot water systems, 8-72 hours for chilled water and glycol systems. Drain out the cleaning solution. Flush system, open, clean, and inspect all strainers, drip legs, and non-flow areas. Refill with fresh water, establish bleed, and allow system to makeup fresh water and bleed until water leaving system is of same quality as makeup. NOTE: BYPASS THE BOILER OR USE pH NEUTRAL CLEANER PER BOILER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS FOR BOILERS WITH ALUMINUM HEAT EXCHANGERS.

E. Cleaning and Flushing of Copper Systems: Refill system with pH neutral degreaser. Circulate for 8-24 hours. Drain out the degreaser solution. Flush system, open, clean, and inspect all strainers, drip legs, and non-flow areas. Refill with fresh water, establish bleed, and allow system to makeup fresh water and bleed until water leaving system is of same quality as makeup. NOTE: BYPASS THE BOILER OR USE pH NEUTRAL CLEANER PER BOILER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS FOR BOILERS WITH ALUMINUM HEAT EXCHANGERS.

F. Boiler Cleaning: The boiler shall be completely cleaned using an alkaline cleaning product at rates and times set by the water treatment sub-contractor and/or the boiler manufacturer's recommendations. NOTE: USE pH NEUTRAL CLEANER PER BOILER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS FOR BOILERS WITH ALUMINUM HEAT EXCHANGERS.

G. Filter Cartridge Installation: Install first set of cartridges in the side stream filters. Run the circulation pumps for 30 minutes. Change the set of cartridges. After at least one week of running, change the filter cartridges again. This third set of cartridges is the final set for system turnover to the Owner.

H. Inhibitor or Glycol Charging:

1. Immediately after cleaning and flushing, introduce corrosion inhibitor to protect the clean system until normal startup.

2. On glycol systems, if glycol is not to be introduced right away, immediately introduce corrosion inhibitor to protect the clean system until normal startup. Before addition of glycol, bleed system to thoroughly clean it of interim inhibitor.

3. See Section 23 21 16 Hydronic Specialties for glycol concentration and glycol feed unit.

SECTION 23 21 13


PAGE 17 OF 17


PIPING PRESSURE TEST REPORT

System / Section No.:

Date of Test: ____ / ____ / ____

Test Medium: WATER OTHER-SPECIFY

Test Pressure: ______ PSIG ______ FT

Time Held at Test Pressure: ______ HOURS ______ MINUTES

CHECKLIST TO BE COMPLETED AFTER PRESSURE TEST

NOT APPLICABLE

COMPLETED

System Drained

System Air Dried

Temporary Equipment (e.g., pressure gages, blind flanges, caps, etc.) Removed

Permanent Equipment (e.g., safety valves, relief valves, gages, etc.) Replaced

Valving Returned to Proper Configuration

REMARKS:

I certify this report to accurately reflect the results of the pressure test.

FIELD TECHNICIAN (print and sign):

TEST REPORT REVIEWED BY:

OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE DATE

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 21 16

HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

PAGE 1 OF 5


SECTION 23 21 16 - HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Expansion tanks

2. Air vents.

3. Air separators

4. Pump suction diffusers

5. Radiator and fintube thermostatic valves

6. Relief valves

7. Glycol feed tank and mixture

8. Pump and equipment flexible connectors

9. Side-stream filter for closed loop systems

B. Related Sections

1. Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping, Valves and Accessories


A. ASME (BPV VIII, 1) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 - Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007.

1.4 COORDINATION


1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide product data for manufactured products and assemblies required for this project. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. Include product description, model and dimensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXPANSION TANKS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Amtrol Inc.

2. Armstrong Fluid Technology

3. Xylem, Bell & Gossett.

4. Taco, Inc.

B. Construction: Closed, welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME (BPV VIII, 1); cleaned, prime coated, and supplied with steel support saddles; with tappings for installation of accessories.

1. Pressure rating: 125 psi.

2. See the Equipment Schedule for size and capacity.

C. Gage Glass Set: Brass compression stops, guard, and 3/4 inch glass, maximum 24 inches length, long enough to cover tank for 2 inches above bottom to 2 inches below top.

D. Quick Connect Air Inlet:

SECTION 23 21 16


PAGE 2 OF 5


1. Expansion Tank: Inlet tire check valve, manual air vent, tank drain, and pressure relief valve.

2.2 DIAPHRAGM/BLADDER TYPE EXPANSION TANKS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Amtrol Inc.



4. Taco, Inc: www.taco-hvac.com.

B. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME (BPV VIII, 1); supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 125 psi, with flexible EPDM diaphragm sealed into tank, and steel support stand.

C. Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting, tank drain; precharge to 12 psi.

D. See the Equipment Schedule for size and capacity.

2.3 AIR VENTS

A. Manufacturers:



3. Taco, Inc.

B. Float Type: Brass or semi-steel body, copper, polypropylene, or solid non-metallic float, stainless steel valve and valve seat; suitable for system operating temperature and pressure; with isolating valve.

2.4 AIR SEPARATORS

A. In-line Air Separators:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Armstrong Fluid Technology, VA series.

b. Xylem, Bell & Gossett; Model RL series.

c. Taco, Inc.

d. Caleffi, Discal 551 series.

2. Cast iron for sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller, or steel for sizes 2 inch and larger; tested and stamped in accordance with ASME (BPV VIII, 1); for 125 psi operating pressure.

3. See the Equipment Schedule for size and capacity.

2.5 PUMP SUCTION DIFFUSERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong Fluid Technology.


3. Taco, Inc.

4. Victaulic Company of America; Model 731-G and W731.

B. Fitting: Elbow pattern, cast-iron body, threaded for 2 inch and smaller, flanged for 2-1/2 inch and larger, rated for 250 psi working pressure, with stainless steel inlet vanes, cylinder strainer with 5/32 or 3/16 inch diameter openings, start-up fine mesh strainer to fit over cylinder strainer, and permanent magnet located in flow stream and removable for cleaning. Ductile-iron body for grooved connections.

SECTION 23 21 16


PAGE 3 OF 5


C. See Equipment Schedule and plans for line and pump suction size and connections. Use full line size. Do not reduce line size to suction diffuser, unless line size is 2 or more sizes larger than suction diffuser.

D. Accessories: Adjustable foot support or integrally cast base support boss, blowdown tapping in bottom, gage tapping in side.

2.6 RADIATOR & FINTUBE THERMOSTATIC VALVES

A. Manufacturers: Danfoss Hydronic Heating - North America; Model RA-2000: na.heating.danfoss.com.

B. Angle or straight pattern thermostatic valve, with bronze body, EPDM disc, replaceable packing gland. The operator shall be of the bellows design with either a liquid or vapor charge, capable of temperature adjustment between 45° and 86°F.

2.7 RELIEF VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong Fluid Technology.


3. Taco, Inc.

4. Pentair, Kunkle valve.

B. Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME certified and labeled.

C. See the plans or Equipment Schedule for size and pressure relief setting. If no size is specified, the equipment supplier shall size the valve to handle the full capacity of the control valve, regulator, pump, or other device upstream of the relief valve. On expansion tanks or other equipment where the relief valve is to protect the equipment from thermal expansion only, size per the equipment manufacturer's recommendation.

2.8 GLYCOL FEED TANK & MIXTURE

A. System shall be Wessels Type GMP Series Glycol Make-up Package.

B. See the equipment schedule on the plans for the model, and size.

C. Unit shall be fully automated and autonomous and furnished complete with the following components all mounted on a sturdy steel frame with ½” system connection and factory preset 12 psig (field adjustable) discharge:

1. Low level cut-off and alarm arrangement including a 120 v signal for remote alarm.

2. Isolation valves and strainer.

3. Pressure tank with pressure control.

4. Pressure reducing valve and gauge.

5. Translucent polyethylene solution container with lid designed to accommodate relief valve piping.

6. Magnetic starter, 120/60/1 motor with controls.

D. Glycol Mixture:

1. For building glycol/water cooling systems use 30% by weight inhibited ethylene glycol; DOW SR-1, Enerco 8006, PVS Chill EG inhibited ethylene glycol, or equivalent by Interstate Chemical.

2. For building glycol/water heating systems use 40% by weight inhibited ethylene glycol, DOW SR-1, Enerco 8006, PVS Chill EG inhibited ethylene glycol, or equivalent by Interstate Chemical.

SECTION 23 21 16


PAGE 4 OF 5


3. For snowmelt systems or other systems in food or pharmaceutical plants use 40% by weight inhibited propylene glycol, DOWFROST, Enerco 8406, PVS Chill PG inhibited propylene glycol, or equivalent by Interstate Chemical.

2.9 PUMP AND EQUIPMENT FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Pump Flexible Connectors: Connectors for piping to pumps shall be stainless steel bellows flexible joints with stainless steel outer braid; Metraflex SLP, or equivalent by Twin City Hose of appropriate ratings. Use on in-line pumps above 1/2 HP and all base mounted pumps.

1. Flexible connectors at end suction pump inlets and discharges shall be stainless steel bellows with braid as described above. The Contractor may provide Metraflex CRV Flex with turning vanes, wye strainers, and long radius elbows at pump inlets in lieu of Metraflex Model SLP flexible connectors and suctions diffusers.

2. The flexible connectors shall be the size(s) of the branch lines to the pump, not the pump connection sizes. Reducing flexible connectors may be used on the pump connections at the Contractors option.

3. For grooved piping systems an alternate, if approved by the Engineer, is to use three flexible couplings near the pump per the piping fitting manufacturer's recommendations; Victaulic Style 177, 77, or W77; or equivalent by Grinnell, Anvil Gruvlok, or Shurjoint.

B. Equipment (Boiler, Chiller, etc.) Flexible Connectors: Equipment connections for hydronic piping shall be braided hose type as made by Metraflex, Twin City Hose, Atlantic Hose, or Thermo-Tech of appropriate material and ratings. See the equipment manufacturer's recommendations and the plans for use and location of flexible connectors.

2.10 SIDE-STREAM FILTER FOR CLOSED LOOP SYSTEMS

A. Side Stream Filter: Housing shall be 304 or 316 stainless steel having a pressure rating of 150 psig at temperatures up to 200°F or higher. Unit shall be multiple cartridge type.

1. Cartridges shall be appropriate for the fluid and temperature. If not specified on the equipment schedule, the minimum temperature rating of the cartridges shall be 140°F. The cartridges shall have a porosity of 10 microns.

2. See the equipment schedules for the size and/or capacity of the filter.

3. Manufacturers: Shelco, Harmsco, Pentair Industrial or equivalent if approved by the Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide manual air vents at system high points and as indicated.

C. Provide air separator on suction side of system circulation pump and connect to expansion tank.

D. Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection.

E. Provide pump suction fitting on suction side of base mounted centrifugal pumps where indicated. Remove temporary strainers after cleaning systems.

F. Provide combination pump discharge valve on discharge side of base mounted centrifugal pumps where indicated.

G. Support pump fittings with floor mounted pipe and flange supports.

H. Balancing valves shall be installed after each terminal unit, coil, and other items as indicated on the drawings. Valves shall be sized for the GPM and pressure drop, not pipe size (i.e. 1/2” for .5 GPM and under).

I. Provide relief valves on pressure tanks, low pressure side of reducing valves, heat exchangers, and expansion tanks.

SECTION 23 21 16


PAGE 5 OF 5


J. Select system relief valve capacity so that it is greater than make-up pressure reducing valve capacity. Select equipment relief valve capacity to exceed rating of connected equipment.

K. Clean and flush glycol system before adding glycol solution. Refer to Section 23 25 00.

L. Perform tests determining strength of glycol and water solution and submit written test results.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 21 23

HYDRONIC PUMPS

PAGE 1 OF 6


SECTION 23 21 23 - HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Close-coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps.

2. Separately coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps.

3. Separately coupled, base-mounted, end-suction centrifugal pumps.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ECM: Electronically commutated motor.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene monomer.

C. EPR: Ethylene propylene rubber.

D. FKM: Fluoroelastomer polymer.

E. HI: Hydraulic Institute.

F. NBR: Nitrile rubber or Buna-N.

1.4 COORDINATION



A. Product Data: For each type of pump.

1. Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated.

2. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal(s) for each pump.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 CLOSE-COUPLED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS


1. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

2. Bell & Gossett, Xylem.

3. Grundfos Pumps Corporation.

4. TACO Comfort Solutions, Inc.

SECTION 23 21 23

HYDRONIC PUMPS

PAGE 2 OF 6


B. Source Limitations: Obtain pumps from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, close-coupled, in-line pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontally or vertically.

D. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gauge tappings at inlet and outlet and threaded companion-flange connections.

2. Impeller: ASTM B584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. For constant-speed pumps, trim impeller to match specified performance.

3. Pump Shaft Sleeve: Type 304 stainless steel.

4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of silicon carbide rotating ring against a silicon carbide or tungsten carbide stationary seat. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal.

5. Seal Flushing: Flush, cool, and lubricate pump seal by directing pump discharge water to flow over the seal.

E. Motor: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment.

1. NEMA Premium Efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1.

2. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

3. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in electrical sections.

2.3 SEPARATELY COUPLED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS






C. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separately coupled, in-line pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontally.


1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gauge tappings at inlet and outlet, and threaded companion-flange connections.

2. Impeller: ASTM B584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, and keyed to shaft. For pumps that are not frequency-drive controlled, trim impeller to match specified performance.

3. Pump Shaft: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel.

4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of silicon carbide rotating ring against a silicon carbide or tungsten carbide stationary seat.

5. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings.

E. Shaft Coupling: Interlocking frame with interconnecting springs capable of absorbing vibration.

SECTION 23 21 23

HYDRONIC PUMPS

PAGE 3 OF 6


F. Motor: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."



3. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in electrical Sections.

2.4 SEPARATELY COUPLED, BASE-MOUNTED, END-SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS






C. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separately coupled, end-suction pump with flexible shaft coupling as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for base mounting, with pump and motor shafts horizontal.


1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gauge tappings at inlet and outlet, drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of volute, and flanged connections.

2. Impeller: ASTM B584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. For pumps that are not frequency-drive controlled, trim impeller to match specified performance.

3. Pump Shaft: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel.

4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of silicon carbide rotating ring against a silicon carbide or tungsten carbide stationary seat.

5. Pump Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing with grease fittings.

E. Shaft Coupling: Molded rubber insert and interlocking spider capable of absorbing vibration.

F. Coupling Guard: Dual rated; ANSI B15.1, Section 8; OSHA 1910.219 approved; steel; removable; attached to mounting frame.

G. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from ASTM A36/A36M channels and angles. Fabricate to mount pump casing, coupling guard, and motor.

H. Motor: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."




2.5 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS



SECTION 23 21 23

HYDRONIC PUMPS

PAGE 4 OF 6




4. Victaulic Company of America

B. Suction Diffuser:

1. Angle pattern.

2. 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting.

3. Bronze 16-mesh wire startup and Type 304 stainless steel permanent strainers with 3/16-inch diameter openings and removeable permanent located in the flow stream.

4. Type 304 stainless steel straightening vanes.

5. Drain plug.

6. Factory-fabricated support.

C. Triple-Duty Valve:

1. Angle or straight pattern.

2. 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body, pump-discharge fitting.

3. Valve with multi-turn stem and memory stop to allow valve to be returned to its original position after shutoff.

4. Brass valve disc with EPDM rubber seat.

5. Type 304 stainless steel valve stem.

6. Drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features.

7. Brass gauge ports with integral check valve and orifice for flow measurement.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before pump installation.

C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps will be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4 and HI 2.4.

B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.

C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.

D. Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and extend to open drain.

E. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install base-mounted pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases with anchor bolts, set and level, and grout in place. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 23 05 48.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."

F. Equipment Mounting: Install in-line pumps with continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers of size required to support weight of in-line pumps.

SECTION 23 21 23

HYDRONIC PUMPS

PAGE 5 OF 6


1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 23 05 48 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."

2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 23 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.3 ALIGNMENT

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform alignment service.

B. Perform alignment service. When required by manufacturer to maintain warranty coverage, engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform it.

C. Comply with requirements in HI standards for alignment of pump and motor shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between motor feet and base frame.

D. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.

E. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.

3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.

D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.

E. Install check, shutoff, and flow control valves or triple-duty valve on discharge side of pumps. Refer to schematics and details.

F. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.

1. Use startup strainer for initial system startup. Install permanent strainer element before turnover of system to Owner.

G. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between pump casing and valves.

H. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of in-line pumps over 5 hp between pump casing and valves.

I. Install pressure gauges on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-gauge tapping or install single gauge with multiple-input selector valve. The use of rubber hoses will not be permitted.

J. Install check valve on each condensate pump unit discharge unless unit has a factory-installed check valve.

3.5 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Connect wiring in accordance with Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Ground equipment in accordance with Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, in accordance with NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

3.6 CONTROL CONNECTIONS

A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices.

B. Connect control wiring in accordance with Section 26 05 23 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

SECTION 23 21 23

HYDRONIC PUMPS

PAGE 6 OF 6


3.7 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Check piping connections for tightness.

3. Clean strainers on suction piping. Use startup strainer for initial startup.

4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication.

b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in correct direction.

5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation.

6. Start motor.

7. Open discharge valve slowly.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Hydronic pumps will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 23 00

REFRIGERANT PIPING AND ACCESSORIES

PAGE 1 OF 10



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

SECTION 23 23 00 - REFRIGERANT PIPING AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Piping.

2. Refrigerant.

3. Moisture and liquid indicators.

4. Valves.

5. Strainers.

6. Check valves.

7. Pressure relief valves.

8. Filter-driers.

9. Solenoid valves.

10. Expansion valves.

11. Flexible connections.

B. Related Sections


2. Section 23 07 19 - Hydronic Piping Insulation.


4. Section 26 05 83 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Electrical characteristics and wiring

connections.


A. AHRI 495 - Performance Rating of Refrigerant Liquid Receivers; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and

Refrigeration Institute; 2005.

B. AHRI 710 - Performance Rating of Liquid-Line Driers; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and


C. AHRI 730 - Flow-Capacity Rating and Application of Suction-Line Filters and Filter Driers; Air-

Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2005.

D. AHRI 750 - Standard for Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves; Air-Conditioning, Heating,

and Refrigeration Institute; 2007.

E. AHRI 760 - Standard for Performance Rating of Solenoid Valves for Use With Volatile

Refrigerants; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2007.

F. ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating,

Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2010 (ANSI/ASHRAE Std 15).

G. ASHRAE Std 34 - Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants; American Society of

Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2007.

H. ASME (BPV VIII, 1) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 - Rules for

Construction of Pressure Vessels; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007.

SECTION 23 23 00


PAGE 2 OF 10



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

I. ASME (BPV IX) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and Brazing

Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2010.

J. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The

American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005).

K. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings For Flared Copper Tubes; The American Society of

Mechanical Engineers; 2006.

L. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components; The American Society of

Mechanical Engineers; 2006.

M. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2008

(ANSI/ASME B31.9).

N. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless; 2007.

O. ASTM A 234/A 234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and

Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2007.

P. ASTM B 88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009.

Q. ASTM B 88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2005.

R. ASTM B 280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and

Refrigeration Field Service; 2008.

S. ASTM F 708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers; 1992

(Reapproved 2008).

T. AWS A5.8/A5.8M - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; American

Welding Society; 2004 and errata.

U. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2010.

V. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture; Manufacturers

Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2009.

W. MSS SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application; Manufacturers

Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2003.

X. MSS SP-89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices;

Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2003.

Y. UL 429 - Electrically Operated Valves; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including

All Revisions.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Where more than one piping system material is specified ensure system components are

compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide

necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently

provided.

B. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.5 unless indicated otherwise.

C. Liquid Indicators:

1. Use line size liquid indicators in main liquid line leaving condenser.

2. If receiver is provided, install in liquid line leaving receiver.

3. Use line size on leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.

D. Valves:

1. Use service valves on suction and discharge of compressors.

2. Use gage taps at compressor inlet and outlet.

SECTION 23 23 00


PAGE 3 OF 10



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

3. Use gage taps at hot gas bypass regulators, inlet and outlet.

4. Use check valves on compressor discharge.

5. Use check valves on condenser liquid lines on multiple condenser systems.

E. Refrigerant Charging (Packed Angle) Valve: Use in liquid line between receiver shut-off valve

and expansion valve.

F. Strainers:

1. Use line size strainer upstream of each automatic valve.

2. Where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are used, use single main liquid

line strainer.

3. On steel piping systems, use strainer in suction line.

4. Use shut-off valve on each side of strainer.

G. Pressure Relief Valves: Use on ASME receivers and pipe to outdoors.

H. Filter-Driers:

1. Use a filter-drier immediately ahead of liquid-line controls, such as thermostatic expansion

valves, solenoid valves, and moisture indicators.

2. Use a filter-drier on suction line just ahead of compressor.

3. Use sealed filter-driers in lines smaller than 1/2 inch outside diameter.

4. Use sealed filter-driers in low temperature systems.

5. Use sealed filter-driers in systems utilizing hermetic compressors.

6. Use replaceable core filter-driers in lines of 1/2 inch outside diameter or greater.

7. Use replaceable core liquid-line filter-driers in systems utilizing receivers.

8. Use filter-driers for each solenoid valve.

I. Solenoid Valves:

1. Use in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or pump-down compressor

control.

2. Use in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems.

3. Use in oil bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into the

suction line when system shuts down.

J. Flexible Connectors: Utilize at connections to all equipment having compressors.

1.5 COORDINATION


1.6 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide general assembly of specialties, including manufacturers catalogue

information. Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate schematic layout of system, including equipment, critical dimensions,

and sizes.

D. Design Data: Submit design data indicating pipe sizing. Indicate load carrying capacity of

trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers.

E. Test Reports: Indicate results of leak test, acid test.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate support, connection requirements, and

isolation for servicing.

SECTION 23 23 00


PAGE 4 OF 10



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

G. Submit welders certification of compliance with ASME (BPV IX).

H. Project Record Documents: Record exact locations of equipment and refrigeration accessories

on record drawings.

I. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for changing cartridges, assembly views, spare parts

lists.

J. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. Extra Filter-Dryer Cartridges: One of each type and size.

2. Refrigeration Oil Test Kits: One, each containing everything required to conduct one test.


A. Designer Qualifications: Design piping system under direct supervision of a Professional

Engineer experienced in design of this type of work.

B. Designer Qualifications: Design piping system under direct supervision of a Professional

Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in Michigan.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this

section, with minimum five years of documented experience.

D. Conform to ASME B31.9 for installation of piping system.

E. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME (BPV IX) and applicable state labor

regulations.

F. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME (BPV IX).

G. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL, as suitable for the

purpose indicated.


A. Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place.

B. Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end caps and

plugs in place until installation.

C. Dehydrate and charge components such as piping and receivers, seal prior to shipment, until

connected into system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, H58 hard drawn or O60 soft annealed.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper.

2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy.

B. Copper Tube to 7/8 inch OD: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type K (A), annealed.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.26 cast copper.

2. Joints: Flared.

C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black.

1. Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wrought steel welding type.

2. Joints: Welded in accordance with AWS D1.1.

D. Steel Pipe Sizes 12 Inch and Over: ASTM A 53/A 53M, 0.375 inch wall, black.

1. Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wrought steel welding type.

2. Joints: Welded in accordance with AWS D1.1.

E. Pipe Supports and Anchors:

SECTION 23 23 00


PAGE 5 OF 10



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

1. Conform to ASME B31.5.

2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Malleable iron adjustable swivel, split ring.

3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.

6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel

clamp.

7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete

pier or steel support.

9. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

10. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.

11. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded

connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms;

size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.

2.2 MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Henry Technologies

2. Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning

3. Sporlan Valve Company

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 33 00 – Submittals and Substitutions.

B. Indicators: Single port type, UL listed, with copper or brass body, flared or solder ends, sight

glass, color coded paper moisture indicator with removable element cartridge and plastic cap;

for maximum temperature of 200 degrees F and maximum working pressure of 500 psi.

2.3 VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Hansen Technologies Corporation


3. Danfoss Flomatic


B. Diaphragm Packless Valves: UL listed, globe or angle pattern, forged brass body and bonnet,

phosphor bronze and stainless steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless steel

spring, nylon seat disc, solder or flared ends, with positive backseating; for maximum working

pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 275 degrees F.

C. Packed Angle Valves: Forged brass or nickel plated forged steel, forged brass seal caps with

copper gasket, rising stem and seat with backseating, molded stem packing, solder or flared

ends; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 275 degrees F.

D. Ball Valves: Two piece bolted forged brass body with teflon ball seals and copper tube

extensions, brass bonnet and seal cap, chrome plated ball, stem with neoprene ring stem seals;

for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 300 degrees F.

E. Service Valves: Forged brass body with copper stubs, brass caps, removable valve core,

integral ball check valve, flared or solder ends, for maximum pressure of 500 psi.

SECTION 23 23 00


PAGE 6 OF 10



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

2.4 STRAINERS

A. Straight Line or Angle Line Type: Brass or steel shell, steel cap and flange, and replaceable

cartridge, with screen of stainless steel wire or monel reinforced with brass; for maximum

working pressure of 430 psi.

B. Straight Line, Non-Cleanable Type: Steel shell, copper plated fittings, stainless steel wire

screen.

2.5 CHECK VALVES

A. Manufacturers:





B. Globe Type: Cast bronze or forged brass body, forged brass cap with neoprene seal, brass

guide and disc holder, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, teflon seat disc; for maximum

temperature of 300 degrees F and maximum working pressure of 425 psi.

C. Straight Through Type: Brass body and disc, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring,

neoprene seat; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 200

degrees F.

2.6 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. Manufacturers:





B. Brass body, stainless steel diaphragm, direct acting, adjustable over 0 to 80 psi range, for

maximum working pressure of 450 psi.

2.7 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES

A. Manufacturers:



3. Sherwood Valve/Harsco Corporation


B. Straight Through or Angle Type: Brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealed and

stamped with ASME UV and National Board Certification NB, selected to ASHRAE Std 15, with

standard setting of 235 psi.

2.8 FILTER-DRIERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Flow Controls Division of Emerson Electric




SECTION 23 23 00


PAGE 7 OF 10



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

B. Cores: Molded or loose-fill molecular sieve desiccant compatible with refrigerant, activated

alumina, activated charcoal, and filtration to 40 microns, with secondary filtration to 20 microns;

of construction that will not pass into refrigerant lines.

C. Construction: UL listed.

1. Replaceable Core Type: Steel shell with removable cap.

2. Sealed Type: Copper shell.

3. Connections: As specified for applicable pipe type.

2.9 SOLENOID VALVES

A. Manufacturers:





B. Valve: AHRI 760, pilot operated, copper or brass body and internal parts, synthetic seat,

stainless steel stem and plunger assembly (permitting manual operation in case of coil failure),

integral strainer, with flared, solder, or threaded ends; for maximum working pressure of 500

psi.

C. Coil Assembly: UL 429, UL listed, replaceable with molded electromagnetic coil, moisture and

fungus proof, with surge protector and color coded lead wires, integral junction box with pilot

light.

2.10 EXPANSION VALVES

A. Manufacturers:





B. Angle or Straight Through Type: AHRI 750; design suitable for refrigerant, brass body, internal

or external equalizer, bleed hole, adjustable superheat setting, replaceable inlet strainer, with

non-replaceable capillary tube and remote sensing bulb and remote bulb well.

C. Selection: Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine available pressure

drop across valve. Select valve for maximum load at design operating pressure and minimum

10 degrees F superheat. Select to avoid being undersized at full load and excessively

oversized at part load.

2.11 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Danfoss Flomatic




B. Valve: Brass body with flared or solder connection, needle valve with floating needle and

machined seat, stepper motor drive.

C. Evaporation Control System: Electronic microprocessor based unit in enclosed case,

proportional integral control with adaptive superheat, maximum operating pressure function,

preselection allowance for electrical defrost and hot gas bypass.

SECTION 23 23 00


PAGE 8 OF 10



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

D. Refrigeration System Control: Electronic microprocessor based unit in enclosed case, with

proportional integral control of valve, on/off thermostat, air temperature alarm (high and low),

solenoid valve control, liquid injection adaptive superheat control, maximum operating pressure

function, night setback thermostat, timer for defrost control.

2.12 FLEXIBLE PIPING CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Circuit Hydraulics

2. Flexicraft Industrial

3. Penflex

4. Universal

5. Flexonics


B. Products:

1. Corrugated stainless steel hose with single layer of stainless steel exterior braiding,

minimum 9 inches long with copper tube ends; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi.

2. Corrugated type, non-porous bronze alloy, suitable for 300 psi working pressure.

3. All bronze construction with braided sleeve, minimum length of eighteen inches, sweat

connections, suitable for 300 psi working pressure.

4. Suction flexible connectors (vibration eliminators) shall be wrapped with vapor barrier tape

to prevent frost formation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and maintain

gradient.

C. Install piping to conserve building space and avoid interference with use of space.

D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope piping one percent

in direction of oil return.

E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected

equipment.

F. Inserts:

1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.

2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of

reinforced concrete beams.

3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4

inches.

4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt

with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.

SECTION 23 23 00


PAGE 9 OF 10



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

G. Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.5.

2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.

3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent

work.

4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

5. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of

connected horizontal piping.

6. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or

trapeze hangers.

7. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

H. Arrange piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, and provide

double risers as required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction of flow.

I. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

J. Provide access to concealed valves and fittings. Coordinate size and location of access doors

with Section 08 31 13.

K. Flood piping system with nitrogen when brazing.

L. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building frame, brush clean, and apply

one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

M. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to

Section 09 90 00.

N. Insulate piping and equipment; refer to Section and Section 23 07 19.

O. Follow ASHRAE Std 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of

refrigerant.

P. Provide replaceable cartridge filter-driers, with isolation valves and valved bypass.

Q. Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately downstream of evaporator on suction line.

R. Provide external equalizer piping on expansion valves with refrigerant distributor connected to

evaporator.

S. Install flexible connectors at right angles to axial movement of compressor, parallel to

crankshaft.

T. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.

U. Provide electrical connection to solenoid valves.


A. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5.

B. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psi. Perform final tests at 27 inches vacuum and

200 psi using halide torch. Test to no leakage.

3.4 HANGER SPACING

A. Hanger Spacing for Copper Tubing.

1. 1/2 inch, 5/8 inch, and 7/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

2. 1-1/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.




SECTION 23 23 00


PAGE 10 OF 10



A/E PROJECT 5-4749





B. Hanger Spacing for Steel Piping.

1. 1/2 inch, 3/4 inch, and 1 inch: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

2. 1-1/4 inches: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.


4. 2 inches: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.




END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 25 00

HYDRONIC WATER TREATMENT

PAGE 1 OF 4


SECTION 23 25 00 - HYDRONIC WATER TREATMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Cleaning and Treatment Chemicals

a. Cleaning Chemicals

b. Closed (Water) System Treatment Chemicals

2. Chemical Treatment Equipment

a. By-Pass (Pot) Feeder (Closed Loop Systems)

b. Makeup Water/glycol meter

c. Boiler Blowdown Controller and Valves

B. Related Sections



C. Scope

1. Chemical Treatment: Provide chemical injection system for each hydronic loop and cooling tower/condenser loop.

2. Provide a comprehensive service program that includes:

a. Technical assistance to contractor during installation.

b. Cleaning (See Part3 Execution)

1) Thorough flushing of all piping with fresh water.

2) Removal and cleaning of all strainers, open drip-legs and other non-flow piping to remove debris.

3) Determination of loop capacity.

c. Supervision of flushing and cleaning

d. Addition of corrosion inhibitor to protect the clean system.

e. Operator training and regular on-site testing including written reports for one(1) year after start up. Fluid from heat transfer loops must be fully analyzed by a qualified laboratory at least twice the first year. Thereafter, complete analysis and evaluation should be done annually.

f. Provide laboratory and technical service during this maintenance period.

g. A detailed training class shall be provided to the Owner's operations staff after system is started up.

1.3 COORDINATION


1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide chemical treatment materials, chemicals, and equipment including electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

SECTION 23 25 00


PAGE 2 OF 4


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Enerco Corporation.

B. GE Water Technologies.

C. H.V. Burton Co., H-O-H Water Technology

D. Mitco, Inc.

E. Schaefer Technologies, Inc.

F. Betz-Dearborn

2.2 CLEANING AND TREATMENT CHEMICALS

A. General: Provide a comprehensive service program that includes technical assistance to contractor during installation, cleaning chemicals, supervision of cleaning, treatment chemicals, operator training and regular on-site testing including written reports for one (1) year after start-up.

B. Cleaning Chemicals:

1. Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products; sodium tripoly phosphate and sodium molybdate.

2. Verify with the equipment manufacturers if another cleaning solution should be used. Note: Some boilers require pH neutral or slightly acidic cleaning solutions.

C. Treatment Chemicals:

D. Provide a one (1) year supply of all chemicals for control of scale and corrosion.

E. Provide testing equipment to include portable kit as required for monitoring system scale and corrosion inhibitor.

F. Closed (Water) System Treatment Chemicals

1. Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust pH.

2. Corrosion inhibitors.

2.3 BY-PASS (POT) FEEDER (CLOSED LOOP SYSTEMS)

A. For each closed loop chemical feed point, provide one potfeeder. Potfeeder shall include feeder body, funnel and valves all constructed of materials compatible with the system. Pressure rating of the feeder shall be 125 psig. minimum. Potfeeders of 5 gallon capacity and larger shall have welded legs. Potfeeder size selection shall be as follows:

1. Approximate Loop Volume Pot Feeder Size

2. 100-1000 gallons 4 quart (1 gallon)

3. 1000-2500 gallons 6 quart

4. 2500-4000 gallons 8 quart (2 gallon)

5. 4000-6000 gallons 10 quart

6. 6000-8000 gallons 5 gallon

2.4 CHEMICAL TREATMENT FEED PUMPS & CHEMICAL CONTAINMENT SUMP

A. Positive displacement, diaphragm type metering pump with adjustable flow rate, thermoplastic construction, continuous-duty fully enclosed electric motor and drive, and built-in relief valve.

B. Provide a drum spill containment sump/pallet constructed of corrosion resistant materials of sufficient size to hold all chemical drums and of sufficient volume to contain at least 50% of the largest drum. Also if the drums are larger than 5 gallons, provide a ramp for the sump/pallet for handling drums with a drum cart. Eagle Modular spill containment platform, or equivalent.

SECTION 23 25 00


PAGE 3 OF 4


2.5 MAKEUP WATER/GLYCOL METER

A. See Section 23 05 19 Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping (Provided by Mechanical Contractor)

B. Chemical Treatment Contractor shall supply for each makeup feed point provide one (1) Electric Contact Head Water Meter of bronze construction rated up to 110°F and 150 psig. Meter shall be a disc type design using a magnetic drive to couple the measuring piston to the electric contact head. The electric contact switch shall be normally open and capable of handling control voltages up to 240 volts with contacts rated at 10 amps minimum. The gallons per contact shall be initially set at 10 gallons per contact, but must be readily field changeable. Water meter size and gallons per contact shall be determined by water treatment subcontractor. Meter pressure drop shall not exceed 10 psid at maximum rated flow.

2.6 GLYCOL FEEDER AND GLYCOL MIXTURE: SEE SECTION 23 21 16.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


3.2 CLOSED SYSTEM TREATMENT

A. Provide one bypass feeder on each system. Install isolating and drain valves and necessary piping. Install around balancing valve downstream of circulating pumps unless indicated otherwise.

B. Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated by test.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Systems shall be operational, filled, started, and vented prior to cleaning. Use water meter to record capacity in each system.

B. Place terminal control valves in open position during cleaning.

C. After testing, provide chemical cleaning for entire hydronic system. Provide all necessary mechanical equipment, chemicals, control equipment and service. See Section Two.

D. Prior to flushing, install fine mesh construction strainers at inlets to all equipment with connections 2.5 inches and larger. Install fine mesh construction element in permanent strainers periodically. At completion of final flush, clean permanent strainers and remove construction strainers.

3.4 CLEANING SEQUENCE

A. Hot Water Heating Systems:

1. Apply heat while circulating, slowly raising temperature to 160 degrees F and maintain for 12 hours minimum.

2. Remove heat and circulate to 100 degrees F or less; drain systems as quickly as possible and refill with clean water.

3. Circulate for 6 hours at design temperatures, then drain.

4. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed.

5. Filter Cartridge Installation: Install first set of cartridges in the side stream filters. Run the circulation pumps for 30 minutes. Change the set of cartridges. After at least one week of running, change the filter cartridges again. This third set of cartridges is the final set for system turnover to the Owner.

B. Chilled Water Systems:

1. Circulate for 48 hours, then drain systems as quickly as possible.

2. Refill with clean water, circulate for 24 hours, then drain.

3. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed.

SECTION 23 25 00


PAGE 4 OF 4


4. Filter Cartridge Installation: Install first set of cartridges in the side stream filters. Run the circulation pumps for 30 minutes. Change the set of cartridges. After at least one week of running, change the filter cartridges again. This third set of cartridges is the final set for system turnover to the Owner.

C. Use neutralizer agents on recommendation of system cleaner supplier and approval of Architect/Engineer.

D. Flush open systems and glycol filled closed systems with clean water for one hour minimum. Drain completely and refill.

E. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens.

F. Inspect, remove sludge, and flush low points with clean water after cleaning process is completed. Include disassembly of components as required.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 31 00

HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS

PAGE 1 OF 8



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

SECTION 23 31 00 - HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Flexible ductwork.

2. Materials.

3. Metal ductwork, casings and plenums – General requirements.

4. Metal ductwork (Rectangular).

5. Metal ductwork (Manufactured round and flat oval ductwork).

6. Casing and plenums.

7. Duct hangers and supports.

8. Duct sealant.

9. Ductwork leakage testing.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 09 90 01 – Mechanical Electrical Painting.

2. Section 23 07 13 - Duct Insulation.

3. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories.

4. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.


A. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.

B. ASTM A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron

Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2009a.

C. ASTM A 1008 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-

Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution

Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2010\parD.

D. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2007.

E. ASTM A240 - Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet,

and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications, current edition, including all

revisions.

F. ASTM A480 – Specification for General Requirements for Flat-rolled Stainless, and Heat-

resisting Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip, current edition, including all revisions.

G. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2010.

H. Industrial Ventilation – A Manual for Recommended Practice for Design, 29th Edition, 2016.

I. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National

Fire Protection Association; 2009.

J. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking

Operations; National Fire Protection Association; 2008.

K. SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning

Contractors' National Association; 2012, Second Edition.

L. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air

Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.

SECTION 23 31 00


PAGE 2 OF 8



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

M. SMACNA (KVS) - Kitchen Ventilation Systems and Food Service Equipment Fabrication &

Installation Guidelines; 2001.

N. UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; Underwriters Laboratories

Inc.; current edition, including all revisions.

O. UL 2221: Standard for Fire Resistive Grease Duct Enclosure Assemblies, current edition

including all revisions.

1.3 COORDINATION


1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials, duct liner, duct connections, and flexible

ductwork.

C. Duct Fabrication Drawings: Provide fabrication drawings for portions of duct systems requiring

a SMACNA 4 inch pressure class and higher. Indicate duct sizes, gages, SMACNA pressure

classification, SMACNA leakage classification, fitting types, ductwork accessories, potential

interferences and conflicts with building structure or other building trades.

D. Leakage Testing Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test

pressure, maximum specified leakage rate and actual leakage rate.


A. Welding Qualifications - Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, “Structural Welding Code – Steel”, for steel hangers and supports.

2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, “Structural Welding Code – Aluminum” for aluminum supports.

3. AWS D9.1M/D9.1 “Sheet Metal Welding Code” for duct joint and seam welding.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK

A. Insulated Flexible Ducts (Upstream of variable or constant volume terminal units):

1. Manufacturers:

a. Thermaflex Model M-KC.

b. Flexmaster USA Model 4M.

c. Substitutions: See Section 01 33 00 – Submittals and Substitutions.

2. Two ply polyester or vinyl film supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass

insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film.

a. Pressure Rating: 16 inches W.G. positive and 2 inches W.G. negative.

b. Maximum Velocity: 5500 fpm.

c. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 250 degrees F.

d. Insulation R-Value: 4.2, per ASTM C-518.

B. Insulated Flexible Ducts (At final connections to air outlets)

1. Manufacturers:

a. Thermaflex Model M-KE.

b. Flexmaster USA Model 1M.

c. Substitutions: See Section 01 33 00 – Submittals and Substitutions.

SECTION 23 31 00


PAGE 3 OF 8



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

2. Polyethylene fabric supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation;

aluminum vapor barrier film.

a. Pressure Rating: 10 inches W.G. positive and 1/2 inch W.G. negative.

b. Maximum Velocity: 5000 fpm.

c. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 250 degrees F.

d. Insulation R-Value: 4.2, per ASTM C-518.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M FS Type B,

with G60/Z180 coating.

B. Galvanized Steel Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M FS Type B,

with G90/Z275 coating.

C. Carbon Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS, cold-rolled commercial steel,

with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts.

D. Aluminum Ducts: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M); aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14. Aluminum

Connectors and Bar Stock: Alloy 6061-T651 or of equivalent strength.

E. Type 304 or 316 Stainless Steel Ducts: ASTM A240 and A480.

2.3 METAL DUCTWORK, CASINGS AND PLENUMS – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Unless indicated otherwise, manufacture, fabricate all ducts, casings and plenums in

accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as

indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures

indicated.

B. Where ductwork, casings and plenums will be painted, the metal surface shall be provided with

a paintable finish, such as “Paintgrip” (acid washed), phosphatized, or galvannealed. Refer to

Section 09 90 00 for painting requirements.

C. Cleaning: The exterior of all ductwork, casings and plenums which will be painted shall be

cleaned at the factory or in the shop to remove oil and grease prior to shipping to the site.

Extreme care must be taken in the cleaning process, so that oil from the duct construction is

removed or dried such that it does not bleed through after ductwork, casing and plenums are

painted.

2.4 METAL DUCTWORK (RECTANGULAR)

A. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on

centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide air foil

turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal

with glass fiber insulation.

B. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;

maximum 30 degrees (included angle) divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees

(included angle) convergence downstream.

C. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages

indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or

electric welded. Prime coat welded joints.

D. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated. Unless indicated

otherwise on drawings, 90 degree conical tee connections may be used on branch runouts to a

single supply air outlet.

E. Where ductwork will be painted the metal surface shall be provided with a paintable finish, such

as “Paintgrip” (acid washed), phosphatized, or galvannealed. Refer to Section 09 90 00 for

painting requirements.

SECTION 23 31 00


PAGE 4 OF 8



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

F. Shop Cleaning: The exterior of all ductwork which will be painted shall be cleaned in the shop

to remove oil and grease.

G. Approved manufacturers for double wall, insulated rectangular duct:

1. Advanced Sheet Metal

2. Allied Mechanical

3. Franklin Holwerda Company

4. LaPine Metal Products

5. Lindab.

6. Mill Creek Fabrication

7. Northwest Kent Mechanical Company

8. SEMCO Incorporated.

9. Set Duct Industries.

10. Target Construction, Inc.

11. United McGill Corporation.

12. Universal Spiral Air

13. Zinger Sheet Metal

H. Double Wall, Insulated Rectangular Ducts: In addition to the above requirements for single-wall

duct, the following shall apply: Ducts shall have galvanized steel outer and inner walls, and 1

inch (25 mm) 2 inch (50 mm) thick fiberglass insulation. The outer walls shall be per the

thickness and stiffener requirements to meet the required SMACNA pressure classification.

The inner walls shall be 22 gauge, with 3/32” holes staggered on 3/16” centers, and shall turn

down 90 degrees to seal ends of lined portions of duct. Lining shall be 1.5 lb. per square foot

density fiberglass insulation, and shall have a continuous mylar or approved equal coating. All

lining and coatings shall meet a Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum,


2.5 METAL DUCTWORK (MANUFACTURED ROUND AND FLAT OVAL DUCTWORK)

A. Approved manufacturers (Single-wall and double-wall):

1. Advanced Sheet Metal

2. Allied Mechanical

3. LaPine Metal Products

4. Lindab.

5. Mill Creek Fabrication


7. Set Duct Industries.

8. United McGill Corporation.

9. Universal Spiral Air

10. Zinger Sheet Metal


B. Round and Flat Oval Ducts shall be machine made from round spiral lockseam duct with light

reinforcing corrugations; fittings manufactured of at least two gages heavier metal than similar-

sized straight duct.

1. Tees and laterals shall be 45 degree lateral taps, conical tees, or wye fittings, unless other

fitting types are explicitly called for on drawings.

SECTION 23 31 00


PAGE 5 OF 8



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

2. Elbows shall be segmented or segmented standing seam type.

C. Transverse Joints: Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards

– Metal and Flexible, Figure 3-1 “Round Duct Transverse Joints”. Flanged joints are required in

the following locations:

1. Where single or double-wall round or flat oval ductwork is exposed in a finished space

(unless a different joining means is explicitly indicated on drawings).

2. In round ducts 60 inches or larger in outside diameter.

D. Longitudinal Seams: Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction

Standards – Metal and Flexible, Figure 3-2 “Round Duct Longitudinal Seams”, spiral seam RL-1

only. Longitudinal joints are not acceptable unless explicitly indicated.

E. Double Wall Insulated Round and Flat Oval Ducts: Ducts shall have galvanized steel outer and

inner walls, and 1 inch (25 mm) 2 inch (50 mm) thick fiberglass insulation. The outer walls shall

be per the requirements described above for single wall round and flat oval metal ductwork.

The inner walls shall be minimum 22 gauge, with 3/32” holes staggered on 3/16” centers, and

shall turn down 90 degrees to seal ends of lined portions of duct. The inner walls shall be

connected with a separate slip coupling, fastened and sealed to eliminate any exposed

insulation, rough edges or airflow obstructions. Duct lining shall be 1.5 lb. per square foot

density fiberglass insulation, and shall have a continuous mylar coating. All lining and coatings

shall meet a Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723. Lining thickness shall be as indicated on

drawings.

F. PVC Coated Steel Ducts: UL 181, Class 1, G-60 galvanized steel spiral duct and fittings coated

with 4 mil polyvinyl chloride plastic on outside and 2 mil thick on inside, gauge per SMACNA

HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible (unless indicated otherwise), 200F

temperature rating.

2.6 CASINGS AND PLENUMS

A. Mount floor mounted casings on 4 inch high concrete curbs. At floor, rivet panels on 8 inch

centers to angles. In floors of acoustically lined plenums and casings, provide liner of 18 gage

galvanized expanded metal mesh supported at 12 inch centers, turned up 12 inches at sides

with sheet metal shields.

B. Reinforce door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum supporting

angles. Install hinged access doors where indicated or required for access to equipment for

cleaning and inspection.

C. Fabricate acoustic plenums and casings with reinforcing turned inward. Provide 16 gage back

facing and 22 gage perforated front facing with 3/32 inch diameter holes on 5/32 inch centers.

Unless otherwise indicated, construct panels 3 inches thick packed with 4.5 lb/cu ft minimum

glass fiber media, on inverted channels of 16 gauge.

2.7 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Unless indicated otherwise, duct hangers and supports shall be in compliance with Chapter 4 of

SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, except as modified herein.

B. Hanger Rods shall be ASTM A 36/A 36M galvanized steel, threaded both ends, threaded one

end, or continuously threaded.

2.8 DUCT SEALANTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Hardcast

2. McGill Airseal LLC

3. Foster Products

SECTION 23 31 00


PAGE 6 OF 8



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

4. Permatite

B. Non-hardening, water and water-vapor resistant, mildew and mold resistant.

C. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration and

compatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class of ducts.

D. VOC Content: Not more than 250 g/L, excluding water.

E. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of zero, when tested

in accordance with ASTM E 84.

F. Pressure sensitive tape complying with UL-181A or UL-181B and installed in compliance with

the certification is approved on systems having a SMACNA pressure class of 3” W.G. or less.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install and support in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and SMACNA HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

B. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined and double-wall ducts, maintain

sizes inside lining.

C. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers.

D. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems. At the completion of air flow

measurements, provide galvanized, plastic, or rubberized plugs specifically made for sealing

duct test holes, to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated

ductwork, patch and tape insulation after test plugs are installed.

E. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and

maintenance activities.

F. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp

in direction of air flow.

G. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open

ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.

3.2 SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS

A. General-purpose ductwork, casings and plenums shall be constructed of the following materials.

Note that this paragraph does not supersede material requirements for ductwork serving

specialty systems described above.

1. Ductwork located outside: G90 Galvanized Steel, unless indicated otherwise.

2. Ductwork located inside: G60 Galvanized Steel, unless indicated otherwise.

3. Locker Room Exhaust Ductwork: G90 Galvanized Steel or Aluminum

3.3 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK CONNECTIONS

A. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with three foot maximum length of flexible

duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction.

B. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with 5 feet maximum

length of flexible duct. Flexible ducts shall be stretched tight so that no excess duct is used.

Limit changes in direction of flexible duct to a maximum of 90 degrees.

C. Connect flexible ducts to round metal ducts with draw bands and duct sealant.

D. Connect flexible ducts to oval diffuser inlets with stainless steel draw bands, sheet metal screws

and duct sealant.

SECTION 23 31 00


PAGE 7 OF 8



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

3.4 CASINGS AND PLENUMS

A. Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static pressure

holds door in closed position.

B. Where a duct or plenum is connected to an exterior or interior wall louver, and the duct or

plenum size is smaller than the louver, provide a blank-off panel sealing the louver area around

the duct. Use the same material as the duct, painted black on the exterior side. Seal the blank-

off panel water-tight to the louver frame and the duct. For exterior wall louvers, insulate the

blank-off per exhaust/relief air or outside air plenum requirements, as applicable.

C. Provide accessible cleanouts in kitchen hood exhaust ducts per NFPA 96 and State of Michigan

Mechanical Code requirements.

D. Provide residue traps in kitchen hood exhaust ducts at base of vertical risers with provisions for

clean out.

3.5 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. In areas having a metal roof deck, support ductwork and accessories directly from the building

structure. Provide supplementary steel where required. No ductwork or accessories shall be

supported from the roof deck.

B. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

C. For ductwork having a width of 36 inches or less, strap hangers or trapeze hangers may be

used. Trapeze hangers shall have bottom angle supports and strap, angle or rod hanger

elements.

D. For ductwork having a width greater than 36 inches, trapeze hangers shall be used. Trapeze

hangers shall have bottom angle supports and angle or rod hanger elements. Straps are not

permitted.

E. Flexible ductwork supports: Flexible ductwork shall be supported at minimum 5 foot spacing,

with a maximum permissible sag of 1/2” per foot between supports. Hanger or saddle material

in contact with the flexible duct shall be wide enough so that it does not reduce the internal

diameter of the duct when the supported section rests on the hanger or saddle material. In no

case shall the material contacting the flexible duct be less than 1 inch wide. More narrow

hanging materials may be used in conjunction with a sheet metal saddle that covers one-half

the circumference of the outside diameter of the flexible duct and fits neatly around the lower

half of the duct’s outer circumference.

3.6 DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASS

A. Low Pressure Supply: 2" W.G.

B. High Pressure Supply (Upstream of VAV boxes): 6” W.G.

C. Return and Relief: 2" W.G.

D. General Exhaust: 2" W.G.

E. Outside Air Intake: 2" W.G.

F. Combustion Air: 2" W.G.

G. Evaporative Condenser Intake and Exhaust: 2" W.G.

H. Emergency Generation Ventilation: 2" W.G.

3.7 DUCT SEALING REQUIREMENTS

A. Duct sealing shall be in accordance with the more stringent of ASHRAE 90.1-2013, SMACNA

HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, 2012 Edition, and the requirements listed below.

B. Seal all ductwork having a Pressure Class rating to SMACNA Seal Class A. Duct penetrations

to be sealed include wiring, tubing and rods. Duct penetrations not requiring sealant include

control rods for dampers (manual or automatic), screws and other fasteners.

SECTION 23 31 00


PAGE 8 OF 8



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

C. Seal all duct casings and plenums (outside air plenums, relief air plenums, acoustical plenums,

air handling unit inlet or discharge plenums) to SMACNA Seal Class A

D. Openings for rotating shafts shall be sealed with bushings or other devices that seal off air

leakage.

E. All connections shall be sealed, included but not limited to spin-ins, taps, other branch

connections, access doors, access panels and duct connections to equipment.

F. Sealing that would void product listings is not required.

G. Sealing of spiral lock seams is not required.

3.8 DUCTWORK LEAKAGE TESTING

A. Leakage testing is required for the following ductwork:

1. All ductwork having a SMACNA Pressure Class of 3” W.G. or higher, and all ductwork

located outdoors shall be leakage-tested.

2. Representative sections totaling no less than 25 Percent of ductwork having a SMACNA

Pressure Class of 3” W.G. shall be leakage-tested. All sections shall be selected by the

building owner or the designated representative of the building owner.

3. 100 Percent of ductwork having a SMACNA Pressure Class of 4” W.G. and higher shall be

leakage-tested.

4. The maximum permissible leakage shall be the more stringent of the following:

a. ASHRAE 90.1-2013 requirement: Maximum allowable leakage (Lmax) shall be

determined by the equation Lmax = CLP0.65.

b. SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual requirement: Round and flat oval

ducts shall be tested to SMACNA leakage class 2. Rectangular ducts shall be

leakage-tested to SMACNA leakage class 4. Where tested duct sections include a

combination of round/flat oval and rectangular ducts, they shall be tested to the more

stringent requirement.

5. Where tested duct sections include a combination of round/flat oval and rectangular ducts,

they shall be tested to the more stringent requirement.

6. Duct casings and plenums shall not be leakage-tested.

7. Leakage testing is not required for continuously welded ductwork.

8. Leakage testing shall be performed by the Contractor, in accordance with procedures

established in the SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, 2012 Edition or most

recent update.

9. Leakage testing shall be performed prior to the installation of any insulation on the duct

sections to be tested.

10. Test pressures shall equal the pressure classification of the ductwork being tested.

11. Ductwork operating under a negative pressure and requiring pressure testing shall be

tested under the corresponding positive pressure.

12. Leakage testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer, or by another authorized Owner's

representative.

13. Test results shall be recorded on SMACNA Air Duct Leakage Test Summary forms or

approved equivalent.

14. In addition to the quantitative leakage requirements described, tested ductwork shall be

free of audible leaks. At the request of the Engineer, tests may be required during non-

normal working hours (to determine the presence of audible leaks).

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 33 00

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PAGE 1 OF 7



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

SECTION 23 33 00 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Air turning vanes.

2. Duct access doors.

3. Flexible duct connections.

4. Volume control dampers.

5. Cable-controlled volume dampers.

6. Fire dampers.

7. Smoke dampers.

8. Combination fire and smoke dampers.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.

2. Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.

3. Section 23 36 00 - Air Terminal Units: Pressure regulating damper assemblies.


connections.


A. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National


B. NFPA 92A - Standard for Smoke-Control Systems Utilizing Barriers and Pressure Differences;

2009.

C. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air


D. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;

Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

E. UL 555 - Standard for Fire Dampers; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including

All Revisions.

F. UL 555S - Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems;

Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.3 COORDINATION


1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers and

duct access doors. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Provide instructions for smoke dampers, fire dampers

and combination fire and smoke dampers.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products

specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.

SECTION 23 33 00


PAGE 2 OF 7



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories

Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.


A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR TURNING VANES

A. Fabricate turning vanes and vane runners in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated.

B. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel construction; blades shall be

double-wall (airfoil) type.

C. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber

insulation.

2.2 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Nailor Industries Inc.

2. Ruskin Company.


4. Greenheck.

5. Pottorff


B. Size as required for the application and recommended by the respective manufacturer of the

device needing access or the function required.

C. Fabrication: Rigid and close-fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening

locking devices. For duct access doors located in insulated ducts, provide rigid fiberglass

insulation (thickness to match adjacent ductwork) with sheet metal cover.

1. Access doors less than 12 inches square: Secure with sash locks.

2. Access doors up to 18 inches square: Provide continuous hinges and two sash locks.

3. Access doors up to 24 x 48 inches: Continuous hinges and two compression latches with

outside and inside handles.

2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible, and as indicated.

B. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.

1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A,

minimum density 30 oz per sq yd.

a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2 inches wide.

2. Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gage thick galvanized steel.

C. Leaded Vinyl Sheet: Minimum 0.55 inch thick, 0.87 lbs per sq ft, 10 dB attenuation in 10 to

10,000 Hz range.

2.4 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Final branch takeoffs to air inlets and outlets: 45 Degree High Efficiency Take Off (H.E.T.O.

fitting, in compliance with SMACNA recommendations). Ductmate taped high efficiency takeoff

SECTION 23 33 00


PAGE 3 OF 7



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

or approved equal, 24 gauge, pre-sealed with EPDM rubber and co-polymer gaskets, material

to match adjacent ductwork, locking quadrant dampers, standoffs on insulated ductwork.

B. Dampers for locations other than final branch takeoffs to air inlets and outlets (Ruskin model

numbers are listed, to establish the level of quality required. Other listed manufacturers shall

provide products equivalent to the listed Ruskin models.):

1. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Ruskin.

b. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.

c. Nailor Industries Inc.

d. Greenheck.

e. Pottorff.

f. Substitutions: See Section 01 33 00 – Submittals and Substitutions.

2. Single Blade, Rectangular: Ruskin Model MD25.

a. Finish: Mill galvanized.

b. Maximum height: 12 Inches.

c. Maximum width: 24 Inches.

d. Blade thickness: 22 Gauge.

e. Frame thickness: 24 Gauge.

f. Shaft: 3/8 Inches square.

3. Multi-Blade, Rectangular: Ruskin Model MD35 or CD35.

a. Finish: Mill galvanized (Stainless steel).

b. Maximum height: 48 Inches for Model MD35, 72 inches for Model CD35.

c. Maximum width: 48 Inches.

d. Blade thickness: 16 Gauge.

e. Frame thickness: 16 Gauge.

f. Shafts: 1/2 Inches hexagonal.

g. Use opposed blade dampers for balancing applications. Use parallel blade dampers

for mixing applications.

4. Single Blade, Round: Ruskin Model MDRS25

a. Finish: Mill galvanized.

b. Maximum diameter: 20 Inches.

c. Blade thickness: 20 Gauge.

d. Frame thickness: 20 Gauge.

C. Maximum velocity: 1500 FPM.

D. Maximum pressure: 2.0" S.P.

E. Maximum temperature: 250 degrees F.

F. End Bearings: Molded synthetic end bearings.

G. Quadrants:

1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.

2. Rossi damper operators may be used in lieu of wingnut damper operators, at the

Contractor’s discretion.

SECTION 23 33 00


PAGE 4 OF 7



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

3. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or

adapters.

4. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends.

2.5 CABLE-CONTROLLED VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Young Regulator/Bowden.

2. Ruskin.


B. Young Regulator/Bowden model numbers are listed, to establish the level of quality required.

Other listed manufacturers shall provide products equivalent to the listed models

C. Manual damper controller and cable shall be concealed above the ceiling. Cable to consist of

Bowden cable .054” stainless steel control wire with a tensile strength of 260,000 lbs. that is

encapsulated in 1/16” flexible galvanized spiral wire sheath. Control kit shall consist of “C”

bracket to fastened above the ceiling, 7/8” diameter cold rolled steel zinc plated threaded cap

suitable for painting, and 14 gauge steel rack and pinion gear drive capable of delivering 35 in.

lbs. of push / pull torque that converts rotary motion to push-pull motion. Control shaft shall be

D-style flatted 1/4” diameter with 265-degree rotation providing graduations for positive locking

and control, and 1-1/2” linear travel capability. Control kit is designed to be imbedded in the

ceiling flush with the finished surface. Control kit shall be manually operated using Young

Regulator Model 030 wrench. Control kit shall be Young Regulator Model 270-896 or approved

equal.

2.6 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Ruskin.

2. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.


4. ABI Balance.

5. Pottorff.

6. Greenheck.

7. NCA Manufacturing.

8. United Enertech.


B. Ruskin model numbers are listed, to establish the level of quality required. Other listed

manufacturers shall provide products equivalent to the listed Ruskin models.

C. General:

1. Fusible links shall be rated for 165oF unless indicated otherwise.

2. Provide each damper with a factory switch package for remote indication of damper

position.

D. Static Fire Dampers

1. Dampers shall be ‘B’ Style unless otherwise indicated.

2. Galvanized steel: Ruskin Model IBD2.

3. Stainless steel: Ruskin Model IBD2SS.

4. Out-of-Wall Models: Ruskin Model IBD2/OW.

SECTION 23 33 00


PAGE 5 OF 7



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

5. Dampers shall be Curtain Type, 1.1/2 Hour rated, in gauges required for listing.

6. Dampers shall be U.L. 555 listed and labeled, classification R5531.

7. Provide sleeves of lengths and gauges to ensure field-compliance with U.L. listing

requirements.

8. Provide 301 stainless steel constant force closure springs (horizontal mount dampers).

E. Dynamic Fire Dampers

1. Dampers shall be ‘B’ Style unless otherwise indicated.

2. Galvanized Steel: Ruskin Model DIBD2.

3. Stainless Steel: Ruskin Model DIBD2SS.

4. Out-of-Wall Models: Ruskin Model DIBD2/OW.

5. Dampers shall be Curtain Type, 1.1/2 Hour rated, in gauges required for listing.

6. Dampers shall be U.L. 555 listed and labeled, classification R5531.

7. Provide 301 stainless steel constant force closure springs on horizontal units, and on

vertical units larger than 24”x24” size. Provide spring clips on vertical units 24”x24” size

and smaller.

8. Dynamic Closure Ratings:

a. 4000 FPM: Vertical mount only, up to 24”x24” size.

b. 3000 FPM: Vertical and horizontal mount, up to 24”x24” size.

c. 2000 FPM: Vertical and horizontal mount, all sizes.

F. Ceiling Fire Dampers

1. Ruskin Model CFD. Specific Models shall be selected to match the U.L. listing of the

Floor/Ceiling construction.

2. Dampers shall be Butterfly Type, 1.1/2 Hour rated, with galvanized steel blades with U.L.

Classified insulation.

3. Dampers shall be U.L. 555C listed and labeled, classification R8039.

4. Dampers shall have air volume adjustment capabilities.

5. For wood truss ceiling applications, provide Ruskin Model CFD7T.

G. Fire dampers for high negative pressure welding exhaust or dust collection systems shall be

Ruskin Model FDGT or equal, guillotine-type fire dampers fabricated from a fire resistant panel

used in the construction of 3 hour UL tested and labeled sliding fire doors. Dampers shall be

Class A UL listed and labeled, and shall have a 1-3/4” thick fire door, 14 gauge galvanized

frame, designed for vertical mounting in horizontal ducts.

2.7 SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Ruskin Models SD36 or SD60-2, as applicable.



4. ABI Air Balance.

5. Pottorff.

6. Greenheck.


8. United Enertech.

SECTION 23 33 00


PAGE 6 OF 7



A/E PROJECT 5-4749


B. Ruskin Models SD36 and SD60-2 are the basis of design. Other manufacturers shall meet or

exceed this quality, as determined by the Engineer.

C. For velocities below 2000 feet per minute, and pressures below 4” W.G., provide Ruskin Model

SD36 or equal.

D. For velocities between 2001 and 4000 feet per minute, and pressures below 8” W.G., provide

Ruskin Model SD60-2 or equal.

E. Provide factory sleeve and collar for each damper.

F. Provide factory switch package Ruskin SP100 or equal to allow remote indication of damper

blade position

G. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555S, and as indicated.

H. Dampers: UL Class I or II, Temperature Class 350°F or higher.

I. Operators: UL listed and labeled spring return electric type suitable for 120 volts, single phase,

60 Hz.

J. Locate damper operator on exterior of duct and link to damper operating shaft UL 555S

Leakage Class I or II, Temperature Class 350°F or higher. .

2.8 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Ruskin Model FSD36 or FSD60, as applicable.



4. ABI Air Balance.

5. Pottorff.

6. Greenheck.


8. United Enertech.


B. Ruskin Models FSD36 and FSD60 are the basis of design. Other manufacturers shall meet or

exceed this quality, as determined by the Engineer.

C. For velocities below 2000 feet per minute, and pressures below 4” W.G., provide Ruskin Model

FSD36 or equal.

D. For velocities between 2001and 4000 feet per minute, and pressures below 8” W.G., provide

Ruskin Model FSD60 or equal.

E. Provide factory sleeve and collar for each damper.

F. Provide factory switch package Ruskin SP100 or equal to allow remote indication of damper

blade position.

G. Construction: Fabricate with 16 gage galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated

bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, stainless steel jamb seals,

stainless steel closure spring, blade stops. Blades shall be Ruskin Triple V-Groove (Model

FSD36) or airfoil (Model FSD60).

H. Maximum pressure drop for a 12”x12” damper at 1000 FPM velocity shall not exceed 0.125”

W.G. Dampers shall be tested per AMCA Publication 511 and shall bear the AMCA seal for Air

Performance.

SECTION 23 33 00


PAGE 7 OF 7



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

I. Dampers shall meet the requirements for combination fire and smoke dampers established by

all pertinent NFPA and ICC International Building Code standards.

J. UL 555 rated for 1-1/2 hours.

K. UL 555S Leakage Class I or II, Temperature Class 350°F or higher.

L. Operators: UL listed and labeled spring return electric type suitable for 120 volts, single phase,

60 Hz.

M. Locate damper operator on exterior of duct and link to damper operating shaft.

N. Electro Thermal Link: Fusible link melting at 165 degrees F; 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz; UL

listed and labeled.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify that electric power is available and that the power is of the correct characteristics.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install air duct accessories in accordance with the most stringent of the following:

manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, all state and local codes, and follow SMACNA HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 23 31 00 for duct

construction and pressure class.

B. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans,

automatic dampers, at fire dampers, smoke dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers,

and elsewhere as indicated. Provide for cleaning kitchen exhaust ducts in accordance with

NFPA 96. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder

access, and as indicated. Review locations prior to fabrication.

C. Provide duct access doors on the appropriate side of fire and smoke dampers for inspection

and maintenance of the dampers and their operating parts. The access door shall not affect the

integrity of fire-resistance rated assemblies. The access openings shall not reduce the fire-

resistance rating of the assembly. Access points shall be permanently identified on the exterior

by a label having letters not less than 0.5 inch height, reading: FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER,

SMOKE DAMPER, or FIRE DAMPER.

D. Provide fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and smoke dampers at locations

indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by

authorities having jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves,

breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.

E. Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 92A.

F. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative.

G. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct connections

immediately adjacent to the equipment.

H. At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connections immediately

adjacent to the equipment; see Section 23 05 48.

I. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to registers, grilles and diffusers, regardless of

whether dampers are specified as part of the register, grille and diffuser assembly.

J. Use splitter dampers only where indicated.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 33 19

DUCT SILENCERS

PAGE 1 OF 3


SECTION 23 33 19 - DUCT SILENCERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Duct Silencers.

2. Ductwork Lagging.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.

2. Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings: Connections to silencers.

3. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Flexible duct connections.


A. AABC MN-1 - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance; Associated Air Balance Council; 2002.

B. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2008.

C. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2006.

D. AMCA 302 - Application of Sone Ratings for Non-Ducted Air Moving Devices; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 1973 (Reaffirmed 2001).

E. AMCA 303 - Application of Sound Power Level Ratings for Fans; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 1979 (R2008).

F. ANSI S1.4 - American National Standard Specification for Sound Level Meters; 1983 (R2006) with Amd.S1.4A-1985.

G. ANSI S1.8 - American National Standard Reference Quantities for Acoustical Levels; 1989 (R2006).

H. ANSI S1.13 - American National Standard Measurement of Sound Pressure Levels in Air; 2005.

I. ANSI S12.1 - American National Standard Guidelines for the Preparation of Standard Procedures to Determine the Noise Emission from Sources; 1983 (R2006).

J. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 2008.

K. ARI 575 - Method of Measuring Machinery Sound Within Equipment Rooms; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 2008.

L. ASHRAE Std 68 - Laboratory Method of Testing In-Duct Sound Power Measurement Procedure for Fans; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1997.

M. ASHRAE (HVACA) - ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2010.

N. ASTM E 477 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Acoustical and Airflow Performance of Duct Liner Materials and Prefabricated Silencers; 2006a.

O. ASTM E 596 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Noise Reduction of Sound-Isolating Enclosures; 1996 (Reapproved 2009).

P. NEBB (STDS) - Procedural Standards for the Measurement and Assessment of Sound and Vibration; National Environmental Balancing Bureau; 2006.

Q. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.

1.3 COORDINATION

SECTION 23 33 19

DUCT SILENCERS

PAGE 2 OF 3



1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide catalog information indicating, materials, dimensional data, pressure losses, and acoustical performance.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.

B. Perform Work in accordance with AMCA 300 standards and recommendations of ASHRAE Std 68.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCT SILENCERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Kinetics Noise Control: www.kineticsnoise.com

2. Dynasonics: www.dynasonics-acoustics.com.

3. SEMCO Incorporated: www.semcoinc.com.

4. Ruskin: www.ruskinsound.com.

5. United McGill: www.mcgillairsilence.com

6. Vibro-Acoustics: www.vibro-acoustics.com

7. Commercial Acoustics: www.mfmca.com.


B. Description: Duct section with sheet metal outer casing, sound absorbing fill material, and inner casing of perforated sheet metal; incorporating interior baffles of similar construction. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

C. Materials:

1. Outer Casing: Minimum 22 gage thick galvanized steel stiffened as required, with mastic filled lock formed seams, 2 inch long, 11 gage slip joints on both ends.

2. Inner Casing and Splitters: Minimum 24 gage thick perforated galvanized steel.

3. Fill: Glass fiber or mineral wool of minimum 4 lb/cu ft density.

4. Fill Liner: Bonded glass fiber matting.

D. Performance: Refer to Mechanical Equipment Schedule on drawings.

2.2 DUCTWORK LAGGING

A. Acoustic Insulation: 2 inch thick, 3 to 5 lb/cu ft density glass fiber or mineral wool insulation.

B. Covering: sheet lead with surface weight minimum 4 lb/sq ft.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Support duct silencers independent of ducts with flexible duct connections, lagged with leaded vinyl sheet on inlet and outlet. Refer to Section 23 31 00 and Section 23 33 00.

C. Install cross-talk silencers in wall. Seal wall penetrations; refer to Section 07 92 00.

D. Where indicated, lag ductwork by wrapping with insulation and covering. Apply covering to be air tight. Do not attach covering rigidly to ductwork.

E. Attach ductwork to acoustic louvers with flexible duct connections. Refer to Section 23 33 00.

SECTION 23 33 19

DUCT SILENCERS

PAGE 3 OF 3


END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 34 23

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PAGE 1 OF 6


SECTION 23 34 23 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Ceiling-mounted ventilators.

2. Centrifugal ventilators - roof downblast.

3. Inline fans

B. Related Sections

1. Section 23 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment.


3. Section 23 05 48 - Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.



1.3 COORDINATION


1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fans.

2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

3. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

4. Certified fan sound-power ratings.

5. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.

6. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.

7. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

8. Prefabricated roof curbs.

9. Fan speed controllers.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

4. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC power ventilators to include in normal and emergency operation, and maintenance manuals.

SECTION 23 34 23


PAGE 2 OF 6


1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings have been lubricated, and fans have been test-run under observation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.

1. The warranty of this equipment is to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the purchase date. Any units or parts which prove defective during the warranty period will be replaced at the Manufacturers option when returned to Manufacturer, transportation prepaid.

2. Motor Warranty is warranted by the motor manufacturer for a period of two years. Should motors furnished by us prove defective during this period, they should be returned to the nearest authorized motor service station.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CEILING-MOUNTED VENTILATORS


1. Acme Engineering & Manufacturing Corp.

2. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

3. Loren Cook Company.

4. PennBarry.

B. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation.

C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel removable for service.

D. Back-draft damper: Integral.

E. Grille: Aluminum, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew or spring retainer attachment to fan housing.

F. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-in.

G. Accessories:

1. Variable-Frequency Motor Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent.

2. Manual Starter Switch: Single-pole rocker switch assembly with cover and pilot light.

3. Time-Delay Switch: Assembly with single-pole rocker switch, timer, and cover plate.

4. Motion Sensor: Motion detector with adjustable shutoff timer.

5. Ceiling Radiation Damper: Fire-rated assembly with ceramic blanket, stainless steel springs, and fusible link.

6. Filter: Washable aluminum to fit between fan and grille.

7. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.

8. Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, and transition fittings.

2.2 CENTRIFUGAL VENTILATORS - ROOF DOWNBLAST



SECTION 23 34 23


PAGE 3 OF 6


2. Aerovent; a division of Twin City Fan Companies, Ltd.



5. PennBarry.

B. Housing: Downblast; removable extruded or spun-aluminum dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.

C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades; spark proof construction.

D. Belt Drives:

1. Resiliently mounted to housing.

2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.

3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.

4. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory.

5. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. Provide fixed pitch for use with motors larger than 5 hp.

6. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

E. Motors: Electronically Commutated Motor

1. Refer to Section 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment

F. Accessories:

1. Variable-Frequency Motor Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent.

2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inchmesh, aluminum or brass wire.

4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; factory set to close when fan stops.

5. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator; wired to close when fan stops.

6. Spark-resistant, all-aluminum wheel construction.

7. Mounting Pedestal: Galvanized steel with removable access panel.

G. Roof Curbs: Refer to Section 23 05 29 Roof Mounted Piping, Ductwork and Equipment Supports.

2.3 INLINE EXHAUST FANS



2. Aerovent; a division of Twin City Fan Companies, Ltd.



5. PennBarry.

B. General Description:

1. Base fan performance at standard conditions (density 0.075 Lb/ft3)

2. Maximum operating temperature rating shall meet application requirements.

SECTION 23 34 23


PAGE 4 OF 6


3. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacture's engraved metal nameplate containing the model number and individual serial number

C. Housing:

1. Housing Material: Reinforced steel.

2. Housing Coating: None.

3. Housing Construction: Side panels shall be easily removable for service. Include inlet and outlet flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.

D. Fan Wheels: Aluminum airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.

E. Belt Drives:

1. Resiliently mounted to housing.

2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.

3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings; minimum ABMA9, L(10) of 100,000 hours.

4. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory.

5. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. Provide fixed pitch for use with motors larger than 5 hp.

6. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

F. Direct-Drive Units: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing; with wheel, inlet cone, and motor on swing-out service door.

G. Motors: Electronically Commutated Motor

1. Refer to Section 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment

H. Accessories:

1. Access for Inspection, Cleaning, and Maintenance: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

2. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent.

3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers factory set to close when fan stops.

4. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers with electric actuator wired to close when fan stops.

5. Volume-Control Damper: Manually operated with quadrant lock, located in fan outlet.

6. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.

7. Insulated Housing: 1-inche thickness constructed of fiberglass liner with matte finish.

8. Isolation: Refer to Specification Section 23 05 48 Vibration Controls for HVAC

9. Fan Guards: 1/2- by 1-inch mesh of galvanized steel in removable frame. Provide guard for inlet or outlet for units not connected to ductwork.

10. Motor and Drive Cover (Belt Guard): Epoxy-coated steel.

11. Side Discharge: Flange connector and attachment hardware to provide right-angle discharge on side of unit.

2.4 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

SECTION 23 34 23


PAGE 5 OF 6



2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.

B. AMCA Certification: Fans shall comply with AMCA 11 and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

C. Fan Sound Ratings: Comply with AMCA 311, and label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. Sound ratings shall comply with AMCA 301. The fans shall be tested according to AMCA 300.

D. Fan Performance Ratings: Comply with AMCA 211 and label fans with AMCA-Certified Rating Seal. The fans shall be tested for air performance - flow rate, fan pressure, power, fan efficiency, air density, speed of rotation, and fan efficiency - according to AMCA 210/ASHRAE 51.

E. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

F. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

B. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install power ventilators on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 23 05 48 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."

C. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with zinc-plated hardware. Refer to Section 23 05 29 Roof Mounted Piping, Ductwork and Equipment Supports.

D. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.

E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

F. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.2 DUCTWORK CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories."


A. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, according to NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

1. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs, as specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with a black background and engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high.

SECTION 23 34 23


PAGE 6 OF 6




B. Connect control wiring according to Section 26 05 23 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that there is adequate maintenance and access space.

4. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.

5. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

6. Adjust belt tension.

7. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

8. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

9. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.

10. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

11. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.

12. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Controls and equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

E. Lubricate bearings.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fans.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 36 00

AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PAGE 1 OF 3



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

SECTION 23 36 00 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Single duct variable volume units.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 23 09 13 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC: Thermostats and

Actuators.


3. Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping: Connections to heating coils.

4. Section 23 21 16 - Hydronic Specialties: Connections to heating coils.

5. Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.


7. Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets.


connections.


A. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems; National


B. UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; Underwriters Laboratories

Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 COORDINATION


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 – Submittals and Substitutions for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data indicating configuration, general assembly, and materials used in

fabrication. Include catalog performance ratings that indicate air flow, static pressure, and NC

designation. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's

name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products

specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.



1.7 WARRANTY

A. Provide minimum one (1) year warranty to cover parts and labor.

SECTION 23 36 00

AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PAGE 2 OF 3



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS (BASE BID)

A. Trane.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS (VOLUNTARY ALTERNATES)

A. Titus.

B. Price.

C. Environmental Technologies/Johnson Controls.

D. Kreuger.

E. Nailor Industries, Inc.

F. Substitutions: See Section 01 33 00 – Submittals and Substitutions.

2.3 SINGLE DUCT VARIABLE VOLUME UNITS

A. Basic Assembly:

1. Casings: Minimum 22 gage galvanized steel.

B. Lining: One inch fiberglass, foil-faced.

C. Air Inlets: Round stub connections for duct attachment.

D. Air Outlets: Rectangular slip and drive connections.

E. Volume Damper: Construct of galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating

bearings; maximum damper leakage: 2 percent of design air flow at 1 inch rated inlet static

pressure.

F. Provide multi-point averaging inlet velocity sensors for air flow measuring and pressure-

independent flow control. Sensing probes shall be in a "cross" pattern. Flow measuring taps

shall be easily accessible. Each unit shall include a calibration chart for flow measurement.

G. Controls

1. Factory-furnished controls (controllers, damper actuators) shall be digital electronic, with a

factory-furnished, galvanized steel control enclosure having a removable cover.

2. Low voltage electric damper actuators shall be factory-furnished and installed. Controllers

and control enclosures shall be furnished field-installed by the BMS/ATC Contractor.

H. Hot Water Heating Coil:

1. Construction: 1/2 inch copper tube mechanically expanded into aluminum plate fins, leak

tested under water to 200 psig pressure, factory installed.

2. Capacity: Refer to Mechanical Equipment Schedule.

I. Electric Heating Coil:

1. Construction: UL listed, slip-in type, open coil design, integral control box factory wired

and installed, with:

a. Primary and secondary over-temperature protection.

b. Minimum airflow switch.

2. Electrical Characteristics: Refer to Mechanical Equipment Schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Provide ceiling access doors or locate units above easily removable ceiling components.

C. Support units individually from structure. Do not support from adjacent ductwork.

SECTION 23 36 00

AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PAGE 3 OF 3



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

D. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

E. Field-cut existing ductwork as required for installation of VAV retrofit terminals.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 37 00

AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PAGE 1 OF 4



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

SECTION 23 37 00 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Registers, Diffusers and Grilles.

2. Kitchen Return/Exhaust Grilles.

3. Stationary Louvers (Exterior).

4. Roof Hoods.

5. Goosenecks.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Painting of ducts visible behind outlets and inlets.


A. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and Control

Association International, Inc.; 2007.

B. ARI 890 - Standard for Air Diffusers and Air Diffuser Assemblies; Air-Conditioning and


C. ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets;

American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2006.

D. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air


1.4 COORDINATION


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 – Submittals and Substitutions for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data for construction, size, finish, type of mounting, performance, finish

type, color. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing types, sizes, locations and

applications.


A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std. 70.

B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500-L.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REGISTERS, DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES


1. Titus.

2. Krueger.

3. Price Industries.

4. Anemostat.

5. Nailor Industries, Inc.

SECTION 23 37 00


PAGE 2 OF 4



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

6. Tuttle & Bailey.


B. Refer to the Mechanical Equipment Schedule for Model numbers, air quantities, sizes, border

types, duct collar types, direction of throw, accessories and color.

C. Factory-furnished dampers shall be adjustable from the face. Dampers on diffusers with round

necks shall be radial type.

D. Construction shall be (steel) (aluminum), unless indicated otherwise on the Mechanical

Equipment Schedule.

E. Finishes shall be factory baked enamel, white finish, unless indicated otherwise.

F. Where NC-levels are not indicated on the Mechanical Equipment Schedule, they shall be

maximum NC-35.

G. Frame types shall be as indicated on the Mechanical Equipment Schedule. In hard ceilings,

provide plaster mounting frames.

H. Rectangular Ceiling Diffusers: Square or rectangular as indicated, stamped, multi-core

diffusers, four-way blow unless indicated otherwise.

I. Perforated Face Ceiling Diffusers: Fully adjustable throw pattern through internal, adjustable

direction-of-throw quadrants and a removable face.

J. Sidewall Supply Registers/Grilles: Adjustable airfoil blades with spring or other device to set

blades, double deflection, outer blades parallel to horizontal dimension unless indicated

otherwise. Frames shall be 1-1/4 inch with concealed mounting and gaskets. Frames shall be

minimum 20 gage, and blades shall be minimum 22 gage.

K. Sidewall Exhaust and Return Registers/Grilles: Fixed blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch

maximum blade spacing, blades parallel to horizontal dimension unless indicated otherwise.

Frames shall be 1-1/4 inch with concealed mounting and gaskets. Frames shall be minimum 20

gage, and blades shall be minimum 22 gage.

L. Linear Floor Supply Registers/Grilles: Extruded aluminum blades with 0 degree deflection, 1/8

x 3/4 inch on 1/4 inch centers unless indicated otherwise. Frames shall be compatible with floor

finish and shall have countersunk screw mountings.

2.2 STATIONARY LOUVERS (EXTERIOR)

A. Manufacturers:

1. Ruskin Company.

2. The Airolite Company.

3. American Warming and Ventilating.

4. Dowco

5. Greenheck

6. Construction Specialties, Inc.


8. Reliable.


B. Factory fabricated and assembled, complete with frame, mullions, and accessories;

C. AMCA Certified and labeled for Air Performance and Water Performance under AMCA 511

D. Construction:

1. Horizontal blades, extruded aluminum construction, with intermediate mullions matching

frames.

SECTION 23 37 00


PAGE 3 OF 4



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

2. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).

3. Metal Thickness: Frame 0.083 (0.125) inch; blades 0.083 (0.125) inch.

4. Factory Bird Screen: Interwoven wire mesh of steel, 0.063 inch diameter wire, 1/2 inch

open weave, diagonal design.

5. Frame Depth and Style: Refer to the Mechanical Equipment Schedule.

6. Finish and Color: Refer to the Mechanical Equipment Schedule. Where required, color

anodizing shall comply with AAMA 611 Class I, AA-M12C22A42/44.

E. Minimum Free Area: Refer to the Mechanical Equipment Schedule.

F. Pressure Drop: Air pressure drop for both exhaust and intake shall not exceed 0.15 inches w.g.

with free area air velocities of 1000 feet per minute.

G. Wind Load Resistance: Louvers shall resist positive and negative wind load of 25 psf without

damage or permanent deformation.

H. Water Penetration: Louvers shall allow a maximum of 0.01 oz/sq ft water penetration at

calculated intake design velocity based on design air flow and actual free area, when tested in

accordance with AMCA 500-L.

I. Drainable Blades: Unless indicated otherwise, louvers shall have drainable blades, consisting

of a continuous rain stop at front or rear of blade aligned with vertical gutter recessed into both

jambs of frame.

J. Thinline louvers: 2” Depth, 3/4” flanged (channel) frame, extruded aluminum alloy construction,

fixed drainable blades, minimum 0.06” thickness blades and frame, 1/2” aluminum birdscreen,

finish as indicated on the Equipment Schedule. Air pressure drop shall not exceed 0.15” w.c. at

872 feet per minute across the louver free area. Water penetration shall not exceed 0.01 oz. at

872 feet per minute across the louver free area, when tested in accordance with AMCA 500-L.

K. Brick vents: 4” Depth, blades and frames shall have 6063T5 Extruded aluminum construction,

0.10” nominal wall thickness. Louvers shall have (3) 1/8” mortar rids on top and bottom of

frame. Blades shall be at approximate 48 degree angles, with overlapping blades for visual

screening. The minimum free area shall be 39 percent. Insect screens shall be 18x16 mesh.

Frames shall be channel-type (flanged). Finish shall be clear anodize.

2.3 ROOF HOODS

A. Manufacturers

1. Cook.

2. Greenheck.

3. PennBarry.

4. Carnes.

B. Fabricate of aluminum, minimum 16 gauge base and 18 gauge hood; suitably reinforced; with

hinged hood; birdscreen with aluminum mesh birdscreens.

C. Hood bases shall be minimum 12 inches.

D. Provide factory primed finish for field painting unless indicated otherwise on drawings.

E. Provide factory 1 inch fiberglass insulation or anti-condensate coating.

F. Provide factory curbs, minimum 18” height unless indicated otherwise on drawings.

G. Sizes shall be as indicated on the Mechanical Equipment Schedule.

2.4 GOOSENECKS

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible, of minimum 18 gage galvanized steel.

SECTION 23 37 00


PAGE 4 OF 4



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

B. Provide factory curbs, minimum 16” height unless indicated otherwise on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Check locations of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in positions to

conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangements.

C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connections.

D. Provide factory installed balancing damper with register, grille or diffuser where ductwork

installation does not accommodate the installation of duct mounted balancing dampers.

E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Section 09 90 00.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 40 00

HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES

PAGE 1 OF 5


SECTION 23 40 00 - HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Disposable, extended area panel filters.

2. Disposable panel filters.

3. Filter gages.

4. Air Purification Devices.

B. Related Sections



A. ARI 850 - Commercial and Industrial Air Filter Equipment; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 2004.

B. ASHRAE Std 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1992

C. ASHRAE Std 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1999.

D. Thermal DOP Method; MIL-STD-282 - Filter Units, Protective Clothing, Gas-Mask Components, and Related Products: Performance-Test Methods; Military Specifications and Standards; 1956; Revision 4, 1995.

E. UL 586 - High Efficiency, Particulate, Air Filter Units; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

F. UL 867 - Electrostatic Air Cleaners; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

G. UL 900 - Standard for Air Filter Units; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 COORDINATION


1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly and filter frames, dimensions, motor locations and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.


A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FILTER MANUFACTURERS

A. AAF International/American Air Filter: www.aafintl.com.

SECTION 23 40 00


PAGE 2 OF 5


B. Camfil Farr Company: www.camfilfarr.com.

C. Flanders PrecisionAire Company; precisionaire.com.

D. Substitutions: See Section 01 33 00 – Submittals and Substitutions.

2.2 DISPOSABLE, EXTENDED AREA PANEL FILTERS

A. Products:

1. American Air Filter Perfect Pleat 2"

2. Camfil Farr 30/30

3. Flanders PrecisionAire Pre Pleat 40

B. Media: UL 900 Class 2, pleated, lofted, non-woven, reinforced cotton and synthetic fabric; supported and bonded to welded wire grid by corrugated aluminum separators.

1. Frame: Cardboard.

2. Nominal size: As required for specified equipment.

3. Nominal thickness: 2 inches.

C. Performance Rating, per ASHRAE Std 52.1:

1. Dust spot efficiency: 25-30 percent.

2. Weight arrestance: 90-92 percent.

3. Dust holding capacity: 170 grams.

4. Initial resistance at 500 FPM face velocity: 0.30 inch WG.

D. Performance Rating, per ASHRAE Std 52.2: MERV 7.

2.3 DISPOSABLE PANEL FILTERS

A. Products:

1. American Air Filter Heavy Duty

2. Camfil Farr 20-20

3. Flanders PrecisionAire Industrial Grade Disposable Air Filters

B. Media: UL 900 Class 2, fiber blanket, factory sprayed with flameproof, non-drip, non-volatile adhesive.

1. Nominal Size: As required for specified equipment.

2. Thickness: 1 inch.

C. Performance Rating, per ASHRAE Standard 52.1:

1. Weight arrestance: 70-75 percent.

2. Face Velocity: 500 FPM.

3. Initial Resistance: 0.20 inch WG.

D. Casing: Cardboard frame.

2.4 AIR PURIFICATION SYSTEMS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Global Plasma Solutions; IMOD System

2. Atmos Air

B. General

1. The air purification system(s) shall be of the size, type, arrangement and capacity indicated and required by the unit furnished and shall be of the manufacturer specified.

2. All other Suppliers of comparable products requesting prior approval shall: Submit for prior approval in accordance with the specification requirements.

SECTION 23 40 00


PAGE 3 OF 5


3. In addition, manufacturers submitting for prior approval for Bi-Polar Ionization must as part of the prior approval request provide their ASHRAE 62.1-2007 calculations that prove conformance to the ASHRAE Standard with the reduction of outside air to the scheduled values. A letter on the manufacturer’s letterhead requesting prior approval must accompany the request for prior approval stating their calculations are ASHRAE compliant. A third party validation study performed on a previous installation of the same application shall also be included.

C. Bi-polar Ionization Design and Performance Criteria

1. Each piece of air handling equipment, so designated on the plans, details, equipment schedules and/or specifications shall contain a Plasma Generator with Bi-polar Ionization output as described here within.

2. The Bi-polar Ionization system shall be capable of:

a. Effectively killing microorganisms downstream of the bi-polar ionization equipment (mold, bacteria, virus, etc.).

b. Controlling gas phase contaminants generated from human occupants, building structure and furnishings.

c. Capable of reducing static space charges.

d. Effectively reducing space particle counts.

e. When mounted to the air entering side of a cooling coil, keep the cooling coil free from pathogen and mold growth.

f. All manufacturers shall provide documentation by an independent NELEC accredited laboratory that proves the product has minimum kill rates for the following pathogens given the allotted time and in a space condition:

1) MRSA - >96% in 30 minutes or less

2) E.coli - > 99% in 15 minutes or less

3) TB - > 69% in 60 minutes or less

4) C. diff - >86% in 30 minutes or less

5) Noro Virus -> 93.5% in 30 minutes or less

6) Legionella -> 99.7% in 30 minutes or less

g. Capable of modular field assembly in sections.

3. The bi-polar ionization system shall operate in a manner such that equal amounts of positive and negative ions are produced. Uni-polar ion devices shall not be acceptable.

a. Air exchange rates may vary through the full operating range of a constant volume or VAV system. The quantity of air exchange shall not be increased due to requirements of the air purification system.

b. Velocity Profile: The air purification device shall not have maximum velocity profile.

4. Humidity: Plasma Generators shall not require preheat protection when the relative humidity of the entering air exceeds 85%. Relative humidity from 0 - 100% shall not cause damage, deterioration or dangerous conditions within the air purification system.

5. Equipment Requirements:

a. Electrode Specifications (Bi-polar Ionization):

1) Each alternating current (AC) Ionization Bar with Bi-polar Ionization output shall include a minimum of eighteen carbon fiber cluster ion needles per foot of coil face width shall be provided. The entire cooling coil width shall have equal distribution of ionization across the face. The plasma electrode shall require no more than 1.0” in the direction of airflow for mounting. All hardware required for

SECTION 23 40 00


PAGE 4 OF 5


mounting shall be provided by the air purification manufacturer except self-tapping screws for the power supply.

2) Electrodes shall be provided in 6.0” increments, epoxy filled for an IP55 rating and utilizing brass connection hardware that is recessed into the connection joint once fully engaged and assembled.

3) Electrodes shall be energized when the main unit disconnect is turned on.

4) The ionization output shall be a minimum of 60 million ions/cc per inch of cooling coil width as measured 1 inch from the cold plasma needles.

5) Ionization bars shall be provided with magnet mounting kits to prevent penetration into cooling coils.

6) Ionization bars shall be constructed of UL 94VO and UL746C composite material.

6. Air Handler Mounted Units: Where so indicated on the plans and/or schedules Plasma Generator(s) shall be supplied and installed. The mechanical contractor shall mount the Plasma Generator and wire it to the remote mount power supply using the cables provided by the air purification manufacturer. A 24VAC, 115VAC or 208-230VAC circuit shall be provided to the plasma generator power supply panel. No more than 15 watts shall be required per power supply. Each power supply shall be capable of powering up to 6 ionization bars or a total of 100 linear feet of bar. Each plasma generator shall be designed with powder coated metal casing, liquid tight flexible conduit and a high voltage quick connector.

7. Plenum Mounted Units: Where so indicated on the plans and/or schedules Plasma Generator(s) shall be supplied and installed. The mechanical contractor shall mount the Plasma Generator and wire it to the AHU control power (24VAC) as instructed by the Air Purification Manufacturer’s instructions or line voltage subject to power available. Each unit shall be designed with a molded casing, self-cleaning system, self-cleaning test button, power status LED and dry contacts to prove ion output is operating properly. The dry contacts shall close to prove the ion generator is working properly and may be daisy chained in series such that only one dry contact per AHU is required to interface to the BAS or the optional DDC controller.

8. Ionization Requirements:

a. Plasma Generators with Bi-polar ionization output shall be capable of controlling gas phase contaminants and shall be provided for all equipment listed above.

1) The Bi-polar ionization system shall consist of Bi-Polar Plasma Generator and power supply. The Bi-polar system shall be installed where indicated on the plans or specified to be installed. The device shall be capable of being powered by DC power or 24VAC or 94VAC to 264VAC without the use of an external transformer. Ionization systems requiring isolation transformers shall not be acceptable.

2) Ionization Output: The ionization output shall be controlled such that an equal number of positive and negative ions are produced. Imbalanced levels shall not be acceptable.

3) Ionization output from each electrode shall be a minimum of 200 million ions/sec when tested at 2” from the ionization generator.

9. Ozone Generation:

a. The operation of the electrodes or Bi-polar ionization units shall conform to UL 867-2007 with respect to ozone generation.

10. Electrical Requirements: Wiring, conduit and junction boxes shall be installed within housing plenums in accordance with NEC NFPA 70. Plasma Generator shall accept an

SECTION 23 40 00


PAGE 5 OF 5


electrical service of 24 VAC or 100 VAC to 240VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz. The contractor shall coordinate electrical requirements with air purification manufacturer during submittals.

11. Control Requirements:

a. All Plasma Generators shall have internal short circuit protection, overload protection, and automatic fault reset.

b. Integral airflow sensing shall modulate the Plasma output as the air flow varies or stops. A mechanical air flow switch shall not be acceptable as a means to activate the Plasma device due to high failure rates and possible pressure reversal.

c. The installing contractor shall mount and wire the Plasma device within the air handling unit specified or as shown or the plans. The contractor shall follow all manufacturer IOM instructions during installation.

d. All Plasma devices shall have a means to interface with the BAS system. Either a 0-10VDC output or dry contacts shall be acceptable to prove there are ions being produced. Systems providing indication that power is applied to the Plasma device, but not directly sensing the power at the ion output, shall not be acceptable.

2.5 FILTER GAGES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Dwyer Instruments, Inc: www.dwyer-inst.com.

2. H.O. Trerice Co: www.trerice.com.

3. Weiss Instruments: www.weissinstruments.com.

B. Direct Reading Dial: 3-1/2 inch diameter diaphragm actuated dial in metal case, vent valves, black figures on white background, front recalibration adjustment, range 0-0.5 inch WG, 2 percent of full scale accuracy.

C. Accessories: Static pressure tips with integral compression fittings, 1/4 inch plastic tubing, 2-way or 3-way vent valves.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install air cleaning devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with felt, rubber, or neoprene gaskets.

C. Install filter gage static pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum, in accessible position. Adjust and level.

D. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace temporary filters used during construction and testing with clean set.

E. If systems are used for temporary heating, all return air, exhaust air and outside air openings in the air handling system shall be covered with MERV 8 filter media with dust retention and anti-microbial capability, Fiberbond Dual-Ply Dustlok Media or equal. Replace filter media as required to maintain its structural integrity.

F. In systems having both pre- and final filters (bags, cartridges or carbon filters), do not install final filters until temporary construction filters have been removed, just prior to system testing, adjusting and balancing.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 52 16

CONDENSING BOILERS

PAGE 1 OF 6


SECTION 23 52 16 - CONDENSING BOILERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes gas-fired, fire-tube condensing boilers, trim, and accessories for generating hot water.


1. Section 23 09 23: Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC

2. Section 23 09 93: Sequence of Operations for HVAC Control

3. Section 23 21 13: Hydronic Piping, Valves and Accessories

1.3 COORDINATION




1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for boilers.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Source quality-control reports.

B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

C. Product Certificates:

1. ASME Stamp Certification and Report: Submit "A," "S," or "PP" stamp certificate of authorization, as required by authorities having jurisdiction, and document hydrostatic testing of piping external to boiler.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For boilers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of boilers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Floor-Mounted Fire-Tube Condensing Boilers:

a. Heat Exchanger and Pressure Vessel: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

b. Thermal Shock: 10 years

c. The boiler manufacturer shall repair or replace any part of the boiler that is found to be defective in workmanship or material within eighteen (18) months of shipment from

SECTION 23 52 16

CONDENSING BOILERS

PAGE 2 OF 6


the factory or twelve (12) months from start-up, whichever comes first. Warranty shall also include one-year labor service guarantee for all boiler parts from startup date.

2. Warranty Period for Floor-Mounted Water-Tube Condensing Boilers:

a. Heat Exchanger and Pressure Vessel: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

b. Thermal Shock: 10 years.

c. The boiler manufacturer shall repair or replace any part of the boiler that is found to be defective in workmanship or material within eighteen (18) months of shipment from the factory or twelve (12) months from start-up, whichever comes first. Warranty shall also include one-year labor service guarantee for all boiler parts from startup date.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS – HIGH EFFICIENCY BOILER

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Patterson Kelly: Model 1050

B. Cleaver Brooks: Model Clearfire LC

C. Aerco: Model Benchmark Platinum

D. Fulton: Model Endura+

E. Viessman: Model Vitocrossal 300 CA3

F. Note: The equipment supplier is also responsible for coordination of space requirements with the mechanical contractor, clearance requirements and installation requirements of non-basis of design equipment with the work of all other trades and with the space available for installation.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Boilers shall be UL/FM, IRI and CSD-1 approved, ASME Code Stamped and have an input and gross output rating as noted on the drawings when fired with natural gas. Boilers shall be sealed combustion with individually ducted fresh air and exhaust air.

B. See the plans and Equipment Schedule for model, size, and capacity.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Boiler shall be a low pressure drop, Firetube design with extended heating surfaces and water-backed furnace, suitable for primary flow piping arrangements. Condensing section consists of duplex stainless steel firetubes and tube sheets, along with SS flue gas condensate collection chamber. The design shall be a true counter-flow arrangement for maximum condensing and heat transfer effectiveness.

B. The boiler shall be suitable for variable flow primary pumping only systems without the need for a dedicated boiler circulating pump.

C. The Vessel shall be mounted on a structural steel base with exhaust gases and condensate collected in a SS flue-gas/condensate chamber complete with drain trap and connection provisions for draining condensation from the products of combustion. A condensate neutralizing box complete with neutralization media shall be shipped loose for field installation by contractor.

D. The furnace and firetubes shall be fully accessible without burner disassembly or removal from the boiler. The burner assembly shall be complete with davit arm and hinges for serviceability.

E. The vessel shall be fully insulated with a minimum of 2" of insulation, guaranteeing external convection and radiation heat losses to the boiler room from the boiler to be less than 0.25% of the rated capacity.

F. With a return temperature of 140F, the boiler shall have a minimum acceptable fuel-to-water efficiency of 88%. There shall be no minimum return temperature limit for the boiler.

G. A threaded air vent connection shall be furnished at the top of the boiler for field piping to an expansion tank, air separator, or for the addition of an auto-vent valve when a bladder type expansion tank is utilized.

SECTION 23 52 16

CONDENSING BOILERS

PAGE 3 OF 6


H. To drain the boiler, a bottom-threaded connection shall be provided at the rear of the boiler and field piped by the installing contractor with a manual full size shutoff valve to drain.

I. Boiler design shall permit operation with a water condition of 8.0-9.5 pH range.

2.4 FUEL BURNING SYSTEM

A. General: Forced draft, gas-fired premix surface combustion burner mounted in and integral with the boiler. A hinged swing-out burner assembly is provided for ease of service and inspection of burner, as well as the fireside of heat exchanger

B. The pre-mix design shall utilize a PID loop controlled modulating variable speed fan connected to a venturi to simultaneously modulate fuel and air for a minimum 5:1 turndown ratio. Staged and/or stepped modulation at any point in the modulation range will not be accepted.

C. Burner head shall be constructed of a SS alloy metal fiber for solid body radiation of the burner flame. Combustion shall take place on the surface of the burner mantle, which shall be constructed of a woven SS alloy material creating a 360 degree low temperature radiant flame.

D. Emissions: The equipment shall be guaranteed to limit NOx emissions to 20 PPM or less.

E. The combustion air delivery system shall be of spark resistant construction and suitable for handling a mix of fuel and air.

F. Gas Train - As a minimum, the gas train shall meet the requirements of cULus and ASME CSD-1 and shall include:

1. Low Gas Pressure Interlock, manual reset.

2. High Gas Pressure Interlock, manual reset.

3. Upstream and downstream manual test cocks.

4. Ball Type manual shutoff valve upstream and downstream of the main safety shut-off gas valve(s).

5. Unibody, motorized double safety gas valve-regulator combination or motorized single safety gas valve-regulator combination with proof-of-closure.

6. Gas Pressure Regulator as required for job site conditions

7. Pilot gas train with pilot regulator and solenoid safety shut-off valve

8. Union connection to permit burner servicing.

G. Combustion Air Proving Switch shall be furnished to ensure sufficient combustion airflow is present for burner ignition firing.

H. Provision shall be made for safe operation and/or shut down in the case of a blocked flue or blocked condensate situation.

2.5 TRIM

A. Temperature and pressure gauges shall be mounted on the water outlet.

B. Solid State Low water cut-off probe with manual reset and test switch.

C. Manual Reset High Limit Temperature sensor; range not to exceed 250 deg F and shall be an integral device of the Boiler Burner Control and UL recognized as a limit control.

D. Outlet water supply temperature sensing probe for modulation and operating water limit setpoint.

E. Return temperature water-sensing probe for operating water limit setpoint and enhanced control functionality.

F. ASME rated pressure relief valve.

G. A condensate drain connection shall be available on the boiler, allowing flue gas condensate to freely drain out of the exhaust manifold of the boiler. A condensate drain trap assembly shall accompany the boiler system with a pH neutralization kit.

SECTION 23 52 16

CONDENSING BOILERS

PAGE 4 OF 6


H. The water supply and return connections on the boiler shall be 150# flanged connections. The water connections shall not be designed to support any external structural load from the piping system.

I. The boiler shall come with lifting eyes and fork truck accessibility for rigging.

J. Instructions for installation, operation and maintenance of the boiler shall be contained in a manual provided with each boiler.

K. A wiring diagram corresponding to the boiler configuration shall be included with each boiler.

L. Each boiler shall be installed and operated in a functioning hydronic system, inclusive of venting, as part of the manufacturing process. A factory test fire report corresponding to the boiler configuration shall be included with each boiler.

M. Low water cut-off and inlet flow switch to automatically prevent burner operation when water falls below safe level or on low flow through boiler.

2.6 CONTROLS

A. The Boiler shall include a Boiler System control which shall be an integrated, solid state digital micro-processing modulating device, complete with sequence indication, fault reset, mode selection, and parameterized setpoints. It shall be mounted at the front of the boiler panel for easy access and viewing.

B. Controller shall provide for both flame safety and boiler control through separate power supplied CPU's (to meet NFPA) and shall perform the following functions:

1. Burner sequencing with safe start check, pre-ignition interlock, pre-purge, electronic gas pilot ignition with UV flame sensing to prove combustion.

2. Flame and Running Interlock Supervision. The control shall provide pre-purge and post-purge and shall maintain a running history of operating hours, number of cycles, and the most recent 15 lockouts. Each lockout message in history shall include boiler sequence status and multi-point diagnostic details at time of lockout, including First Out Annunciation of Running Interlock lockout.

3. Safety Shutdown with display of lockout and Soft Shutdown of any non-safety related disabling of boiler operation.

4. PID Modulating control of the variable speed fan for fuel/air input relative to load requirements.

5. Gas pressure supervision, high and low.

6. Combustion Air Proving Supervision.

7. High Air Pressure (blocked flue or blocked condensate drain) Supervision.

8. The supply temperature, return temperature, and set-point temperature shall be displayed at all times on the boiler overview of the touch screen display.

9. Controller shall be equipped with a touch screen display for configuration set up, trouble shooting, and operational status, and shall include ModBus and Bacnet communication gateway for remote monitoring of this information.

10. Include the control of system primary heating pumps, isolation valves, start permissive interlock, sequencing of boilers and pumps.

11. BACnet interface for BMS interface. Refer to Specifications Sections 29 09 23 and 29 09 93 for additional information.

12. Password protect options.

13. Outdoor reset capabilities for an individual boiler with warm weather shutdown.

C. All boiler parameter input control set-points shall be factory configured with starting conditions programmed at the time of initial jobsite operation.

SECTION 23 52 16

CONDENSING BOILERS

PAGE 5 OF 6


D. All controls to be panel mounted and so located on the boiler as to provide ease of servicing the boiler without disturbing the controls and also located to prevent possible damage by water.

E. Electrical power supply shall be 460 volts, 60 cycle, 3 phase for the combustion air blower and variable speed drive; a control transformer shall provide 120 volts used for control circuit requirements.

F. When multiple boilers are to be installed together, a Lead-Lag system integration control shall be provided to stage up to 8 boilers. The Master control resides within the on-board boiler control. The control shall include automatic selection and modulation of needed boilers based on temperature set point and firing rate threshold; an adjustable outdoor reset schedule, and setback capability. The control shall modulate boiler(s) at a lower firing rate, before allowing any boiler to operate at high fire. This method takes advantage of the inverse efficiency (lower fire rate, higher efficiency) characteristic of condensing boilers. Each Slave boiler shall have the capability of enabling a connected isolation valve as needed. The Master and Slave boiler controls shall monitor outdoor temperature, supply water temperature, return water temperature,

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install boiler and provide connection of natural gas service in accordance with requirements of NFPA 54 and applicable codes.

B. Pipe relief valves to nearest floor drain.

C. Equipment and materials shall be installed in an approved manner and in accordance with the boiler manufacturers’ installation requirements.

D. Assemble unit sections and parts shipped loose or unassembled for shipment purposes. Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations and instructions.

E. Install electrical control items furnished by manufacturer per wiring diagram provided by manufacturer.

F. Complete water piping installation as required by manufacturer for operation of system.

G. All aspects of installation of Boiler Plant shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. The vent system must conform with all manufacturer’s recommendations and shall utilize UL listed stainless steel AL-29-4C rated for positive pressure. The vent must be sized in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.2 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Provide 4 hours of training by factory-trained personnel in the operation and maintenance of the boilers.

3.3 BOILER STARTUP

A. The boiler system shall be started up with Contractor assistance after pressure testing and cleaning is complete.

B. The Contractor shall pay for startup of the boiler by a factory representative. Include CSD-1 testing and documentation.

C. Start-up system with a factory representative approval, and coordinate approval with Insurance company. NOTE: It is imperative that the installing contractor be on-site to work with the factory representative (burner technician) during startup, to assist him with his basic knowledge of the project and the associated control systems.

D. Provide two year system guarantee from startup date, including boiler service guarantee.

E. Instruct Owner's personnel in systems operation and provide as-built drawings and control information.

F. Training shall be provided onsite by qualified contractor to the Owner's operations staff for all components of heating and cooling systems and subsystems.

SECTION 23 52 16

CONDENSING BOILERS

PAGE 6 OF 6


G. Per CSD-1 requirements, the installing Contractor shall provide the Owner the manufacturer's operating, testing, servicing, and cleaning instructions for the controls and safety devices; complete wiring and piping diagrams, and written instructions that the operating, testing, and servicing must be done by a "qualified individual". The Contractor shall obtain a written, signed receipt from the Owner signifying that they received this information.

H. Make all necessary adjustments, particularly including draft and gas burner adjustments.

I. Verify all existing field conditions and establish all dimensions necessary for installation. Contractor is responsible for all dimensions and acceptance of existing conditions.

J. Where boilers are used for temporary heat, contractor shall retest boiler, burner, and control system prior to turning it over to the owner.

K. Adjust control settings such a low fire operator, high fire operator, cut-in, high limit and temperature setpoints to manufacturer's recommended levels.

L. Boiler manufacturer shall provide spare ignitor and flame sensor parts and any special tools that are required.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 73 13

MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS

PAGE 1 OF 9


SECTION 23 73 13.16 - MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Insulated, double-wall-casing, indoor air-handling units that are factory assembled using multiple section components, including the following:

a. Casings.

b. Fans, drives, and motors.

c. Coils.

d. Air filtration.

e. Dampers.

f. Air-to-air energy recovery.

g. Air blender.

1.3 COORDINATION


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each air-handling unit.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

3. Include unit dimensions and weight.

4. Include cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories.

5. Fans:

a. Include certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

b. Include certified fan-sound power ratings.

c. Include fan construction and accessories.

d. Include motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.

6. Include certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.

7. Include filters with performance characteristics.

8. Include dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-handling units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of indoor, semi-custom air-handling units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 2 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

SECTION 23 73 13


PAGE 2 OF 9


PART 2 - PRODUCTS



B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-handling units and components.

C. ASHRAE 62.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

D. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

E. Structural Performance: Casing panels shall be self-supporting and capable of withstanding positive/negative 8-inch wg of internal static pressure, without exceeding a midpoint deflection of 0.0042 inch/inch of panel span.

F. Outdoor Unit Floor and Roof Panels: Self-supporting and capable of withstanding 300-lb static load at midspan, without exceeding a midpoint deflection of 0.0042 inch/inch.

G. Outdoor Unit Roof Panels: Self-supporting and capable of withstanding a static snow load of 30 lb./sq. ft., without exceeding a midpoint deflection of 0.0042 inch/inch.

H. Casing Leakage Performance: ASHRAE 111, Class 6 leakage or better at plus or minus 8-inch wg.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS


1. Daikin Applied.

2. Trane.

3. YORK; a Johnson Controls company.

2.3 UNIT CASINGS

A. Frame: Modular and providing overall structural integrity without reliance on casing panels for structural support.

B. Base Rail:

1. Material: Galvanized steel.

2. Height: 6 inches.

C. Casing Joints: Hermetically sealed at each corner and around entire perimeter.

D. Double-Wall Construction:

1. Outside Casing Wall:

a. Material, Galvanized Steel.

b. Factory Finish: Provide manufacturer's standard finish.

2. Inside Casing Wall:

a. Material, Galvanized Steel.

E. Floor Plate:

1. Material, Galvanized Steel.

F. Outdoor Unit Roof: Cross-broken and pitched with "C" caps over joints to provide watertight seal.

G. Outdoor Unit Piping Vestibule: Insulated with same insulation and thickness as casing, 24 inches deep by full width of piping connections.





SECTION 23 73 13


PAGE 3 OF 9


H. Casing Insulation:

1. Materials: Injected polyurethane foam insulation.

2. Casing Panel R-Value: Minimum R-13.

3. Insulation Thickness: 2 inches.

4. Thermal Break: Provide continuity of insulation with no through-casing metal in casing walls, floors, or roofs of air-handling unit.

I. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

J. Panels, Doors, and Windows:

1. Panels:

a. Fabrication: Formed and reinforced, double-wall and insulated panels of same materials and thicknesses as casing.

b. Fasteners: Two or more camlock type for panel lift-out operation. Arrangement shall allow panels to be opened against airflow

c. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.

d. Size: Large enough to allow unobstructed access for inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit's internal components.

2. Doors:

a. Fabrication: Formed and reinforced, double-wall and insulated panels of same materials and thicknesses as casing.

b. Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless-steel piano hinge and two wedge-lever latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange doors to be opened against airflow. Provide safety latch retainers on doors so that doors do not open uncontrollably. Doors shall be fully removable without the use of specialized tools

c. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.

d. Size: Large enough to allow for unobstructed access for inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit's internal components.

3. Service Lights: LED vaporproof luminaire with individual switched junction box located outside, adjacent to access door.

a. Locations: Fan section(s).

4. Convenience Outlets: One 20-A duplex GFCI receptacle per location with junction box located on outside casing wall.

a. Locations: Fan section.

K. Condensate Drain Pans:

1. Construction:

a. Double-wall, stainless-steel sheet with space between walls filled with foam insulation and moisture-tight seal.

2. Drain Connection:

a. Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow. Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan.

b. Connection shall be of sufficient size to collect all condensation produced from the coil.

3. Slope: Minimum 0.125-in./ft. slope, to comply with ASHRAE 62.1, in at least two planes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and from humidifiers and to direct water toward drain connection.

SECTION 23 73 13


PAGE 4 OF 9


4. Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face for distance to comply with ASHRAE 62.1.

5. Width: Entire width of water producing device.

6. Depth: A minimum of 2 inches deep.

7. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect condensate from top coil.

2.4 FAN, DRIVE, AND MOTOR SECTION

A. Fan and Drive Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower.

B. Fans: Centrifugal, rated according to AMCA 210; galvanized steel; mounted on solid-steel shaft.

1. Shafts: With field-adjustable alignment.

a. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway.

2. Shaft Bearings:

a. Grease-Lubricated Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, ball or roller bearings with adapter mount and two-piece, cast-iron housing with grease lines extended to outside unit and an L-50 rated life of 200,000.

3. Housings: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to form curved scroll housings with shaped cutoff and spun-metal inlet bell.

a. Bracing: Steel angle or channel supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.

4. Housings, Plenum Fans: Steel frame and panel; fabricated without fan scroll and volute housing. Provide inlet screens for Type SWSI fans.

5. Plenum Fan Arrays: Contained as defined in AHRI 430. Steel or aluminum frame with inlet cone and structural framing around each fan built into an array of multiple fans. Provide backdraft dampers at each fan to prevent short circuiting of flow if one fan is not operating.

6. Mounting: For internal vibration isolation. Factory-mount fans with manufacturer's standard restrained vibration isolation mounting devices having a minimum static deflection of 1 inch.

7. Shaft Lubrication Lines: Extended to a location outside the casing.

8. Flexible Connector: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip minimum 3-1/2 inches wide, attached to two strips of minimum 2-3/4-inch-wide by 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized-steel sheet.

a. Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric, double coated with neoprene. Fabrics, coatings, and adhesives shall comply with UL 181, Class 1.

1) Fabric Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.

2) Fabric Minimum Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.

3) Fabric Minimum Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

C. Drive, Direct: Factory-mounted, direct drive.

D. Motors:

1. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment.


SECTION 23 73 13


PAGE 5 OF 9



4. Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on exterior of unit.

2.5 COIL SECTION

A. General Requirements for Coil Section:

1. Comply with AHRI 410.

2. Fabricate coil section to allow removal and replacement of coil for maintenance and to allow in-place access for service and maintenance of coil(s).

3. For multizone units, provide air deflectors and air baffles to balance airflow across coils.

4. Coils shall not act as structural component of unit.

B. Coils:

1. Hydronic Coils:

a. Piping Connections: Threaded or Flanged, same end of coil.

b. Tube Material: Copper.

c. Fin Type: Plate.

d. Fin Material: Aluminum or Copper.

e. Fin and Tube Joint: Mechanical bond.

f. Headers:

1) Cast iron with cleaning plugs and drain and air vent tappings extended to exterior of unit.

2) Seamless copper tube with brazed joints, prime coated.

3) Fabricated steel, with brazed joints, prime coated.

4) Provide insulated cover to conceal exposed outside casings of headers.

g. Frames: Galvanized steel channel frame.

h. Coil Working-Pressure Ratings: 200 psig, 325 deg F.

i. Coating: Corrosion-resistant coating.

2. Refrigerant Coil:

a. Tubes: Copper.

b. Fins:

1) Material: Aluminum or Copper.

c. Fin and Tube Joints: Mechanical bond.

d. Headers: Seamless-copper headers with brazed connections.

e. Frames: Galvanized steel.

f. Coatings: Corrosion-resistant coating.

g. Ratings: Designed, tested, and rated according to ASHRAE 33 and AHRI 410.

1) Working Pressure: Minimum 300 psig.

2.6 AIR FILTRATION SECTION

A. Particulate air filtration is specified in Section 23 40 00 HVAC Air Cleaning Devices.

B. Side-Access Filter Mounting Frames:

1. Particulate Air Filter Frames: Match inner casing and outer casing material, and insulation thickness. Galvanized steel track.

a. Prefilters: Incorporate an integral 2-inch thick track with same access as primary filter.

SECTION 23 73 13


PAGE 6 OF 9


b. Sealing: Incorporate positive-sealing device to ensure seal between gasketed material on channels to seal top and bottom of filter cartridge frames to prevent bypass of unfiltered air.

2.7 DAMPERS

A. Dampers: Low-leakage, double-skin, airfoil-blade, galvanized steel dampers with compressible jamb seals and extruded-vinyl blade edge seals in opposed or parallel-blade arrangement (as indicated on schedule) with zinc-plated steel operating rods rotating in stainless steel sleeve bearings mounted in a single galvanized steel frame, and with operating rods connected with a common linkage. Leakage rate shall not exceed 4 cfm/sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and 8 cfm/sq. ft. at 4-inch wg.

B. Dampers with Airflow Measurement: Comply with requirements in Section 23 09 13 "Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC."

C. Damper Operators: Comply with requirements in Section 23 09 13 "Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC."

2.8 MATERIALS

A. Steel:

1. ASTM A36/A36M for carbon structural steel.

2. ASTM A568/A568M for steel sheet.

B. Stainless Steel:

1. Manufacturer's standard grade for casing.

2. Manufacturer's standard type, ASTM A240/A240M for bare steel exposed to airstream or moisture.

C. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M.

D. Aluminum: ASTM B 09.

E. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Coat with a corrosion-resistant coating capable of withstanding a 3000-hour salt-spray test according to ASTM B117.

1. Standards:

a. ASTM B117 for salt spray.

b. ASTM D2794 for minimum impact resistance of 100 in-lb.

c. ASTM B3359 for cross hatch adhesion of 5B.

2. Application: Immersion or Spray.

3. Thickness: 1 mil.

4. Gloss: Minimum gloss of 60 on a 60-degree meter.

2.9 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTIONS

A. Air Handling Unit shall have a single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent protection.

B. Air Handing Unit shall be wired to junction box(es) on exterior of unit for field electrical connections.

2.10 CONTROLS

A. Controls shall be field-furnished and installed by the Temperature Control Contractor. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Section 23 09 23 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC."

SECTION 23 73 13


PAGE 7 OF 9


2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. AHRI 430 Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested according to AHRI 430 and shall be listed and labeled by AHRI.

B. Fan Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear AMCA-certified sound ratings seal.

C. Fan Performance Rating: Factory test fan performance for airflow, pressure, power, air density, rotation speed, and efficiency. Rate performance according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating."

D. Water Coils: Factory tested to 300 psig according to AHRI 410 and ASHRAE 33.

E. Steam Coils: Factory tested to 300 and 200 psig underwater according to AHRI 410 and ASHRAE 33.

F. Refrigerant Coils: Factory tested to minimum 450-psig internal pressure and to minimum 300-psig internal pressure while underwater, according to AHRI 410 and ASHRAE 33.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Installer shall examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Installer shall examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Installer shall examine roughing-in for steam, hydronic, and condensate drainage piping systems and electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install air-handling units on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete.

2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 23 05 48.13 Vibration Controls for HVAC.

B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and maintenance.

C. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place in unit and at all return openings in system. Replace temporary filters used during construction and testing, with new, clean filters.

D. Install filter-gauge, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gauges on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Provide filter gauges on filter banks, installed with separate static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters.

E. Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in Section 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to air-handling unit, allow for service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.

SECTION 23 73 13


PAGE 8 OF 9


D. Connect condensate drain pans using NPS 1-1/4, ASTM B88, Type M copper tubing. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction per detail on construction drawings.

E. Hot- and Chilled-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 23 21 13 Hydronic Piping and Section 23 21 16 Hydronic Specialties. Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each coil supply connection. Install balancing valve and union or flange at each coil return connection.

F. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 23 23 00 "Refrigerant Piping and Accessories." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each supply and return connection.


A. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.

B. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, according to NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

D. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with a black background and engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high.



B. Connect control wiring according to Section 26 05 23 Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables.

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

3. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, controllers, and switches.

4. Verify proper motor rotation direction, free fan wheel rotation, and smooth bearing operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards.

5. Verify that bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts are lubricated with factory-recommended lubricants.

6. Verify that zone dampers fully open and close for each zone.

7. Verify that face-and-bypass dampers provide full face flow.

8. Verify that outdoor- and return-air mixing dampers open and close and maintain minimum outdoor-air setting.

9. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.

10. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed for electric coils.

11. Install new, clean filters.

12. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected duct systems are in fully open position.

B. Starting procedures for air-handling units include the following:

1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan to indicated rpm. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.

SECTION 23 73 13


PAGE 9 OF 9


2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.

3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan performance.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 18 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.8 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling unit and air-distribution systems and after completing startup service, clean air-handling units internally to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers, coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, fill water and steam coils with water, and test coils and connections for leaks.

2. Charge refrigerant coils with refrigerant and test for leaks.

3. Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.


B. Air-handling unit or components will be considered defective if unit or components do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-handling units.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 81 01

TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS

PAGE 1 OF 8



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

SECTION 23 81 01 - TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Finned tube radiation and convectors.

2. Fan Coil Units.

3. Unit heaters.

4. Cabinet unit heaters.

5. Unit ventilators (Conventional Style).

6. Blower coil units.

7. Hydronic radiant ceiling panels.

8. Electric unit heaters.

9. Gas fired unit heaters

B. Related Sections





5. Section 26 05 83 - Equipment Wiring Connections.

1.3 COORDINATION





A. Product Data: Provide typical catalog of information including arrangements.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate cross sections of cabinets, grilles, bracing and reinforcing, and typical elevations.

2. Indicate mechanical and electrical service locations and requirements.,


A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions and recommendations.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and locations of access

doors in radiation cabinets required for access or valving.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturers descriptive literature, operating

instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listings.

D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's

name and registered with manufacturer.

SECTION 23 81 01


PAGE 2 OF 8



A/E PROJECT 5-4749


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FINNED TUBE RADIATION AND CONVECTORS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Sterling.

2. Vulcan.

3. Modine.

4. Zehnder Rittling.

5. Sigma.


B. Element Hangers: Quiet operating, ball bearing cradle type providing unrestricted longitudinal

movement, on enclosure brackets.

C. Enclosures: 0.0478 inch steel up to 18 inches in height, 0.0598 inch steel over 18 inches in

height, with easily jointed components.

1. Support rigidly, on wall or floor mounted brackets.

D. Finish: Factory applied baked enamel. Color shall be from manufacturer’s standard selections,

unless indicated otherwise.

E. Access Doors: For otherwise inaccessible valves, provide factory-made permanently hinged

access doors, 6 x 7 inch minimum size, integral with cabinet.

2.2 FAN COIL UNITS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Trane

2. York/JCI

3. Daiken

4. Carrier

B. Capacities:

1. Refer to the Equipment Schedule on drawings.

2. Certification: Unit capacities shall be certified under Industry Room Fan Coil Air

Conditioner Certification Program in accordance with AHRI Standard 440-97.

C. Electrical: Units shall have factory installed disconnect switches. Motor voltages shall be as

indicated on the Equipment Schedule on the drawings. Units shall be U.L. listed.

D. Fan Speed Control: Unit-mounted (wall-mounted), incorporating a 0-10 Vdc signal for limitless

control of the fan RPM between the factory-set low and high speeds. Each unit shall have a line

voltage-to-24 volt transformer and an ECM motor controller.

E. Controls: Field-furnished and installed (factory-furnished, wired, tested, and configured building

automation system controllers, BACnet or LonTalk compatible, as required for coordination with

the building automation system).

F. Unit configurations and sizes shall be as indicated on the Equipment Schedule on the drawings.

SECTION 23 81 01


PAGE 3 OF 8



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

G. Basic Construction: Units shall include a chassis, coil(s), fan wheel(s), fan casing(s), fan board

and motor(s). Units shall also include a noncorrosive, main drain pan, positively sloped in every

plane, and insulated with closed-cell insulation. Horizontal units and all units with standard

piping packages also include a factory auxiliary drain pan. Steel parts exposed to moisture shall

be galvanized. The fan board assembly and both drain pans shall be easily removable. The fan

board assembly shall include a quick disconnect motor plug. The chassis construction shall be

18-gage galvanized steel. The unit shall be acoustically and thermally insulated with closed-cell

insulation. All panels shall be made rigid by channel forming.

H. All exposed cabinet parts shall have a factory baked powder paint finish meeting ASTM B117

standards (salt spray test).

I. Front panels on vertical cabinet and slope top units shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel

construction. All other panels on vertical cabinet and slope top units shall be 18 gauge

galvanized steel construction. All panels on horizontal cabinet units shall be 18 gauge

galvanized steel construction. Front panels on recessed units shall be 18 gauge galvanized

steel construction. All recessed and concealed panels shall be 18 gauge galvanized steel

construction.

J. Extended End Pockets: None (Provide 8 inch extended end pockets on the piping end)(Provide

8 inch extended end pockets on the controls end).

K. Vertical cabinet units, slope-top units and horizontal cabinet units shall have hinged access

doors with key locks.

L. Provide leveling feet on vertical and low vertical cabinet units.

M. Unit Sub-Bases: None (16 Gauge steel construction, painted black to match the units’ standard

base. Sub-base height shall be X inches. The sub-base depth and width shall match the unit

housing).

N. False Backs: None (18 Gauge steel construction, painted to match the units’ cabinets. False

back depth shall be X inches. The false backs height and width shall match the unit cabinets.

O. Unit Inlets: Refer to the Equipment Schedule on the drawings for unit inlet configurations.(Front

toe space)(Front bar grille)(Front stamped louver)(Bottom stamped louver)(Bottom toe

space)(Back duct collar)(Back open return)(Back stamped louver).

P. Unit Outlets: Refer to the Equipment Schedule on the drawings for unit outlet configurations.

(Front duct collar)(Front bar grille)(Front stamped louver)(Front quad grille)(Top quad grille)(Top

bar grille)(Top duct collar).

Q. Outside air dampers: None (Manual dampers, adjustable from zero to 100 percent)(Automatic

two-position dampers, adjustable from zero to 50 percent)(Economizer dampers, with field-

adjustable minimum positions)(Refer to Equipment Schedule on the drawings for damper

types)(Refer to the Equipment schedule on the drawings for damper locations).

R. Fans: Centrifugal forward-curved, double width, galvanized steel fan wheels with formed sheet

metal fan housings.

S. Filters: One inch throwaway filters, (MERV 8).

T. Fan motors shall be free discharge (high static) ECM type.

U. Coils: Aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. Maximum coil working pressure at

300 psig. Maximum entering water temperature at 200oF. Coils shall have manual air vents.

Quantities of coils and number of coil rows shall be as indicated on the Equipment Schedule on

the drawings.

V. Electric Heat: None (Refer to the Equipment Schedule on the drawings).

W. Factory Piping Package: None (Describe factory piping package).

SECTION 23 81 01


PAGE 4 OF 8



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

X. Recessing Flanges: None (Provide factory recessing flanges on semi-recessed vertical cabinet

units.

Y. Projection Panels: None (Provide factory projection panels on semi-recessed vertical cabinet

units).

2.3 UNIT HEATERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Trane.

2. Sterling.

3. Zehnder Rittling

4. Vulcan.

5. Modine.

6. Airtherm.

7. Daikin.

8. Sigma.


B. Coils: Seamless copper tubing, silver brazed to steel headers, and with evenly spaced

aluminum fins mechanically bonded to tubing.

C. Casing: 0.0478 inch steel with threaded pipe connections for hanger rods.

D. Finish: Factory applied baked enamel of color.

E. Fan: Direct drive propeller type, statically and dynamically balanced, with fan guard; horizontal

models with permanently lubricated sleeve bearings; vertical models with grease lubricated ball

bearings.

F. Air Outlet: Adjustable pattern diffuser on projection models and two way louvers on horizontal

throw models.

G. Motor: Permanently lubricated sleeve bearings on horizontal models, grease lubricated ball

bearings on vertical models. Refer to Section 23 05 13.

2.4 CABINET UNIT HEATERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Sterling Hydronics/Mestek Technology, Inc.

2. Trane.

3. Zehnder Rittling.

4. Vulcan.

5. Modine.

6. Airtherm.

7. Daikin.

8. Sigma.


B. Coils: Evenly spaced aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes, designed for 100 psi

and 220 degrees F.

C. Cabinet: 0.0598 inch steel with exposed corners and edges rounded, easily removed panels,

glass fiber insulation and integral air outlet.

SECTION 23 81 01


PAGE 5 OF 8



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

D. Finish: Factory applied baked enamel of color as selected on visible surfaces of enclosure or

cabinet.

E. Fans: Centrifugal forward-curved double-width wheels, statically and dynamically balanced,

direct driven.

F. Motor: Tap wound multiple speed permanent split capacitor with sleeve bearings, resiliently

mounted.

G. Control: Multiple speed switch, factory wired, located in cabinet.

H. Filter: Easily removed 1 inch thick pleated disposable type, located to filter air before coil.

2.5 UNIT VENTILATORS (CONVENTIONAL STYLE)

A. Manufacturers (Vertical, under-the-window units):

1. Base Bid: Daikin.

2. Voluntary Alternates:

a. McQuay Model AV.

b. Carrier Model 40UV.


B. Manufacturers (Horizontal units):

1. Base Bid: Trane Inc; Model HUV.

2. Voluntary Alternates:

a. McQuay Model AH.

b. Carrier Model 40UH.


C. Coils: Copper tubes mechanically expanded into evenly spaced aluminum fins tested to

operate at 150 psi. Provide drain pan under cooling coil, easily removable for cleaning, with

drain connection.

D. Cabinet: 0.0747 inch steel on solid base pan with exposed edges rounded. Provide removable

front panels with quick-acting, key-operated cam locks. Provide removable die-cast or

fabricated steel discharge grilles. For units having cooling coils, insulate internal parts and

surfaces exposed to conditioned air stream with moisture resistant insulation.

E. Cabinet Accessories: Matching steel construction, reinforced, for use with unit ventilators or

finned radiation, with steel alignment pins, adjustable kick plates with leveling bolts, shelves and

sliding doors as indicated, corner, end, and wall filler sections as required.

F. Finish: Factory apply baked enamel of color as selected on visible surfaces of enclosure or

cabinet.

G. Fans: Centrifugal forward-curved double-width wheels, statically and dynamically balanced,

direct driven, arranged to draw air through coil.

H. Wall Louvers: Refer to Mechanical Equipment Schedule on drawings.

I. Control: Factory-wired non-fused disconnect switch, located in cabinet. Units not having Dx

cooling shall have a factory-wired multiple speed switch, located in cabinet.

J. Filter: Easily removed 1 inch thick glass fiber throw-away type, located to filter air before coil.

2.6 BLOWER COIL UNITS

A. Manufacturer

1. Trane.

2. Daikin.

SECTION 23 81 01


PAGE 6 OF 8



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

3. Johnson Controls.

4. Carrier.

5. Magic Aire.


B. Unit sizes, configurations and capacities shall be as shown on the drawings.

C. Sound ratings shall be determined in accordance with AHRI 260 - Standard for Sound Rating of

Ducted Air Moving and Conditioning Equipment.

D. Performance ratings shall be determined in accordance with AHRI 430 – Performance Rating of

Central Station Air Handling Units.

E. Casings and Accessories: Heavy-gauge galvanized steel construction with one inch, 1.5 pound

per square foot density internal fiberglass lining with a (One inch matte-faced) (One inch foil-

faced) finish. Linings shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed

rating of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. Casings shall

include access panels for coil removal, and for fan/motor removal.

F. Hydronic Coils: Coils shall have aluminum fins, mechanically bonded to seamless copper

tubes. Hydronic coil fin spacing shall be 12 fins per inch. Coils shall be factory leak tested at

450 psig underwater. Maximum rated operating conditions shall be 300 psig, 200oF. Coil

performance shall be determined in accordance with AHRI Standard 410.

G. Direct Expansion (DX) Coils: Coils shall have 3/8 inch O.D.x0.014” W round seamless copper

tubes expanded into full fin collars for permanent fin-tube bond. Coils shall have aluminum fins,

mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes. Hydronic coil fin spacing shall be 12 fins per

inch. Coils shall be factory leak tested at 650 psig underwater. Maximum rated operating

conditions shall be 650 psig at 127oF with R-410A. Coil performance shall be determined in

accordance with AHRI Standard 410. Coil casings shall be minimum 16-gauge galvanized

steel. Coils shall have round, seamless, copper pipe liquid lines and suction headers with male

sweat connections. Suction headers shall have bottom connections to aid drainage of oil.

Liquid and suction connections shall be on the outside of the unit housing, and on the same

side of the unit. Connections shall be clearly labeled to ensure proper piping connections.

Coils shall have factory furnished and piped distributor assemblies.

H. Steam Coils: One-row, steam distributing type coils, pitched to ensure proper drainage.

Supply, return and vacuum breaker connections shall be located on the same side of the unit.

I. Fan shall be double-width, double-inlet forward curved, centrifugal fans. Fans shall be

dynamically balanced.

J. Fan motors shall be direct-drive, brushless DC (BLDC) electronically commutated motors

(ECM), factory-programmed and run-tested in assembled units. Motors shall be 60 Hz.,

multiple voltage with a +/- 10 percent voltage utilization range. Motors shall be open type with

permanently sealed ball bearings and internal overload protection.

K. Filters: Refer to Equipment Schedule on drawings. Unless indicated otherwise, filter sections

shall be integral to the blower coils, shall be capable of accepting both one inch and two inch

filters, and shall have side-access.

L. Condensate Drain Pans: Drain pans shall be double-sloped to ensure complete drainage.

Drain pans shall be fully removable for cleaning, without removal of the cooling coils. Drain pan

construction shall be (PVC) (Stainless steel). RH/LH Connections shall be as indicated on the

drawings.

M. Coil Connection Sides: As Indicated On Drawings.

2.7 HYDRONIC RADIANT CEILING PANELS

A. Manufacturers:

SECTION 23 81 01


PAGE 7 OF 8



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

1. Airtex Radiant Systems.

2. Aero Tech.

3. Sterling.

4. Sigma.

B. Ceiling Panels: Extruded aluminum with interlocking edges; manufactured and assembled to

sizes and configurations indicated.

C. Panel dimensions shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Unless indicated otherwise, panels shall be finished in manufacturer's standard white color.

2.8 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. INDEECO (Industrial Engineering and Equipment Company).

2. Marley Engineered Products.

3. Trane.

4. Brasch.


B. Assembly: UL listed and labeled assembly with terminal box and cover, and built-in controls.

C. Heating Elements: Enclosed copper tube, aluminum finned element of coiled nickel-chrome

resistance wire centered in tubes and embedded in refractory material.

D. Cabinet: 0.0478 inch steel with easily removed front panel with integral air outlet and inlet

grilles.

E. Element Hangers: Quiet operating, ball bearing cradle type providing unrestricted longitudinal

movement, on enclosure brackets.

F. Fan: Direct drive propeller type, statically and dynamically balanced, with fan guard.

G. Motor: Permanently lubricated, sleeve bearings for horizontal models, ball bearings for vertical

models.

2.9 GAS FIRED UNIT HEATERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Trane Inc.

2. Modine

3. Sterling Hydronics/Mestek Technology, Inc.

4. Reznor


B. Units shall be complete with 20 gauge aluminized steel heat exchanger die-formed corrosion

resistant aluminized steel burners with stainless steel port protectors; draft diverter, sealed

combustion factory installed 24 volt controls, wall thermostat, spark ignition, fan time delay;

totally enclosed motors with thermal overload protection, fan blade guard, belt guard; and

adjustable louver fin diffusers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install terminal heat transfer units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install equipment exposed to finished areas after walls and ceiling are finished and painted. Do

not damage equipment or finishes.

SECTION 23 81 01


PAGE 8 OF 8



A/E PROJECT 5-4749

C. Protection: Provide protective covers over unit cabinets during balance of construction.

D. Finned Tube Radiation: Center finned elements under windows. Provide factory trim pieces

where units butt up against walls. Provide end caps where units do not butt up against walls.

E. Unit Heaters: Support from building structure; provide supplementary steel where required.

Mount as high as possible to maintain greatest headroom unless otherwise indicated.

F. Cabinet Unit Heaters: Coordinate wall opening dimensions to ensure correct opening size for

recessed units.

G. Unit Ventilators: Locate as indicated, level and shim units, and anchor to structure. Coordinate

exact location of wall louvers. Install shelving and auxiliary cabinetry. Provide wall trim pieces

for continuous wall-to-wall installation.

H. Vertical Unit Ventilators:

1. Assemble and install top extensions per manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Provide continuous gasketing of the units against the back and side walls. Provide custom

grey foam rubber gasketing (not black) for any gasketing that is visible in the occupied

space. Ensure that the gasketing has sufficient thickness to compensate for minor

irregularities in the building surfaces.

3. Where indicated on drawings, provide metal trim pieces between unit ventilators and

adjacent walls, material and paint finish to match the unit ventilators.

I. Induction Units: Support base units from continuous wall mounting strip or wall mounting

brackets. Support cabinet enclosures from wall mounting strip or attach direct to wall and floor.

J. Electric heat units: Install units and factory-furnished accessories in accordance with

manufacturers’ recommendations, and in compliance with Division 26 requirements. Furnish a

copy of the manufacturer's wiring diagram.

3.2 CLEANING

A. After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of units. Vacuum

clean coils and inside of cabinets.

B. Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish materials

furnished by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 81 26

SMALL SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS

PAGE 1 OF 6


SECTION 23 81 26 – SMALL SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat-pump units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components.

1.3 COORDINATION


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



B. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems."

2. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - " Procedures," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

C. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period:

a. For Compressor: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

SECTION 23 81 26


PAGE 2 OF 6


b. For Parts: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

c. For Labor: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Daikin.

2. Fujitsu.

3. LG.

4. Mitsubishi.

2.2 INDOOR UNITS

A. Concealed Ducted Evaporator-Fan Components:

1. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and insulation on back of panel.

2. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.

3. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal-expansion valve. Comply with ARI 206/110.

4. Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements; with refractory ceramic support bushings, automatic-reset thermal cutout, built-in magnetic contactors, manual-reset thermal cutout, airflow proving device, and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection.

5. Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to motor.

6. Fan Motors:

a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

b. Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.

c. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.

7. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

8. Filters: Permanent, cleanable.

9. Condensate Drain Pans:

a. Fabricated with one percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and humidifiers, and to direct water toward drain connection.

1) Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with ASHRAE 62.1.

2) Depth: A minimum of 1 inch deep.

b. Single-wall, galvanized-steel sheet.

c. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow. Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan.

1) Minimum Connection Size: NPS 1.

d. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound.

e. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect condensate from top coil.

SECTION 23 81 26


PAGE 3 OF 6


B. Wall-Mounted Cassette, Evaporator-Fan Components:

1. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by Architect, and discharge drain pans with drain connection.


3. Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements; with refractory ceramic support bushings, automatic-reset thermal cutout, built-in magnetic contactors, manual-reset thermal cutout, airflow proving device, and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection.

4. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal.

5. Fan Motors:


b. Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.

c. NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1.

d. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in electrical Sections.

e. Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on interior of unit.










C. Ceiling-Mounted Cassette, Evaporator-Fan Components:

1. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by Architect, and discharge drain pans with drain connection.

a. Integral factory-supplied supply and return grille to fit ceiling grid kit of 24 by 24 inches, with filter.

b. Unit with supply and return collars for ducting in the field.

c. Unit with 24-by-48-inch air distribution plenum, with integral MERV 8 filter and three-way air distribution.


3. Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements; with refractory ceramic support bushings, automatic-reset thermal cutout, built-in magnetic contactors,

SECTION 23 81 26


PAGE 4 OF 6


manual-reset thermal cutout, airflow proving device, and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection.

4. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal.

5. Fan Motors:


b. Multi-tapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.

c. NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1.

d. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in electrical Sections.

e. Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on interior of unit.










D. Air Filtration Section:

1. General Requirements for Air Filtration Section:

a. Comply with NFPA 90A.

b. Minimum MERV according to ASHRAE 52.2.

c. Filter-Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lifted out from access plenum.

2. Disposable Panel Filters:

a. Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type.

b. Thickness: 1 inch.

c. MERV according to ASHRAE 52.2: 5.

d. Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive and antimicrobial agent.

e. Mounting Frame: Galvanized steel, with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet side, and hinged; with pull and retaining handles.

2.3 OUTDOOR UNITS

A. Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components:

SECTION 23 81 26


PAGE 5 OF 6


1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.

2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation device. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.

a. Compressor Type: Scroll.

b. Inverter driven compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and automatic-reset low-pressure switch.

c. Refrigerant: R-410A.

d. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and liquid subcooler. Comply with ARI 206/110.

3. Heat-Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature-air cutoff thermostat.

4. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.

5. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.

6. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 0 deg F.

7. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide BACnet interface for connection to DDC control system. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Section 23 09 23 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC" and Section 23 09 93 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC DDC."

B. Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator fan, with the following features:

1. Compressor time delay.

2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start.

3. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting, operating mode, and fan speed.

4. Fan-speed selection including auto setting.

C. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.

D. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.

E. Condensate Pumps.

F. Drain Hose: For condensate.

G. Supports: Refer to Section 23 05 29 Piping, Ductwork and Equipment Supports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb.

B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure.

C. Install roof-mounted, compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in Section 23 05 29 “Roof Mounted Piping, Ductwork and Equipment Supports." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-plated fasteners.

D. Equipment Mounting:

SECTION 23 81 26


PAGE 6 OF 6


1. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations as specified under concrete portion of specifications.

2. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting base.

3. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 23 05 48 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."

E. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.


D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.

END OF SECTION